Home

Simulink Report Generator User's Guide

1. Paragraph Object Format Object Format Property Formatting Font family FontFamily Font Font family for complex FontFamily ComplexScriptFont scripts to handle locales Font size FontSize FontSize Bold Bold Bold Font color FontColor FontColor Italic Italic Italic Strike Strike Strike Underline Underline Underline Subscript Subscript Subscript Superscript Superscript Superscript Horizontal alignment HAlign HAlign Level of indentation n a Level Use the PowerPoint template to specify formatting for each level Tip Although you can specify that text in a Paragraph object is a subscript or superscript using Text objects with Subscript or Superscript property set gives you greater formatting flexibility See Also Classes mlreportgen ppt ExternalLink mlreportgen ppt Paragraph mlreportgen ppt Text mlreportgen ppt TextBox Classes mlreportgen ppt TableEntry 12 87 12 Programmatic PowerPoint Presentation Creation Related Examples Add and Replace Text on page 12 77 More About Presentation Formatting Approaches on page 12 20 12 88 Create and Format Tables Create and Format Tables In this section Create a Table on page 12 89 Format a Table on page 12 89 Create a Table To create a table you can Create an empty Table object using the mlreportgen ppt Table constructor without arguments Then append Ta
2. AC Control View All AC Control P sidemo_auto_climatecontrol p Pa AC Control Main ShowPortLabels FromPorticon Permissions ReadWrite Cy ErrorFen Heat Transfer Equation from evaporator PermitHierarchicalResolution All MinAlgLoopOccurrences off y w Tcomp m_dot h4 h1 PropExecContextOutsideSub off Code Generation y efficiency RTWSystemCode Auto Enable m_dot mass flow rate w speed of the engine Tcomp compressor torque h4 h1 enthalpy Internal temp Exit Temp AC Temp enthalpy Engine Speed R gt efficiency enthalpy Texit Blower Speed proportion Max flow rate The AC Control subsystem appears in the model viewer The tab label reflects the name of the currently displayed subsystem Open the model browser hidden by default Click Hide Show Model Browser 3 Open another system in a separate tab In the model browser CTRL click select the Heater Control system 4 Drag the AC Control system to the top of model viewer Place the cursor in the display area hold down the mouse scroll wheel and drag 5 Zoom the display with the mouse scroll wheel Display Parameters and Properties of Blocks and Signals In the model browser select sldemo_auto_climatecontrol 2 Double click the AC Control subsystem 3 Click the Temp enthalpy block to view the block parameter values The Object Inspector pane groups the block parameters by the block paramete
3. 2 3 Report Contents 5 4 eas be bee Eee Ee ee ES 2 3 Generate a System Design Description 2 6 Open the System Design Description Dialog Box 2 6 Choose System Design Description Options 2 6 Customize the System Design Description 2 10 Using the Report Explorer to Customize the Report 2 10 Building a Dialog Box for a Custom Report Setup File 2 11 Creating Simulink Reports 3 Create a Simulink Report Generator Report 3 2 Specify Report Options in the Setup File 3 3 Add Report Content with Components 3 5 Report Components 0 0 00 ee eee ees 3 5 Add MATLAB Code 0 ens 3 7 Add a Title Page pide iouar ene dera r iE ee 3 12 Open the Simulink Model 000005 3 14 Add Logical Then and Logical Else Components 3 16 Error If Model Cannot Be Opened 4 3 18 Create the Body of the Report 00005 3 21 Process with a Model Loop Component 3 22 Add a Paragraph for Each Model 3 24 vi Contents Insert a Snapshot of the Model 005 3 25 Add a Loop for Processing the Model 3 26 Block Parameter Value from a MATLAB Expression 3 28 Create a Section for Each Iteration 05 3 29 Insert the Block Value 0 0 00 eee eee 3 31 Set a
4. 7 25 Comparing XML Files from Models with Identical Names 7 27 Work with Referenced Models and Library Links 7 28 Compare XML from Models Managed with Subversion 7 30 Work with Subversion 0 0 0 tees 7 30 Configure TortoiseSVN 0 0 0 ees 7 31 Test TortoiseSVN Setup 0 0 0 0 eee ee eee 7 32 Compare Templates 0 0 000 ce eens 7 34 Compare Project Templates 0 0 0 0 ee eeeee 7 34 Compare Model Templates 0 000 eee 7 35 xi Components Alphabetical List 8 Functions Alphabetical List 9 Template Based Report Formatting 10 Report Conversion Templates 0000 00 10 2 Templates for Report Conversion 000005 10 2 Custom Templates 0 0 0 0 ec ee eee 10 2 Custom Component Styles 0 00 00 eee eee 10 2 Benefits of Using Templates 0 000000 eee 10 2 Generate a Report Using a Template 10 4 Generate SDD Report Using a Template 10 4 Conversion Template Contents 005 10 5 Default Styles sos sisi sob cde gee le Save seg ceeds a e alge Ae Poe eg 10 5 Part lemplates 2 5 cesoss el es Sass es eee ee AR aR 10 9 Header and Footers in Word Conversion Templates 10 10 Copy a Conversion Template 00050 10 12 Copy a Conversion Template 000005 10 12 Open a Conversion Template
5. Automatic list from context Report on all blocks in the current context that do not have associated requirements The parent component of the Block Loop component determines its context If this component does not have the Model Loop System Loop Signal Loop or Block Loop as its parent selecting this option causes this component to report on all blocks in all models that do not have associated requirements e Model Loop Reports on all blocks in the current model with no associated requirements e System Loop Reports on all blocks in the current system with no associated requirements e Signal Loop Reports on all blocks connected to the current signal with no associated requirements Custom use block list Enables you to specify a list of blocks on which to report Enter the full path of each block Loop Options Choose block sorting options and reporting options in this pane Sort blocks Missing Requirements Block Loop Use this option to select how to sort blocks applied to each level in a model Alphabetically by block name Sorts blocks alphabetically by their names Alphabetically by system name Sorts systems alphabetically Lists the blocks in each system but in no particular order Alphabetically by full Simulink path Sorts blocks alphabetically by Simulink path By block type Sorts blocks alphabetically by block type By block depth Sorts blocks by their depth in the model By
6. 3 Report simulink_tutorial rpt a Eval 4The name of the model that wil a Title Page Dynamic Simulink Report 8 if strcmp bdroot acs expModel 48a then SR Model Loop Chapter current model 4 Paragraph This report demonstra H System Snapshot Bae pe for explteration 1 1 length expValue om else 8 Chapter Load Model Failed 4 Paragraph Error Model lt expMod 4 Save the report setup file Block Parameter Value from a MATLAB Expression Note This section builds on the previous tasks described in the step by step example summarized in Create a Simulink Report Generator Report on page 3 2 To see the completed report setup file open Simulink Dynamic Report The report is for the vdp model For each iteration get a value from the expValue array to use as the Gain parameter value This task requires an Evaluate MATLAB Expression component 1 In the Outline pane on the left select the for component 2 Inthe Library pane in the middle under the MATLAB category double click Evaluate MATLAB Expression In the Outline pane the component name is shortened to Eval Add Report Content with Components eA Report Generator 3 Report simulink_tutorial rpt a Eval 4The name of the model that wil m Title Page Dynamic Simulink Report if stremp bdroot gcs expModel I g8 then i Model Loop Chap
7. A figure that plots the values included in the table Print Options Image file format Specifies the image file format for example JPEG or TIFF from this list Select Automatic HG Format the default to choose the format best suited for the specified report output format automatically Otherwise choose an image format that your output viewer can read Other options are Automatic HG Format Uses the file format selected in the Preferences dialog box Bitmap 16m color Bitmap 256 color Black Black Black Black Black Black Color Color Color Color and white and white and white and white and white and white encapsulated PostScript encapsulated PostScript TIFF encapsulated PostScript2 encapsulated PostScript2 TIFF PostScript PostScript2 encapsulated PostScript encapsulated PostScript TIFF encapsulated PostScript2 encapsulated PostScript2 TIFF To Workspace Plot Color PostScript Color PostScript2 JPEG high quality image JPEG medium quality image JPEG low quality image PNG 24 bit image TIFF compressed TIFF uncompressed Windows metafile Paper orientation Landscape Portrait Rotated Use figure orientation Uses the orientation for the figure which you set with the orient command Full page image PDF only In PDF reports scales images to fit the full page minimizes page margins and maximizes the size of the image by using either a portrait or landscape orientation
8. Modify Styles in an HTML Template on page 11 127 More About Report Formatting Approaches on page 11 20 Format Inheritance on page 11 25 11 22 Use Format Objects Use Format Objects A format object is a MATLAB program entity that defines the properties and functions of a specific type of document format such as a font family or font size The DOM API provides a set of constructors for creating format objects corresponding to most of the formatting options available in HTML and Word documents Most DOM document objects include a Style property that you can set to a cell array of format objects Together format objects and the document object Style property allow you to format a document object by creating an array of format objects that define the appearance style of the object and assigning this array to the Style property of the document object For example the following script uses format objects to specify the style of a warning paragraph p Paragraph Danger p Style Color red FontFamily Arial FontSize 18pt You can assign the same array of format objects to more than one DOM document object This allows you to create a programmatic equivalent of a template style sheet For example warning Color red p Paragraph Danger p Style warning p Paragraph Caution p Style warning FontFamily Arial FontSize 18pt The DOM API allows you to assign any
9. User Setpoint in Celsius Simulating Automatic Climate Control Systems Temperature Control Chart Engine Speed Torque Comp AC Control Fromt From Copyright 1990 2013 The MathWorks Inc A proportion fan speed Fan Speed rate Heat Sources Heat from occupants Interior Dynamics Kelvin to Celsius Heater Control Thermometer Display 5 6 Open a Web View File in a Web Browser Simulating Automatic Climate Control Systems Parameter Attributes Text DropShadow Interpreter FontName FontWeight FontSize FontAngle ForegroundColor BackgroundColor HorizontalAlignment Simulating Automatic Climate Control Systems off off auto auto 12 auto black white center UseDisplayTextAsClickCallback off ClickFen To open a Web view file to display in a Web browser from the folder that contains the Web view files select the HTML file Display and Navigate a Web View Open the webview html file to display the Web view For details about file packaging and location see Web View Files on page 5 2 To use a Google Chrome Browser you need to do some setup Open a Web View in a Google Chrome Browser on a Windows Platform 1 If you do not already have a shortcut set up for Google Chrome click the Windows Start button and search for Chrome 2 Right click and drag the Google Chro
10. 0005 10 14 Set Conversion Template Properties 10 15 Move a Conversion Template 0005 10 16 Delete a Conversion Template 4 10 17 Customize Microsoft Word Report Styles 10 18 Customize Default Microsoft Word Component Styles 10 18 xii Contents Create Styles in a Microsoft Word Template Customize Microsoft Word Part Templates Custom Word Part Templates Display the Developer Ribbon in Word Customize a Word Conversion Part Template Set Default Text Style fora Hole Distinguish Inline and Block Holes Avoid Changing Block Holes to Inline Holes Delete a Hole Add an Inline Hole 0 Add a Block Hole Customize a Microsoft Word Title Page Template Create a Custom Template Change the Color of a Report Title Assign the Template to a Report Customize Title Page Content and Layout Create a Custom HTML Template Copy an HTML Template Select an HTML Editor Edit HTML Styles in a Template 10 18 10 21 10 21 10 22 10 22 10 23 10 25 10 26 10 26 10 28 10 29 10 30 10 30 10 31 10 33 10 34 10 36 10 36 10 37 10 37 Create a Report Program 11 Create a Report Program Document Object Model
11. 8 166 State Loop State Loop Run child components for all states in current context Description This component runs its children for all states in its context The parent component of this component determines the context Model Loop Includes all states in the models System Loop Includes all states in the systems Machine Loop Includes all states in the machines Chart Loop Includes all states in the charts State Loop Includes all states in the current state For conditional processing based on states you can use the RptgenSF getReportedState function For more information see Loop Context Functions on page 6 24 State Types Include and and or states Includes AND and OR states in the loop Include box states Includes box states in the loop Include functions Includes function states in the loop Include truth tables Includes truth tables in the loop Include MATLAB functions Includes MATLAB functions in the loop Loop Options Report depth Specifies the level on which to loop e Local children only e All objects 8 167 8 Components Alphabetical List 8 168 Skip autogenerated charts under truth table Keeps autogenerated state objects under truth tables from appearing in the report Search Stateflow Indicates specific states to include in the loop Section Options Create section for each object in loop Inserts a section in the generated
12. Automatic HG Format uses the Simulink file format selected in the Preferences dialog box Bitmap 16m color Bitmap 256 color Black and white encapsulated PostScript Black and white encapsulated PostScript TIFF Black and white encapsulated PostScript2 Black and white encapsulated PostScript2 TIFF Black and white PostScript Black and white PostScript2 Color encapsulated PostScript Color encapsulated PostScript TIFF Color encapsulated PostScript2 Color encapsulated PostScript2 TIFF Color PostScript Color PostScript2 JPEG high quality image JPEG medium quality image JPEG low quality image PNG 24 bit image TIFF compressed TIFF uncompressed Windows metafile Paper orientation 8 111 8 Components Alphabetical List 8 112 Landscape Portrait Rotated Use figure orientation Uses the orientation for the figure which you set with the orient command Full page image PDF only In PDF reports scales images to fit the full page minimizes page margins and maximizes the size of the image by using either a portrait or landscape orientation For more information about paper orientation see the orient reference page in the MATLAB documentation Image size Specifies the size of the Handle Graphics figure snapshot in the form w h width height In the units text box select one of the following options Inches Centimeters Points Normalized Invert hardcopy Inverts colors for printi
13. Current exports only the Simulink system or the Stateflow chart specified by system_name CurrentAndAbove exports the Simulink system or the Stateflow chart specified by the system_name and all systems or charts that contain it All exports all Simulink systems or Stateflow charts in the model that contains the system or chart specified by system_name Data Types char LookUnderMasks Specifies whether to export the ability to interact with masked blocks none default all none does not export masked blocks in the Web view Masked blocks are included in the exported systems but you cannot access the contents of the masked blocks all exports all masked blocks Data Types char FollowLinks Specifies whether to follow links into library blocks off default on off does not allow you to follow links into library blocks in a Web view on allows you to follow links into library blocks in a Web view Data Types char FollowModelReference Specifies whether to access referenced models in a Web view off default on 9 9 9 Functions Alphabetical List 9 10 off does not allow you to access referenced models in a Web view on allows you to access referenced models in a Web view Data Types char ViewFile Specifies whether to display the Web view in a Web browser when you export the Web view true default false true displays the Web view in a
14. FontColor Italic Strike Subscript Superscript Underline Style Children Parent 1x1 mlreportgen ppt Paragraph Tag ppt Text 1535 Id 1535 ee ee a ee ee Related Examples Use Format Properties on page 12 47 Create PPT Objects on page 12 8 More About Presentation Formatting Approaches on page 12 20 12 13 12 Programmatic PowerPoint Presentation Creation Create a Presentation Object to Hold Content 12 14 Every PPT API program must create an mLreportgen ppt Presentation object to hold presentation content To create a presentation object use the mlreportgen ppt Presentation constructor If you use the constructor without arguments the PPT API creates a presentation named Untitled pptx in the current folder The presentation uses the default PPT API PowerPoint template You can specify the file system path of the presentation as the first argument of the constructor For the second argument of the constructor you can specify a PowerPoint template to use This Presentation constructor creates a presentation called myPresentation in the current folder using a PowerPoint template called CompanyTemplate pptx pres Presentation myPresentation CompanyTemplate pptx If the template you use is an existing presentation that includes content the new presentation that the PPT API generates includes the content in that presentation You can replace content from t
15. For more information about paper orientation see the orient command in the MATLAB documentation Image size Use figure PaperPositionMode setting Uses the PaperPositionMode property of the Handle Graphics figure to set the image size in the report For more information about paper position mode see the orient command in the MATLAB documentation Automatic same size as on screen Sets the image in the report to the same size as it appears on the screen Custom Specifies a custom image size Specify the image size in the size and units fields 8 213 8 Components Alphabetical List 8 214 Size Specifies the size of the Handle Graphics figure snapshot in the format wxh width times height This field is active only if you choose Custom in the Image size list box Units Specifies units for the size of the Handle Graphics figure snapshot This field is active only if you choose Set image size in the Custom list box Invert hardcopy Uses the Handle Graphics figures InvertHardcopy property which inverts colors for printing it changes dark colors to light colors and light colors to dark colors e Automatic Automatically changes dark axes colors to light axes colors If the axes color is a light color it is unchanged Invert Changes dark axes colors to light axes colors and light axes colors to dark axes colors e Don t invert Retains image colors displayed on screen in the printed report e Use figure
16. Why Append HTML to a DOM Report on page 11 90 Workflow for Appending HTML on page 11 90 Why Append HTML to a DOM Report You can append HTML markup or the entire contents of an HTML file to a programmatic report written with the document object model DOM API Append HTML to Convert an existing HTML report to a Microsoft Word or PDF report You can append HTML markup for a report to a DOM report which you can then generate in Word or PDF format Add content based on HTML markup You can append the HTML content to a DOM report You can use the HTML content as a building block in a DOM report that includes other report elements Workflow for Appending HTML Appending HTML to a DOM report involves these tasks 1 In a DOM report append HTML content or an HTML file to a document or document part For example this DOM code creates a Word report that displays Hello World based on the HTML content that you append to the report import mlreportgen com d Document MyReport docx addHTML d lt p style color blue gt lt b gt Hello World lt b gt lt p gt An alternative approach is to create an mlreportgen dom HTML or mlreportgen dom HTMLFile object and append it to a DOM report If you receive any MATLAB error messages fix the source HTML markup and append the HTML again Appending HTML to DOM Reports The HTML content that you append must be XML parsable For a summary of those requ
17. d Select the if isempty expOkValue component again and add the Logical Then component as a child The two components are siblings in the Outline pane on the left Section 1 Post Test Analysis BR Paragraph lt Text from children gt 4 if isempty expOkValues age then i gA else Save the report setup file Now insert report components to handle the case where expOkValues is empty that is where no signal values fall within the designated range a Inthe Outline pane on the left select the else component b Inthe Library pane in the middle double click the Text component to add it as a child of the else component c In the Properties pane on the right in the Text to include in report text box enter the following None of the selected iteration values had a maximum signal value between lt testMin gt and lt testMax gt Now handle the case where expOkValues is not empty and you want to insert a table of the acceptable signal values 3 47 3 Creating Simulink Reports a Inthe Outline pane on the left select the then component b Adda Text component as a child to the then component c Inthe Properties pane on the right in the Text to include in report text box enter the following text lt size expOkValues 1 gt values for lt expBlock gt were found that resulted in a maximum signal value greater than lt testMin gt but less than lt testMax gt The following table shows those
18. p Paragraph This is a link to the link ExternalLink http www mathworks com MathWorks site append p link replace slides Content p close slides if ispc winopen slidesFile end Format an External Link To specify default formatting for the link text use the Style property with format objects ExternalLink Object Format Object Format Property Formatting Font family FontFamily n a Create and Format Links ExternalLink Object Format Object Format Property Formatting Font family for complex FontFamily n a scripts to handle locales Text color FontColor n a Font size FontSize n a Bold Bold n a Italic Italic n a Strike Strike n a Underline Underline n a Background color BackgroundColor n a See Also Classes mlreportgen ppt ExternalLink More About Presentation Formatting Approaches on page 12 20 12 97
19. slides Presentation myPresentation pptx tableSlide add slides Blank magicTable Table magic 5 magicTable X 3in MagicTable Y 5in add tableSlide magicTable close slides To replace content in a table replace the whole table To replace a Table object use the replace method with the Table object and specify another Table object To replace a table in a slide content placeholder use the replace method with the Slide object and specify a Table object slides Presentation myPresentation Add and Replace Presentation Content tableSlide add slides Title and Table table1 Table magic 9 contents find tableSlide Table replace contents 1 table1 close slides Add or Replace a Picture You can add a picture by using an add method or a replace method with a Slide object import mlreportgen ppt slides Presentation myPresentation pptx pictureSlide add slides Blank plane Picture which b747 jpg plane X 2in plane Y 2in plane Width 5in plane Height 2in add pictureSlide plane close slides You can use a replace method with a Picture or PicturePlaceholder object For example the default template has a Title and Picture slide layout that has a picture placeholder called Picture import mlreportgen ppt slides Presentation myPresentation pictSlide add slides Title and Picture plane2 Pict
20. table Width 50 append doc table close doc rptview doc OutputPath Use these format objects and format properties to format a table Formatting Format Object Format Property Width of table Width Width Color of table background BackgroundColor BackgroundColor Create border around table Border Border 11 61 11 Create a Report Program 11 62 contents Formatting Format Object Format Property Color of border Border BorderColor Thickness of border Border BorderWidth Create left right top or Border n a bottom table border Collapse table and table BorderCollapse BorderCollapse entry borders HTML Create column separator ColSep ColSep Column separator color ColSep ColSepColor Column separator thickness ColSep ColSepWidth Create row separator RowSep RowSep Row separator color RowSep RowSepColor Row separator thickness RowSep RowSepWidth Indent table from left OuterMargin OuterLeftMargin margin Space before or after table OuterMargin n a Space to right of table OuterMargin n a Align table left right or HAlign HAlign center Specify table entry flow FlowDirection FlowDirection direction left to right or right to left Resize table columns to fit ResizeToFitContents n a Format Table Entries A Table object has properties that allow you to specify the same format or set of formats for all of its entries For
21. Create a loop to process the model length times using the For Loop component 1 In the Outline pane on the left select the System Snapshot component 2 Inthe Library pane in the middle under the Logical and Flow Control category double click For Loop The For Loop component is added as a sibling of the System Snapshot component m eA Report Generator 3 Report simulink_tutorial rpt GB Eval The name of the model that wil a Title Page Dynamic Simulink Report E 480 if stremp bdroot acs expModel g8 then 958 Model Loop Chapter current model p88 Paragraph This report demonstra H System Snapshot b a for RPTGEN_LOOP 1 1 5 488 Chapter Load Model Failed S 4a Paragraph Error Model lt expMod 3 Inthe Properties pane on the right a Inthe End text box replace the existing text with the following text length expValue expValue is the array of Gain parameter values assigned in the Eval component with the command expValue 1 0 0 5 1 2 The expression length expValue evaluates to 5 in this example b Inthe Variable name text box replace the existing text with the name of the for loop variable Enter the following text expIteration The name of the For component in the Outline pane on the left changes to reflect the loop variable and the termination value 3 27 3 Creating Simulink Reports 3 28 F Report Generator
22. Hide All Slide Number Footer Date Subtitle Title Click to edit Master title style Click to edit Master subtitle style Create a Presentation Programmatically Specify a title and a subtitle Specify the slide the name of the content objects you want to replace and the text for the title and subtitle For the subtitle to specify a different font for the word histogram use a Paragraph object for that text replace presentationTitleSlide Title Create Histogram Plots subtitleText Paragraph The funcName Text histogram funcName Font Courier New append subtitleText funcName append subtitleText Function replace presentationTitleSlide Subtitle1 subtitleText Add a Slide with a Picture To add a picture to a slide create a Picture object specifying an image file This example creates a MATLAB plot and saves the plot as an image file You can add the picture to a slide Use a Title and Content slide layout and add a title and picture x randn 10000 1 h histogram x saveas gcf myPlot_img png ploti Picture myPlot_img png pictureSlide add slides Title and Content replace slides Title Histogram of Vector contents find pictureSlide Content replace contents 1 plot1 Add a Slide with Text Depending on the slide layout PowerPoint formats the text you add as a paragraph a bulleted list or a numbered list This example creates ano
23. In this section Create a Custom Template on page 10 30 Change the Color of a Report Title on page 10 31 Assign the Template to a Report on page 10 33 Customize Title Page Content and Layout on page 10 34 The Report Explorer default Word document conversion template contains document part templates for the front recto and back verso side of a report title page The Report Explorer file converter for the Word from template output type uses the title page part templates to produce the title pages in the Word output This example shows how to create a custom template that changes the color of the title and how to customize the layout of a title page The example uses a custom template with the Report Generator magic square report example Create a Custom Template Note To complete the rest of this example you need a custom Word conversion template If you have a custom template that you want to use for this example you can skip to Change the Color of a Report Title on page 10 31 In the Report Explorer select Tools gt Edit Document Conversion Template In the list of templates select the Default Word Template In the Template Browser click Copy template In the file browser navigate to the folder on the MATLAB path that you want to use for the custom template For the file name enter magic square and click Save In the list of templates select Copy of Default Word Template
24. Looping on system Heater Control Looping on system Interior Dynamics Looping on system Subsystem Looping on system Subsystem1 Looping on system User Setpoint in Celsius Converting report Below is an excerpt from the generated report 8 79 8 Components Alphabetical List 8 80 10 Chapter 1 Description of subsystems Table of Contents fl4 Aircraft Dynamics Model Controller Dryden Wind Gust Models fl4 Nz pilot calculation sldemo auto climate elec AC Control ClimateControlSystem ElectricalSystem Heater Control Interior Dynamics sldemo auto climate elec Subsystem Subsystem Subsystem1 Variable resistor with parasitic L f14 Aircraft Dynamics Model Elevator Deflection y Q Vertical Gust Vettical Velocity d deg w ftsec Gust radisec Transfer Font q rad sec gt Controller _ eq In the Models to include list click 14 to select it Clear the Active check box to omit 14 model information from the generated report Rerun the report The report now includes information only on the sldemo_auto_ climate elec model as shown at the end of the previous example Generating Reports on Specified Systems and their Subsystems Model Loop 11 To reactivate the f14 model in the Model Loop Models to include list select the 14 model and then select the Active check box Insert Anything into Report Yes inserts a section if you
25. UseDisplayTextAsClickCallback off ClickFen To view the contents of a specific system use one of these approaches In the model viewer double click the system In the model browser select a system To expose this pane click Hide Show Model Browser Click the View All tab and click the thumbnail of a system To open a system in a separate tab press CTRL and click the system View Block Parameters and Signal Properties Click a block or signal in the model to see its parameters or properties in the Object Inspector pane Display and Navigate a Web View AC Control Main ShowPortLabels FromPorticon Permissions ReadWrite ErrorFen PermitHierarchicalResolution All MinAlgLoopOccurrences off PropExecContextOutsideSubsystem off v Code Generation RTWSystemCode Auto Torque Comp AC Control Access Optional Web View Information To view the model coverage or requirements optional Web view information in a Web view you must have Simulink Verification and Validation installed To access the information click a highlighted block for example blocks with an orange border have requirements information The information for that block appears in the Informer pane below the model See Also Functions Slwebview Related Examples Create and Use a Web View on page 5 13 More About Web Views on page 5 2 Web View Files on page
26. rgChapterTitle s prefix rgChapterTitleNumber number a rgChapterTitle hte q rgChapterContent Chapter content rgChapterContent 7 Select Properties 8 Inthe Content Control Properties dialog box select the Use a style to format text typed into the empty control check box 9 From the Style list select a style to use an existing style or select New Style to create a new style to use as the default style and click OK 10 23 10 Template Based Report Formatting 10 Select the part template and click the Quick Parts button 11 Click Save Selection to Quick Part Gallery A A Signature Line E A Date amp Time Quick WordArt Drop Equation Sym Parts Capv Object g mireportgen rgChapter pref sumbere ttie rgFigureTitle prefix wumber Tithe rgListTitle Tithe rgRectoTitlePage Report Title Report Subtitle rgSect1Title fa AutoText a Document Property im Field E Building Blocks Organizer F Save Selection to Quick Part Gallery 12 In the Create New Building Block dialog box set Name to the part template name for example rgChapter and the Category to mlreportgen Click OK 13 Save and close the template 10 24 Customize Microsoft Word Part Templates Distinguish Inline and Block Holes The Report Explorer supports two types of holes inline and block Use an inline hole is for content that you can in
27. 0 Create an Inline Hole 0 5 Create a Block Hole Modify Styles in an HTML Template Create Microsoft Word Page Layout Sections Define Page Layouts ina Template Navigate Template Defined Sections Create Sections Programmatically 4 Create Page Footers and Headers Create Page Headers and Footers in a Template Create Page Headers and Footers Programmatically 11 112 11 112 11 112 11 112 11 113 11 114 11 117 11 117 11 118 11 122 11 122 11 124 11 124 11 124 11 125 11 127 11 128 11 128 11 128 11 129 11 131 11 131 11 133 Programmatic PowerPoint Presentation Creation 12 Create a Presentation Program 5 PPT API Programs Two Ways to Use the PPT API 005 PPT API Applications and PowerPoint Templates Template Elements 12 2 12 3 12 4 12 5 12 5 xvii xviii Contents Create PPT Objects 0 0 0 0 ccc ees PPT Objects Use a PPT Constructor PPT Objects Created Without Constructors Import the PPT API Package 045 Get and Set PPT Object Properties Create a Presentation Object to Hold Content Generate a Presentation Display Presentation Generation Messages Presentation Generation Messages
28. 12 31 12 Programmatic PowerPoint Presentation Creation Tip To create a slide layout based on an existing slide layout right click in the slide layout that you want to base the layout on Then select Duplicate Layout 4 Customize the layout For example you can change the font for an existing placeholder or add a placeholder such as a table placeholder You can interactively set the location and size of the table placeholder To remove or add title and footers use the Title and Footers check boxes in the ribbon FILE SLIDE MASTER HOME INSERT TRANSITIONS ANIMATIONS REVIEW VIEW ADD INS Acrobat i A pos R Delete fs J Title Aal 3 Colors A Background Styles x FR Rename SSS A Fonts Hide Background Graphics Insert Slide Insert Insert Yi Footers Theme Slide Close Master Layout Placeholder X D Effects Sizer Master View Edit Master Edit Theme Background le Size Close Sas Content a88 5 Text 7 Picture CS M e Click to edit Master title style Online Image 5 Save the template Add a Placeholder You can add any type of placeholder to any slide layout However to replace placeholder content using the PPT API you can replace this subset of placeholders Content e Text e Picture e Table 12 32 Set Up a PowerPoint Template Add a placeholder 1 In PowerPoint open the template that you want to modify 2 Inthe View tab in the Master Views secti
29. 4 4 else 2 Text None of the selected 4 ae else 4 lt 4 Chapter Load Model Failed ee Paragraph Error Model lt expMod 3 50 Error Handling for MATLAB Code Error Handling for MATLAB Code You can add MATLAB code to a report by using the Evaluate MATLAB Expression component also called the Eval component See Add MATLAB Code on page 3 7 for details The Evaluate MATLAB Expression component dialog box includes an Evaluate this expression if there is an error check box The dialog box includes default error handling code that you can use or you can create your own error handling code If you do not change the default error handling code then when you generate the report and there is an error in the MATLAB code that you added Ifyou clear Evaluate this expression if there is an error check box then the complete report is generated without displaying an error message at the MATLAB command line Ifyou select Evaluate this expression if there is an error check box then the complete report is generated and an error message appears at the MATLAB command line To stop report generation when an error occurs in the MATLAB code that you added change the second and third lines of the following default error handling code as described below warningMessageLevel 2 displayWarningMessage true failGenerationWithException false failGenerationWithoutException false To stop report generation
30. 6 At the top of the Template Properties dialog box use these settings Aa O N a Customize a Microsoft Word Title Page Template Template Copy of default rg docx Template Properties Path H Documents MATLAB magic square dotx Template id magic square docx Display name Magic Square Template Description Template for magic square Word reports Creator ABC Inc 7 Apply the properties by selecting another template in the list of templates Change the Color of a Report Title You can customize the Magic Square Template see Create a Custom Template on page 10 30 to use blue text for the report title 1 In the Report Explorer select Tools gt Edit Document Conversion Template In the Report Explorer list of Word templates select Magic Square Template 3 Inthe Template Browser click Open style sheet In Word the template opens with the Manage Styles dialog box displayed 4 Inthe Manage Styles dialog box select the rgTitle style and click Modify 10 31 10 Template Based Report Formatting Edit Recommend Restrict Set Defaults Sort order As Recommended x _ Show recommended styles only Select a style to edit T rgSect3Title a T rgSect4Title T rgSectSTitle T rgSubtitle T rgTable wa aie T rgTitleVerso 1a rgTOCSectionTitle 1a TOC Title Preview of rgTitle Arial ee a Delete Font Default Arial 24 5 pt Bold Do no
31. 8 149 8 Components Alphabetical List 8 150 e Property Value PROPERTY Value e Property Value PROPERTY Value Alignment Specifies the alignment of the contents of the selected table cell in the Table Cells pane Left Center e Right e Double justified Lower border Displays the lower border of the table in the generated report Right border Displays the right border of the table in the generated report Creating Custom Tables To create a custom table edit a preset table such as the Blank 4x4 table Add and delete rows and add properties To open the Edit Table dialog box click Edit For more information on creating custom property tables see Property Table Components on page 6 6 If the Simulink Coder software is not installed Summary req Simulink Coder does not appear in this list If you are using a report setup file that contains a summary property the property name appears in the report but the property value does not Example The following report displays information on the F14 model using the Simulation Parameters preset table Solver ode45 ZeroCross on StartTime 0 0 StopTime 60 RelTol 1e 4 AbsTol 1e 6 Refine 1 InitialStep auto FixedStep auto MaxStep auto LimitMaxRows off MaxRows 1000 Decimation 1 Simulink Property Table Insert Anything into Report Yes Table Class rptgen_sl csl prop table See Also Model Loop Signal Loop
32. 988 Chapter Load Model Failed In the Outline pane on the left select the Chapter component 5 Inthe Library pane in the middle under Formatting double click Paragraph 6 Inthe Properties pane on the right enter the following text in the Paragraph Text text box to display the following error message Error Model lt expModel gt could not be opened The expression lt expModel gt indicates that the value of the workspace variable expModel1 is inserted into the text as in the following example Error Model vdp could not be opened 7 Inthe Outline pane on the left select the Chapter Section component 8 Save the report setup file The Outline pane looks as follows Add Report Content with Components E 4 Report Generator H Report simulink_tutorial rpt a Eval The name of the model that wil a Title Page Dynamic Simulink Report 48A stremp bdroot gcs expM odel Heathen 98 else 8 Chapter Load Model Failed ss 488 Paragraph Error Model lt exp Create the Body of the Report Note This section builds on the previous tasks described in the step by step example summarized in Create a Simulink Report Generator Report on page 3 2 To see the completed report setup file open Simulink Dynamic Report The report is for the vdp model Creating the body of the report involves setting up components and code for dynamic execution of report components In
33. Add Report Content with Components 1 958 Section 1 Processing the vdp model B Variable lteration_Value m Eval Evaluate this string in the bas In the Properties pane on the right clear the Insert MATLAB expression in report and Display command window output in report check boxes In the Expression to evaluate in the base workspace text box replace the existing text with the following text set_param expBlock expParam Iteration_Value okSetValue 1 The set_param command sets the value of the Gain parameter for the Mu block in the vdp model to the value of Iteration Value Make sure you select Evaluate expression if there is an error Enter the following text into the text box okSetValue logical 0 If the set_param command works okSetValue is set to 1 If an error occurs okSetValue is set to 0 The next component then reports the error and terminates processing Save the report setup file The Outline pane on the left looks as follows 3 33 3 Creating Simulink Reports 3 34 BF Report Generator a Report simulink_tutorial rpt Eval The name of the model that wil 4 Title Page Dynamic Simulink Report SS if stremp bdroot ges expM odel then 48a Model Loop Chapter current model e88 Paragraph This report demonstra a System Snapshot 4 for explteration 1 1 lengthfexpValue H Eval Evaluate this string in the bas om Section 1
34. Click in the table placeholder On the Insert tab click Table An empty table appears Position the table in the slide layout To move the table hover the cursor over the top left corner of the table until you see a cursor with intersecting arrows Drag the table to where you want it to appear Click to edit Master title style E 6 Table In the Table Styles set of table styles select a style Then use PowerPoint table formatting tools to customize the table 12 35 12 Programmatic PowerPoint Presentation Creation FILE SLIDE MASTER HOME INSERT v Header Row First Column Total Row Last Column v Banded Rows Banded Columns Table Style Options TRANSITIONS ANIMATIONS REVIEW VIEW ADD INS Acrobat DESIGN LAYOUT aanca 2 Shading As A JEX o Borders amp A 1pt Quick gt Draw Eraser 7 Effects Styles Ay Z Pen Color Table WordArt Styles a Draw Borders Medium Style 2 Accent 4 Click to edit Master title style e Table nn Fis 7 Save the template Related Examples Access PowerPoint Template Elements on page 12 37 More About Presentation Formatting Approaches on page 12 20 12 36 Access PowerPoint Template Elements Access PowerPoint Template Elements In this section PPT API Applications and PowerPoint Templates on page 12 5 Template Elements on page 12 5 Get Slide Master Names on page 12 39 Get S
35. Document Object Model on page 11 4 11 17 T1 Create a Report Program Close a Report The last step in creating a report with the DOM API is to close the report Closing a report writes out any content that remains in memory and closes the report file Use the close function d Document MyDoc append d Hello World close d See Also Functions mlreportgen dom Document close Related Examples Create a Report Program on page 11 3 More About s Document Object Model on page 11 4 11 18 Display a Report Display a Report The DOM API rptview function allows you to display a generated report in a viewer appropriate to its document type the Microsoft Word editor for Word documents an HTML browser for HTML reports and Adobe Acrobat for PDF reports The rptview function takes two arguments The path of the report The output type htm1 docx or pdf If you omit the second argument the output type rptview uses the output type from the report s extension If an HTML report is in zipped format rptview creates a copy of the report in your temporary directory and displays the temporary copy If you specify pdf the function uses Word to convert the report to PDF format It then displays the report in Adobe Acrobat See Also Functions rptview Related Examples Create a Report Program on page 11 3 11 19 11 Create a Report Program Report Formatti
36. Example This table is an example of a table created by the Model Variables component This Property Table reports on the variables in the Controller in the F14 model Variable Name Parent Blocks Calling Value String Ka 14 Controller Gain3 Ka 0 677 Kf 14 Controller Gain Kf 1 746 Ki 14 Controller Proportional plus Ki 3 864 integral compensator Kq f14 Controller Gain2 Kq 0 8156 Insert Anything into Report Yes Table Class rptgen_sl csl_obj_fun_var See Also Block Loop Model Loop Signal Loop System Loop Simulink Library Information Simulink Library Information Insert table that lists library links in the current model system or block Description This component inserts a table that lists library links in the current model system or block Table Columns Block Includes the Simulink block name in the generated table Library Includes the Simulink library root name in the generated table Reference block Includes the Simulink reference block name in the generated table Link status Includes the link status in the generated table Display Options Title Specifies a title for the generated report Sort table by Block Sorts the table by block name Library Sorts the table by library name e Reference Block Sorts the table by reference block name e Link Status Sorts the table by link status Merge repeated rows Merges sorted rows i
37. Force off Logs no data for any block in the current system or subsystem Use this selection to work with models containing fixed point enabled blocks if you do not have a Fixed Point Designer license For more information on logging simulation results see Propose Fraction Lengths Using Simulation Range Data in the Fixed Point Designer documentation Logging Type Specify how to record logs in this section Overwrite log Clears information in the logs before new logging data is entered Merge log Merges new logging data with previously logged information Insert Anything into Report No Class rptgen_fp cfp options 8 37 8 Components Alphabetical List See Also Model Simulation 8 38 Fixed Point Property Table Fixed Point Property Table Insert table that reports on Fixed Point Designer block property name property value pairs Description This component inserts a table that reports on Fixed Point Designer block property name property value pairs Table Select a preset table which is already formatted and configured in the preset table list in the upper left corner of the attributes page preset table Specifies the type of object property table e Default e Mask properties e Block limits e Out of range errors e All fixed point properties e Blank 4x4 To apply the specified table select the table and click Apply Split property value cells Split property name proper
38. Sorts blocks by their location in the model layout by columns The block appearing the furthest toward the left top corner of the model is the anchor for the column The column contains all other blocks that overlap the vertical area defined by the left and right edges of the anchor block The other columns use the same algorithm using as the anchor the next unreported block nearest the left top of the model By traversal order Sorts blocks by traversal order By simulation order Sorts blocks by execution order Search for Simulink property name property value pairs Reports on Simulink blocks with specified property name property value pairs that have associated requirements 8 92 Requirements Block Loop Section Options Create section for each object in loop Inserts a section in the generated report for each block found in the loop that has associated requirements Display the object type in the section title Inserts the object type automatically into the section title in the generated report Create link anchor for each object in loop Creates a hyperlink to the block in the generated report Insert Anything into Report Yes inserts a section if you select the Create section for each object in loop option Class RptgenRMI CBlockLoop See Also Missing Requirements Block Loop Missing Requirements System Loop Model Loop Requirements Block Loop Requirements Documents Table Requirements Signal Loop R
39. The report for a data dictionary includes a table that summarizes the properties of each variable in the dictionary The report also includes a dictionary details section that fully reports the properties and value of each variable in the dictionary If you use a conversion template to generate the report you can specify template defined styles for the summary table title and the summary table To use a conversion template in the Report Options dialog box set File format to one of these values e Word from template e HTML from template e PDF from template Table title style name Specifies the style to use for the data dictionary table title To specify the default style name rgTableTitle which the default conversion template defines use Auto To specify a custom style defined in a custom template that you use with this report select Specify Table style name Specifies the style to use for the data dictionary table To specify the default table style name rgUnruledTabl1le which is the default conversion template defines use Auto To specify a custom style defined in a custom template that you use with this report select Specify 8 121 8 Components Alphabetical List 8 122 Options You can specify whether to include dictionaries referenced by a dictionary and how to present the referenced information Include referenced data dictionaries Includes information from the data dictionaries that the dictiona
40. append p t add slide1 Content p close slides Parent default red text Child text object blue text 5 12 25 12 Programmatic PowerPoint Presentation Creation Set Up a PowerPoint Template 12 26 In this section Use Existing Presentations as Templates on page 12 26 Customize a Copy of the Default Template on page 12 26 Global Presentation Formatting Using a Slide Master on page 12 27 Add a Slide Master on page 12 28 Format a Slide Layout on page 12 30 Add a Slide Layout on page 12 31 Add a Placeholder on page 12 32 Change the Style for a Table on page 12 35 Use Existing Presentations as Templates When you use an existing PowerPoint presentation as a template for a PPT API presentation the content from the existing presentation appears in the PPT API presentation You can use the PPT API to update content in the existing presentation You can also programmatically change some aspects of the formatting of the content that you are updating To format a PPT API presentation that you create completely programmatically specify an empty PowerPoint presentation as a template when you create a Presentation object Customize a Copy of the Default Template You can use the default PPT API PowerPoint template as a starting point for a custom template Note You can use a similar approach to customize a PowerPoint template other than th
41. import mlreportgen ppt Examples that refer to PPT API objects and functions without the mlreportgen ppt prefix assume that you have already imported the PPT API package Related Examples Create PPT Objects on page 12 8 Get and Set PPT Object Properties on page 12 12 Create a Presentation Program on page 12 2 12 11 12 Programmatic PowerPoint Presentation Creation Get and Set PPT Object Properties 12 12 Most PPT objects have properties that describe the object For example Paragraph objects have properties such as Bold FontColor and Level You can set the value of most object properties To get or set the property of PPT object use dot notation Append a period to the name of a variable that references the object Add the property name after the period For example these lines set the font color of a paragraph referenced by p to green p Paragraph Hello World p s Paragraph with properties Bold FontColor Italic Strike Subscript Superscript Underline Level Style Children 1x1 mlreportgen ppt Text Parent Tag ppt Paragraph 1534 Id 1534 baa u a i a ee n p FontColor green This code displays the properties of a child object of paragraph p The constructor for p created a child text object from the string Hello World p Children ans Text with properties Get and Set PPT Object Properties Content Hello World Bold
42. on page 6 6 Insert Anything into Report Yes Table Class rptgen_sf csf_prop table See Also Stateflow Filter 8 189 8 Components Alphabetical List 8 190 Stateflow Snapshot Insert into report snapshot of Stateflow object Description This component inserts a snapshot of a Stateflow object defined by the Statef low Filter parent component into the report This component only executes if the selected object in the Stateflow Filter component is a graphical object such as Chart State Transition and Frame Snapshot Image file format Specifies the image file format for example JPEG or TIFF Select Automatic SF Format default to choose the format best suited for the specified report output format automatically Otherwise choose an image format that your output viewer can read e Automatic SF Format uses the file format selected in the Preferences dialog box e Bitmap 16m color e Bitmap 256 color e Black and white encapsulated PostScript e Black and white encapsulated PostScript TIFF e Black and white encapsulated PostScript2 e Black and white encapsulated PostScript2 TIFF e Black and white PostScript e Black and white PostScript2 e Color encapsulated PostScript e Color encapsulated PostScript TIFF e Color encapsulated PostScript2 e Color encapsulated PostScript2 TIFF Stateflow Snapshot Color PostScript Color PostScript2 JPEG high quality image JPEG me
43. on page 7 11 Open Child Comparison Reports for Selected Nodes on page 7 12 Understand the Report Hierarchy and Matching on page 7 13 Filter Out Differences on page 7 13 Change Color Preferences on page 7 15 Save Comparison Results on page 7 15 Navigate the Simulink XML Comparison Report You can select a pair of Simulink models to compare their XML files You can use models from any version of Simulink The XML comparison tool produces a comparison report based on the SLX files You can use the report to explore the differences view the changes highlighted in the original models and merge differences The XML Comparison report shows changes only not the entire XML text file contents The report shows a hierarchical view of the portions of the two XML files that differ The report does not show sections of the files that are identical To learn about the report see About Simulink Model XML Comparison on page 7 2 To step through differences use the Comparison tab on the toolstrip To move to the next or previous group of differences on the Comparison tab in the Navigate section click the arrow buttons to go to the previous or next difference See Step Through Changes on page 7 10 You can also click to select items in the hierarchical trees and observe the following display features Selected items appear highlighted in a box Ifthe selected item is part of a matched pair it
44. report Generate report from specified Simulink system Syntax report report filename report ___ 0OPATH report ___ fFORMAT report ___ genOption1 report1 report2 report rptfile1 rptfile2 Description report with no arguments opens the Report Explorer For more information on the Report Explorer see Working with the Report Explorer report filename generates a report from the specified report setup files You can specify one or more report setup files When specifying the name of the report setup file omit the rpt file name extension report OOPATH sets the name of the generated report You can specify a path or a single file name for the OPATH path argument report ___ fFORMAT sets the output format and file name extension of the generated report Supported formats include Adobe Acrobat PDF pdf HTML htm1 Microsoft Word doc Rich Text format rtf For example report simple report fPDF generates a PDF file e report genOption1 specifies one or more of the following report generation options e noview Prevents launching the file viewer 9 2 report graphical Shows hierarchy in Report Explorer e debug Enables debug mode e quiet Sets error echo level to 0 SSTYLESHEETNAME Sets stylesheet name not required when choosing format reporti report2 report rptfilei rpt
45. rpt Document MyReport html MyTemplate p Paragraph Here is a magic square or rank 5 BodyPara append rpt p p Paragraph sprintf Rank d MagicSquare rank p StyleName TableTitle append rpt magic rank close rpt rptview rpt OutputPath Override Template Formats You can use programmatic formats to override the paragraph formats defined in a template based paragraph style For example suppose you define a paragraph style named BodyPara in your Word template and set the KeepWithNext property to off You can override the style in your report program to keep a particular paragraph on the same page with the next paragraph For example import mlreportgen dom rpt Document MyReport docx MyTemplate p Paragraph Keep this body paragraph with next BodyPara p Style KeepWithNext append rpt p Create and Format Paragraphs p Paragraph Next paragraph append rpt p close rpt rptview rpt OutputPath See Also Classes mlreportgen dom Bold mlreportgen dom Display mlreportgen dom FontFamily mlreportgen dom FontSize mlreportgen dom Italic mlreportgen dom KeepLinesTogether mlreportgen dom KeepWithNext mlreportgen dom LineSpacing mlreportgen dom PageBreakBefore mlreportgen dom Paragraph mlreportgen dom Strike mlreportgen dom Text mlreportgen dom Underline Related Examples j Add Content to a Report on page 11 11
46. 0005 Display PPT Default M EBSABUS KEE hd arden Oued cae Create and Display a Progress Message Presentation Formatting Approaches Template Formatting Format Objects Format Properties Interactive Formatting of Slide Content Presentation Format Inheritance Set Up a PowerPoint Template Use Existing Presentations as Templates Customize a Copy of the Default Template Global Presentation Formatting Using a Slide Master Add a Slide Master 0 0c cece cee eee Format a Slide Layout Add a Slide Layout 0 0 0 0 ec ee Add a Placeholder Change the Style for a Tabler memora ln ag tet lee pe teed Access PowerPoint Template Elements PPT API Applications and PowerPoint Templates Template Elements 0 0 0 0 ee ens Get Slide Master Names 0 00 e eens Get Slide Layout Names 0 0 0 0 cece eee Get Placeholder and Content Object Names Get Table Style Names 12 8 12 8 12 8 12 9 12 11 12 12 12 14 12 15 12 16 12 16 12 16 12 18 12 20 12 21 12 21 12 22 12 22 12 24 12 26 12 26 12 26 12 27 12 28 12 30 12 31 12 32 12 35 12 37 12 5 12 5 12 39 12 40 12 41 12 42 Define a Style Using Format Objects Use Format Properties Dot Notation Get
47. 12 56 12 57 12 57 12 58 12 61 12 63 12 65 12 65 12 66 12 67 12 67 12 68 12 69 12 70 12 73 12 73 12 75 12 76 12 76 12 77 12 77 12 80 12 81 xix xx Contents Create and Format Text Create Text Create a Subscript or Superscript 0005 Format Texti ss ia wc 6 eae Eo aes ee RAGS ORS Create and Format Paragraphs Create a Paragraph Format Paragraph Content 0 0 00 ee eens Create and Format Tables Create Table ste ira dod inst LA he eee eR a EIR Ge Format a Table Create and Format Pictures 0 Create a Picture Format a Picture Create and Format Links Create an External Link Format an External Link 12 83 12 83 12 83 12 84 12 86 12 86 12 86 12 89 12 89 12 89 12 94 12 94 12 95 12 96 12 96 12 96 Getting Started Simulink Report Generator Product Description on page 1 2 System Design Documentation and Results Reporting on page 1 3 Interactive Model Exploration on page 1 6 Report Creation Workflow on page 1 9 Report Components on page 1 11 Working with the Report Explorer on page 1 16 How Simulink Report Generator and Simulink Software Interact on page 1 19 Supported Report Formats on page 1 20 Add Content to PowerPoint Presentations Programmatically on page 1 21 1 Getting Starte
48. 38 then 438 Model Loop Chapter current model 488 Paragraph This report demonstra GB System Snapshot aga for explteration 1 1 length exp alue in BB Eval Evaluate this string in the bas 1 488 Section 1 Processing the vdp model a Variable lteration_Value GB Eval set_param expBlock expParamter if okSetValue I g8 then ae Simulate model use model start end time a Scope Snapshot All lt Y graph amp open scope blocks in reported systems of current model Se 48B if maxldynamicx 2 gt testMin amp amp max dynamicX 2 BB else i GB Paragraph Could not set lt expBl 4P else 4 488 Chapter Load Model Failed i 488 Paragraph Error Model lt expMod 11 Ifthis condition is true the signal data falls within the desired range Add a Paragraph component to print information about the signal data in the report a In the Outline pane on the left select the if component you just added b Inthe Library pane in the middle under the Formatting category double click Paragraph so that it becomes a child of the if component 3 41 3 Creating Simulink Reports A masfdynamicx 2 gt testin amp amp masfdynamic 2 W 488 Paragraph lt No Text gt c Inthe Properties pane on the right i From the Title Options selection list select Custom
49. Background color BackgroundColor BackgroundColor Bold Bold Bold Italic Italic Italic Subscript or superscript VerticalAlign n a Strike through Strike Strike Underline type single Underline Underline double etc Underline color Underline n a Preserve white space WhiteSpace WhiteSpace Display as specified Display n a Format Text Using Microsoft Word Style Sheets You can format a paragraph using a style defined in the Word template used to generate the report T1 Create a Report Program 11 44 To define a text style in a Word template start by using these steps 1 Open the Word template used with the report 2 Open the Styles pane 3 As Click the Manage Styles button 4 Click New Style 5 Inthe Create New Style from Formatting dialog box set Style type to Character or Linked paragraph and character For more information about working with Word styles see Modify Styles in a Microsoft Word Template on page 11 117 Format Text Using HTML Style Sheets You can format text using a style defined in the HTML template used to generate the report Apply a template style to a Text object either as the second argument in a Text object constructor or by setting the StyleName property to a template style For an HTML report use a span style For example span Pass font family Times New Roman Times serif color green For more information about using HTML styles with DOM objects see Mod
50. Create and Format Links on page 12 96 12 Programmatic PowerPoint Presentation Creation Create a Presentation Program 12 2 In this section PPT API Programs on page 12 3 Two Ways to Use the PPT API on page 12 4 PPT API Applications and PowerPoint Templates on page 12 5 Template Elements on page 12 5 You can use the MATLAB API for PowerPoint PPT API to update and create PowerPoint presentations programmatically For example this MATLAB script creates a presentation that has a title page and one content slide with a bulleted list import mlreportgen ppt SlidesFile mySlides pptx slides Presentation slidesFile slide1 add slides Title Slide replace slide1 Title My Presentation replace slide1 Subtitle Create a Presentation Program slide2 add slides Title and Content para Paragraph First Content Slide para FontColor blue replace slide2 Title para replace slide2 Content First item Second item Third item close slides After you create the presentation which his named MySlides pptx you can open it On a Windows platform you can open the presentation in MATLAB if ispc winopen slidesFile end The generated presentation MySlides pptx includes these two slides Create a Presentation Program My Presentation Create a Presentation Program First Content Slide e First item Second
51. Font family for complex FontFamily n a scripts Font size FontSize n a Text color FontColor n a Bold Bold n a Italic Italic n a Strike Strike n a Underline Underline n a Background color BackgroundColor n a To specify default formatting for the contents of a TableEntry object use these formatting options TableEntry Object Format Object Format Property Formatting Background color BackgroundColor BackgroundColor Column width ColWidth n a Vertical alignment of table VAlign VAlign cell content Font family FontFamily Font Font family for complex FontFamily ComplexScriptFont scripts to handle locales Text color FontColor FontColor Font size FontSize FontSize Bold Bold n a Italic Italic n a Strike Strike n a Underline Underline n a 12 91 12 Programmatic PowerPoint Presentation Creation 12 92 Access a Table Row or Entry To access a row in a table use the mlreportgen ppt Table row method Specify the Table object and the number of the row you want to access For example to access a TableRow object for the second row of myTable use myTable Table magic 5 row2 row myTable 2 To access an entry in a table use the mlreportgen ppt Table entry method Specify the Table object and the number of the row and the number of the column that you want to access For example to access a TableEntry object for the third entry in the second row of myTabl
52. In the Library pane in the middle double click System Loop to add it to the report setup file By default Model Explorer adds this component as a child of the Model Loop component In the System Loop properties pane under Section Options select the Create section for each object in loop check box Selecting this option creates a section in the generated report for each subsystem on which the component loops Accept the default values for all other fields Loop component Model Loop 10 Save the report The report setup file hierarchy now looks as follows A Report Explorer Report sldemo_auto_report rpt File Edit View Tools Help USE 45XB 7 SSitstvre Report Generator 3 Report sidemo_auto_report rpt 488 Chapter Description of subsys 5 4 Model Loop Section 1 sldemo_auto_climate_elec mdl H 4 System Loop Section 2 Reported systems in current model Sow System Snapshot 11 Run the report by clicking File gt Report The report loops on the system ClimateControlSystem of the sldemo_auto_ climate elec model and all of its subsystems as shown in the following Message List 8 75 8 Components Alphabetical List Z Message List 3 Important running 4 loop Beginning report Looping on model sldemo_auto_climate_elec Looping on system ClimateControlSystem Looping on system AC Control Looping on system External Temperature in Celsius Looping on system Heat from occupa
53. Insert Variable MATLAB Property T able MATLAB T oolbox Version Number Variable T able SS GS BS BB In the Properties pane on the right click the icon next to Add component to current report to insert the component into the report Note You cannot edit the component information in the Properties pane on the right until you add the component to the report 3 7 3 Creating Simulink Reports In the Outline pane on the left the Evaluate MATLAB Expression component appears under the simulink_tutorial report setup file The Simulink Report Generator software abbreviates the component name to Eval 4 Report Generator H Report simulink_tutorial rpt Eval Evaluate this string in the bas The icon in the upper left corner of the Eval component s icon indicates that this component cannot have child components By default any components you add while the Eval component is selected are siblings of this component The options for the Evaluate MATLAB Expression component appear in the Properties pane on the right Add Report Content with Components Evaluate MATLAB Expression IV Insert MATLAB expression in report IV Display command window output in report Expression to evaluate in the base workspace Eval Now 4Evaluate this string in the base workspace JV Evaluate this expression if there is an error rptgen displayMessage sprintf Error during 4rptgen displayMe
54. Logical and Flow Control 4 paragraph A Simulink bloch 4 paragraph A variable that q 4 paragraph The order in wh 4 paragraph A number that it 4 paragraph A symbolic MA lt paragraph A block output 4 paragraph A subsystem the 4 chapter About this Report Report Options Report File Location H vdp pdF Directory Custom HA Filename Custom gt vap If report already exists increment to prevent overwriting Report Format and Stylesheet File format Acrobat PDF Generation Options V7 View report after generation Auto save before generation FZ Compile mode to report on compiled information Evaluate this string after generation clear sdd_custom_data Report description Generates a document that describes the design of software modeled by a Simulink model aon x Numbered Chapters amp Sections The Report Explorer reflects any changes for example a different report name that you made in the System Design Description dialog box 2 Inthe Report Explorer add or modify components See Working with Components and Information Components 2 10 Customize the System Design Description Do not remove the sdd_custom_data structure which is defined as sdd_custom_data struct model bdroot rootSystem gcs You can modify the model argument which is the model for which you generated the report and the rootSystem argument which is the
55. PDF Image Formats PDF reports only support bitmap bmp jpeg jpg and Scalable Vector Graphics SVQ The SVG format is only supported for Simulink models and Stateflow charts For example MATLAB figures do not display in SVG when you select the SVG format for PDF reports RTF Display of Hidden Content RTF reports use placeholders field codes for dynamically generated content such as page numbers or images On Windows platforms to display that content press Ctrl A and then press F9 On Linux and Mac platforms use the field code update interface for the program that you are using to view the RTF document Change the Default Output Format In the Report Generator Preferences pane use the Format ID preference to specify the default output format for reports Stylesheets For each output format you can choose from several stylesheets for each report output format For details see e PDF Stylesheets on page 4 8 Web Stylesheets on page 4 8 RTF DSSSL Print and Word Stylesheets on page 4 9 4 7 A Generate a Report 4 8 Note Some Web and Print stylesheets include an automatically generated list of titles which includes table titles and figures with titles PDF Stylesheets PDF Stylesheet Description Default print Displays title page table of contents list of titles stylesheet Standard Print Displays title page table of contents list of titles Simp
56. Pthen i i Simulate model use model start end time pa B Scope Snapshot All gt lt Y graph amp open scope blocks in reported systems of current model i max dynamicx 2 gt testMin amp amp max dynamicx 2 in Paragraph The conditioned signa B Eval expOkValues expOkValues i else i GB Paragraph Could not set lt expBl b Pae P Chapter Load Model Failed aa 4 Paragraph Error Model lt expMod m Click the down arrow three times so Section 1 moves to the end of the Model Loop Chapter component 3 45 3 Creating Simulink Reports Report Generator F Report simulink_tutorial rpt pe j Eval The name of the model that wil en i EB Title Page Dynamic Simulink Report h wit stremp bdroot ges expM odel 5 4 then ies Loop Chapter current model iow 88 Paragraph This report demonstra pas B System Snapshot 4 Pron explteration 1 1 length expValue i iB Eval Evaluate this string in the bas i P Section 1 Processing the vdp model jee i EB Variable lteration_Yalue m E Eval set_param espBlock expParam lter 3 epi okSetValue oy Pthen ioe iB Simulate model use model start end time ben i EB Scope Snapshot AllY graph amp open scope blocks in reported systems of current model h i max dynamicx 2 gt testMin amp amp maxfdynamicx 2 fee E Paragraph The condit
57. Status Unchanged testVar Name testVar Value testVarVal class char LastModified 2015 Jan 30 23 37 08 139822 Status New Simulink Data Dictionary Loop Class rptgen_sl csl data _dict_loop See Also Simulink Data Dictionary 8 131 8 Components Alphabetical List 8 132 Simulink Dialog Snapshot Insert snapshots of Simulink editor dialog boxes Description This component takes snapshots of Simulink editor dialog boxes You use it to display the current settings associated with an object or document the appearance of your custom mask dialog boxes The parent component of this component determines the behavior of this component Block Loop Documents the dialog box of the current reported block System Loop Documents the dialog box of the current reported system Format Image file format Specifies the format for the snapshot image file The automatic format chooses BMP format for PDF files and PNG for other formats Show all tabs Automatically generates images for all the tabs for the dialog box If you clear this check box Simulink Report Generator creates an image of only the first tab Display Options Scaling Controls size of the image as displayed in a browser Making an image larger using this option does not affect the storage size of the image but the quality of the displayed image may decrease as you increase or decrease the size of the displayed image Generally t
58. This interface information in the top model enables incremental loading and diagnostic checks without any need to load child models When you load a model for example to compare XML then Simulink refreshes the interface information for referenced models if it can find the child model Simulink can locate the child model if it is on the path If another model of the same name is higher on the path Simulink updates the interface information for that other model before comparing XML This can produce entries for interface changes for model reference blocks in the comparison report Make sure your referenced models are not on your path before you generate the report to avoid these interface changes in the results If both model versions are off the path the interface information in the top model is not refreshed during the XML comparison process Instead the cached information is used resulting in a valid XML comparison report With library links Simulink does not update the cached interface information when comparing XML and so the report correctly captures library interfaces However with both referenced models and library links Simulink updates the information when displaying the model When displaying report items in original models you may see that Simulink finds another model or library that is higher in the path To obtain the clearest results make sure that the models and associated libraries are temporarily removed Work with Referen
59. Tip To avoid document type declaration issues remove declarations from existing HTML content that you intend to append to DOM reports If the content does not include a declaration the DOM prepends a valid declaration that defines the entire HTML character entity set HTML Code Requirements for DOM Reports Related Examples Use an HTML Cleanup Program on page 11 96 Append HTML Content to DOM Reports on page 11 92 Append HTML File Contents to DOM Reports on page 11 94 More About Appending HTML to DOM Reports on page 11 90 11 105 11 Create a Report Program Display Report Generation Messages 11 106 In this section Report Generation Messages on page 11 106 Display DOM Default Messages on page 11 106 Create and Display a Progress Message on page 11 108 Report Generation Messages The DOM API includes a set of messages that can display when you generate a report The messages are triggered every time a document element is created or appended during report generation You can define additional messages to display during report generation The DOM API provides these classes for defining messages ProgressMessage e DebugMessage e WarningMessage e ErrorMessage The DOM API provides additional classes for handling report message dispatching and display It uses MATLAB events and listeners to dispatch messages A message is dispatched based on ev
60. as in this example First row Second row Third row follows blank line e Text retain line breaks Imports plain text including line breaks as in this example First row Second row Third row follows blank line e Fixed width text retain line breaks Imports fixed width text all letters have the same width or size including line breaks as in this example First row Second row Third row follows blank line Tip This option is useful for importing MATLAB files Insert linking anchor for blocks Inserts a linking anchor for each DocBlock block that designates the location where other links for that block point See the Simulink Linking Anchor or Link component reference pages for more help Do not use this option if you have already specified an anchor location for a DocBlock block with an Object Linking Anchor component 8 31 8 Components Alphabetical List Insert Anything into Report Yes Text paragraph or external RTF HTML data Class rptgen_sl csl blk doc See Also Block Loop Model Loop Simulink Linking Anchor System Loop 8 32 Fixed Point Block Loop Fixed Point Block Loop Run child components for the Simulink model system or signal defined by parent component Description This component runs its children for the Simulink model system or signal that its parent defines Options for the parent component are e Model Loop e System Loop e Signal Loop Rep
61. for each variable If you specify to create a section for each variable you can select the Display the object type in the section title to insert a variable name in each section title Create link anchor for each object in loop Specifies a custom title Insert Anything into Report Yes inserts sections if you select the Create section for each object in loop option Class rptgen_sl csl _ws_var_loop See Also Simulink Workspace Variable Bus Simulink Functions and Variables 8 163 8 Components Alphabetical List Software Quality Objectives Coding Rules Summary Create table of coding rule violations in results downloaded from Polyspace Metrics Description This component creates a table containing coding rule violations in results downloaded from Polyspace Metrics 8 164 Software Quality Objectives Run time Checks Details Software Quality Objectives Run time Checks Details Create table of run time checks in results downloaded from Polyspace Metrics Description This component creates a table containing run time checks in results downloaded from Polyspace Metrics 8 165 8 Components Alphabetical List Software Quality Objectives Run time Checks Summary Create table of run time check distribution in results downloaded from Polyspace Metrics Description This component creates a table containing the distribution of run time checks in results downloaded from Polyspace Metrics
62. simppend theta For more information see lt VariableName gt Notation on the Text component reference page in the MATLAB Report Generator documentation Search for Simulink property name property value pairs Reports only on Simulink blocks with specified property name property value pairs that do not have associated requirements Section Options Create section for each object in loop Inserts a section in the generated report for each block found in the loop Display the object type in the section title Automatically inserts the object type into the section title in the generated report Create link anchor for each object in loop Create a hyperlink to the block in the generated report Insert Anything into Report Yes inserts a section if you select the Create section for each object in loop option Class Name RptgenRMI NoReqBlockLoop Missing Requirements Block Loop See Also Block Loop Missing Requirements System Loop Requirements Block Loop Requirements Documents Table Requirements Signal Loop Requirements Summary Table Requirements System Loop Requirements Table 8 57 8 Components Alphabetical List 8 58 MATLAB Function Insert information about MATLAB Function block contents Description This component displays tables with information about MATLAB code included in MATLAB Function blocks You specify which of the following kinds of information to include in the report Function p
63. 1 Inthe Report Explorer click File gt Open and then open sldemo_auto_report rpt by double clicking it 8 77 8 Components Alphabetical List 2 Inthe Outline pane on the left click Model Loop Section 1 sldemo_auto_ climate elec In the Model Loop properties pane click the a button to add a model to the Models to include list 4 Inthe Model Loop properties pane from the Model name selection list select lt Custom block diagram gt 5 Inthe Model name field delete the text lt Custom block diagram gt and enter f14 mdl The Model Loop properties pane now looks as follows fant s Dorot ioie ins i Dorot foton modei refererceboes z FP Indude all variants E 6 Save the report setup file 7 Generate the report 8 78 Model Loop The report generation process loops over the specified systems in the f 14 and sldemo_auto_ climate elec models as shown in the following message box 2101 3 Important messages running a loop Beginning report Looping on system F14 Looping on system Aircraft Dynamics Model Looping on system Controller Looping on system Dryden Wind Gust Models Looping on system More Info2 Looping on system Nz pilot calculation lt Looping on model sldemo_auto_climate_elec Looping on system ClimateControlSystem Looping on system AC Control Looping on system External Temperature in Celsius Looping on system Heat From occupants
64. 16 Delete a Conversion Template on page 10 17 Customize Microsoft Word Report Styles on page 10 18 Customize Microsoft Word Part Templates on page 10 21 Customize a Microsoft Word Title Page Template on page 10 30 Create a Custom HTML Template on page 10 36 10 Template Based Report Formatting Report Conversion Templates 10 2 In this section Templates for Report Conversion on page 10 2 Custom Templates on page 10 2 Custom Component Styles on page 10 2 Benefits of Using Templates on page 10 2 Templates for Report Conversion By selecting the Word from template output type you can cause the Report Generator to use a Microsoft Word template to convert the XML content for a report to a Word or PDF document Similarly by selecting HTML from template you can cause the Report Generator to use an HTML template to convert XML content to an HTML document The Report Generator uses the template to determine the layout and format of the resulting document Custom Templates The MATLAB Report Generator comes with default HTML and Word templates You can create customized versions of these templates to meet your report formatting and layout requirements You can use a custom template to generate a report Specify the name of the custom template in the Report Options dialog box in the Template field Custom Component Styles You can use styles defined in your cu
65. Convert XML Documents Using the Report Explorer 4 18 Convert XML Documents Using the Command Line 4 20 Edit XML Source Files 0 0000 cece eee eee 4 20 Create a Report Log File 0 0005 4 21 Generate MATLAB Code from Report Setup File 4 22 Troubleshooting Report Generation Issues 4 25 Meinory Us ase le neasa Bes nod a SAE weit ea Da aes 4 25 HTML Report Display on UNIX Systems 4 25 Export Simulink Models to Web Views 5 Web Views ersi ores ere Ste Se De eth Bl ha a 5 2 What Isa Web View etoient ia Rea eae hee a 5 2 System Requirements 0 0 0 cece eee eee 5 2 Web View Files 2 0 eee ee eee 5 2 Export Models to Web View Files 5 4 Open the Web View Dialog Box 0005 5 4 Export a Model to a Web View 0 00 02 eee ees 5 4 Display and Navigate a Web View 05 5 6 Display a Web View When You Export It 5 6 Open a Web View File in a Web Browser 5 6 View Contents of a System 0 0 0 eee eee 5 7 View Block Parameters and Signal Properties 5 8 Access Optional Web View Information 5 9 Search a Web View 0 0 0 cece ee tees 5 10 Perform a Search erst ee eb si ce ee A go ee 5 10 Sort Search Results 2 0 0 cee es 5 12 Navigate Between Search Results and Model Elements 5 12 Create and Use a W
66. Custom Word Part Templates on page 10 21 Display the Developer Ribbon in Word on page 10 22 Customize a Word Conversion Part Template on page 10 22 Set Default Text Style for a Hole on page 10 23 Distinguish Inline and Block Holes on page 10 25 Avoid Changing Block Holes to Inline Holes on page 10 26 Delete a Hole on page 10 26 Add an Inline Hole on page 10 28 Add a Block Hole on page 10 29 Custom Word Part Templates You can create custom Word part templates such as a title page part template to Tailor report formatting to meet your specific formatting requirements Delete a hole For a description of holes see Part Template Holes on page 10 10 Rearrange the order of holes Add fixed content to a footer or header If you delete a hole in a part template then the generated report does not include the component data associated with that hole For example the rgRectoTitlePage part template includes an rgAuthor hole If you delete the rgAuthor hole then reports generated with the template do not include the author even if the report has a Title Page component that specifies a value for the Author property The only kind of holes that you can add to a part template are the holes that the Report Explorer supports for that part template For example for the rgChapter part template you can only reinsert rgChapterTitlePrefix rgChapterTitleNumber rgChapterTi
67. DOM Object Help and Documentation Construct a DOM Object 0 00 00 cece Import the DOM API Package Get and Set DOM Object Properties Create a Document Object to Hold Content 11 3 11 4 11 4 xiii Xiv Contents Add Content to a Report 0 0 00 cee 11 11 Clone a DOM Object 0 0 0 0 0c cee eee 11 13 Add Content as a Group 0 0 0 0 11 14 Stream a RE Ports cose sacs asco Yer aea Feo a tg hina be Soe vie Po 11 16 Report Packages 0 0 00 eens 11 17 Close ax Report seces sei 68k ele a ate e eae 11 18 Display a Report 0 0 0 0 ens 11 19 Report Formatting Approaches 11 20 Use Style Sheets 0 0 0 0 cee 11 21 Use Format Objects 0 0000 ees 11 23 Use Format Properties 0 0 00 eee eens 11 24 Format Inheritance 0 0 11 25 Create Object Containers 00 0000 eee 11 26 Form Based Reporting 000000 e eens 11 28 Fill the Blanks in a Report Form 11 29 Navigate Holes in the Form 0000 005 11 29 Use Subforms in a Report 0 0 0 0 00 0c eee 11 31 Create Document Part Template Libraries 11 33 Create a Document Part Template Library in a Microsoft Word Template File 0 0 0 cee ee eee 11 33 Create a Document Part Template Library in an HTML Template Files ranna iae o e aaa Bea a Bee be
68. DOM Reports on page 11 90 HTML Code Requirements for DOM Reports on page 11 100 11 95 11 Create a Report Program Use an HTML Cleanup Program 11 96 You can use an HTML cleanup program such as HTML Tidy to fix many issues and to identify issues you need to address manually For a description of requirements for HTML content that you can append see HTML Code Requirements for DOM Reports on page 11 100 Use HTML Tidy to Fix HTML Code You can use the HTML Tidy program to fix HTML content so that it meets the requirements for appending to a DOM report This example uses a batch file to fix the HTML content 1 Copy the following HTML content into a text editor such as Wordpad lt html gt lt head gt lt title gt Hi there lt title gt lt head gt lt body gt lt p gt This is a page a simple page with a simple table lt style gt table th td border 1px solid black lt style gt lt table style width 50 gt lt tr gt lt td gt lt b gt Name lt B gt lt td gt lt td gt lt b gt Age lt b gt lt td gt lt td gt lt b gt Occupation lt b gt lt td gt lt tr gt lt tr gt lt td gt Joe Smith lt td gt lt td gt 40 lt td gt lt td gt Plumber lt td gt lt tr gt lt tr gt lt td gt Sue Jones lt td gt lt td gt 33 lt td gt lt td gt Scientist lt td gt lt tr gt lt tr gt Use an HTML Cleanup Program lt td gt Carlos Martinez lt td gt lt td gt
69. E fPilsimulink a innttie alsystem a ae fe Oy pranch ry me rE engines gt bewe SL t Engine gt transmission Branch gt transmission SRE Mux gt vehicle kph yellow amp throttle 1 L E Branch gt engine REM L tosi pence statefiow E Mux 1 gt vehicle mph yellow amp throttle 1 Gf shit logic B stateflow E AD gear state i o vehicle koh D yellow amp era E thote s Copyright 1997 2012 The Mathworks Inc dst Ready 118 ods SH selection state Ckickdown Py sta owm 263 steady state gt junction File Diagram Simulation Analysis Code Tools Help dst eGR kickdoun gt steady state dst tsa kickdown gt steady state Himst 5 dst a st EER carmdl 58 junction gt kickdown a ka Run frons sre F a i 5 E a R to run the simulation bere a eras engine RPM y 5 Pigcar ial ee Engne 7 Parameter 8 p P fiat caeatomie User inputs We vehicle xph chiclemph peed low Nes 25 on Taams 2 throttle A throttle inemiesion speed at osi Tote time renin seed Double click to shit oge ienie open the GUI eed andselectan input maneuver a veride mon yellow amp E thote 7 Copyright 1997 2012 The W athwores Inc 2 z AR The XML comparison report shows a hierarchical view of the portions of the two XML files that differ The report does not show sections of the files that are identical If the files are identical you see a message reporti
70. Edit Figure Loop Components Edit Figure Loop Components In this section Figure Loop in a Report on page 6 25 Figure Properties on page 6 26 Loop on the Current Figure on page 6 27 Loop on Visible Figures on page 6 27 Loop on Figures with Tags on page 6 27 Modify Loop Section Options on page 6 27 Figure Loop in a Report This example uses the Figure Loop which is representative of many types of loops The Figure Loop component runs its child components several times In each iteration the Figure Loop applies its child components to Handle Graphics figures The figloop tutorial report setup file creates a report that documents several Handle Graphics figures 1 At the MATLAB command prompt enter setedit figloop tutorial 2 To display the Handle Graphics figures enter figloopfigures The figures Membrane Data An Application and Peaks Data appear on the screen because their visible property is on The Invisible Membrane Data and An Invisible Application figures do not appear on screen because their visible property is off These invisible figures exist but they are hidden 3 Inthe Report Explorer in the Outline pane on the left select the Figure Loop component called Figure Loop Section 1 The Properties pane for the Figure Loop component appears 6 25 6 Add Content with Components 6 26 FigureLoop Figure Selection Indude figures AI figur
71. Else component Select the if okSetValue component again Double click the Logical Then component The Outline pane on the left looks as follows 3 35 3 Creating Simulink Reports Report Generator 3 Report simulink_tutorial rpt i GB Eval The name of the model that wil a Title Page Dynamic Simulink Report 48Aif strcmp bdroot gcs expModel g8 then 488 Model Loop Chapter current model 48a Paragraph This report demonstra s BS ystem Snapshot 480 for explteration 1 1 lengthlesp alue GB Eval Evaluate this string in the bas 4 Section 1 Processing the vdp model a Variable Iteration_Value i GB Eval set_param expBlock expParam ter m 1 T Te wo 2 lt a g 3 Inthe Outline pane on the right select the else component In the Library pane in the middle double click Paragraph If okSetValue 0 the Gain parameter value is not set and the report displays an error 5 Inthe Properties pane on the right Choose Custom title from the Title Options selection list b Enter Error in the text box next to the selection list c Enter the following text into the Paragraph Text text box Could not set lt expBlock gt lt expParam gt to value lt Iteration_Value gt 6 Save the report 3 36 Add Report Content with Components Simulate the Model Using a Model Simulation Compo
72. Example of a container node Icons indicate the category of item for example model subsystem Stateflow machine or chart block line parameter etc 7 Compare Simulink Model XML Files 7 10 To expand or filter the tree view use the View tab controls on the toolstrip for the following functions Expand All Expands every item in the tree Tip Right click to expand or collapse the hierarchy within the selected tree node Collapse All Collapses all items in the tree to the most compact view possible Filter Opens the Filter list Select check boxes to enable or disable display of categories of changes in the report Use the filters to show only the changes you are interested in By default the report hides all nonfunctional changes such as repositioning of items Turn off filters to explore all differences including nonfunctional changes See Filter Out Differences on page 7 13 If you want to swap the files on the Comparison tab select Swap Sides The report swaps the sides and reruns the comparison Refresh also runs the analysis again To create a new report see Select Simulink Models for XML Comparison on page 7 5 For examples with instructions see also Examples of XML Comparison on page 7 7 Step Through Changes On the Comparison tab in the Navigate section when you click the Next arrow button or press the Down key when the report has focus you step through gro
73. Format Options To specify alignment for text in a given cell in the toolbar at the bottom of the dialog box use the four justification buttons Select the HandleVisibility table row Then select the double justify button the last button to the right 6 11 6 Add Content with Components 6 12 Figure Prop Table lt no title gt 7 F oy xi Select a preset table J Apply I Split property value cells main Properties a C z z 3 z Property Value z Edit Table Titles Table titles can contain properties and text By default the title of a table is the same as the value of the lt Name gt property You can modify this property to modify the table title Note Table titles are always in nonsplit mode Enter Text into Table Cells For the text to be visible the table must be in nonsplit mode Clear Split property value cells To enter text into the HandleVisibility table cell double click the cell A gray box appears with the label for the cell property Property Table Components Figure Prop Table lt no title gt 0 xj Select a preset table x Apply J Split property value cells main Properties fad nValue P HandleVisibility gt test text Tag tValue Visible Walue If you type text outside the angle brackets the text appears as is in the report Text inside the table brackets must specify a valid property name If you enter an invalid pr
74. HOME INSERT TRANSITIONS ANIMATIONS REVIEW VIEW ADD INS Acrobat Sel Ge Ges H Ruler S H color B Arrange All mp ag Be E E cs eA ED R Gridlines E Grayscale a rn Cascade Normal Outline Slide Notes r Slide Handout Notes I Zoom Fitto New Switch Macros View Sorter Page Met Master Master Guides Window i Black and White window EP Move Split Windows Presentation Views Master Views Show G Zoom Color Grayscale Window Macros Slide Master View Master slides control the look of 4 your entire presentation including i colors fonts backgrounds effects H and just about everything else i You can insert a shape or a logo on j a slide master for example and it oose ck to edit Master title style Click to edit Master text styles Second level Third level Fourth level e Fifth level 3 Inaslide master click in a placeholder For example in the master title slide click inClick to edit Master title style text and select a formatting option such as changing the font color to red 4 Save the template Add a Slide Master You can add a slide master to a PowerPoint template Adding a slide master is useful for providing different formatting for different parts of a presentation 1 In PowerPoint open the template 2 Inthe View tab in the Master Views section click Slide Master 3 In the left pane that shows the slide master and slide layouts click after the last slide layout 4 Right cli
75. HTML Template Modify Styles in an HTML Template You can customize or add format styles in a custom HTML template 1 Ina text or HTML editor open the TEMPLATEROOT Stylesheet root css file 2 In the Properties pane click Open stylesheet 3 Ina text or HTML editor edit the cascading style sheet CSS For information about editing a cascading style sheet see documentation such as the W3Schools com CSS tutorial 4 Save the style sheet Related Examples Add Holes in an HTML Template on page 11 124 i Create a Microsoft Word Template on page 11 111 11 127 T1 Create a Report Program Create Microsoft Word Page Layout Sections 11 128 In this section Define Page Layouts in a Template on page 11 128 Navigate Template Defined Sections on page 11 128 Create Sections Programmatically on page 11 129 You can divide a Word document into one or more sections each with its own page layout Page layout includes page margins page orientation and headers and footers Define Page Layouts in a Template Every Word template has at least one page layout section You can use Word to create as many additional sections as you need For example you may want to create in the main template of a report sections for your report s title page table of contents and chapters See the Word documentation for information on how to create page layout sections in a Word template Navigate Templat
76. Inthe Expression to evaluate in the base workspace text box enter the following to save the desired signal values in the expOkValues array expOkValues expOkValues Iteration _Value max dynamicx 2 c Make sure you select Evaluate this expression if there is an error Insert the following text in the text box disp Error during eval evalException message 14 Save the report setup file Create a Post Test Analysis Section Note This section builds on the previous tasks described in the step by step example summarized in Create a Simulink Report Generator Report on page 3 2 To see the completed report setup file open Simulink Dynamic Report The report is for the vdp model Now that you have collected all the desired values create the post test analysis section by creating a table and inserting it into your report at the end of this chapter 1 In the Outline pane on the left select the Model Loop Chapter component 3 43 3 Creating Simulink Reports 5 44 Report Generator 3 Report simulink_tutorial rpt j Eval 4The name of the model that wil H Title Page Dynamic Simulink Report SBS if stremplbdroot gcs esp odel then 88 Model Loop Chapter current model 48a Paragraph This report demonstra W System Snapshot g8 for explteration 1 1 length exp alue ei Eval ZEvaluate this string in the bas 488 Section 1
77. K icl Align Text ALLOD ann New Delete B I U ax Aar A ainter Slide jes GP Shape Effects Select gt Slides Font 5 Paragraph fe Drawing n Editing x Selection ai Show All Hide All z y Slide Number Footer Date Content Title 20 9 Click to edit Master title style e Click to edit Master text styles Second level Third level If you update content in an existing PowerPoint presentation to you can view the name of content objects on that slide also use the Selection Pane For example 1 Create and generate a presentation with a slide that has a table import mlreportgen ppt 12 41 12 Programmatic PowerPoint Presentation Creation slidesFile myTablePresentation pptx Slides Presentation slidesFile slide1 add slides Blank add slide1 Table magic 5 close slides if ispe winopen slidesFile end 2 In PowerPoint select the Selection Pane The name of the table is a generated string of characters You can rename that object and use that new name with the PPT API Selection we Show All Hide All ajv 6d423a21 2767 4500 a926 778b8494aa Slide Number Footer 17 24 a a jis fens 23 s 7 fu 16 a e fas 20 22 10 12 fis 2 3 12 42 a1 is 235 2 9 Get Table Style Names When you use the PPT API to specify a table style other than the default you need to know the names of table styles
78. More About Report Formatting Approaches on page 11 20 11 51 T1 Create a Report Program Create and Format Lists 11 52 In this section Create an Unordered List on page 11 52 Create an Ordered List on page 11 53 Create a Multilevel List on page 11 55 Format Lists on page 11 56 You can add two kinds of lists to a report Unordered bulleted Ordered numbered e Multilevel lists that contain ordered or unordered lists in any combination Create an Unordered List You can create an unordered list from a numeric or cell array or from scratch Creating a list from a cell array allows you to include items of different types in the list Creating a list from scratch is useful for including multiple objects in a list item Create an Unordered List from an Array You can create an unordered list by appending a one dimensional numeric or cell array to a document or document part The append function converts the array to an mlreportgen dom UnorderedList object appends the object to the document and returns the object which you can then format In the cell array you can include strings numbers and some DOM objects such as a Text object For a list of DOM objects you can include see mlreportgen dom ListItem import mlreportgen dom d Document myListReport html t Text third item append d first item 6 t fourth item Create and Form
79. Object Properties 11 8 To get or set the property of a document object use dot notation which involves appending a period to the name of a variable that references the object followed by the property name For example the following line saves the current font family of a paragraph referenced by p and sets it to a new font family saveFont p FontFamily p FontFamily Arial Related Examples Construct a DOM Object on page 11 6 Use Format Properties on page 11 24 More About 7 Document Object Model on page 11 4 Create a Document Object to Hold Content Create a Document Object to Hold Content Every report program must create an mlreportgen dom Document object to hold report content Use the mlreportgen dom Document constructor to create a Document object If you use the constructor with no arguments the DOM API creates an HTML document named Untitled htmx in the current folder You can specify the file system path of the report as the first argument of the constructor You can specify the type of report to be generated by using a second argument You can specify the type to be htm1 or docx for Microsoft Word You can then use the rptview function to convert a Word report to PDF or you can open the report in Word and save it as PDF This Document constructor creates an HTML report called myReport d Document myreport html Using a third argument you can specify the file system
80. PDF or RTF format support this property e Auto e Right e Center e Left Image title None Default e Object name Uses the object name as the title e Full Stateflow name Specifies the Stateflow path and the name of the object Full Simulink Stateflow name Specifies the Simulink path and name of the object e Custom Enter a different title Caption Specifies a caption for your image None Default Custom Specifies a custom caption e Description Sets the caption to the value of the object Description property Insert Anything into Report Yes Image Class rptgen_sf csf_obj_ snap 8 193 8 Components Alphabetical List 8 194 Class rptgen_sf csf_prop table See Also Stateflow Filter Stateflow Summary Table Stateflow Summary Table Table of properties or parameters of specified Stateflow object Description This component displays a table of properties or parameters of specified Stateflow objects It can have the following parents e Any Stateflow looping component e Any Simulink looping component Model Loop System Loop Block Loop or Signal Loop Properties Object type Specifies the object type to display in the generated report This value affects the options available in the Property Columns pane Table title Specifies a title for the Summary Table in the generated report Automatic Generates a title automatically from the parameter e Cu
81. Processing the vdp model B Variable lteration_Yalue sa H Eval set_param expBlock expParamlter Check Value Using a Logical If Component Note This section builds on the previous tasks described in the step by step example summarized in Create a Simulink Report Generator Report on page 3 2 To see the completed report setup file open Simulink Dynamic Report The report is for the vdp model Check the value of okSetValue using a Logical If component If the value is 0 the simulation cannot proceed because the Gain parameter could not be set 1 In the Outline pane on the left select the Eval component for the set_param command In the Library pane in the middle under the Logical and Flow Control category double click Logical If The component is added as a sibling of Eval Add Report Content with Components 8Section 1 Processing the vdp model i EB Variable lteration_Value jee H Eval set_paramfexpBlock expParam lter ha eB if true 3 In the Properties pane on the right in the Test expression text box replace true with okSetValue okSetValue can be 1 true or 0 false so insert two components Logical Then and Logical Else to process those conditions 1 In the Outline pane on the left select the if okSetValue component 2 Toinsert Logical Then and Logical Else in the correct order a b c In the Library pane in the middle double click the Logical
82. Program 11 66 Create a Formal Table To create a formal table use the same basic approaches as with an informal table except that you must use an mLreportgen domlFormalTable constructor to construct a formal table The constructor optionally accepts a two dimensional numeric array or a cell array of MATLAB data for the body header and footer sections If you choose to build a formal table completely or partially from scratch you can use the FormalTable object functions appendHeaderRow and appendBodyRow to append rows to the table header and footer sections The FormalTable append function appends a row to the body section Alternatively you can access a section using the Header Body or Footer properties of the FormalTab1e object import mlreportgen dom d Document test t FormalTable a b c d r TableRow append r TableEntry Column 1 append r TableEntry Column 2 append t Header r append d t close d rptview d OutputPath Format a Formal Table You can format a formal table programmatically using DOM format objects or format properties You can also use Word and HTML template styles For information about these formatting techniques and format inheritance see Report Formatting Approaches on page 11 20 Format a Formal Table Programmatically You can format a formal table programmatically the same way you format an informal table The format objects and properties t
83. Style to create a new style to use as the default style and click OK 10 Select the part template and click the Quick Parts button 11 Click Save Selection to Quick Part Gallery Add Holes in a Microsoft Word Template A A Signature Line E ea Date amp Time Quick WordArt Drop Equation Sym Parts Capv JObject mireportgen rgChapter pref sumbere ute rgFigureTitle prefix number Tithe rgListTitle Tithe rgRectoTitlePage Report Title Report Subtitle rgSect1Title amp f AutoText Document Property fm Field EE Building Blocks Organizer Eg Save Selection to Quick Part Gallery N 12 Inthe Create New Building Block dialog box set Name to the part template name for example rgChapter and the Category to mlreportgen Click OK 13 Save and close the template 11 115 11 Create a Report Program Related Examples Modify Styles in a Microsoft Word Template on page 11 117 Create an HTML Template on page 11 122 Create and Format Tables on page 11 58 11 116 Modify Styles in a Microsoft Word Template Modify Styles in a Microsoft Word Template In this section Edit Styles in a Word Template on page 11 117 Add Styles to a Word Template on page 11 118 Edit Styles in a Word Template You can customize or add format styles in a custom Word template 1 In Word open the Styles dial
84. Styles D Select Paragraph Drawing ha Editing A Selection Show All Hide All ajv Slide Number iia Footer Date Ais Content Histogram of Vector Title 3 Rename content objects In the PowerPoint Selection pane click in the content name box and replace the current name with the name you want Use these unique names to update content objects In the second slide change the Title object name to HistBins and the Content object name to Histogram In the third slide change Title to RelatedFuncs Change Content to FuncList 12 54 Update Presentation Content Programmatically In the fourth slide change Content to ParamTable Import the PPT API Package All PPT API class names include the prefix mlreportgen ppt To avoid the need to include the prefix in your code insert this statement at the beginning of a PPT API program import mlreportgen ppt Note The import line is the first line in the example program This example creates a PPT API program in sections and therefore does not show the import command To view the complete program click myUpdatedPresentation program Create the Presentation Object Create a Presentation object Specify myUpdatedPresentation pptx as the output file for the generated presentation e myNewPPTPresentation pptx as the PowerPoint template Use the presentation file that you want to update as the template file slidesFile myUpdatedPresentation p
85. T1 Create a Report Program 11 114 Set Default Text Style for a Hole Your template can specify the name of a default style to use to format Text and Paragraph objects appended to a hole If such an object does not specify a style name the DOM API sets its StyleName property to the name of the default style which must be a character or linked character and paragraph style defined in the template Defining a default hole style eliminates the need to format hole content programmatically 1 Open the template in Word 2 Inthe Word ribbon select the Developer tab 3 Click the hole whose default style name you want to specify This step assumes that you have already created the hole If have not create a hole see Inline and Block Holes on page 11 112 In the Insert tab select the Quick Parts button 5 In the Quick Parts Gallery select the part template that contains the hole for example rgChapter 6 Right click in the text area of the hole whose default text style you want to specify For example in rgChapter right click in the rgChapterTitle hole rgChapterTitle prefix rgChapterTitleNumber number rgChapterTitle hte i rgChapterContent Chapter content rgChapterContent 7 Select Properties 8 Inthe Content Control Properties dialog box select the Use a style to format text typed into the empty control check box 9 From the Style list select a style to use an existing style or select New
86. Text histogram code Style FontFamily Courier New append introText code append introText function to create many types of plots contents find introSlide Content replace contents 1 introText close slides if ispc winopen slidesFile end Related Examples Create a Presentation Programmatically on page 12 61 g 1 0 1 h 12 59 12 Programmatic PowerPoint Presentation Creation 12 60 Set Up a PowerPoint Template on page 12 26 Access PowerPoint Template Elements on page 12 37 Add Slides on page 12 73 Create and Format Text on page 12 83 Create and Format Paragraphs on page 12 86 Create and Format Tables on page 12 89 Create and Format Pictures on page 12 94 Create and Format Links on page 12 96 Create a Presentation Programmatically Create a Presentation Programmatically In this section Set Up a Template on page 12 63 Import the PPT API Package on page 12 65 Create the Presentation Object on page 12 65 Add a Presentation Title Slide on page 12 66 Add a Slide with a Picture on page 12 67 Add a Slide with Text on page 12 67 Add a Slide with a Table on page 12 68 Generate and Open the Presentation on page 12 69 Code for myNewPPTPresentation on page 12 70 This presentation example shows some common tasks involved in creating a presentat
87. Title Page Note This section builds on the previous tasks described in the step by step example summarized in Create a Simulink Report Generator Report on page 3 2 To see the completed report setup file open Simulink Dynamic Report The report is for the vdp model Create a custom title page for your report using the Title Page component 1 2 In the Outline pane on the left select the Eval component S Report Generator EI 3 Report simulink_tutorial rpt i Eval Evaluate this string in the bas In the Library pane in the middle under the Formatting category click Title Page Add Report Content with Components 4 Formatting Chapter Subsection Image Link List Paragraph Table Text Title Page as as a as as as a CY Click the icon next to Add component to current report The Title Page component appears in the Outline pane eA Report Generator 3 Report simulink_tutorial rpt a Eval The name of the model that wil i Title Page lt No Title gt Note To use the Title Page component you need to have a Chapter component in your report You have not yet added a Chapter component so the Properties pane displays a message indicating that chapters are required for the Title Page component to appear correctly Because later in this example you add Chapter components to this report you can ignore that message In the Pr
88. Tutorial psi 18 Title The Figure Loop 1a i rptgen_cfr_textl rptgen cfr_text Content 20 The Figure Loop produces a report which documents multiple figure windows Each time t er set rptgen_cfr_ titlepagel AbstractComp rptgen_cfr_textl da rptgen_cfr_text2 rptgen cfr_ text 29 set rptgen_cfr_titlepagel LegalNoticeComp rptgen_cfr_text2 24 rptgen_cfr_imagel rptgen cfr_image FileName 29 set rptgen_cfr_titlepagel ImageComp rptgen_cfr_imagel 26 setParent rptgen_cfr_ titlepagel RptgenML CReport1 5 To generate the figloop_ tutorial report from this MATLAB file run the following command in the MATLAB Command Window report buildfigloop_ tutorial The MATLAB Report Generator software runs and displays the report 4 23 A Generate a Report The Figure Loop Ol x File Edit View Go Debug Desktop Window Help E OE Es a a Location ile H tpe65313af_Sdb0_47c6_a198_949Fca092679 htm v a The Figure Loop A Tutorial The MathWorks 02 Jan 2008 11 23 41 Abstract The Figure Loop produces a report which documents multiple figure windows Each time the Figure Loop component runs it reports on a different figure Chapter 1 Code for Creating Figures function hList figloopfigures SFIGLOOPFIGURES creates figures for figloop tutorial rpt FIGLOOPFIGURES creates five figures which are used by the Report Generator setup file figloop tutorial rpt To run this
89. Viewing To control how you view a generated report you can set the following preferences Preference Purpose View command Specify the MATLAB command you want to use to view the report Each file format has an associated default view command preference You can modify the view command for example to support the use of a system browser 4 15 A Generate a Report 4 16 Preference Purpose Visible in Report Deselect this check box to make the current output Explorer format unavailable in the Report Explorer For example if your specified report format is Word document and you deselect this check box then the Microsoft Word document format is no longer available for reports created using the Report Explorer Animate Report Explorer when generating reports Select this check box if you want components in the Outline pane to be animated as the report generates This box is selected by default To speed up the report generation processing consider clearing this preference Reset to Defaults To reset all of the preferences in the Output Format Options section of the Report Generator Preferences pane click Reset to Defaults The Reset to Defaults button does not change the Animate Report Explorer when generating reports preference Change Report Locale Change Report Locale Versions 2 0 and later of the MATLAB Report Generator and Simulink Report Generator software use th
90. Web View pane is visible the pane does not automatically change to show information about the newly visible system To update the Web View pane click Refresh If you have Simulink Verification and Validation installed you can use the Optional Views tab to select Model Coverage or Requirements or both to export the associated kind of information See Also Functions Slwebview Related Examples Display and Navigate a Web View on page 5 6 Create and Use a Web View on page 5 13 More About Web Views on page 5 2 Web View Files on page 5 2 Optional Web Views on page 5 20 5 5 5 Export Simulink Models to Web Views Display and Navigate a Web View In this section View Contents of a System on page 5 7 Access Optional Web View Information on page 5 9 Display a Web View When You Export It Display a Web View When You Export It on page 5 6 Open a Web View File in a Web Browser on page 5 6 View Block Parameters and Signal Properties on page 5 8 When you export a Web view using the Web View dialog box or from the Report Explorer Web View pane the Web view appears in your system Web browser sldemo_auto_climatecontrol Distribution Recycle Recyciing Air Air On Recycing Airt External Temperature in Celsius View All Pa sidemo_auto_climatecontrol Distribution g 4 1 System Trigger T 4
91. XY Graph block Simulink Spectrum Analyzer and Time Scope blocks DSP System Toolbox Video Viewer Computer Vision System Toolbox Blocks in the Simulink Control Design Linear Analysis Plots library for example the Bode Plot block If the model has not been simulated scopes are empty For more information see the Model Simulation component reference page The parent component of the Scope Snapshot determines its behavior Model Loop orno Simulink looping component Includes all XY graphs and scopes in the current model System Loop Includes all XY graphs and scopes in the current system Block Loop Includes the current block when it is an XY graph or scope Signal Loop Includes all XY graphs and scopes connected to the current signal If the Scope Snapshot does not have any of the Simulink looping components as its parent it includes all XY graphs and scopes in all open models Scope Options Report on closed scopes Takes a snapshot of all scopes in context This option forces closed scopes to open when the report is generating Autoscale time axis Scales the Simulink scope time axis to include the entire log Scope Snapshot Print Options Image file format Specifies the image file format for example JPEG TIFF etc Select Automatic HG Format the default to choose the format best suited for the specified output format automatically Otherwise choose an image format that your output viewer can read
92. a temporary directory The XML comparison tool then produces a comparison report based on the SLX files For more information on creating reports see Select Simulink Models for XML Comparison on page 7 5 Using XML Comparison Reports You can display XML comparison reports in the MATLAB Comparison Tool The comparison tool processes the output of the XML comparison into an interactive report About Simulink Model XML Comparison with links that you can click to reverse annotate from the XML tag comparison to the corresponding Simulink models Reverse annotation means when you click items in the report Simulink Report Generator displays the corresponding items highlighted in the original models as shown in the following example erg Pa ste le eg ic w Dsplay Diagram Simulation Analysis Code Tools Hep ne mm g i lg Saveas v Go Nerge Node nina New Retesh Swab G Pint L Fud v Compare Selected werge Parameter Comearison sil se Parameter o SaveRghtFie Help Palspot stra amp sf_carmdl a Ex fear 2 x z Lohr fa Mode Hierarchy Nel fal Simulink
93. align center Apply a Table Style to a Table Once you have defined a table style in a template you can apply it to a Table object in your report program either as the second argument in the Table object constructor or by setting it to the StyleName property of the Table object For example suppose you have defined styles named BodyPara TableTitle and RuledTable in the template for your report This example specifies style names in a Paragraph constructor in the StyleName property of a Paragraph object and in a Table constructor import mlreportgen dom rank 5 rpt Document MyReport html MyTemplate p Paragraph Here is a magic square or rank 5 BodyPara append rpt p p Paragraph sprintf Rank d MagicSquare rank p StyleName TableTitle append rpt Table magic rank RuledTable close rpt rptview rpt OutputPath You can use programmatic formats to override the styles defined in a template based table style For example suppose you define a table style named UnruledTable in your template to create tables without any borders or column or row separators You can then override the style in your report program to draw a frame around a table import mlreportgen dom rpt Document MyReport html MyTemplate table Table magic 5 UnruledTable table Border single append rpt table close rpt rptview rpt OutputPath 11 65 T1 Create a Report
94. and return to the defaults enter slxmlcomp clearWindowPositions View Changes in Model Configuration Parameters You can use the report to explore differences in the model Configuration Parameters If you select a Configuration Parameter item the report displays the appropriate root node pane if possible of both Configuration Parameters dialog boxes The Parameters pane of the report displays the label text from the dialog controls or the parameter name if it is command line only and the parameter values Some configuration parameters have a different hierarchy in the XML file and the dialog box You can right click to merge a selected parameter value in the Parameters pane Related Examples Select Simulink Models for XML Comparison on page 7 5 Compare Simulink Model XML Files on page 7 8 Merge Simulink Models from the Comparison Report on page 7 21 Compare Revisions More About About Simulink Model XML Comparison on page 7 2 Merge Simulink Models from the Comparison Report Merge Simulink Models from the Comparison Report In this section Merge Models on page 7 21 Merge MATLAB Function Block Code on page 7 23 Merge Models You can merge Simulink models from the XML text comparison report You can merge individual parameters blocks or entire subsystems The merge feature enables you to merge two versions of a design modeled in Simulink Tip Yo
95. and values in Block Specific Parameters see the Ports amp Subsystems Library Block Parameters section Section Options Create section for each object in loop Inserts a section in the generated report for each object found in the loop Display the object type in the section title Inserts the object type automatically into the section title in the generated report Create link anchor for each object in loop Creates a hyperlink to the object in the generated report Insert Anything into Report Yes inserts a section if you select the Create section for each object in loop option Class rptgen_fp cfp blk loop See Also Block Loop Model Loop Signal Loop Simulink Linking Anchor System Loop 8 35 8 Components Alphabetical List 8 36 Fixed Point Logging Options Set fixed point options like in Fixed Point Tool Description This component sets fixed point options like those set in the Fixed Point Tool invoked by running the fxptd1g function This component must be a child of the Model Loop component Use this component to set the following options on the current model e Data type override Fixed point instrument mode Logging type This component can have child components It is a good practice to use this component with a Model Simulation component as its child This approach sets fixed point properties for the model for the purpose of the simulation and then restores them
96. available for particular nodes you see a Compare button to open a report for that pair of nodes For example if there are differences in the Model Workspace you can click Compare to open a new report to explore differences in variables Ha Model Workspace Compare You can open child reports for parameters MATLAB Function blocks truth tables and Model Workspaces To compare parameters click the Parameters pane then on the Comparison tab select Compare Selected Parameter This opens a new report for the currently selected pair of parameters Use this when the report cannot display all the details in the Parameters pane e g long strings or a script Ifthe original models contain MATLAB Function block components and if differences are found the XML comparison tool lists them in the Stateflow section of the report Click the Compare button at the end of the MATLAB Function block report items to open new comparisons in the Comparison Tool showing the text difference reports for the MATLAB Function block components You can merge differences in MATLAB Function block code from the text comparison report See Merge Simulink Models from the Comparison Report on page 7 21 and the example slxml_radar_matlab_function Ifthe original models contain truth tables and if differences are found the XML comparison tool lists them in the Stateflow section of the report Click the Compare button at the end of the MATLAB Functio
97. component attribute page Simulink Report Generator terminates the model simulation after 60 seconds Terminating the report prevents the report generation process from entering an infinite loop Simulation Options Compile model before simulation Compiles the model before simulating preserving scope content Select this option if You use Simulink Coder Summary properties You sort systems or blocks by simulation order e You use scope snapshots Simulation status messages Displays simulation status messages or inserts them into the report Display to command line Sends messages to a command line window Display to Report Generator Message List Sends messages to the Simulink Report Generator message window e Insert into report Includes messages in the report Simulation parameters Specifies simulation parameters Insert Anything into Report No Class rptgen_sl csl_mdl_sim See Also Model Loop 8 83 8 Components Alphabetical List 8 84 Object Loop Run child components for Stateflow objects and then insert table into report Description This component runs its child components for each Stateflow object and inserts a table into the generated report For conditional processing of Stateflow objects you can use the RptgenSF getReportedObject function For more information see Loop Context Functions on page 6 24 Object Types Report on Data objects Includes Sta
98. constructor takes no arguments and returns a TableRow object You can then create and append TableEntry objects to the object to complete the row construction Once you construct the row you can add the row to the table using the append function This example creates a two column table with two rows import mlreportgen dom rpt Document test table Table 2 row TableRow append row TableEntry Col1 append row TableEntry Col2 append table row 11 67 T1 Create a Report Program 11 68 row TableRow append row TableEntry dataii append row TableEntry data12 append table row append rpt table close rpt rptview rpt OutputPath Format a Table Row Use these format objects and format properties to format a table row page boundary Format Table Columns Row Height Formatting Format Object Format Property Specify the exact height of a RowHeight Height row Specify the minimum height RowHeight n a of row Word only Cause this row to repeat as RepeatAsHeaderRow n a header row when a table flows across pages Allow this row to straddle a AllowBreakAcrossPages n a To format table columns you can use mLreportgen dom TableColSpecGroup objects either alone or with mlreportgen dom TableColSpecGroup objects Use a TableColSpecGroup object to specify the format of a group of adjacent table columns Use a TableColSpec object to overr
99. content that you append to a DOM report you can use these CSS style attributes background color border e border bottom e border bottom color e border bottom style boder bottom width border color e border left e border left color e border left style e boder left width border right e border right color e border rigtht style e border right width e border style e border top e border top color e border top style 11 102 HTML Code Requirements for DOM Reports e border top width e color e display e font family e font size e font style e font weight e height e line height margin e margin bottom e margin left e margin right margin top padding padding bottom e padding left padding right e padding top e text align e text decoration e text indent e vertical align white space e width For information about these CSS formats see the W3Schools CSS documentation at www weschools com cssref Support for HTML Character Entities You can append HTML content that includes special characters such as the British pound sign the U S dollar sign or reserved XML markup characters The XML markup 11 103 11 Create a Report Program 11 104 special characters are gt lt amp and To include special characters use HTML named or numeric character references For example to include the left bracket lt in HTML content that you want to append use o
100. conversion template or add styles toa custom Word template For more information about Word styles see the Microsoft Word documentation Customize Default Microsoft Word Component Styles Note If you do not have a custom Word conversion template see Copy a Conversion Template on page 10 12 1 In the Report Explorer select Tools gt Edit Document Conversion Template 2 Inthe list of templates in the middle pane select the custom template that contains the style you want to customize 3 Inthe Properties pane click Open stylesheet The Word Manage Styles dialog box appears 4 Use the Manage Styles dialog box to modify or create styles Styles that begin with rg for example rgParagraph are the default styles used for report components A default style applies to all instances of a component with which it is associated In the Report Explorer some components allow you to replace the name of a default style with the name a style that you create This allows you to specify different styles for different instances of the same component For details see Create Styles in a Microsoft Word Template on page 10 18 Create Styles in a Microsoft Word Template Note If you do not have a custom Word conversion template see Copy a Conversion Template on page 10 12 Customize Microsoft Word Report Styles 1 In the Report Explorer select Tools gt Edit Document Conversion Template 2 I
101. data dictionaries whose parent is on the MATLAB path e Dictionaries in list Report on all data dictionaries that you specify in the text box Enter data dictionary names separated by either a comma or semicolon You can use multiple lines If you do not specify the full path to a data dictionary the loop includes that data dictionary only if the dictionary is on the MATLAB path Use a Summary Table component to show annotation objects in reports Each Summary Table component creates a single table with each reported annotation on a single row of the table Section Options Create section for each object in loop Create a separate chapter for each data dictionary Example Suppose you have an HTML report with the Simulink Data Dictionary Loop component configured like this 8 127 8 Components Alphabetical List File Edit View Tools Help Ug rax Fas tire Name Simulink Data Dictionary Loop B m Report on YB Fixed Point Block Lod _ ba Dictionaries in iat x Simulink Data Dicti Fixed Point Logging ia a an Hr Michael simulink MModels MM_dict_2copy sidd Fixed operty Hi Michael Simulink MMModels testDD sid B Fixed Point Summar Formatting B Array Based Table chapter Subsection B Image eB Title Page Section Options Formatting Tables V Create section for each object in loop a Then you configure the Simulink Data Dictionary component lik
102. dom Text mlreportgen dom Underline Related Examples i Add Content to a Report on page 11 11 More About J Report Formatting Approaches on page 11 20 11 45 T1 Create a Report Program Create and Format Paragraphs 11 46 In this section Create a Paragraph on page 11 46 Create a Heading on page 11 46 Format a Paragraph on page 11 47 Create a Paragraph You can create a paragraph by using an mlreportgen dom Paragraph constructor with a text string For example p Paragraph Text for a paragraph You can also specify these DOM objects in a Paragraph object constructor e mlreportgen dom Text e mlreportgen dom ExternalLink e mlreportgen dom InternalLink e mlreportgen dom LinkTarget e mlreportgen dom Image Create a Heading You can use an mlreportgen dom Heading object to create a paragraph that you want to appear in the table of contents of a document see Create a Table of Contents on page 11 77 Specify the heading level as the first argument in the Heading object constructor followed by the heading content Optionally as a third argument you can specify the name of a paragraph style defined in the template used to generate your report This example creates a heading with the text Chapter 1 System Overview and specifies the heading to appear at the top level in a table of contents hi Heading 1 Chapter 1 System Overview Create and Form
103. e Simulink Verification and Validation User Supplied Information Components In addition to using system based components to extract data from a system and insert that information into a report you can also add content that you or others supply For example to include text use the Paragraph and Text components To insert a graphic from a file use an Image component To insert ASCII text use an Import File component To include notes about the report source files use a Comment component For an example see Add Introductory Text to the First Chapter Dynamic Reporting Components Dynamic reporting components execute conditionally enabling you to decide when a child component executes or how many times a child component executes To control the report generation flow use logical and flow components such as Logical If Logical Then While Loop or For Loop A looping component runs its child components a specified number of times There are several looping components including logical loops Handle Graphics loops and model Report Components and chart loops For model and chart loops you can control aspects such as the order in which the report sorts blocks For examples see Logical and Looping Components on page 6 21 Add Logical Then and Logical Else Components on page 3 16 Create the Body of the Report on page 3 21 Filter with Loop Context Functions on page 6 22 Format
104. element Use an mlreportgen dom LinkTarget object with the document element to link to For example you can include an About the Author link to a section that has the heading Author s Biography import mlreportgen dom d Document mydoc append d InternalLink bio About the Author h Heading 1 LinkTarget bio append h Author s Biography append d h close d rptview mydoc html Add Text or Images to Links To add text or an image to an ExternalLink or InternalLink object use the append method with that object Append a Text Image or CustomElement object See Also mlreportgen dom ExternalLink mlreportgen dom ExternalLink append mlreportgen dom InternalLink mlreportgen dom LinkTarget 11 73 11 Create a Report Program Related Examples Create Image Maps on page 11 84 7 Add Content to a Report on page 11 11 More About Report Formatting Approaches on page 11 20 11 74 Create and Format Images Create and Format Images In this section Create an Image on page 11 75 Resize an Image on page 11 76 Image Storage on page 11 76 Links from an Image on page 11 76 Create an Image To create an image to a report create an mlreportgen dom Image object You can append it to one of these document element objects e Document Group e Paragraph e ListItem TableEntry For example you can create a MATLA
105. files and not see the dialog box again run these commands opt slxmlcomp options opt setCloseSameNameModel true This is persistent across MATLAB sessions To revert to default behavior and be prompted whether or not to close the open model every time enter opt slxmlcomp options opt setCloseSameNameModel false 7 27 7 Compare Simulink Model XML Files Work with Referenced Models and Library Links 7 28 The XML comparison report applies only to the currently selected models and does not include changes to any referenced models or linked libraries For compatibility with source control and peer review workflows the comparison report shows only changes in the files selected for comparison Tip If you want to examine your whole hierarchy instead try using a Simulink Project where you can examine modified files and dependencies across your whole project and compare to selected revisions See Project Management If you are comparing models that contain referenced models with the same name then your MATLAB path can affect the results For example this can happen if you generate an XML comparison report for the current version of your model and a previous baseline Make sure that your referenced models are not on your MATLAB path before you generate the report The reason why results can change is that Simulink records information in the top model about the interface between the top model and the child model
106. files from Simulink models you can choose to display the corresponding items in the original models when you select report items You can use this reverse annotation function to explore the changes in the original models When you select an item the report invokes reverse annotation to the original model and highlights the corresponding item in the model Control the display by using the View tab Highlight in Models button and the Always Highlight check box Tip Click a Subsystem contents node to see the report highlight all visible modified objects in the subsystem For details see Display Items in Original Models on page 7 17 Merge Differences Tip You can only merge from left to right If you want to merge into the other file use Swap Sides before you start merging Swap Sides reverts any merges already made and creates a new comparison report for the original files To merge a selection use the following buttons on the Comparison tab in the Merge section 7 11 7 Compare Simulink Model XML Files Merge Node Merge the selected node from the left side of the report to the right Merge Parameter Merge the selected parameter from the left side of the report to the right Undo All Revert all merge operations For more information see Merge Simulink Models from the Comparison Report on page 7 21 Open Child Comparison Reports for Selected Nodes If additional comparisons are
107. files to include or exclude when reporting file metrics Specify file metrics to include or exclude from report Enter a regular MATLAB expression Enter a regular MATLAB expression Include Function Metrics Choose whether to include per function metrics in report Select the check box to include per function metrics 8 87 8 Components Alphabetical List 8 88 Property Purpose User Action Function Metrics gt Files Specify files to include or Enter a regular MATLAB to include exclude when reporting expression Functions to include function metrics Specify functions to include or exclude when reporting function metrics Enter a regular MATLAB expression Function metrics to include Specify function metrics to include or exclude from report Enter a regular MATLAB expression Coding Rules Filters The properties in table below apply to the inclusion of coding rule violations in your report Property Purpose User Action Files to include Specify files to include or Enter a regular MATLAB exclude when reporting expression coding rule violations Coding rule numbers to Specify coding rules to Enter a regular MATLAB include include or exclude when expression reporting coding rule violations Classifications to include Specify classifications to Enter a regular MATLAB include or exclude when expression reporting coding rule viol
108. format object to any document object regardless of whether the format applies If the format does not apply it is ignored More About Report Formatting Approaches on page 11 20 Format Inheritance on page 11 25 11 23 T1 Create a Report Program Use Format Properties 11 24 Most DOM objects have a set of properties corresponding to the format options most commonly used for an object of that class You can use dot notation with format properties to specify formats for an object For example the following code sets the font and color of text in a paragraph using the Color FontFamily and FontSize format properties of a Paragraph object p Paragraph Danger p Color red p FontFamilyName Arial p FontSize 18pt Assigning a value to a format property causes the API to create an equivalent format object and assign it to the Style property of the document object Similarly assigning a format object to an object s Style property causes the API to assign an equivalent value to the corresponding format property if it exists In this way the API keeps format properties for an object in sync with the Style property of the object Note When you change the value of a format property the DOM API Creates a clone of the corresponding format object Changes the value of the clone s corresponding format object property Replaces the original format object with the clone in the array of
109. from block_A to block_B a line emerging from that block has a change in its source block parameter This change in the line parameters is considered nonfunctional Lines are highly functional but line changes can be very noisy because of changes in blocks they connect to Hide changes in graphical interface This information is a summary of inports and outports at the top level of the model Filter graphical interface changes to avoid duplication in the report as any changes in root ports are also reported as functional changes where you can use reverse annotation Hide changes in block parameter defaults Hiding changes in defaults can avoid duplication in the report as any changes in blocks are also reported as functional changes where you can use reverse annotation Block parameter defaults are an undocumented part of the Simulink XML file that store the default parameters for the blocks used in a model Exceptions The report does not filter out changes to Block and System names annotations and Stateflow Notes as nonfunctional even though changes to these items do not affect the outcome of simulation The report always displays these changes to facilitate review of code changes because they can contain important information about users intentions In certain rare cases the report filters out changes that can impact the behavior of the design By default moves are filtered as nonfunctional but in the following cases moves can cha
110. have two models of the same name in memory at the same time The XML comparison tool creates a read only copy of one model named modelname_TEMPORARY_COPY and compares the resulting XML files Warning When you use reverse annotation from the report one of the models displayed is a temporary copy with a new name The temporary copy is read only to avoid making changes that can be lost Alternatively you can run the comparison by renaming or copying one of the files All merge operations merge from left to right so you cannot accidentally merge to a temporary copy Merge operations on models with identical names copy changes from the left temporary copy model to the right model If you swap sides the report always places a new temporary copy on the left side of the report so any merges change the original model file and never a temporary copy If one of the models is open when you try to compare XML files a dialog box appears where you can click Yes to close the file and proceed or No to abort You must close open models before the XML comparison tool can compare XML files from two models with the same name The problem requiring you to close the loaded model is called shadowed files In some cases another model with the same name might be in memory but not visible See Shadowed Files in the Simulink documentation for more information If you want to automatically close open models of the same name when comparing XML
111. in a PowerPoint template To see the names of table styles in a template using PowerPoint 1 Select View gt Slide Master 2 Inaslide layout that has a table click Table or anywhere in that placeholder On the Insert tab click Table 3 Create an empty table in the slide layout A panel of Table Styles appears To see the name of a table style hover over the table style image Access PowerPoint Template Elements FILE SLIDE MASTER HOME INSERT TRANSITIONS ANIMATIONS REVIEW VIEW ADD INS Acrobat v Header Row First Column Seees cosco ssess ssses seees sooo 2 Total Row Last Column mkd pHa a amp v Banded Rows Banded Columns U e gt we QE Table Style Options Table Styles Medium Style 2 Accent 2 i 6 16 2015 To see table style names using the PPT API use the getTableStyleNames method with an mlreportgen ppt Presentation object The output in this example shows just the first two of many table styles in the default template import mlreportgen ppt slides Presentation myPlaceholderPresentation getTableStyleNames slides 12 43 12 Programmatic PowerPoint Presentation Creation ans Medium Style 2 Accent 1 5022544A 7EE6 4342 B048 85BDC9FD1C3A Light Style 1 9D7B26C5 4107 4FEC AEDC 1716B250A1EF To use a table style name with the PPT API you can use either the name string or the numeric identifier string Related Examples Set Up a PowerPoin
112. in all open models Plot 1 D data Plots data from a 1 D Lookup Table block Choose the plot type Line plot or Bar plot from the corresponding list The input data appears on the horizontal or x axis and the output data appears on the vertical or y axis For more information on line and bar plots see 2 D and 3 D Plots in the MATLAB Graphics documentation Create table for 1 D data Creates a table that contains numeric data values from the 1 D Lookup Table block Plot 2 D data Creates a plot of 2 D Lookup Table blocks You can specify whether the data appears as a surface plot or a line plot The line plot is best for small data sets and the surface plot for larger tables For more information on surface and line plots see 2 D and 3 D Plots in the MATLAB Graphics documentation Note This option creates a 2 D slice through n D data Create table for 2 D data Creates a table that contains numeric data values from the 2 D Lookup Table block Create table for N D data Creates a table that contains numeric data values from the n D Lookup Table block Print Options Image file format Specifies the image file format Select Automatic HG Format the default to choose automatically the format best suited for the output format that you chose in the Report component Otherwise choose an image format that your output viewer can read e Automatic SL Format Uses the Simulink file format selected in the Preferences
113. in currently opened report setup files Report components can reside within other report components creating parent child and sibling relationships The Library pane in the middle lists the objects available in the context of the Outline pane 1 17 T Getting Started Outline Pane Context Library Pane Contents No report setup file is open Report setup file is open Reports Components Stylesheet is open Stylesheet attributes The Properties pane contents depend on the Outline pane context If no report setup file is open on the right displays tasks the Report Explorer can perform If a report setup file is open the Properties pane displays the properties for the item that is currently selected in the Library pane Outline Pane Context Properties Pane Contents No report setup file is open Tasks that the Report Explorer can perform Report setup file is open Properties for the item that is currently selected After you create a report setup file the Properties pane initially displays properties for the report setup file as a whole Tip If the Report Explorer window opens with only two panes one of the panes is hidden You can move the vertical boundaries between the panes to reveal any hidden pane or to make visible panes wider or narrower 1 18 How Simulink Report Generator and Simulink Software Interact How Simulink Report Gen
114. into Report Yes Table Class rptgen_sl csl mdl_ changelog See Also Model Advisor Report 8 67 8 Components Alphabetical List 8 68 Model Configuration Set Insert active configuration set of a model into a report Description This component displays a table with the active configuration set for the model For information about configurations sets see Manage a Configuration Set Display Options Title Specifies a title for the table in the generated report Automatic Generates a title automatically from the parameter e Custom Specifies a custom title e None Uses no title Show configuration set table grids Show grid lines for the table Make configuration set tables page wide Make the table as wide as the page Insert Anything into Report Yes Table Class rptgen_sl csl _mdl_cfgset See Also Model Loop System Loop Model Loop Model Loop Loop on Simulink models and systems as specified by child components Description This component loops on Simulink models and systems as specified by child components For example you can use a Model Loop with a child System Loop to report on the subsystems of the specified system Consider making these components children of the Model Loop although the Model Loop not necessarily required to be the immediate parent of a given component For conditional processing based of blocks you can use the RptgenSL getReportedB
115. is rendered as an inner table The cell array also includes a Text object constructor that uses the AlertLevel template style import mlreportgen dom doc Document test tablei append doc magic 5 table1 Border single table1 ColSep single table1 RowSep single ca text entry Paragraph a paragraph entry Text Danger AlertLevel magic 4 table2 Table ca append doc table2 close doc rptview doc OutputPath Create a Table Using the Table entry Function You can use the entry function with a Table object to add content to a table entry or to format an entry This approach is useful when you need to format table entries individually For example import mlreportgen dom doc Document test a magic 5 v i max a v1 i1 max max a 11 59 T1 Create a Report Program 11 60 table Table a text table entry i i1 i1 Children 1 text Color red append doc table close doc rptview doc OutputPath Create a Table from Scratch You can create a table from scratch by creating TableEntry objects appending them to TableRow objects and appending the TableRow objects to a Table object This approach is useful when you need to create table entries that span multiple columns or rows that have a different number of entries This example shows how to create a table with four columns and two rows In the first table row the
116. is highlighted in a box in both left and right trees Compare Simulink Model XML Files When you select an item the original model displays and the corresponding item is highlighted See Explore Changes in the Original Models on page 7 11 Report item highlighting indicates the nature of each difference as follows Type of report item Highlighting Notes Modified Pink Modified items are matched pairs that differ between the two files When you select a modified item it is highlighted in a box in both trees Example of a modified pair of nodes ma E Branch gt engine RPM 1 AE Muxi gt vehicle kph yellow amp throttle 1 te Mux gt vehicle mph yellow amp throttle 1 SE Stateflow Changed parameters for the selected pair are displayed in a separate Parameters panel for review If strings are too long to display in the Parameters table right click and select Compare as Text to open a new comparison of the parameters Example of modified parameters SS fourth gt third GB fourth gt third lt AB Ene enennd Ei ctatn Parameter 1 executionOrder p Unmatched Green When you select an unmatched item it is highlighted in a box in one tree only Example of an unmatched node C kickdown Container None Rows with no highlighting indicate a container item that contains other modified or unmatched items
117. masters use the PowerPoint software You cannot use the PPT API to change global presentation formatting You can use the API to customize formatting on individual slides Slide layouts Adds new slides based on a slide layout Replaces or adds content in the locations specified by a slide layout To customize the layout of slides use PowerPoint Table styles Applies a formatting style to a table you create with the PPT API Placeholders Replaces placeholders with content The content you use the PPT API to replace the placeholder must match the kind of placeholder The content replaces all placeholders with the same name throughout the presentation To replace a specific placeholder on a specific slide in the template use one of these approaches Specify a unique placeholder name Search in a slide for an object name To access a specific placeholder use an index number that represents the location of the specific placeholder Access PowerPoint Template Elements Get Slide Master Names A PowerPoint template can have more than one slide master A slide master can have a child slide layout that has the same name as a child slide layout in another slide master When you use the PPT API if the template has multiple slide masters you need to know the name of the slide master so that you can specify the correct slide layout View the names of slide masters in a template using Power
118. model to export simulation data to the MATLAB workspace during simulation for later retrieval analysis and postprocessing You can use several approaches to explore the simulation data For example you can use the Simulation Data Inspector to generate a report with plots of simulation data For details see Save Runtime Data from Simulation in the Simulink documentation Report Creation Workflow Report Creation Workflow Approaches for Creating Reports You can create and generate reports Interactively using the Report Explorer Programmatically using the DOM Document Object Model API You can use the Report Explorer graphical interface to create reports without having to write code Using the programmatic approach you can integrate report generation into analysis and testing applications For more information see Programmatic Report Creation Interactive Report Creation 1 Open the Report Explorer In the menu bar on the Simulink model window click Tools gt Report Generator 2 Create a new report setup file For information about report setup files see Report Setup 3 Add existing Simulink or Stateflow components to the report setup file or create your own custom components For information on using components see Working with Components Working with Components 4 Choose a Microsoft Word HTML or PDF template or a Report Explorer stylesheet to apply styles the report setu
119. om stremp bdroot ges expM odel g8then 38 Model Loop Chapter current model i89 Paragraph lt No Text gt 4 else 38 Chapter Load Model Failed 88 Paragraph Error Model lt expMod 3 Inthe Properties pane on the right in the Paragraph Text text box enter the following text 3 24 Add Report Content with Components 4 This report demonstrates Simulink Report Generator s ability to experiment with Simulink systems and auto document the results In this report you load the model lt expModel gt and simulate it lt length gt times This report modifies the lt expBlock gt block s lt expParam gt value setting it to the values lt expValue gt Each iteration of the test includes a set of scope snapsnots in the report When this report is generated the variable names preceded by percent signs and enclosed in brackets lt gt are replaced with the values of those variables in the MATLAB workspace Save the report setup file Insert a Snapshot of the Model Note This section builds on the previous tasks described in the step by step example summarized in Create a Simulink Report Generator Report on page 3 2 To see the completed report setup file open Simulink Dynamic Report The report is for the vdp model Inside each Model Loop Chapter component include a snapshot of the current model using the System Snapshot component In th
120. on the right a Inthe Workspace variable name text box enter expOkValues The Simulink Report Generator software uses the contents of expOkValues to construct the table b Inthe Table title text box enter Valid Iteration Values 14 Save the report setup file The Outline pane on the left looks as follows 3 49 3 Creating Simulink Reports 4 KA Report Generator 4 A Report simulink_tutorial rpt a Eval The name of the model that wil a Title Page Dynamic Simulink Report 4 ee if strcmp bdroot gcs expModel 4 ge then 4 4 ModelLoop Chapter current model 4 Paragraph This report demonstra a System Snapshot 4 pe for explteration 1 1 length expValue a Eval Evaluate this string in the bas 4 ge Section 1 Processing the vdp model variable Iteration_Value B Eval set_param expBlock expParam Iter 4 48 if okSetValue 4 then a Simulate model use model start end time a Scope Snapshot All XY graph amp open scope blocks in reported systems 4 ge if ax dynamicX 2 gt testMin amp max dynamicX 2 4 Paragraph The conditioned signa a Eval expOkValues expOkValues s 4 else 4 Paragraph Could not set lt expBl 4 Section 1 Post Test Analysis 4 ee Paragraph lt Text from children gt 4 lt 8 if isempty expOkValues 4 S then Text lt size expOkValues 1 Eval expOkValues Mu Value Signal 4 Array Based Table expOkValues
121. open left right 2213 2014 12 10 12 34 26 2213 2014 12 10 12 34 26 i MATLAB Code File utilities clean_up_project m open left right 442 2014 12 10 12 34 26 442 2014 12 10 12 34 26 identica MATLAB Code File tests f14_airframe_test m open not in this list 1775 2014 12 10 12 34 26 added folder tests not in removed Compare Model Templates You can compare model templates SLTX files If you select two model template files to compare you see a comparison report showing differences in template properties You can open a new comparison report to compare XML text files from the Simulink models Click Template Properties to view differences in the Parameters such as the description or date modified Next to Model click Compare to open a Simulink model XML comparison report where you can investigate differences 7 35 7 Compare Simulink Model XML Files Parameter 2014 12 10T12 27 38Z 2014 12 10T12 24 04Z created This template creates a model his template creates a model containing a continuous time ontaining a continuous time plant model and a controller plant model and a controller he plant model is a simple damped second order system description A discrete PID controller is used o make the output of the plant rack an input reference signal he model is configured to log data that can be displayed using he Simulation Data Inspector title
122. path of a Word or HTML template to be used as a basis for creating the report You need to specify a template only if you are using template based formatting using style sheets or form based report generation If you specify a template it must be a Word template dotx for Word reports or an HTML template htmtx for HTML reports For example this Document constructor creates a Word report using the Word template myWordTemplate dotx d Document myreport docx myWordTemplate See Also Functions rptview Classes mlreportgen dom Document Related Examples Create a Report Program on page 11 3 Use Style Sheets on page 11 21 11 Create a Report Program Construct a DOM Object on page 11 6 More About Form Based Reporting on page 11 28 Document Object Model on page 11 4 11 10 Add Content to a Report Add Content to a Report The DOM append function allows you to add content to documents paragraphs tables and other DOM objects that serve as containers for report content The append function takes two arguments The first argument is the object to which the content is to be appended The second is the content to be appended In this example the text Hello World is appended to the document d Document MyReport append d Hello World The append function throws an error if the second argument the content to be appended is incompatible with the first arg
123. reference page 1 Start the Report Explorer by entering report in the MATLAB Command Window 2 Inthe Options pane in the middle double click figloop_tutorial rpt to open its report setup file 3 Inthe Outline pane on the left click Report figloop_tutorial rpt to select it 4 Inthe Report Explorer menu bar click File gt Generate MATLAB File The MATLAB Report Generator software generates MATLAB code for the figloop_tutorial rpt report setup file It saves this code in the buildfigloop tutorial m file in the folder you specify Part of this file appears in the following figure Generate MATLAB Code from Report Setup File a Editor H buildfigloop_tutorial m File Edit Text Go Cell Tools Debug Desktop Window Help ax DGE 4G S he h AH k I lscfos BOaaslo ata afc leh x eee aL unction RptgenML_CReporti huildfigloop tutorial 2 sBUILDFIGLOOP_TUTORIAL 3 4 Auto generated by MATLAB on 02 Jan 2008 11 15 08 5 6 Create RptgenML CReport J RptgenML CReporti RptgenML CReport Description 8 amp report which demonstrates advanced component types sprintf n sprintf n a Stylesheet html SingleClearTitleTocLot 10 Format html jurs eT DirectoryType pwd 12 setedit RptgenML CReportl 13 14 Create rptgen cfr titlepage TS rptgen cfr_titlepagel rptgen cfr_titlepage Copyright_Date 1998 16 Ruthor The MathWorks TF Subtitle A
124. report for each object found in the loop Display the object type in the section title Inserts the object type automatically into the section title in the generated report Create link anchor for each object in loop Creates a hyperlink to the object in the generated report Insert Anything into Report Yes section if you select the Create section for each object in loop option Class rptgen_sf csf_ state loop See Also Chart Loop Machine Loop Model Loop State Loop System Loop Simulink Function System Loop State Transition Matrix State Transition Matrix Insets state transition matrix contents into report Description This component inserts the contents of state transition matrices into a report A state transition matrix is an alternative view of a state transition table In the state transition matrix you can easily see how the state transition table reacts to each condition and event Options gt Title e No title default Report uses no title for the state transition matrix Use Stateflow name For the title in the report uses the names of the State Transition Table blocks from which the state transition matrices are generated Custom In the text field specify a custom name for the state transition matrix Display condition actions on matrix Include the state transition matrix condition actions A condition action is an action that executes as soon as a condition evaluates to true
125. s InvertHardcopy setting Uses the InvertHardcopy property set in the Handle Graphics image e Make figure background transparent Makes the image background transparent Display Options Scaling Controls size of the image as displayed in a browser Making an image larger using this option does not affect the storage size of the image but the quality of the displayed image may decrease as you increase or decrease the size of the displayed image Generally to achieve the best and most predictable display results use the default setting of Use image size Use image size Causes the image to appear the same size in the report as on screen default e Fixed size Specifies the number and type of units Zoom Specifies the percentage maximum size and units of measure Size Specifies the size of the snapshot in the format w h width height This field is active only if you choose Fixed size in the Scaling list To Workspace Plot Max size Specifies the maximum size of the snapshot in the format w h width height This field is active only if you choose Zoom from the Scaling list Units Specifies units for the size of the snapshot This field is active only if you choose Zoom or Fixed size in the Image size list box Alignment Only reports in PDF or RTF format support this property e Auto e Right e Left e Center Title Specifies text to appear above the snapshot Caption Specifies text to app
126. select the Create section for each object in loop option Class rptgen_sl csl_mdl_ loop See Also Block Loop System Loop 8 81 8 Components Alphabetical List 8 82 Model Simulation Run current model with specified simulation parameters Description This component runs the current model using specified simulation parameters Ensure that this component has the Model Loop component as its parent For more information on simulation parameters see Configure Simulation Conditions in the Simulink documentation I O Parameters Use model s workspace I O variable names Use the names of the parameters specified in the Simulation Parameters dialog box The following options are available if you do not select the Use model s workspace I O variable names option Time Specifies a new variable name for the Time parameter States Specifies a new variable name for the States parameter Output Specifies a new variable name for the Output parameter Timespan Use model s timespan values Use the model s Start time and Stop time values as specified in the Solver tab in the Simulation Parameters dialog box The following options are available if you do not select the Use model s timespan values option Start Specifies a simulation starting time Stop Specifies a simulation ending time Model Simulation Note If you set the stop time of your model to inf infinity in Simulink or on this
127. system level in the model at which and below which you want to use to generate the report Do not remove or modify functions that begin with StdRpt such as StdRpt getChecksum 3 Optionally modify a style sheet see Layout Stylesheets 4 Save the customized report with a name other than SDD_custom rpt Building a Dialog Box for a Custom Report Setup File To provide options for your custom report you can create a dialog box like the System Design Description dialog box The dialog box that you create for your custom report can allow others to adapt the report to meet their needs without their having to use the Report Explorer 2 11 Creating Simulink Reports Create a Simulink Report Generator Report on page 3 2 Specify Report Options in the Setup File on page 3 3 Add Report Content with Components on page 3 5 Error Handling for MATLAB Code on page 3 51 Generate the Report on page 3 52 3 Creating Simulink Reports Create a Simulink Report Generator Report This example shows how to use the Report Explorer to design a report setup file and generate a report that does the following Opens a Simulink model for the van der Pol equation called the vdp model Sets the Gain parameter for the Mu block to five different values Simulates the model each time the Gain parameter is set Collects the results Results that fall within a specified range appear in a table in the gener
128. terms based on the smallest width you specify For example for a three column table if the first column width is 1 and the column width of the other two columns is 3 then the second and third columns is three times wider than the first column Grid lines Show grid lines for the table Spans page width Make the table as wide as the page Argument Summary Table Include argument summary table Generate a table with summary information about the MATLAB Function block function arguments Table title Insert a title for the argument summary table Automatic Use the default title for the table Custom Use the title that you specify for the table Argument Summary Table Options Specify the property columns to include in the table To adda property column 1 In the table on the right select a property near where you want to insert the new property column 2 From the list of properties to the left of the table select a property that you want to add to the table 3 Click the left arrow button 4 If necessary use the up or down arrow button to position the new column To delete a property column select the property in the table and click the right arrow button You can change the header text for property and value columns of the table In the Header column double click to change the header text The Width column indicates the relative width in relative terms based on the smallest width you specify For example for a
129. the Properties of an Object 0 000 000 ee Set the Properties of an Object 0 000000 Update Presentation Content Programmatically Generate the Existing Presentation 04 Updates to the Presentation 0 000 eee eee Set Up the Existing Presentation Import the PPT API Package 005 Create the Presentation Object 005 Replace a Picture Replace Text with Links Replace a Table Insert a New Slide Generate and Open the Presentation Code for myUpdatedPresentation Create a Presentation Programmatically Set Up a Template Import the PPT API Package 005 Create the Presentation Object 04 Add a Presentation Title Slide Add a Slide with a Picture 0 0 0 0 0c eae Add a Slide with Text Add a Slide with a Table Generate and Open the Presentation Code for myNewPPTPresentation Add Slides Specify the Order of a Slide 00000 Specify the Slide Master Add and Replace Presentation Content Set Up the Template Replace Content Add and Replace Text Add or Replace a Table Add or Replace a Picture 12 45 12 47 12 47 12 47 12 48 12 50 12 50 12 52 12 54 12 55 12 55 12 55 12 56
130. the class of the variables for which you want to filter out specific properties You can specify one class at a time or enter an asterisk to specify all classes After you enter the class name move the cursor outside of the edit box Available Properties If the class that you entered in Class name for all classes is on the MATLAB path then this list displays the properties of that class Filtered Properties Displays the properties to filter out Use the right arrow button to add to the Filtered Properties list the properties that you selected in the Available Properties list If the class that you enter is not on the MATLAB path then a Comma separated list of properties to be filtered edit box appears Enter the names of properties to use for filtering Convert to Custom Generate custom MATLAB code that implements your Filter Properties standard filter settings Note Selecting the Convert to Custom button overwrites any existing MATLAB custom filtering code for this component To create and apply custom filtering MATLAB code select the Use custom property filter check box Selecting this check box opens an edit box where you define a MATLAB function for filtering properties The edit box includes a sample function commented out that you can use as a starting point for your filtering function Use the isFiltered variable for the output of your function For example To filter out the Owner and testProp properties in
131. the corresponding field Specify the full path of each block Loop Options Choose block sorting options and reporting options in this pane Sort blocks Use this option to select how to sort blocks applied to each level in a model e Alphabetically by block name Sorts blocks alphabetically by name Alphabetically by system name Sorts systems alphabetically Lists blocks in each system but in no particular order 8 99 8 Components Alphabetical List Alphabetically by full Simulink path Sorts blocks alphabetically by Simulink path By block type Sorts blocks alphabetically by block type By block depth Sorts blocks by their depth in the model By layout left to right Sorts blocks by their location in the model layout by rows The block appearing the furthest toward the left top corner of the model is the anchor for the row The row contains all other blocks that overlap the horizontal area defined by the top and bottom edges of the anchor block The other rows use the same algorithm using as the anchor the next unreported block nearest the left top of the model By layout top to bottom Sorts blocks by their location in the model layout by columns The block appearing the furthest toward the left top corner of the model is the anchor for the column The column contains all other blocks that overlap the vertical area defined by the left and right edges of the anchor block The other columns use the s
132. the edit box enter isFiltered strcmpi propertyName Owner strcmpi propertyName testProp Simulink Workspace Variable To filter out all properties except for the CoderInfo property in the edit box enter isFiltered strcmpi propertyName CoderInfo If you clear the Use custom property filter check box Simulink Report Generator saves your custom MATLAB filtering code but does not use that code to filter properties Insert Anything into Report Yes List Class rptgen_sl csl ws _ variable See Also Simulink Workspace Variable Loop Bus Simulink Functions and Variables 8 161 8 Components Alphabetical List Simulink Workspace Variable Loop Generates a model variable loop Description This component generates a model variable loop used by the Simulink Workspace Variable component to report on those workspace variables that the Simulink model uses You can limit the variables included in the loop to those that match property name and value pairs that you specify If you want to report on model variables your report setup file must include this component as a child of aModel Loop component and must include a Simulink Workspace Variable component as its child Also in the Report Options dialog box select Compile model to report on compiled information For example m FA Name Report Options 4 Gener Repet a Fixed Point Des
133. the paragraph where you want to create an inline hole Tip If the hole is the only hole in a paragraph or is at the end of a paragraph a Add several blank spaces at the end of the paragraph b Insert the hole before the spaces c Delete the extra spaces Click the Rich Text Control button Word inserts a rich text control at the insertion point Click the Properties button In the dialog box in the Title field enter an ID for the hole and in Tag field enter Hole Click OK The hole ID appears on the rich text control Create a Block Level Hole Creating a block level hole in a Word document is essentially the same as creating an inline hole The main difference is that rich text content control must contain an empty paragraph instead of residing in a paragraph hon a Open the template in the Word editor On the Word tool ribbon select the Developer ribbon Click Design Mode to see the hole marks with the title tag after creating the hole Create an empty paragraph at the point where you want to create a block level hole If you are at the end of a document create a second empty paragraph Select the empty paragraph Select the Rich Text Control button Word inserts a rich text control at the insertion point Click the Properties button In the dialog box in the Title field enter an ID for the hole and in Tag field enter Hole Click OK The hole ID appears on the rich text control 11 113
134. the report whenever you want to capture the latest version of a model without changing the report setup file Property table components display property name property value pairs for objects in tables Summary table components insert tables that include specified properties for objects into generated reports The tables contain one object per row with each object property appearing in a column as shown in the following summary table Report Components The Figure Loop le ES File Edit View Go Debug Desktop Window Help E Table 1 1 Figure Properties Name ag isible HandleVisibility Membrane jmembranelon on membrane off To use descriptive information from DocBlock blocks use the Documentation component A few examples of system based components include MATLAB Property Table e Simulink Workspace Variable e System Hierarchy e Simulink Summary Table e Simulink Dialog Snapshot e Block Execution Order List e Model Loop 1 Getting Started 1 14 e Model Configuration Set e Scope Snapshot For examples of using system based components see e Property Table Components on page 6 6 Summary Table Components on page 6 17 Create the Body of the Report on page 3 21 The Simulink Report Generator also includes system based components that contain model elements from the following Simulink products Stateflow Fixed Point Designer Simulink Coder
135. there is only one property name property value pair per cell If there is more than one name property pair in a cell only the first pair appears in the report All subsequent pairs are ignored For the property name and property value to appear together in one cell clear the Split property value cells check box That setting specifies nonsplit mode Nonsplit mode supports more than one property name property value pair and text per cell Before switching from nonsplit mode to split mode make sure that there is only one property name property value pair per table cell If there is more than one property name property value pair or text per cell only the first property name property value pair appears in the report The report omits subsequent pairs and text Display outer border Displays the outer border of the table in the generated report Table Cells Specifies table properties to modify The selection in this pane affects available fields in the Cell Properties pane Cell Properties The options in this pane depend on the object selected in the Table Cells pane If you select lt Name gt Information only Contents and Show appear If you select any other object in the Table Cells pane Lower border and Right border display Contents Enables you to change the contents of the table cell selected in the Table Cells pane Show as Specifies the format for the contents of the table cell e Value e Property Value PROPERTY Value
136. this example you perform the following tasks Process with a Model Loop Component on page 3 22 Add a Paragraph for Each Model on page 3 24 Insert a Snapshot of the Model on page 3 25 Add a Loop for Processing the Model on page 3 26 Block Parameter Value from a MATLAB Expression on page 3 28 e Create a Section for Each Iteration on page 3 29 Insert the Block Value on page 3 31 Set a Parameter Value on page 3 32 e Check Value Using a Logical If Component on page 3 34 3 21 3 Creating Simulink Reports Simulate the Model Using a Model Simulation Component on page 3 37 e Create a Post Test Analysis Section on page 3 43 Each action requires a separate component under the then component For information about the then component in this report see Add Logical Then and Logical Else Components on page 3 16 Process with a Model Loop Component Note This section builds on the previous tasks described in the step by step example summarized in Create a Simulink Report Generator Report on page 3 2 To see the completed report setup file open Simulink Dynamic Report The report changes the Gain parameter for the Mu block in the vdp model several times This task requires a Model Loop component In the Outline pane on the left select the then component 2 Ihn the Library pane in the middle scroll down to the Simulink category and the
137. three column table if the first column width is 1 and the column width of the other two columns is 3 then the second and third columns is three times wider than the first column 8 59 8 Components Alphabetical List 8 60 Grid lines Show grid lines for the table Spans page width Make the table as wide as the page Column alignment Align the text in each column e Left Center e Right e Double justified Detailed Argument Report Include detailed argument report Generate a table with detailed information about the MATLAB Function block function arguments Argument Property Table Format Options Specify the argument property columns to include in the table Table title Insert a title for the argument properties table e Automatic Use the default title for the table Custom Use the title that you specify for the table You can change the header text for property and value columns of the table In the Header column double click to change the header text Grid lines Show grid lines for the table Spans page width Make the variable table as wide as the page on which the table appears Include function script Include the script for the function Include function symbol data Generate a table that includes information about the user defined and optionally built in MATLAB variables and functions invoked by the MATLAB function that computes the block outputs Highlight script syntax Use col
138. to their original values after the simulation is complete Data Type Override Use local settings Overrides data types according to the value of this parameter set for each subsystem Otherwise settings for parent systems override those of child systems Scaled double Overrides the output data type of all blocks in the current system or subsystem with doubles However this option maintains the scaling and bias specified in the mask of each block Doubles Overrides the output data type of all blocks in the current system or subsystem with doubles The overridden values have no scaling or bias Singles Overrides the output data type of all blocks in the current system or subsystem with singles The overridden values have no scaling or bias Off Does not perform any data type override on any block in the current system or subsystem Fixed Point Logging Options Fixed Point Instrumentation Mode Specify logging options in this section For logged blocks minimum and maximum simulation values are written to the workspace Use local settings Logs data according to the value of this parameter set for each subsystem Otherwise settings for parent systems always override those of child systems e Min max and overflow Logs minimum value maximum value and overflow data for all blocks in the current system or subsystem Overflow only Logs only overflow data for all blocks in the current system or subsystem
139. to export You can specify a different file or folder name Web Views The default location for storing Web view files is the MATLAB current folder You can choose a different folder If you send Web view files to someone else consider whether you need to explain how to access the Web view file Related Examples Export Models to Web View Files on page 5 4 Display and Navigate a Web View on page 5 6 Create and Use a Web View on page 5 13 More About Optional Web Views on page 5 20 5 3 5 Export Simulink Models to Web Views Export Models to Web View Files 5 4 In this section Open the Web View Dialog Box on page 5 4 Export a Model to a Web View on page 5 4 Open the Web View Dialog Box To export a Web view use the Web View dialog box The way you access the dialog box differs depending on whether you are using the Simulink Editor or the Report Explorer You can also open the dialog box from the command line Interface What You Do Simulink Editor Select File gt Export Model to gt Web Report Explorer Select Tools gt Export Simulink to Web Command line Use the slwebview function without arguments Export a Model to a Web View 1 2 3 Open the model to export In the Simulink Editor select File gt Export Model to gt Web In Systems to Export select the levels of the model to export in relationship to the system cu
140. to run the MATLAB software with nodesktop mode enabled Increase the MATLAB JVM Memory Allocation Limit To increase the amount of JVM memory available by increasing the MATLAB JVM memory allocation limit from the MATLAB Toolstrip in the Home tab in the Environment section select Preferences Use the General gt Java Heap Memory dialog box HTML Report Display on UNIX Systems HTML reports may not automatically display on some UNIX platforms To work around this issue configure the MATLAB Report Generator software to launch an external browser 1 Inthe Report Explorer click File gt Preferences 2 Enter the following text in the View command field web rptgen file2urn sfile name browser Where file name is the name of your report setup file 4 25 Export Simulink Models to Web Views Web Views on page 5 2 Export Models to Web View Files on page 5 4 Display and Navigate a Web View on page 5 6 Search a Web View on page 5 10 Create and Use a Web View on page 5 13 Optional Web Views on page 5 20 Capture and View Optional Web View Information on page 5 21 5 Export Simulink Models to Web Views Web Views What Is a Web View A Web view is an interactive rendition of a model that you can view in a Web browser You can use Web views to navigate hierarchically to specific subsystems and see properties of blocks and signals Web views provide a simple way to
141. tutorial type setedit figloop tutorial at the command prompt AO a Figure 1 Membrane Data Figure 2 Invisible Membrane Data Figure 3 An Application Figure 4 An Invisible Application Figure 5 Peaks Data MM Ne ah ale ale w a Figures 2 and 4 are invisible Figures 3 and 4 have HandleVisibility off Figure 5 is the current figure AO A wo FIGLOOPFIGURES deletes any existing figures which have tag peaks app or membrane wo wo Copyright 1997 2004 The MathWorks Inc Revision 1 1 6 2 Date 2004 04 15 00 12 57 a 4 24 Troubleshooting Report Generation Issues Troubleshooting Report Generation Issues In this section Memory Usage on page 4 25 HTML Report Display on UNIX Systems on page 4 25 Memory Usage By default the MATLAB software sets a limit of 100 MB on the amount of memory the Oracle Java Virtual Machine JVM software can allocate The memory that the report generation process uses to build a document must fit within this limit If you are having trouble processing large reports it might be helpful to increase the amount of memory that MATLAB Report Generator and Simulink Report Generator software can allocate See the following sections for more information Run the MATLAB Software Without a Desktop One way to increase the amount of JVM memory available to the MATLAB Report Generator and Simulink Report Generator software is
142. 12 In this section Display the Developer Ribbon in Word on page 11 112 Inline and Block Holes on page 11 112 Create an Inline Hole on page 11 112 Create a Block Level Hole on page 11 113 Set Default Text Style for a Hole on page 11 114 Display the Developer Ribbon in Word To work with holes in a Word template use the Word Developer ribbon If the Developer tab is not showing in your Word ribbon add it to the ribbon 1 In Word select File gt Options 2 In the Word Options dialog box select Customize Ribbon 3 Inthe Customize the Ribbon list select the Developer check box and click OK Tip If you do not see Developer check box in the list set Customize the Ribbon to Main Tabs Inline and Block Holes The DOM API supports two types of holes inline and block An inline hole is for document elements that a paragraph element can contain Text Image LinkTarget ExternalLink InternalLink CharEntity and AutoNumber A block hole can contain the same kinds of document elements as an inline hole as well as Paragraph Table OrderedList UnorderedList DocumentPart and Group document elements Create an Inline Hole 1 Open the template in Word Add Holes in a Microsoft Word Template On the Word ribbon select the Developer tab Click Design Mode to see the hole marks with the title tag after creating the hole Position the Word insertion mark at the point in
143. 2 TableEntry append tr3te1 tr3teiText append tr3te2 tr3te2Text append tr3 tr3te1 append tr3 tr3te2 5 append paramTable tr1 append paramTable tr2 append paramTable tr3 contents find tableSlide Content replace contents 1 paramTable Generate and open the presentation close slides if ispc winopen slidesFile end Related Examples Update Presentation Content Programmatically on page 12 50 Set Up a PowerPoint Template on page 12 26 Access PowerPoint Template Elements on page 12 37 Add Slides on page 12 73 7 Create and Format Text on page 12 83 i Create and Format Paragraphs on page 12 86 Create and Format Tables on page 12 89 Create and Format Pictures on page 12 94 Create and Format Links on page 12 96 Add Slides Add Slides In this section Specify the Order of a Slide on page 12 73 Specify the Slide Master on page 12 75 To add a slide to a presentation use the PPT API to add slide based on a slide layout defined in the PowerPoint presentation template If the template does not include slide layout that meets your requirements you can add a slide layout For details see Add a Slide Layout on page 12 81 To add a slide use the add method with an mlreportgen ppt Presentation object For example using the default PPT API template you can add a slide using t
144. 2014 12 10T12 27 38Z 2014 12 10T12 24 04Z Discrete Feedback Control Feedback Control Related Examples Compare Simulink Model XML Files on page 7 8 Comparing Folders and Zip Files Create a Template from the Current Project Create a Template from a Model 7 36 Components Alphabetical List For a list of MATLAB Report Generator components see the MATLAB Report Generator documentation 8 Components Alphabetical List Acronym Definitions Create table of Polyspace acronyms used in report and their full forms Description This component creates a table containing the acronyms used in the report and their full forms Aronyms are used for Polyspace Code Prover checks and Polyspace result status 8 2 Annotation Loop Annotation Loop Run child components multiple times for each Simulink annotation in current context Description This component runs its child components multiple times for each Simulink annotation in the current context The parent component determines the context Model Loop Reports on all annotations inside the reported portion of the reported model e System Loop Reports on all annotations inside the current system e Block Loop or Signal Loop Does nothing Loop Options The Loop Options pane displays information about the current context You can sort Alphabetically by text orIn traversal order Child components of the Annotation Loop consid
145. 3 c Style KeepLinesTogether end 11 63 T1 Create a Report Program 11 64 append rpt ca close rpt rptview rpt OutputPath Format a Table Using Microsoft Word Style Sheets You can format tables using an existing Word styles in a template or a template style that you modify or add To define a table style in a Word template start by using these steps 1 Open the Word template used with the report 2 Open the Styles pane 3 As Click the Manage Styles button 4 Click New Style 5 Inthe Create New Style from Formatting dialog box set Style type to Table For more information about using Word styles with DOM objects see Modify Styles in a Microsoft Word Template on page 11 117 Format a Table Using an HTML Style Sheet You can format tables using an HTML style defined in the template used to generate the report To define a table style in an HTML template define the style as a table style For example table MyTable border bottom color rgb 128 128 128 border bottom width thin border collapse collapse Tip Use the CSS parent gt selector to specify the format of the children of a table to be formatted with your table style For example this CSS code specifies the format of the table entries td elements of a table whose style is MyTable table MyTable gt tr gt td Create and Format Tables font family Arial Helvetica sans serif font size 11pt text
146. 38 lt td gt lt td gt Lawyer lt td gt lt tr gt lt table gt lt body gt lt html gt This HTML content has elements that are not XML parsable including Lack of a closing tag lt p gt This is a page a simple page with a simple table Inconsistent case for an element tag lt td gt lt b gt Name lt B gt lt td gt In the current MATLAB folder save the file using the file name simple html_example html Display the file in an HTML browser Although the HTML content contains elements that are not XML parsable it displays properly in most HTML browsers such as Internet Explorer This is a page a simple page with a simple table Name Age Occupation floc Smith o Phm Sue Jones 33 Scientist Carlos Martinez 38 Lawyer In MATLAB try appending the HTML file to a DOM report import mlreportgen dom rpt Document html_report docx htmlFile HTMLFile simple_html_example html You receive this error Error using mlreportgen dom HTMLFile 11 97 11 Create a Report Program Parsing HTML text simple _html_example html caused error HTML error expected end of tag b 5 Download the HTML Tidy program For example to download Tidy for Windows go to http www paehl com open_source HTML_Tidy_for_Windows Click the EXE Version compiled 06 nov 2009 link Note To download Tidy for other platforms see http tidy sourceforge net bina
147. 4 button In the generated report the title Magic Squares appears in blue Customize Title Page Content and Layout This example assumes you have created a custom Magic Square Template see Create a Custom Template on page 10 30 You can use a different custom Word template 1 In the Report Explorer select Tools gt Edit Document Conversion Template 2 Inthe Report Explorer list of Word templates select Magic Square Template In the Report Options pane click Open template 3 With the cursor in the first and only visible paragraph in the template in the Insert tab select the Quick Parts button Customize a Microsoft Word Title Page Template In the Quick Parts gallery select rgRectoTitlePage to insert of the front title page part template in the main document conversion template Tip To display Word markup for the part template on the Word ribbon in the Developer tab click Design Mode Highlight the rgImage hole and drag it above the rgTitle hole Delete the rgAuthor hole Select the rgRectoTitlePage part template and click the Quick Parts button Click Save Selection to Quick Part Gallery In the Create New Building Block dialog box set Name to rgRectoTitlePage and the Category to mlreportgen Click OK In the template select the contents of the part template including the section break and click the Delete button Save and close the template Suppose that you use the custom template to gener
148. 5 2 Optional Web Views on page 5 20 5 9 5 Export Simulink Models to Web Views Search a Web View In this section Perform a Search on page 5 10 Sort Search Results on page 5 12 Navigate Between Search Results and Model Elements on page 5 12 Perform a Search 1 i Q In a Web View at the top of the displayed tab click the search button 2 Inthe search box enter the search term Search strings are case insensitive The search treats the string as a partial string 3 To specify search criteria click the search criteria button and select the types of model element you want to search in 4 Block Type LA Mask Type Property Name Property Value 4 Press Enter The elements of the model that the search returns appear highlighted The search results include the name and parent for each returned element 5 10 Search a Web View enablesub View All Pal enablesub gt v amp output I gt Enabled Subsystem Example 0 2 Output Rese Abs Output Reset Sin Wave Enable Signal boolean Period 5 Duty cycle 50 Output Held Search Results enablesub x Name Parent Saturation between 0 75 and 0 75 Output enablesub held Abs Output Reset enablesub Saturation Output Held enablesub Output Reset enablesub Output Held enablesub en xl Mo Las Mo Diri 5 11 5 Export Simulink Models to Web Views Sort S
149. 8 Add Report Content with Components 4 Report Generator kd Report simulink_tutorial rpt a i eB Eval ZEvaluate this string in the bas j B Title Page lt No Title gt 3 BB if true Phen a Loop Current model aer Chapter Section Title 2 Inthe Library pane in the middle under the Formatting category double click Chapter Subsection to add it as a child of the else component This component displays an error message if an error occurs when opening the vdp model al Report Generator 4 Report simulink_tutorial rpt i EB Eval The name of the model Zthat wil jue i Title Page Dynamic Simulink Report is wit stremp bdroot ges expM odel else i 489 Chapter Section Title Note When you add a component to a report it is added by default as a child component unless the selected component cannot have child components 3 Inthe Properties pane on the right choose Custom from the Title selection list and then enter the following text in the text box Load Model Failed Save the report file 3 19 Creating Simulink Reports 3 20 The Outline pane looks as follows i44 Report Generator H Report simulink_tutorial rpt GB Eval The name of the model that wil S 48 if stremp bdroot ges expModel 8 then 4 else
150. B figure save it as an image and add the image to a report import mlreportgen dom d Document imageArea html p Paragraph Plot 1 p Bold true append d p x 0 pi 100 2 pi y sin x plot x y saveas gcf myPlot_img png ploti Image myPlot_img png append d plot1 11 75 11 Create a Report Program 11 76 close d rptview d OutputPath For a list of supported image formats see mlreportgen dom Image Resize an Image To resize an image object you can Set the Image Height and Image Width properties e Use anmlreportgen dom Height or mlreportgen dom Width object in an Image Style property definition For Microsoft Word reports you can use anmlreportgen dom ScaleToFit object to scale an image so that it fits within the page margins Image Storage Keep the original file until it has been copied into the document The DOM API copies the contents of the source image file into the output document when you close the document Links from an Image You can specify an area in an image to be a link Clicking a link area in an image in an HTML browser opens the link For details see Create Image Maps on page 11 84 See Also mlreportgen dom Height mlreportgen dom Image mlreportgen dom ScaleToFit mlreportgen dom Width Related Examples Add Content to a Report on page 11 11 More About Report Formatting Approaches on page 11 20 Create a Tabl
151. Control at the Component Level The output format and stylesheet that you select for a report determines most aspects of the generated report formatting For details see Report Output Format on page 4 5 In addition to stylesheets that control the format and layout of the report for some components you can set properties to specify formatting details for that specific instance of a component For example for the Simulink Property Table you can specify whether to display table borders or specify the alignment of text in table cells 1 15 1 Getting Started Working with the Report Explorer 1 16 About the Report Explorer The Report Explorer is the MATLAB Report Generator and Simulink Report Generator graphical interface It allows you to Create and modify report setup files Apply stylesheets to format the generated report Specify the report file format Generate reports To open the Report Explorer enter report in the MATLAB Command Window Working with the Report Explorer Report Generator Help Menu Report Explorer 3 modeladvisor rpt A slbook rpt elelee A databasetlbx rpt O tw Stoolbox rtw gt ptgendemos Stoolbox ptgen ch1 tutorial rpt figloop tutorial rpt magic square rpt mfile report rpt simple report rpt wesvar report rpt Outline pane Library pane Properties pane The Report Explorer has three panes The Outline pane on the left shows the hierarchy of components
152. East Asian font FontFamily n a Font size FontSize FontSize Foreground color Color Color Background color BackgroundColor BackgroundColor Bold Bold Bold Italic Italic Italic Subscript or superscript VerticalAlign n a Strike through Strike Strike Underline type single Underline Underline double etc Underline color Underline n a Create border around Border n a paragraph Preserve white space WhiteSpace WhiteSpace Indent a paragraph OuterMargin OuterLeftMargin Indent first line of FirstLineIndent FirstLineIndent paragraph Hanging indent FirstLineIndent n a Space before and after OuterMargin n a paragraph Space to right of paragraph OuterMargin n a Space between paragraph InnerMargin n a and its bounding box Space between paragraph LineSpacing n a lines Align paragraph left center HALign HAlign right Start paragraph on next PageBreakBefore n a page Keep with next paragraph KeepWithNext n a Create and Format Paragraphs Formatting Format Object Format Property Keep paragraph on same KeepLinesTogether n a page Eliminate widows and WidowOrphanControl n a orphans Table of contents level of OutlineLevel OutlineLevel paragraph Display as specified Display n a Format a Paragraph Using Microsoft Word Style Sheets You can format using an existing style in a Word template or using a template style that you modify or add To define a paragraph style in a Word templ
153. Edits slxmlcomp compare modelname_A modelname_B See Export Results to the Workspace on page 7 24 for information about the xmlcomp Edits object Choose a Comparison Type If you specify two XML or model files to compare using either the Current Folder Browser or the visdiff function then the Comparison Tool automatically performs the default comparison type The defaults are XML text comparison for XML files and Simulink XML text comparison for model files To change comparison type either create a new comparison from the Comparison Tool or use the Compare Against option from the Current Folder browser You can change comparison type in the Select Files or Folders for Comparison dialog box For example if you want the MATLAB text differences report for XML or model files change the comparison type to Text comparison in the dialog before clicking Compare Examples of XML Comparison For examples with instructions see e slxml_radar_matlab_function e slxml_sfcar e slxml_truthtables For information on using and understanding the report and the XML comparison functionality refer to Compare Simulink Model XML Files on page 7 8 7 7 7 Compare Simulink Model XML Files Compare Simulink Model XML Files 7 8 In this section Navigate the Simulink XML Comparison Report on page 7 8 Step Through Changes on page 7 10 Explore Changes in the Original Models on page 7 11 Merge Differences
154. Gain Gain2 Gain38 Pitch Rate Lead Filter Proportional plus integral compensator Stick Prefilter Sum Sum1 Sum2 Elevator Command deg Dryden Wind Gust Models Band Limited White Noise Q gust model W gust model Wg Qg More Info None Simulink Summary Table Name Blocks More Infol None Nz pilot calculation w q Constant Derivative Derivativel Gain1 Gain2 Product Sum1 Pilot g force g Insert Anything into Report Yes Table Class rptgen_sl csl_ summ_table See Also Block Loop Model Loop Signal Loop System LoopSimulink Function System Loop 8 157 8 Components Alphabetical List 8 158 Simulink Workspace Variable Report on workspace variables used in model in loop generated by Simulink Workspace Variable Loop component Description This component provides information about those workspace variables that the Simulink model uses in a loop generated by aSimulink Workspace Variable Loop component Your report setup must include Simulink Workspace Variable component as a child of a Simulink Workspace Variable Loop component The report includes the name and value each variable Optionally you can include the following information for each variable Variable source MATLAB workspace model workspace or data dictionary Blocks that use the variable For variables that are Simulink data objects for example a Simulink Parameter object
155. Indoor Temp 9 8 Click a Model block to see its properties Double click a Model block to display the referenced model Create and Use a Web View on page 5 13 Input Arguments system_name The system to export to a Web view file string containing the path to the system handle to a subsystem or block diagram handle to a chart or subchart Exports the specified system or subsystem and its child systems to a Web view file By default child systems of the system_name system are also exported Use the SearchScope name value pair to export other systems in relation to system_name Name Value Pair Arguments Specify optional comma separated pairs of Name Value arguments Name is the argument name and Value is the corresponding value Name must appear inside single slwebview quotes You can specify several name and value pair arguments in any order as Name1 Value1 NameN ValueN Example htmlFileName slwebview gcs LookUnderMasks all FollowLinks on Export to a Web view all layers of the model hierarchy to which the current system belongs including the ability to interact with library links and masks SearchScope Systems to export relative to the system_name system CurrentAndBelow default Current CurrentAndAbove All1 CurrentAndBelow exports the Simulink system or the Stateflow chart specified by system_name and all systems or charts that it contains
156. Inthe Quick Parts Gallery select the part template for example rgChapter 7 Edit the copy of the part template For example remove a hole by right clicking and selecting Remove Content Control 8 Inthe template select the part template including all of its holes 9 Inthe Quick Parts Gallery select Save Selection to Quick Part Gallery Customize Microsoft Word Part Templates 10 In the Create New Building Block dialog box set Name to the part template name for example rgChapter and the Category to mlreportgen Click OK 11 In the template delete the customized part template 12 Save the main template Set Default Text Style for a Hole Your template can specify the name of a style to use as a default to format text generated for a hole Note If you do not have a custom Word conversion template see Copy a Conversion Template on page 10 12 1 In the Report Explorer select Tools gt Edit Document Conversion Template 2 Inthe list of templates in the middle pane select the custom template that has the hole you want to set the default text style for 3 Inthe Template Browser click Open template In the Insert tab select the Quick Parts button 5 In the Quick Parts Gallery select the part template that contains the hole for example rgChapter 6 Right click in the text area of the hole whose default text style you want to specify For example in rgChapter right click in the rgChapterTitle hole
157. L on a single page chapters and sections are not numbered HTML on a single page chapters and sections are numbered HTML on a single page suppresses title page and table of contents Multi page Simple HTML on multiple pages suppresses title page and table of contents Multi page Unnumbered Chapters amp Sections HTML on multiple pages chapters and sections are not numbered Multi page Numbered Chapters amp Sections HTML on multiple pages chapters and sections are numbered RTF DSSSL Print and Word Stylesheets RTF or Word Stylesheet Description Standard Print Displays title page table of contents list of titles Simple Print Suppresses title page table of contents list of titles Compact Simple Print Minimizes page count suppresses title table of contents list of titles Large Type Print Uses 12 point font slightly larger than Standard Print Very Large Type Print Uses 24 point font and landscape paper orientation Compact Print Minimizes white space to reduce page count Unnumbered Chapters amp Sections Uses unnumbered chapters and sections Numbered Chapters amp Sections Numbers chapters and sections 4 9 A Generate a Report 4 10 Report Generation Processing The Report Options dialog box includes several options for controlling report processing Option Purpose View report after View
158. My Title For more information about creating and adding text see Add and Replace Text on page 12 77 Create a Subscript or Superscript You can enable the Subscript or Superscript property for a Text object Enabling these properties specifies that the text gets treated as a subscript or superscript when you add it to a Paragraph object For example you can set up a paragraph to display x 12 83 12 Programmatic PowerPoint Presentation Creation 12 84 super Text 2 super Superscript true para Paragraph x append para Super Format Text To format a Text object use format objects with a Text object Style property or use Text object properties For example t Text green text t Style Bold true t FontColor green Text Object Formatting Format Object Format Property Font family FontFamily Font Font family for complex FontFamily ComplexScriptFont scripts to handle locales Font size FontSize FontSize Font color FontColor FontColor Bold Bold Bold Italic Italic Italic Strike Strike Strike Underline Underline Underline Subscript Subscript Subscript Superscript Superscript Superscript See Also Classes mlreportgen ppt ExternalLink mlreportgen ppt Paragraph mlreportgen ppt Text mlreportgen ppt TextBox Related Examples Add and Replace Text on page 12 77 Create and Format Text More About Presentati
159. OM API or a Word or HTML editor depending on the report type 2 Optionally you can change a template style definition or add a new style For details see Modify Styles in a Microsoft Word Template on page 11 117 or Modify Styles in an HTML Template on page 11 127 3 Ina DOM report create a Document object that uses the template 4 Assign the names of styles defined in the style sheet to the StyleName property of objects that you want to have the specified style For example the following script assigns a style named Warning to a paragraph object It assumes that you have defined the Warning style previously in a Word template named MyTemplate dotx d Document MyDoc docx MyTemplate p Paragraph Danger p StyleName Warning append d p close d Assigning the Warning style to the DOM paragraph object causes Word to use the Warning style to render the generated paragraph when you open the generated report Tip Some document object constructors allow you to specify the value of the StyleName property as an argument For example this paragraph has the text Danger and uses a style defined for the template style named Warning p Paragraph Danger Warning 11 21 11 Create a Report Program Related Examples Create a Microsoft Word Template on page 11 111 Modify Styles in a Microsoft Word Template on page 11 117 Create an HTML Template on page 11 122
160. PPT API contains functions also known as methods to create and assemble PPT objects such as paragraphs and tables and add the objects to slides The PPT API includes format objects such as bold and font color objects that you can use to define formatting for presentation elements To generate a PowerPoint presentation file use the PPT API You can open view and edit the generated presentation as you do with any other PowerPoint presentation Use a PPT Constructor The PPT API includes a set of MATLAB functions called constructors that you use to create PPT objects of various types The name of an object constructor is the name of the MATLAB class from which the PPT API creates an object For example the name of the constructor for a PPT paragraph object is mLreportgen ppt Paragraph Some constructors do not require any arguments Other constructors can take arguments that typically specify its initial content and properties For example this line creates a paragraph object p whose initial content is Slide 1 Create PPT Objects p mlreportgen ppt Paragraph Slide 1 A constructor returns a handle to the object it creates Assigning the handle to a variable allows you to append content to the object or set its properties For example this code appends content to the paragraph object p created in the previous example append p In the Beginning You can assign an object handle to multiple variables and hence a
161. PT API to format a specific presentation object You can Define format objects that you can use with a presentation object Style property Specify a value for a format property of a presentation object You can combine formatting with the Style property and formatting with format properties For example p Paragraph This is a paragraph p Style Bold true Underline wavy p FontColor red If you define the same formatting characteristic using each approach the PPT API uses the specification that appears later in the code For example this code specifies blue as the default color for text in a paragraph p Paragraph This is a paragraph p Style FontColor red p FontColor blue Several PPT API objects are hierarchical For example e You can append a Text object to a Paragraph object e You append TableEntry objects to a TableRow object and you can append TableRow objects to a Table object The formatting for a parent object applies to all its child objects unless the child object specifies formatting to override the formatting of the parent object For example import mlreportgen ppt slidesFile myParagraphPresentation pptx slides Presentation slidesFile Presentation Format Inheritance slide1 add slides Title and Content p Paragraph Parent default red text p FontColor red t Text Child text object blue text t FontColor blue
162. Parameter Value 0 0c ce eee 3 32 Check Value Using a Logical If Component 3 34 Simulate the Model Using a Model Simulation Component 3 37 Create a Post Test Analysis Section 0 3 43 Error Handling for MATLAB Code 3 51 Generate the Report 0 0 0 0 cece ees 3 52 Generate a Report 4 Generate a Report 00 00 00 cc eens 4 2 Run a Report 0 eee eens 4 2 Report Output Options 0 0 0 0 eee 4 2 Select Report Generation Options 4 4 Report Options Dialog Box 0 00 4 4 Report Output Format 0 0 0 0 ce ees 4 5 PDF Stylesheets 2 0 0 000 eens 4 8 Web Stylesheets 2 0 eee 4 8 RTF DSSSL Print and Word Stylesheets 4 9 Report Generation Processing 000 eee eeee 4 10 Location of Report Output File 04 4 11 Report Description 0 0 0 ee eee 4 12 Report Generation Preferences 005 4 13 Report Generator Preferences Pane 005 4 13 File Format and Extension 0 0000 eee e ees 4 14 Image Formats 0 00 ee ene 4 15 Report Viewing 0 0 ccc eee ees 4 15 Reset to Defaults 0 0 eens 4 16 Change Report Locale 2 00 0 00 4 17 vii viii Contents Convert XML Documents to Different File Formats 4 18 Why Convert XML Documents 0 00 00 cee 4 18
163. Point Select View gt Slide Master 2 Ihn the left slide layout pane hover over the top slide A tooltip appears with the name of the slide master X ce Office Theme Slide Master used by no slides CIC e Click 3 View any other slide masters by scrolling in the pane Slide masters are numbered and are at the top level in the tree view When you use the slide master name with the PPT API omit the words Slide Master To see slide master names using the PPT API use the getMasterNames method with an mLreportgen ppt Presentation object This example uses the default PPT API PowerPoint template which has one slide master import mlreportgen ppt slides Presentation myPresentation getMasterNames slides ans Office Theme 12 39 12 Programmatic PowerPoint Presentation Creation 12 40 Get Slide Layout Names You need to know the name of slide layouts in a PowerPoint template to use the PPT API to add a slide To see the names of slide layouts in a template using PowerPoint 1 Select View gt Slide Master 2 Inthe left slide layout pane hover over a slide layout under a slide master A tooltip appears with the name of the slide layout Click to edit Master titie style RN Title Slide Layout used by no slides When you use the slide master name with the PPT API omit the word Layout To see slide master names using the PPT API use the Presentation getLayoutNames met
164. Pr generation a Table Footer lt mW t Options The following options specify additional information that the report can include about each variable Show workspace Report the source of each variable MATLAB workspace model workspace or data dictionary Show blocks that use variable Report the blocks that use each variable For variables whose values are Simulink data objects you can filter the properties to include in the report using one of the following approaches Use the Filter Properties area of the dialog box to specify a standard filter The standard filter options apply to all variables whose values are instances of the class or classes that you specify For example you can use a standard filter to filter out the Description property for all variables used by the model whose values use a Simulink Parameter object Select the Use custom property filter option and write MATLAB code for filtering 8 159 8 Components Alphabetical List 8 160 Writing custom filtering code allows you to do kinds of filtering that the standard filter does not perform Some common examples of custom filters that you might want to create are filters that filter out A property for some but not all instances of a class e Properties that match a regular expression The Filter Properties area of the dialog box where you specify a standard filter has these fields Class name for all classes Specify
165. Processing the vdp model i YB Variable Iteration Value a Eval set_param expBlock expParam ter 8if okSetV alue g8then i H Simulate model use model start end time ae Scope Snapshot All lt Y graph amp open scope blocks in reported systems of current model p8 if max dynamicx 2 gt testMin amp amp maxfdynamicx 2 e Paragraph The conditioned signa i EB Eval expOkValues expOkValues else Foon ope Paragraph Could not set lt expBl else 2 488 Chapter Load Model Failed i488 Paragraph Error Model lt expMod 2 Inthe Library pane in the middle under the Formatting category double click Chapter Subsection The new section appears at the beginning of the chapter 3 44 Add Report Content with Components Report Generator B Report simulink_tutorial rpt Eval The name of the model that wil jee i W Title Page Dynamic Simulink Report i wit stremp bdroot ges expModel aa P Model Loop Chapter current model ee g Section 1 Section Title pee Z Paragraph This report demonstra r i System Snapshot o a explteration 1 1 length expValue re j H Eval Evaluate this string in the bas 4 Section 1 Processing the vdp model W Variable lteration_Value HB Eval set_param expBlock expParam lter i okSetValue
166. Programmatic PowerPoint Presentation Creation 12 18 delete 1 Create and Display a Progress Message This example shows how to create and dispatch a progress message You can use a similar approach for other kinds of messages such as warnings 1 Create a message dispatcher dispatcher MessageDispatcher getTheDispatcher 2 Adda listener using the MATLAB addlistener function 1 addlistener dispatcher Message src evtdata disp evtdata Message formatAsText 3 Dispatch the message using the Message dispatch method Specify the dispatcher object and the message to dispatch Here the message is a debug message called firstSlide and the Presentation object slides is the source of the message dispatch dispatcher ProgressMessage firstSlide slides 4 Place code that deletes the listener after the code that generates the presentation delete 1 This presentation uses this progress message import mlreportgen ppt pre Presentation myPresentation pptx dispatcher MessageDispatcher getTheDispatcher l addlistener dispatcher Message src evtdata disp evtdata Message formatAsText dispatch dispatcher ProgressMessage starting presentation pre open pre titleText Text This is a Title titleText Style Bold replace pre Title titleText close pre Display Presentation Generation Messages delete 1L See Also Functions mlreportgen ppt MessageD
167. Report Yes inserts a section if you select the Create section for each object in loop option Class rptgen_sl csl blk loop See Also Model Loop Signal Loop System Loop Simulink Linking Anchor Simulink Name Simulink Property Simulink Property Table Simulink Summary Table 8 9 8 Components Alphabetical List 8 10 Block Type Count Count number of each block type in the current model or system Description This component counts the number of each block type in the current model or system Within a model this component counts blocks underneath masks and inside library links For more information about block types see Nonvirtual and Virtual Blocks in the Simulink documentation Count Types The parent of this component determines where to count block types e Model Loop Reports all block types in the current model All blocks in model Counts block types in the entire model All blocks in reported systems Counts block types only in systems that appear in the report e System Loop Reports all block types in the current system Table Content Table title Allows you to enter the table title Show block names in table Includes a column that displays all block names in the table Sort table e Alphabetically by block type Sorts blocks alphabetically by block type By number of blocks Sorts by decreasing number of occurrences Show total count Displays total number of b
168. Save Printable HTML Report on page 7 24 Save As gt Save to Workspace Export XML comparison results to workspace See Export Results to the Workspace on page 7 24 Related Examples Select Simulink Models for XML Comparison on page 7 5 7 15 7 Compare Simulink Model XML Files 7 16 Display Items in Original Models on page 7 17 Merge Simulink Models from the Comparison Report on page 7 21 Compare XML from Models Managed with Subversion on page 7 30 Compare Revisions Source Control in Simulink Project More About About Simulink Model XML Comparison on page 7 2 Comparing XML Files from Models with Identical Names on page 7 27 Work with Referenced Models and Library Links on page 7 28 Display Items in Original Models Display Items in Original Models In this section Highlighting in Models on page 7 17 Control Highlighting in Models on page 7 19 View Changes in Model Configuration Parameters on page 7 20 Highlighting in Models When you compare the XML text files from Simulink models you can choose to display the corresponding items in the original models when you select report items You can use this reverse annotation function to explore the changes in the original models When you select an item the report invokes reverse annotation to the original model and highlights the corresponding item in t
169. Simulink Report Generator User s Guide MATLAB amp SIMULINK R201 5b J MathWorks How to Contact MathWorks Latest news www mathworks com Sales and services www mathworks com sales_and_ services User community www mathworks com matlabcentral Technical support www mathworks com support contact_us Phone 508 647 7000 The MathWorks Inc 3 Apple Hill Drive Natick MA 01760 2098 Simulink Report Generator User s Guide COPYRIGHT 1999 2015 by The MathWorks Inc The software described in this document is furnished under a license agreement The software may be used or copied only under the terms of the license agreement No part of this manual may be photocopied or reproduced in any form without prior written consent from The MathWorks Inc FEDERAL ACQUISITION This provision applies to all acquisitions of the Program and Documentation by for or through the federal government of the United States By accepting delivery of the Program or Documentation the government hereby agrees that this software or documentation qualifies as commercial computer software or commercial computer software documentation as such terms are used or defined in FAR 12 212 DFARS Part 227 72 and DFARS 252 227 7014 Accordingly the terms and conditions of this Agreement and only those rights specified in this Agreement shall pertain to and govern the use modification reproduction release performance display and disclosure of the Progra
170. Snapshot Options Format Specifies the image file format for example JPEG or TIFF Select Automatic SL Format the default to choose the format best suited for the specified report output format automatically Otherwise choose an image format that your output viewer can read Automatic SL Format uses file format selected in the Preferences dialog box e Bitmap 16m color e Bitmap 256 color e Black e Black e Black e Black e Black e Black Color Color Color Color Color and white encapsulated PostScript and white encapsulated PostScript TIFF and white encapsulated PostScript2 and white encapsulated PostScript2 TIFF and white PostScript and white PostScript2 encapsulated PostScript encapsulated PostScript TIFF encapsulated PostScript2 encapsulated PostScript2 TIFF PostScript System Snapshot Color PostScript2 JPEG high quality image JPEG low quality image JPEG medium quality image PNG screenshot PNG 24 bit image Scalable Vector Graphics Windows metafile e Orientation Largest dimension vertical Positions the image so that its largest dimension is vertical Landscape Portrait Use system orientation Uses the paper orientation setting for the system Use the Simulink PaperOrientation parameter to specify the orientation Full page image PDF only In PDF reports scales images to fit the full page minimizes page margins and maximizes the size of the image by using
171. System Loop 8 151 8 Components Alphabetical List 8 152 Simulink Sample Time Insert title of Simulink sample time into report Description This component inserts a title for a Simulink sample time into the report Properties Table Options Title Specifies a title for the table in the generated report Grid lines Show grid lines for the table Insert Anything into Report Yes Table Class rptgen_sl CSampleTime See Also Chapter Subsection Simulink Summary Table Simulink Summary Table Properties or parameters of specified Simulink models systems blocks or signals in table Description This component displays properties or parameters of selected Simulink models systems blocks or signals in a table Object type Choose the object type to display in the generated report Block Default Model e System e Signal e Annotation The selected object type affects the options available in the Property Columns pane Table title Choose a title to appear in the generated report Automatic Automatically generates a title from the parameter e Custom Specifies a custom title Property Columns This pane displays object properties to include in the Summary Table in the generated report To add a property 8 153 8 Components Alphabetical List 8 154 1 select the appropriate property level in the text box on the left 2 Inthe text box on the right select
172. T API program Related Examples Display Presentation Generation Messages on page 12 16 12 15 12 Programmatic PowerPoint Presentation Creation Display Presentation Generation Messages 12 16 In this section Presentation Generation Messages on page 12 16 Display PPT Default Messages on page 12 16 Create and Display a Progress Message on page 12 18 Presentation Generation Messages The PPT API includes a set of messages that can display when you generate a PowerPoint presentation The messages are triggered every time a presentation element is created or appended during presentation generation You can define additional messages to display while presentation generates The PPT API provides these classes for defining messages ProgressMessage e DebugMessage e WarningMessage e ErrorMessage The PPT API provides additional classes for handling presentation message dispatching and display It uses MATLAB events and listeners to dispatch messages A message is dispatched based on event data for a specified PPT object For an introduction to events and listeners see Events and Listeners Concepts Note When you create a message dispatcher the PPT API keeps the dispatcher until the end of the current MATLAB session To avoid duplicate reporting of message objects during a MATLAB session delete message event listeners Display PPT Default Messages This examp
173. TPresentation Here is the complete PPT API program to create myNewPPTPresentation Note The myTemplate pptx file must be in the current folder If it is not see Set Up a Template on page 12 63 import mlreportgen ppt SslidesFile myNewPPTPresentation pptx slides Presentation slidesFile myTemplate Add a title slide presentationTitleSlide add slides Title Slide replace presentationTitleSlide Title Create Histograms Plots subtitleText Paragraph The funcName Text histogram funcName Font Courier New gt gt append subtitleText funcName append subtitleText Function replace presentationTitleSlide Subtitle subtitleText Add a picture slide x randn 10000 1 h histogram x saveas gcf myPlot_img png ploti Picture myPlot_img png pictureSlide add slides Title and Content replace slides Title Histogram of Vector contents find pictureSlide Content replace contents 1 plot1 Add a text slide textSlide add slides Title and Content titleText2 Paragraph What You Can Do with func Text histogram func Font Courier New Create a Presentation Programmatically append titleText2 func contents find textSlide Title replace contents 1 titleText2 contents find textSlide Content replace contents 1 Create histogram plot of x Specify Number of bins E
174. Table Entries Using Style Sheets For HTML reports you can use styles defined in an HTML template style sheet to format table entries When defining a table entry style use a td element selector For example td TableEntryWithBorder border 5px solid red To apply a template defined style to a table entry set the TableEntry object StyleName property to the name of the style or specify the style name as the second argument to the TableEntry constructor For example te TableEntry Hello World TableEntryWithBorder See Also Classes mlreportgen dom AllowBreakAcrossPages mlreportgen dom ColSep mlreportgen dom FlowDirection mlreportgen dom FormalTable mlreportgen dom RepeatAsHeaderRow mlreportgen dom ResizeToFitContents mlreportgen dom RowHeight mlreportgen dom RowSep mlreportgen dom Table mlreportgen dom TableBody mlreportgen dom TableColSpec mlreportgen dom TableColSpecGroup mlreportgen dom TableEntry mlreportgen dom TableFooter mlreportgen dom TableHeader mlreportgen dom TableHeaderEntry mlreportgen dom TableRow Functions mlreportgen dom FormalTable appendFooterRow mlreportgen dom FormalTable appendHeaderRow mlreportgen dom TableRow append Related Examples Add Content to a Report on page 11 11 More About Report Formatting Approaches on page 11 20 11 71 T1 Create a Report Program Create Links 11 72 In this section Links on pa
175. The condition action is part of a transition label Insert Anything into Report Yes inserts state transition matrices and optionally condition actions Class rptgen_sf_csf_statetransitionmatrix See Also State Transition Table 8 169 8 Components Alphabetical List 8 170 State Transition Table Insets state transition tables into report Description This component inserts the state transition tables into a report A state transition table is an alternative way of expressing sequential modal logic Instead of drawing states and transitions graphically in a Stateflow chart you express the modal logic in tabular format Options gt Title e No title default Report uses no title for the state transition table e Use Stateflow name Uses the name of the State Transition Table block as the title e Custom In the text field specify a custom name for the state transition table Insert Anything into Report Yes inserts state transition table Class rptgen_sf_csf_statetransitiontable See Also State Transition Matrix Stateflow Automatic Table Stateflow Automatic Table Insert table with properties of current Stateflow object Description The Stateflow Automatic Table component inserts a table that contains the properties of the current Stateflow object Parents of this component can be e Machine Loop e State Loop e Chart Loop e Graphics Object Loop Display Options Tab
176. The row contains all other blocks that overlap the horizontal area defined by the top and bottom edges of the anchor block The other rows use the same algorithm using as the anchor the next unreported block nearest the left top of the model By layout top to bottom Sorts blocks by their location in the model layout by columns The block appearing the furthest toward the left top corner of the model is the anchor for the column The column contains all other blocks that overlap the vertical area defined by the left and right edges of the anchor block The other columns use the same algorithm using as the anchor the next unreported block nearest the left top of the model By traversal order Sorts blocks by traversal order By simulation order Sorts blocks by execution order lt VariableName gt Inserts the value of a variable from the MATLAB workspace For more information see lt VariableName gt Notation on the Text component reference page in the MATLAB Report Generator documentation Search for Simulink name property value pairs Reports only on blocks with the specified property name property value pairs To enable searching click the check box In the first row of the property name and property value table click inside the Fixed Point Block Loop edit box delete the existing text and type the property name and value To add a row ae use the Add row button eh For information about subsystem property names
177. Web browser when you export the Web view false does not display the Web view in a Web browser when you export the Web view Data Types logical ShowProgressBar Specifies whether to display the status bar when you export a Web view true default false true displays the status bar when you export a Web view false does not display the status bar when you export a Web view Data Types logical Output Arguments filename The name of the HTML file for displaying the Web view string Reports the name of the HTML file for displaying the Web view Exporting a Web view creates the supporting files in a folder More About Tips A Web view is an interactive rendition of a model that you can view in a Web browser You can navigate a Web view hierarchically to examine specific subsystems and to see properties of blocks and signals slwebview You can use Web views to share models with people who do not have Simulink installed Web views require a Web browser that supports Scalable Vector Graphics SVG Introduced in R2006a 9 11 Template Based Report Formatting Report Conversion Templates on page 10 2 Generate a Report Using a Template on page 10 4 Conversion Template Contents on page 10 5 Copy a Conversion Template on page 10 12 Open a Conversion Template on page 10 14 Set Conversion Template Properties on page 10 15 Move a Conversion Template on page 10
178. XML Files from Models with Identical Names on page 7 27 Work with Referenced Models and Library Links on page 7 28 Compare XML from Models Managed with Subversion on page 7 30 Compare Templates on page 7 34 7 Compare Simulink Model XML Files About Simulink Model XML Comparison 7 2 In this section Creating XML Comparison Reports on page 7 2 Using XML Comparison Reports on page 7 2 Creating XML Comparison Reports If you have Simulink Report Generator software you can compare XML text files from Simulink models You can select a pair of Simulink models to compare their XML files You can use models from any version of Simulink The XML comparison tool produces a comparison report based on the SLX files You can use the report to explore the differences view the changes highlighted in the original models and merge differences You can access the XML comparison tool from The MATLAB Current Folder browser context menu The MATLAB Comparison Tool The MATLAB command line The Simulink Editor Analysis menu The Simulink Project Modified Files view The Simulink Report Generator XML comparison functionality is an extension of the MATLAB Report Generator XML comparison feature You can use the XML comparison tool with both model file formats SLX and MDL If the selected files are md1 files the XML comparison tool first exports the md1 files to SLX files in
179. You can specify default formatting for the contents of a table a column a table row and a table entry Table entry formatting takes precedence over the formatting you specify for a column or for a table row Table row formatting takes precedence over table formatting You can specify these default formatting options for the contents of a Table object Table Object Formatting Format Object Format Property Table style from template n a StyleName Use the PowerPoint template to specify table style formatting Background color BackgroundColor BackgroundColor Column formatting ColSpec ColSpecs Vertical alignment of table VAlign VAlign cell content Font family FontFamily Font Font family for complex FontFamily ComplexScriptFont scripts to handle locales Font size FontSize FontSize Font color FontColor FontColor Upper left x coordinate of n a X the table Upper left y coordinate of n a Y the table Table width n a Width Table height n a Height To specify default formatting for the contents of a TableRow object use the Style property with these format objects TableRow Object Formatting Format Object Format Property Background color BackgroundColor n a Vertical alignment of table VAlign n a cell content Create and Format Tables TableRow Object Formatting Format Object Format Property Font family FontColor n a
180. a chapter rgSect5TitleText Text for Section title for fifth level section in a chapter rgSubTitle Title Page component subtitle rgTable Table content rgtableTitle Table title rgTableTitleNumber Table title number rgTableTitlePrefix Table title prefix rgTtableTitleText Table title text rgTitle Title Page component front page title abstract and legal notice section rgTitleVerso Title Page component back page title abstract and legal notice section rgTOCSection Table of contents Conversion Template Contents Part Templates The conversion templates include template parts to format specific elements of a report Part Template Report Explorer Components the Part Template Formats rgRectoTitlePage Title Page Front title page contents including the report title subtitle author and an image rgVersoTitlePage Title Page Back title page contents including the date published copyright legal notice and abstract rgTOCSectionTitle The table of contents automatically generated for Word and PDF rgChapter Chapter Section Chapter top level section including the title prefix such as Chapter number and title and for the content rgsect1Title Chapter Section rgSect2Title Title for a section sections below the chapter level The title can include a prefix rgSect3Title such as Chapter number and title rgsect4Title rgsect5Title rgListTitle List Title of the list rgTtableTitle Table Ar
181. ageSize Width saveHeight table append rpt magic 22 table Border solid table ColSep solid table RowSep solid close rpt rptview rpt OutputPath Create Sections Programmatically You can use the append function of a Document or DocumentPart to create sections programmatically To use the append function to add a section to a report use this append syntax paraObj append rptObj paraObj docxSectionObj This use of the append function appends a paragraph to the report as the last paragraph of the current section and then starts a new section whose properties are defined by a DOCXSection object For example this script adds a landscape section to a report to accommodate a large magic square import mlreportgen dom rpt Document test docx append rpt Heading 1 Magic Square Report Heading 1 sect DOCXSection sect PageSize Orientation landscape sect PageSize Height 8 5in sect PageSize Width 11in append rpt Paragraph The next page shows magic square sect 11 129 T1 Create a Report Program table append rpt magic 22 table Border solid table ColSep solid table RowSep solid close rpt rptview rpt OutputPath See Also Classes mlreportgen dom DOCXPageMargins mlreportgen dom DOCXPageSize mlreportgen dom DOCXSection Related Examples Create a Microsoft Word Template on page 11 111 11 130 Create Pag
182. all systems with requirements in all models Custom use system list Reports on a list of specified systems Enter the full path of each system Loop Options Sort Systems Alphabetically by system name default Sorts systems alphabetically by name By number of blocks in system Sorts systems by the number of blocks in the system The list displays systems by decreasing number of blocks the system with the largest number of blocks appears first in the list Requirements System Loop By system depth Sorts systems by their depth in the model By traversal order Sorts systems in the traversal order Search for Reports on Simulink blocks with specified property name property value pairs Section Options Create section for each object in loop Inserts a section in the generated report for each object found in the loop Display the object type in the section title Inserts the object type automatically into the section title in the generated report Number sections by system hierarchy Numbers sections in the generated report hierarchically Requires that Sort Systems be set to By traversal order Create link anchor for each object in loop Creates a hyperlink to the object in the generated report Insert Anything into Report Yes inserts a section if you select the Create section for each object in loop option Class RptgenRMI CSystemLoop See Also Missing Requirements Block Loop Missing Req
183. ame algorithm using as the anchor the next unreported block nearest the left top of the model By traversal order Sorts blocks by traversal order By simulation order Sorts blocks by execution order Search for Simulink property name property value pairs Reports on blocks with specified property name property value pairs Insert Anything into Report Yes Table 8 100 Requirements Summary Table Class RptgenRMI CSummaryTable See Also Block Loop Missing Requirements Block Loop Missing Requirements System Loop Requirements Block Loop Requirements Documents Table Requirements Signal Loop Requirements System Loop Requirements Table 8 101 8 Components Alphabetical List 8 102 Requirements System Loop Apply child components to systems with requirements Description This component applies its child components to systems with associated requirements Report On Loop on systems Select systems automatically If selected this option reports on all systems in the current context The parent of the component determines the context of this setting e Model Loop Reports on systems in the current model e System Loop Reports on the current system Signal Loop Reports on the parent system of the current signal Block Loop Reports on the parent system of the current block If the Requirement System Loop does not have any of these components as its parent selecting this option reports on
184. an generate a model report which is an HTML document that describes the structure and content of a model The model report includes block diagrams of the model and its subsystems and the settings of its block parameters To generate the report from the Simulink Editor select File gt Print Details For more information see Generate a Model Report To interactively focus on specific elements of a model for example blocks signals and properties without navigating through the model diagram or chart using the Model Explorer To open the Model Explorer in the Simulink Editor select View gt Model Explorer For details see Model Explorer Overview To generate a report that lists the suboptimal conditions or settings in a model with suggestions for better model configuration settings where appropriate use the Model Advisor To open the Model Advisor in the Simulink Editor select Analysis gt Model Advisor For details see Consulting the Model Advisor To navigate a model hierarchically open systems in a model and determine the blocks contained in a model you can use the Simulink Model Browser To open the Model 1 Getting Started Browser select View gt Model Browser Options gt Model Browser For details see Model Browser Simulink provides several tools for examining the results of a simulation Simulation data includes signal time output state and data store logging data You can set up your
185. and display an exception change the default code to displayWarningMessage false failGenerationWithException true To stop report generation without displaying an exception change the default code to displayWarningMessage false failGenerationWithoutException true If you want to completely replace the default error handling code use the evalException message variable in your code to return information for the exception 3 51 3 Creating Simulink Reports Generate the Report 3 52 Now the report includes all required components To generate the report click the Report icon on the toolbar The following occurs 1 A Message List window appears displaying informational and error messages as the report is processed Specify the level of detail you would like the Message List window to display while the report is being generated Options range from 0 least detail to 6 most detail Click the selection list located under the title bar of the Message List window to choose an option as shown in the following figure A message tist TT 3 Important messages running a loop 0 No messages 1 Error messages only 2 Warning messages 3 Important messages running a loop 4 Standard messages running a component 5 Low level messages status information 6 All me es Message level 3 Important messages is used for the remainder of this example Message List Efel xi 3 Important messages ru
186. append to a DOM report you can use these HTML elements and attributes HTML Element Attributes a class style href name HTML Code Requirements for DOM Reports HTML Element Attributes b class style br n a code class style del class style font class style color face size hi h2 h3 h4 class style align h5 h6 hr class style align size width i class style ins class style img class style src height width alt li class style ol class style p class style align pre class style s class style span class style strike class style sub class style sup class style table class style align bgcolor border cellspacing cellpadding frame rules width tbody class style align valign tfoot class style align valign thead class style align valign td class style bgcolor height width colspan rowspan valign nowrap tr class style bgcolor valign 11 101 11 Create a Report Program HTML Element Attributes tt class style u class style ul class style For information about these elements see the W3Schools tags documentation at www w3schools com tags Supported HTML CSS Style Attributes for All Elements You can use HTML style attributes to format HTML content A style attribute is a string of CSS cascading style sheets formats In HTML
187. at Lists close d rptview myListReport html You can also create an unordered list from an array by including the array in an UnorderedList object constructor import mlreportgen dom d Document unorderedListReport html1 ul UnorderedList Text item1 item 2 3 append d ul close d rptview unorderedListReport html Create an Unordered List from Scratch You can create an unordered list from scratch by creating mlreportgen dom ListItem objects and appending them to an UnorderedList object import mlreportgen dom d Document unorderedListReport html1 1i1 ListItem Rank 3 magic square table append 1i1 Table magic 3 table Border inset table Width 1in 1i2 ListItem second item 1i3 ListItem third item ul UnorderedList append ul 1i1 append ul 1i2 append ul 1i3 append d ul close d rptview unorderedListReport html Create an Ordered List You can create an ordered list from a numeric or cell array or from scratch 11 53 T1 Create a Report Program 11 54 Creating an ordered list from a cell array allows you to include items of different types in the list Creating a list from scratch is useful for including multiple objects in a list item Create an Ordered List from an Array You can create an unordered list from a numeric array or cell array by including the array in anmlreportgen dom OrderedList o
188. at Paragraphs Format a Paragraph You can format a paragraph programmatically using DOM format objects or format properties You can also use Word and HTML template styles For information about these formatting techniques and format inheritance see Report Formatting Approaches on page 11 20 Note You can use the same format objects and properties for Heading objects as you do for Paragraph objects Format a Paragraph Programmatically You can use format objects to format Paragraph objects or format properties to specify commonly used paragraph formats This example uses e An OuterMargin format object to specify the margins for the paragraph The HAlign format property to center the paragraph import mlreportgen dom doc Document test html p Paragraph Indent a half inch and space after 12 points p Style OuterMargin 0 5in Oin Oin 12pt append doc p p Paragraph Centered paragraph p HAlign center append doc p close doc rptview test html Use these format objects and format properties to format a paragraph Formatting Format Object Format Property Font FontFamily FontFamilyName Backup font HTML only FontFamily n a Complex script font for FontFamily n a example Arabic 11 47 11 Create a Report Program 11 48 Formatting Format Object Format Property
189. at you create use one of these approaches in MATLAB Omit the semicolon when you create the object Enter the name of the object For example display the properties of the Paragraph object parai paral Paragraph My paragraph paral Paragraph with properties Bold 12 47 12 Programmatic PowerPoint Presentation Creation 12 48 FontColor Italic Strike Subscript Superscript Underline Level Style Children 1x1 mlreportgen ppt Text Parent Tag ppt Paragraph 22 Ids 22 Uam kaa aai bat a i i d To display the value of a specific property such as the Bold property use dot notation without a semicolon pari Paragraph My paragraph para Bold ans Set the Properties of an Object You can set some PPT API object properties using the object constructor The PPT API sets other properties For most PPT API objects you can change the values of properties that you specified in the constructor Also you can specify values for additional properties To specify a value for an object property use dot notation For example to set the default for text in the para1 paragraph to bold pari Paragraph My paragraph para1 Bold true For some presentation objects you can use the Style property to specify formatting options that are not available in the other properties of the object For example a TableEntry object does not have a Bold property However you can sp
190. ata disp evtdata Message formatAsText open d dispatch dispatcher ProgressMessage starting chapter d p Paragraph Chapter p Tag chapter title p Style CounterInc chapter CounterReset table WhiteSpace pre append p AutoNumber chapter append d p close d rptview test html Display Report Generation Messages delete 1l The MATLAB Command Window displays progress messages including the starting chapter message as well as the messages the DOM API dispatches by default See Also Functions mlreportgen dom MessageDispatcher dispatch mlreportgen dom MessageDispatcher getTheDispatcher mlreportgen dom ProgressMessage formatAsHTML mlreportgen dom ProgressMessage formatAsText mlreportgen dom ProgressMessage passesFilter Classes mlreportgen dom DebugMessage mlreportgen dom ErrorMessage mlreportgen dom MessageDispatcher mlreportgen dom MessageEventData mlreportgen dom MessageFilter mlreportgen dom ProgressMessage mlreportgen dom WarningMessage 11 109 11 Create a Report Program Compile a Report Program 11 110 If the MATLAB Compiler product is installed on your system you can use it to compile your DOM based report generation program This allows you to share your report generation program with others who do not have MATLAB installed on their systems To enable someone who does not have MATLAB installed to run your compiled program
191. ate To format specific content in a specific slide consider using one of the other approaches Adding special case formatting elements in a template can make the template overly complex Format Objects You can define PPT API format objects and use them to specify a formatting style for presentation objects After you create a presentation object you can define the Style property for that object using a cell array of format objects For example p Paragraph Model Highlights 12 21 12 Programmatic PowerPoint Presentation Creation 12 22 p Style FontColor red Bold true For many presentation objects using format objects provides more formatting options than the format properties of the presentation objects Using format objects can streamline your code you can combine multiple formatting options in one statement and you can apply a defined style to multiple presentation objects Format Properties Use format properties of a PPT API presentation element for basic formatting of a specific presentation object After you define a presentation object you can set values for its format properties using dot notation For example p Paragraph My paragraph p Bold true The formatting applies only to the specific object If you want to set just one option for a presentation element using a format property is the simplest approach Interactive Formatting of Slide Content After you generate a PPT API pr
192. ate start by using these steps 1 2 3 Open the Word template used with the report Open the Styles pane A4 Click the Manage Styles button Click New Style In the Create New Style from Formatting dialog box set Style type to Character or Linked paragraph and character For more information about working with Word styles see Modify Styles in a Microsoft Word Template on page 11 117 Format a Paragraph Using HTML Style Sheets You can format using an existing style in an HTML template or using a template style that you modify or add For an HTML report define the style as a p style For example p BodyPara font family Times New Roman Times serif font style normal font size 11pt color black 11 49 T1 Create a Report Program 11 50 margin left 0 5in For more information about using HTML styles with DOM objects see Modify Styles in an HTML Template on page 11 127 Apply a Style to a Paragraph Object Apply a template style to a Paragraph object either as the second argument in a Paragraph object constructor or by setting the StyleName property to a template style For example suppose you have defined styles named BodyPara and TableTitle in the template for your report This example specifies a style name in a Paragraph constructor and in a Paragraph object StyleName format property using the TableTitle style defined in MyTemplate import mlreportgen dom rank 5
193. ate Document Part Template Libraries on page 11 33 Object Oriented Report Creation on page 11 38 Simplify Filling in Forms on page 11 39 11 Create a Report Program 11 2 Create and Format Text on page 11 41 Create and Format Paragraphs on page 11 46 Create and Format Lists on page 11 52 Create and Format Tables on page 11 58 Create Links on page 11 72 Create and Format Images on page 11 75 Create a Table of Contents on page 11 77 Create Image Maps on page 11 84 Automatically Number Document Content on page 11 86 Appending HTML to DOM Reports on page 11 90 Append HTML Content to DOM Reports on page 11 92 Append HTML File Contents to DOM Reports on page 11 94 Use an HTML Cleanup Program on page 11 96 HTML Code Requirements for DOM Reports on page 11 100 Display Report Generation Messages on page 11 106 Compile a Report Program on page 11 110 Create a Microsoft Word Template on page 11 111 Add Holes in a Microsoft Word Template on page 11 112 Modify Styles in a Microsoft Word Template on page 11 117 Create an HTML Template on page 11 122 Add Holes in an HTML Template on page 11 124 Modify Styles in an HTML Template on page 11 127 Create Microsoft Word Page Layout Sections on page 11 128 Create Page Footers and Headers on page 11 1381 Create a Report Program Crea
194. ate Report Explorer when generating reports Edit HTML Command edit lt FileName gt eS Gee Gree Gee File Format and Extension To specify the default file format for reports use the Format ID preference The default preference is web HTML You can select from a range of file formats such as PDF Microsoft Word or LaTex Note For reports that use the Word Document format you must have Microsoft Word installed on the machine that you use to generate the report 4 14 Report Generation Preferences The Extension preference reflects the standard file extension for the file format specified with the Format ID preference You can change the extension Image Formats To set the default image formats associated with the output format for a report use the following preferences Preference Purpose Simulink Images Specify the format for Simulink images to include in the report Stateflow Images Specify the format for Stateflow charts to include in the report HG Images Specify the format for Handle Graphics images to include in the report Note The default preferences for image formats should work in most viewing environments However some image formats do not display in some viewing environments Several components such as the Figure Snapshot component include an option for specifying the image format The component setting overrides the image format preference Report
195. ate a report that has a Title Page component that specifies an image and an author The generated report displays the image at the top of the title page and does not include an author Related Examples Copy a Conversion Template on page 10 12 Customize Microsoft Word Report Styles on page 10 18 More About Report Conversion Templates on page 10 2 Conversion Template Contents on page 10 5 10 35 10 Template Based Report Formatting Create a Custom HTML Template 10 36 In this section Copy an HTML Template on page 10 36 Select an HTML Editor on page 10 37 Edit HTML Styles in a Template on page 10 37 Copy an HTML Template To customize the format styles used in the default HTML template you need to copy that template or a template that was copied from the default template and modify or add style definitions in the copy 1 In Report Explorer select Tools gt Edit Document Conversion Template 2 Inthe Library pane middle pane select a template from the list of HTML templates For example select the DefaultHTMLTemplate 3 In the Properties pane click Copy template In the file browser navigate to the location where you want to save the template file Select a path that is on the MATLAB path for example in the MATLAB folder in your home directory Specify the file name using the default file extension for a HTML template htmtx Click Save 5 I
196. ate library file 2 Open the file named docpart_templates html by default in an HTML or text editor 3 Create the following HTML markup in the lt body gt element of the file lt div class Template gt lt div class TemplateName gt lt span class TemplateName gt TEMPLATE_NAME lt span gt lt div gt lt div class TemplateBody gt TEMPLATE_BODY lt div gt lt div gt 4 Replace TEMPLATE_NAME with a unique name for the template Use this name in the constructor of a DOM DocumentPart object to be based on this template 5 Replace TEMPLATE_BODY with HTML markup that defines the fixed content and holes of the template 6 Save the library file 7 Repackage the template See Also Classes mlreportgen dom DocumentPart Related Examples Fill the Blanks in a Report Form on page 11 29 Create Document Part Template Libraries Create a Microsoft Word Template on page 11 111 Add Holes in a Microsoft Word Template on page 11 112 Create an HTML Template on page 11 122 Add Holes in an HTML Template on page 11 124 More About Form Based Reporting on page 11 28 11 37 11 Create a Report Program Object Oriented Report Creation 11 38 Note This section assumes that you are familiar with object oriented programming in MATLAB For information on object oriented programming in MATLAB see Object Oriented Programming in the MATLAB documentation The DOM API
197. ated report You do not need to know MATLAB or Simulink software to create and run this example report However knowledge of these products might be helpful for understanding the MATLAB code and model simulation that executes To create this report you perform these main tasks Specify Report Options in the Setup File on page 3 3 Add Report Content with Components on page 3 5 This example includes separate sections for different kinds of report creation and generation task Each section builds on the previous sections However if you want to see the report setup components for a later section without doing the previous sections in MATLAB you can view the completed report setup file by opening Dynamic Simulink Report The report is for the vdp model Note For another set of step by step examples for creating and generating a report see the Introduction to System Design Description Reports example Specify Report Options in the Setup File Specify Report Options in the Setup File To create and configure the report setup file Start a Simulink software session 2 Open the Report Explorer From the MATLAB Toolstrip in the Apps tab in the Database Connectivity and Reporting section click Report Generator 3 Select File gt New to create a report setup file 4 Save the report setup file In the Properties pane a Specify where to save the report setup file To save it in the current working fol
198. atically enter it into the Source file field in the Properties pane 3 Select your output format and stylesheet a Inthe File format text box select an output format b Inthe Stylesheet text box select a stylesheet The stylesheet choice depends on the specified output format You can use a predefined or customized stylesheet For more information about available formats and predefined stylesheets see Report Output Format 4 19 A Generate a Report 4 20 For more information about customizing stylesheets see Create a New Stylesheet 4 Use the View Report when done converting check box to indicate whether you want to view the report after it has conversion 5 To begin the conversion click Convert file Convert XML Documents Using the Command Line To convert files using the command line use the rptconvertfunction Edit XML Source Files Before you send a source file to the converter edit it as text in the Report Explorer In the Outline pane on the left open the File Converter Right click MATLAB Report Generator and select Convert source file In the Options pane in the middle select the source file to edit In the Properties pane on the right click Edit as text Use the MATLAB Editor to edit and save the text ab wn Create a Report Log File Create a Report Log File A log file describes the report setup file report generation settings and components A log file can be used for ma
199. ation and subsystem maps into report Description This component reports the following information Version number information List of generated files Code generation configuration information Subsystem map Summary General information Includes the following information in the report Model name and version e Simulink Coder version number List of full paths of generated files e Configuration settings Includes tables that list optimization and Simulink Coder target selection and build process Configuration Parameter settings Subsystem map Includes in the report a unique mapping between subsystem numbers and subsystem labels in the model Traceability Report Use settings from model When you select this option the report uses all of the following configuration settings as specified in your model Deselecting this option allows you to turn off one or more of these settings as needed Eliminated virtual blocks Traceable blocks Code Generation Summary Traceable StateFlow Objects Traceable MATLAB Function Blocks For more information on these configuration settings see Code Generation Pane Report in the Simulink Coder documentation Insert Anything into Report Yes Tables and list Class RptgenRTW CCodeGenSummary See Also Import Generated Code 8 19 8 Components Alphabetical List 8 20 Code and Verification Information Create table of verification times a
200. ation Issues on page 4 25 A Generate a Report Generate a Report 4 2 In this section Run a Report on page 4 2 Report Output Options on page 4 2 Run a Report You can generate a Simulink Report Generator report using one of these methods In the Report Explorer Outline pane select a report and do one of the following actions In the Report Explorer toolbar click the Report button f Press CTL R Select File gt Report From the MATLAB command line use the report command For example to print the system1_description report in PDF format use report system1 description fpdf Report Output Options Before you generate a report you can set options to control aspects of report generation processing such as Output file format PDF HTML or Microsoft Word Stylesheet for the selected output file format to control the layout of the report for example whether to display a title page font and section numbering Output file location Whether to view the generated report automatically For details see Report Output Format on page 4 5 Location of Report Output File on page 4 11 Generate a Report e Create a Report Log File on page 4 21 Report Description on page 4 12 Change Report Locale on page 4 17 4 3 A Generate a Report Select Report Generation Options In this section Report Options Dialog Box
201. ations Status types to include Specify statuses to include Enter a regular MATLAB or exclude when reporting expression coding rule violations Run time Check Filters The properties in table below apply to the inclusion of Polyspace Code Prover checks in your report Report Customization Filtering Property Purpose Red Checks Specify whether to include red checks in your report Red checks indicate proven run time errors Gray Checks Specify whether to include gray checks in your report Gray checks indicate unreachable code Orange Checks Specify whether to include orange checks in your report Orange checks indicate possible run time errors Green Checks time error Specify whether to include green checks in your report Green checks indicate that an operation does not contain a specific run Inspection Point Checks Unreachable Functions Specify whether to include inspection point checks in your report These checks allow an user to find the values that a variable can take at a certain point in the code Specify whether to include unreachable functions in your report Advanced Filters The properties in table below apply to the inclusion of metrics coding rule violations and Polyspace Code Prover checks in your report Property Purpose User Action Justification status Choose whether to report only justified checks only unjustifi
202. bject constructor In the cell array you can include strings numbers and some DOM objects such as a Text object For a list of DOM objects you can include see mlreportgen dom ListItem import mlreportgen dom d Document orderedListReport html1 t Text step 1 ol OrderedList t step 2 step 3 append d ol close d rptview orderedListReport html Create an Ordered List from Scratch You can create an unordered list from scratch by creating mlreportgen dom ListItem objects and appending them to an OrderedList object import mlreportgen dom d Document orderedListReport htm1 1i1 ListItem Create a rank 3 magic square p append 1i1 Paragraph gt gt magic 3 p FontFamilyName Courier New 1i2 ListItem step 2 1i3 ListItem step 3 ol OrderedList append ol 1i1 append o01 1i2 append o1 1i3 append d ol close d rptview orderedListReport html Create and Format Lists Create a Multilevel List A multilevel list is an ordered or unordered list whose list items contain ordered or unordered lists You can create lists that have as many as nine levels You can create multilevel lists either from cell arrays or from scratch Creating a multilevel list from scratch is useful for creating list items that contain multiple paragraphs paragraphs and tables and other combinations of document elements Create a Multilevel List from a Ce
203. bject properties 1 19 1 Getting Started Supported Report Formats 1 20 When the report generation process first creates a report it generates a DocBook XML source file You can customize this XML as needed For more information see the OASIS DocBook TC Web page at http www oasis open org committees docbook and http www docbook org tdg en htm1 docbook html Next the report generation process converts the XML source to one of these user specified report formats e Adobe Acrobat PDF Note PDF reports only support bitmap bmp jpeg jpg and Scalable Vector Graphics svg images The SVG format is only supported for Simulink models and Stateflow charts For example MATLAB figures do not display in SVG when you select the SVG format for PDF reports Hypertext Markup Language HTML Microsoft Word doc Rich Text Format RTF Note RTF reports use placeholders field codes for dynamically generated content such as page numbers or images On Windows platforms to display that content press Ctrl A and then press F9 On Linux and Mac platforms use the field code update interface for the program that you are using to view the RTF document Add Content to PowerPoint Presentations Programmatically Add Content to PowerPoint Presentations Programmatically You can use the PPT PowerPoint API to add generated content to an existing PowerPoint presentation or to create a complete Powe
204. bjects that you want to include repeatedly in a report disclaimerHead Heading 2 Results May Vary disclaimerIntro Paragraph The following results assume disclaimerList UnorderedList Temperature between 30 and 70 degrees F Wind less than 20 MPH Dry road conditions 2 Define a Group object that includes the DOM objects for the group For example disclaimer Group append disclaimer disclaimerHead append disclaimer disclaimerIntro append disclaimer disclaimerList 3 Append the Group object in the place in the report where you want to repeat the content For example if the document object is doc append doc disclaimer This code builds on the code shown above import mlreportgen dom doc Document groupReport html disclaimerHead Heading 2 Results May Vary disclaimerIntro Paragraph The following results assume disclaimerList UnorderedList Temperature between 30 and 70 degrees F Wind less than 20 MPH Dry road conditions disclaimer Group append disclaimer disclaimerHead append disclaimer disclaimerIntro append disclaimer disclaimerList append doc disclaimer p1 Paragraph First set of results p1 Bold true p2 Paragraph more report content Add Content as a Group p2 Bold true append doc p1 append doc p2 append doc disclaimer close doc rptview groupReport htm1 See Als
205. blanks that your DOM report program fills with generated content Related Examples Fill the Blanks in a Report Form on page 11 29 Use Subforms in a Report on page 11 31 Create a Microsoft Word Template on page 11 111 Add Holes in a Microsoft Word Template on page 11 112 Create an HTML Template on page 11 122 Add Holes in an HTML Template on page 11 124 Fill the Blanks in a Report Form Fill the Blanks in a Report Form Navigate Holes in the Form When you create a form template you associate an ID with each hole in the template This allows you to navigate the holes in a form using the DOM moveToNextHole function The first time you execute this function the DOM API copies to the output document all of the text up to the first hole in the template At this point you can start adding content to the output document using this DOM append function thereby filling in the first hole The next time you execute this function the DOM API copies all the text between the first and second hole in the template to the output document You can then fill in the second hole by appending content to the output document In this way you generate the output document by copying the content from the template and filling in all its holes For example this function generates a report from a Word template that has three holes named Title Author and Content The arguments title author and content are assumed t
206. bleRow objects to the Table object and append TableEntry objects to the TableRow objects Create an empty Table object using the mlreportgen ppt Table constructor specifying the number of columns Create a Table object whose rows and columns are populated by the values you specify in the constructor You can specify a two dimensional numeric array or a two dimensional cell array of numbers strings and Paragraph objects You can also use a combination of these kinds of values For an example of creating a table by appending table rows to an empty table see mlreportgen ppt TableRow For an example of creating a table by specifying values in the Table object constructor see mlreportgen ppt Table Format a Table You can specify a table style name for the overall look of a table such as a table that shades alternating rows You can set the Style property of a Table object to the name of a table style The table style must be in the PowerPoint template that the PPT API program uses You can specify the location upper left x and y coordinates height and width properties of a table When you add the table to a presentation programmatically PowerPoint uses those properties if all of the table content fits in the table When you replace a TablePlaceholder or ContentPlaceholder with a table PowerPoint fits the table in the placeholder location and dimensions 12 89 12 Programmatic PowerPoint Presentation Creation 12 90
207. caution titles find slides Title replace titles 1 p1 replace titles 2 p2 12 45 12 Programmatic PowerPoint Presentation Creation 12 46 close slides The PPT API allows you to assign any format object to any presentation object regardless of whether the format is appropriate for that object type Format that are not appropriate are ignored Related Examples i Use Format Properties on page 12 47 i Define a Style Using Format Objects on page 12 45 Set Up a PowerPoint Template on page 12 26 More About Presentation Formatting Approaches on page 12 20 Use Format Properties Use Format Properties In this section Dot Notation on page 12 47 Get the Properties of an Object on page 12 47 Set the Properties of an Object on page 12 48 Most PPT API presentation objects such as a Paragraph object include properties that you can use to set the format of the content of an object Dot Notation To work with PPT API object properties you use dot notation Using dot notation involves specifying an object the variable representing the object followed by a period and then the property name For example suppose that you create a Paragraph object paral pari Paragraph My paragraph To specify the Bold property for the para1 object use par1 Bold true Get the Properties of an Object To display all the properties of an object th
208. ccess the same object via multiple variables PPT Objects Created Without Constructors You can use some PPT API functions to create PPT objects without your code including a constructor For example to create a slide you add a slide layout to a presentation You do not include an mlreportgen ppt Slide constructor For example this code uses an add method for the mLreportgen ppt Presentation object slides The add method creates a Slide1 object based on the Title Slide slide layout which is in the default PPT API PowerPoint template import mlreportgen ppt slides Presentation MySlides slide add slides Title Slide slide1 Slide with properties Layout Title Slide SlideMaster Office Theme Name Style Children 1x2 mlreportgen ppt TextBoxPlaceholder Parent 1x1 mlreportgen ppt Presentation Tag ppt Slide 16 Id 16 See Also Functions mlreportgen ppt Presentation add 12 9 12 Programmatic PowerPoint Presentation Creation 12 10 Classes mlreportgen ppt Presentation mlreportgen ppt Slide Related Examples Import the PPT API Package Create a Presentation Object to Hold Content on page 12 14 Import the PPT API Package Import the PPT API Package All PPT class names and hence constructor names include the prefix mlreportgen ppt To avoid the need to include the prefix in your code insert this statement at the beginning of a PPT API program
209. ced Models and Library Links from the path By removing the files from the path you will see unresolved library links and referenced models when you view the original models but their interfaces will be correct and will correctly align with the comparison report 7 29 7 Compare Simulink Model XML Files Compare XML from Models Managed with Subversion 7 30 In this section Work with Subversion on page 7 30 Configure TortoiseSVN on page 7 31 Test TortoiseSVN Setup on page 7 32 Work with Subversion Simulink Projects provide built in Subversion source control integration You can create an XML comparison report from the Modified Files view of the Simulink Project Tool See Project Management Alternatively you can customize your external Configuration Management tools to call the XML comparison functionality in the Simulink Report Generator as described on this page Comparing two versions of the same file is a common workflow when using Configuration Management tools If your Configuration Management tool is configurable you can customize your Diff operations on Simulink model files from your Configuration Management tool to call the XML comparison functionality in the Simulink Report Generator This allows you to compare two versions of the XML from the same model file and generate a report of the differences TortoiseSVN and Subversion are a popular suite of open source version con
210. ceholders with the same name throughout the presentation To replace a specific placeholder on a specific slide in the template use one of these approaches Specify a unique placeholder name Search in a slide for an object name To access a specific placeholder use an index number that represents the location of the specific placeholder Related Examples Create PPT Objects 12 6 Create a Presentation Program Create a Presentation Object to Hold Content on page 12 14 Update Presentation Content Programmatically on page 12 50 Create a Presentation Programmatically on page 12 61 12 7 12 Programmatic PowerPoint Presentation Creation Create PPT Objects 12 8 In this section PPT Objects on page 12 8 Use a PPT Constructor on page 12 8 PPT Objects Created Without Constructors on page 12 9 PPT Objects The PPT API consists of a hierarchical set of data structures known as objects that represent a presentation and its contents The top of the hierarchy has an object representing the presentation The PPT API maintains a list of objects called the presentation children that represent the presentation contents slides paragraphs tables pictures etc Each child object in turn maintains a list of its contents For example the children of a table object are its row objects the children of a row object are its entry objects and so on The
211. ch system or subsystem defined by the parent component that does not have associated requirements Insert this component as the child of a Model Loop component to include systems and subsystems that do not have any associated requirements in the report Report On Loop on Systems Select systems automatically Reports on all systems in the current context that do not have associated requirements e Model Loop Reports on systems in the current model e System Loop Reports on the current system Signal Loop Reports on the parent system of the current signal Block Loop Reports on the parent system of the current block If this component does not have any of these components as its parent selecting this option reports on all systems in all models that do not have associated requirements Custom use system list Reports on a list of specified systems Specify the full path of each system e lt VariableName gt Inserts the value of a variable from the MATLAB workspace The lt gt notation can denote a string or cell array For more information see lt VariableName gt Notation on the Text component reference page Loop Options Sort Systems Specifies how to sort systems Missing Requirements System Loop Alphabetically by system name default Sorts systems alphabetically by name By number of blocks in system Sorts systems by number of blocks The list shows systems by decreasing number of blocks In
212. cify whether to include inspection point checks in your report These checks allow an user to find the values that a variable can take at a certain point in the code Inspection Point Checks Specify whether to include unreachable functions in your report Unreachable Functions Advanced Filters The properties in table below apply to the inclusion of metrics coding rule violations and Polyspace Code Prover checks in your report User Action Choose an option from the dropdown list Property Purpose Choose whether to report only justified checks only unjustified checks or all checks Justification status Files to include Specify files to include or Enter a regular MATLAB exclude from your report expression Check types to include Specify Polyspace Code Enter a regular MATLAB Prover checks to include in expression your report Function names to Specify functions to include Enter a regular MATLAB include or exclude from your report expression Classification types to Specify classifications to Enter a regular MATLAB include include or exclude from your expression report Status types to include Specify statuses to include Enter a regular MATLAB or exclude from your report expression Enter a regular MATLAB expression Specify comments to include or exclude from your report Comments to include 8 107 8 Components Alphabetical List R
213. ck The other columns use the same algorithm using as the anchor the next unreported block nearest the left top of the model By traversal order Sorts blocks by traversal order By simulation order Sorts blocks by execution order e lt VariableName gt Inserts the value of a variable from the MATLAB workspace The lt gt notation can denote a string or cell array For more information see lt VariableName gt Notation on the Text component reference page Search for Simulink property name property value pairs Reports on blocks with specified property name property value pairs Example Specify the following options to generate a Summary Table in a report for on the model F14 Sort on systems by system depth Include the system parameters Name and Block in the table The following table appears in the report Name Blocks f14 u Actuator Model Aircraft Dynamics Model Angle of Attack Controller Dryden Wind Gust Models Gain Gain1 Gain2 Gain5 More Info More Infol Nz pilot calculation Pilot Pilot G force Scope Stick Input Sum Sum1 alpha rad Nz Pilot g Aircraft Dynamics Model Elevator Deflection d deg Vertical Gust wGust ft sec Rotary Gust qGust rad sec Gain3 Gain4 Gain5 Gain6 Sum1 Sum2 Transfer Fcen 1 Transfer Fcn 2 Vertical Velocity w ft s Pitch Rate q rad s Controller Stick Input in alpha rad q rad s Alpha sensor Low pass Filter
214. ck and select Insert Slide Master A new slide master appears with a copy of the slide layouts under it 12 28 Set Up a PowerPoint Template Presentation Views Click to edit Master tite style ick to edit Master tite style i i 5 Format the new slide master 6 Save the template 12 29 12 Programmatic PowerPoint Presentation Creation Format a Slide Layout To specify formatting to apply to a specific kind of slide use a slide layout 1 In PowerPoint open a template or a presentation that you want to use as a template 2 Inthe View tab in the Master Views section click Slide Master 3 Select the slide layout whose formatting you want to change For example in the default PPT API PowerPoint template click the Title and Content slide layout Tip To see the name of a slide layout hover over that layout A tooltip appears with the name of the slide layout and the number of slides that use that slide layout Click to edit Master title style Click to edit Master title style e Click to edit Master text styles e Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Click to edit Master title style 4 Inaslide master click in a placeholder whose formatting you want to change For example in the default PPT API template in the Title and Content slide layout click in Click to edit Master title style Select a formatting option such as 12 30 Set Up a PowerPoi
215. cks Details Ordered by Color File Create overrides for global filters in Polyspace reports Description This component adds detailed information about the run time checks to your report This component can also be used to override global filters in specific chapters of your report Use the following workflow when using filters in your report 1 To create filters that apply to all chapters of your report use the Report Customization Filtering component For more information see Report Customization Filtering 2 To override some of the filters in individual chapters use the Run time Checks Details Ordered by Color File component Select the Override Global Report filter box Properties Categories To Include The properties in table below apply to the inclusion of Polyspace Code Prover checks in your report Property Purpose Red Checks Specify whether to include red checks in your report Red checks indicate proven run time errors Gray Checks Specify whether to include gray checks in your report Gray checks indicate unreachable code Orange Checks Specify whether to include orange checks in your report Orange checks indicate possible run time errors Run time Checks Details Ordered by Color File Property Purpose Green Checks Specify whether to include green checks in your report Green checks indicate that an operation does not contain a specific run time error Spe
216. clude in a Word paragraph Use a block hole for content that you cannot embed in a paragraph You can configure the Word editor to provide visual cues that indicate whether a hole is an inline or block hole Note If you do not have a custom Word conversion template see Copy a Conversion Template on page 10 12 Open the custom Word template On the Word ribbon select the Home tab Click the Show Hide T button to display Word paragraph markers On the Word ribbon select the Developer tab Click Design Mode to Word markup for holes Coon Fr WON Click a hole to determine whether it is an inline or block hole Inline hole The bounding box does not include the paragraph marker rgChapterTitle rgChapterTitle title yl Block hole The bounding box does includes the paragraph marker rgChapterContent rgChapterContent Chaer content i rgChapterContent q 10 25 10 Template Based Report Formatting Avoid Changing Block Holes to Inline Holes Do not change a block hole to an inline hole You can accidentally change a block hole to an inline hole by removing the paragraph marker of an inline hole that is followed by a block hole For example if you delete the paragraph marker for the rgChapterTitle inline hole the rgCchapterContent block hole changes to an inline hole rgChapterTitlePrefix prefix rgChapterTitleNumber number rgChapterTitle title q 10 26 rgChapterContent C
217. crease as you increase or decrease the size of the displayed image Generally to achieve the best and most predictable display results use the default setting of Use image size Look Up Table Use image size Causes the image to appear the same size in the report as on screen default Fixed size Specifies the number and type of units Zoom Specifies the percentage maximum size and units of measure Size Specifies the size of the snapshot in the form w h width height format This field is active only if you choose Fixed size in the Scaling selection list Max size Specifies the maximum size of the snapshot in the form w h width height This field is active only if you choose Zoom from the Scaling selection list Units Allows you to enter units for the size of the snapshot This field is active only if you choose Zoom or Fixed size inthe Image size list box Alignment Only reports in PDF or RTF format support this property Auto Right Left Center Title Enter text to appear above the snapshot Caption Enter text to appear under the snapshot Insert Anything into Report Yes Figure and or table Class rptgen_sl csl blk lookup See Also Block Loop Model Loop Signal Loop System Loop 8 51 8 Components Alphabetical List 8 52 Machine Loop Run child components for specified Stateflow machines Description This component runs its child components for selected Stat
218. ctions mlreportgen dom Document createTemplate Classes mlreportgen dom Document mlreportgen dom DocumentPart mlreportgen dom DOCXPageFooter mlreportgen dom DOCXPageHeader mlreportgen dom DOCXSection Related Examples 7 Create a Microsoft Word Template on page 11 111 Create an HTML Template on page 11 122 Programmatic PowerPoint Presentation Creation Create a Presentation Program on page 12 2 Create PPT Objects on page 12 8 Import the PPT API Package on page 12 11 Get and Set PPT Object Properties on page 12 12 Create a Presentation Object to Hold Content on page 12 14 Generate a Presentation on page 12 15 Display Presentation Generation Messages on page 12 16 Presentation Formatting Approaches on page 12 20 Presentation Format Inheritance on page 12 24 Set Up a PowerPoint Template on page 12 26 Access PowerPoint Template Elements on page 12 37 Define a Style Using Format Objects on page 12 45 Use Format Properties on page 12 47 Update Presentation Content Programmatically on page 12 50 Create a Presentation Programmatically on page 12 61 Add Slides on page 12 73 Add and Replace Presentation Content on page 12 76 Create and Format Text on page 12 83 Create and Format Paragraphs on page 12 86 Create and Format Tables on page 12 89 Create and Format Pictures on page 12 94
219. cument HTMLToWordReport docx html0bj addHTML rpt lt p gt lt b gt Hello lt b gt lt i style color green gt World lt i gt lt p gt close rpt rptview rpt OutputPath Append an HTMLFile Object You can create an mlreportgen dom HTMLFile object and append it to a DOM report Append HTML File Contents to DOM Reports For example you can convert the contents of two HTML files to a DOM report in Word format This example assumes that there are HTML files called myHTMLfile1 htm1 and myHTMLfile2 htmlin the MATLAB current folder import mlreportgen dom rpt Document MyHTMLReport docx path myHTMLfile1 html htmlFile1 HTMLFile path htm1lFile2 HTMLFile myHTMLFile2 htm1 append htmlFile1 htmlFile2 append rpt htmlFile1 close rpt rptview rpt OutputPath Address Errors If you receive any MATLAB error messages fix the source HTML markup and append the HTML again You can use an HTML cleanup program such as HTML Tidy on the HTML file to fix many issues HTML Tidy also identifies issues you need to address manually After you clean up the HTML content append it to a DOM report For details see Use an HTML Cleanup Program on page 11 96 See Also mlreportgen dom Document addHTMLFile mlreportgen dom HTMLFile Related Examples Append HTML Content to DOM Reports on page 11 92 Use an HTML Cleanup Program on page 11 96 More About Appending HTML to
220. curs because Signal Builder blocks generate new handles when you load a model The report shows that the handles have changed To view the differences click the Compare button in the report and observe that handles called blockH and mode lH are different Filter Out Differences You can use the Filter button on the View tab to control display of categories of changes Turn off filtering to view all identified changes 7 13 7 Compare Simulink Model XML Files 7 14 In the Filter list select check boxes to enable or disable display of categories of changes in the report Use the filters to show only the changes you are interested in By default the report hides all nonfunctional changes such as repositioning of items Turn off filters to explore all differences including nonfunctional changes Try this if you cannot see changes you expected to see in the report Categories for filtering include Hide changes in lines Hide all changes to signal lines including functional changes Hide nonfunctional changes The report processing identifies certain items in the XML file as nonfunctional for example tags representing parameters such as block system chart or label positions font and color settings for blocks and lines and system print and display settings The report processing tries to identify consequential changes as nonfunctional that is changes as a consequence of another change For example if a block name changes
221. d Simulink Report Generator Product Description 1 2 Design and generate reports from models and simulations Simulink Report Generator lets you design and generate richly formatted Microsoft Word HTML and PDF reports from Simulink models and simulations The report generator lets you automatically create artifacts for Model Based Design such as system design descriptions and generated code requirements traceability and testing reports You can publish these artifacts in an interactive web format that colleagues can use without opening the model You can compare Simulink models review comparison results in an interactive XML report and merge model differences Simulink Report Generator produces artifacts for DO 178 ISO 26262 IEC 61508 and related industry standards Key Features e Automatic capture of simulation results and model specifications Report formatting based on Word and HTML report templates Interactive reports for viewing models generated code and analysis results in web browsers Report designer for creating custom Word HTML PDF RTF and XML reports e Artifacts for DO 178 IEC 61508 and ISO 26262 including system design model and code verification and requirements documentation API for forms based Word and HTML report generation Model differencing and merging with XML comparison tool System Design Documentation and Results Reporting System Design Documentation and Results Reporti
222. d Re 11 35 Object Oriented Report Creation 11 38 Simplify Filling in Forms 0 000005 11 39 Create and Format Text 0 0 0 0 0 0c e eee Create Text Create Special Characters 0 000 c eee nee Append HTML or XML Markup 05 Format Text Create and Format Paragraphs Create a Paragraph Create a Heading Format a Paragraph Create and Format Lists 0 0 0 000 0 eee Create an Unordered Tiste FS ha MA Se het a eT Create an Ordered List 0 0 000s Create a Multilevel List 0 0 Format Lists Create and Format Tables 0 05 Two Types of Tables Create a Table from a Two Dimensional Array Create a Table Using the Table entry Function Create a Table from Scratch 0 000000 0008 Format a Table Create a Formal Table 20 0 0 0 2 eee ee Format a Formal Table 0 0 0 0 ce eee Create and Format Table Rows 0 Format Table Columns 0 000000 cc cece ues Create and Format Table Entries Create Links Links 2 cox eis es oe 225 Create a Link Target Create an External Link 0 0 0 000004 Create an Internal Link 0 0008 Add Text or Images to Links 0000005 Create and For
223. d by a container For example the following script uses a single Style property to assign a color to all the entries in a table d Document MyDoc tableArray a b c d table append d tableArray table Style Color blue append d table close d Related Examples 7 Use Style Sheets on page 11 21 Use Format Objects on page 11 23 More About 7 Report Formatting Approaches on page 11 20 11 25 11 Create a Report Program Create Object Containers 11 26 You can use an mlreportgen dom Container object to create an HTML container object such as a div section or article not otherwise supported by the DOM API and to simulate HTML format inheritance in Word output In HTML output a Container object generates an HTML element of the type specified by its HTMLTag property and containing HTML elements corresponding to its DOM contents For example a Container object with the HTMLTag property div and that contains the text Hello World generates this markup lt div gt lt p gt lt span gt Hello World lt span gt lt p gt lt div gt The generated HTML container element has the class and style properties specified by the Container object StyleName and Style properties respectively The rules of HTML CSS cascading style sheets format inheritance assure that the generated children of the Container object inherit the formats specified by the Container object Style and StyleNa
224. d for the current system block or signal respectively Model Sets the linking anchor to the current model e System Sets the linking anchor to the current system Block Sets the linking anchor to the current block Annotation Sets the linking anchor to the current annotation Signal Sets the linking anchor to the current signal Note Use only one anchor per report each object For more information see the Simulink Summary Table component reference page Insert Anything into Report Yes A link and possibly text depending on attribute choices 8 142 Simulink Linking Anchor Class rptgen_sl csl_ obj_anchor See Also Block Loop Model Loop Signal Loop System Loop 8 143 8 Components Alphabetical List 8 144 Simulink Name Insert name of a Simulink model system block or signal into report Description This component inserts the name of a Simulink model system block or signal into the report Using this component as the first child component of a Chapter Subsection component allows the current Simulink model system block or signal name to be the chapter or section title Properties Object type Automatic Automatically selects the appropriate model system block or signal name as the Simulink object name to include in the report If the Model Loop component is the parent component the object name is the current model name If the System Loop Block Loop or Si
225. d that unauthorized use dissemination or copying of the information contained in it or attached to it is strictly prohibited If you have received this document in error please delete it and immediately notify the issuer PAGE1OF1 66 WORDS In the Create New Building Block dialog box in the Name field enter a unique name for the template Use this name in the constructor of a DocumentPart object to be based on this quick part For the first document part template you create in the template file in the Category list click Create New Category Create a category named mlreportgen Then select mlreportgen from the Category list Create Document Part Template Libraries Otherwise select mlreportgen from the Category list 8 Inthe Description field enter a template description and click OK 9 Delete the content that served as the prototype for the document part template 10 Save the template file Modify a Document Part Template in a Quick Part Gallery You can modify a document part template located in a Quick Part Gallery 1 Open the Word template that contains the document part template 2 Clickin the template where you want to create an instance of the document part template 3 Inthe Word ribbon select the Insert tab On the Insert ribbon click the Explore Quick Parts El button to display the Quick Part Gallery 5 To create an instance of the template in the parent template file in the Quick Part Gallery selec
226. dels to Web Views 2portgen webview html 2 sldemo_auto_climatecontrol 94 out 1 Logging and accessibility DataLogging off TestPoint off Code Generation SignalObjectPackage None Documentation Description Heat Transfer Equation from evaporator SEENA y w Tcomp m_dot h4 h1 y efficiency m_dot mass flow rate w speed of the engine Tcomp compressor torque h4 h1 enthalpy ci enthalpy Texit Exit Temp AC Try navigating to other parts of the Web view 5 Close the Web view Open the Web View In the MATLAB current folder or wherever you saved the zip file when you performed the steps in Export Specific Systems on page 5 13 extract the climate_control_webview zip file contents and open the webview html file 5 18 Create and Use a Web View Related Examples Export Models to Web View Files on page 5 4 Display and Navigate a Web View on page 5 6 More About Web Views on page 5 2 5 Export Simulink Models to Web Views Optional Web Views 5 20 Optional Web views provide information about a model in addition to the standard Web view information about blocks and signals in a model The Simulink Report Generator includes the following optional Web views that you can capture and view if you have Simulink Verification and Validation installed e Requirements Model coverage These optional views display requirements o
227. der select Present Working Directory from the Directory selection list Specify the report format In the File format selection list select Acrobat PDF Enter a description for the report In the Report description text box replace the existing contents with the following text Tip Copy and paste this code from the HTML documentation into the Report Explorer Simulink Dynamic Report This report opens up a model sets a block parameter several times simulates the model and collects the results Results that fall within a specified range are displayed in a table after the test is complete The report is configured to test the vdp model only By selecting the Eval String component immediately below the Report component you can modify model block parameter tested values 5 Click File gt Save As to save the report setup file as sSimulink_tutorial rpt 3 Creating Simulink Reports The Outline pane on the left displays the new file name EF Report Generator Fone 3 Report simulink_tutorial rpt To create the content for the report see Add Report Content with Components on page 3 5 Add Report Content with Components Add Report Content with Components In this section Report Components on page 3 5 Add MATLAB Code on page 3 7 Add a Title Page on page 3 12 Open the Simulink Model on page 3 14 Add Logical Then and Logical Else Componen
228. dges of the bins Plot into a specified axes Add a table slide tableSlide add slides Title and Content contents find tableSlide Title titleText3 Paragraph Parameters replace contents 1 titleText3 j paramTable Table paramTable Table colSpecs 2 ColSpec 6in colSpecs 1 ColSpec 3in paramTable ColSpecs colSpecs tri TableRow tri Style Bold true triteiText Paragraph Value trite2Text Paragraph Description trite1 TableEntry trite2 TableEntry append trite1 triteiText append trite2 trite2Text append tri trite1 append tri trite2 tr2 TableRow tr2teiText Paragraph auto tr2teiText Font Courier New tr2te2Text Paragraph The default auto algorithm chooses a bin width to append tr2te2Text cover the data range and reveal the shape of the underlying distribt tr2te1 TableEntry tr2te2 TableEntry append tr2te1 tr2teiText append tr2te2 tr2te2Text append tr2 tr2te1 append tr2 tr2te2 12 71 12 Programmatic PowerPoint Presentation Creation 12 72 tr3 TableRow tr3teiText Paragraph scott tr3teiText Font Courier New tr3te2Text Paragraph Scott s rule is optimal if the data is close append tr3te2Text to being jointly normally distributed This rule is append tr3te2Text appropriate for most other distributions as well tr3te1 TableEntry tr3te
229. dialog box e Bitmap 16m color e Bitmap 256 color e Black and white encapsulated PostScript e Black and white encapsulated PostScript TIFF e Black and white encapsulated PostScript2 Look Up Table Black and white encapsulated PostScript2 TIFF Black and white PostScript Black and white PostScript2 Color encapsulated PostScript Color encapsulated PostScript TIFF Color encapsulated PostScript2 Color encapsulated PostScript2 TIFF Color PostScript Color PostScript2 JPEG high quality image JPEG medium quality image JPEG low quality image PNG 24 bit image TIFF compressed TIFF uncompressed Windows metafile Paper orientation Landscape Portrait Rotated Use figure orientation Uses the orientation for the figure which you set with the orient command Full page image PDF only In PDF reports scales images to fit the full page minimizes page margins and maximizes the size of the image by using either a portrait or landscape orientation For more information about paper orientation see the orient command in the MATLAB documentation Image size Allows you to specify the image size in the report by selecting Use figure PaperPositionMode setting and setting the PaperPositionMode property of the Handle Graphics figure 8 49 8 Components Alphabetical List 8 50 e Automatic same size as on screen Custom Specifies a custom image size Set the image size using the Size field a
230. ding rule violations to display You can display violations for the following set of coding rules MISRA C rules MISRA AC AGC rules MISRA C rules JSF C rules Custom coding rules Include Files Rules with No Problems Detected If you select this option the table displays e Files containing no coding rule violations Rules that your code does not violate Display by Using this option you can break down the display of coding rule violations by Rule number Coding Rules Summary e File 8 27 8 Components Alphabetical List 8 28 Configuration Parameters Create table of analysis options and coding rules Description This component creates two tables e Polyspace Settings The analysis options that you used to obtain your results The table lists command line version of the options along with their values Coding Rules Configuration The coding rules whose violations you checked for The table lists the rule number rule description and other information about the rules Defects Summary Defects Summary Create table of Polyspace Bug Finder defects Description This component creates a table of Polyspace Bug Finder defects From this table you can see the number of defects of each type Properties Include Checkers with No Defects Detected If you select this option the table includes all defects that Polyspace Bug Finder detects including those that do not occur in you
231. dium quality image JPEG low quality image PNG 24 bit image Scalable vector graphics SVG TIFF compressed TIFF uncompressed Windows metafile Paper orientation Portrait Landscape Rotated Largest dimension vertical Positions the image so that its largest dimension is vertical Use Chart PaperOrientation setting Uses the paper orientation setting for the chart Use the Simulink PaperOrientation parameter to specify the orientation Full page image PDF only In PDF reports scales images to fit the full page minimizes page margins and maximizes the size of the image by using either a portrait or landscape orientation For more information about paper orientation see the orient command in the MATLAB documentation Image sizing Shrink image to minimum font size specified in Stateflow Hierarchy Loop Resizes the image so that the text label font size is the minimum font size Fixed and Zoom Specifies the size of the image Scaling Specifies the percentage of the image size to which to scale it 8 191 8 Components Alphabetical List Maximum size Specifies the maximum size for the snapshot in the generated report in the selected units Use width height format In the units text box select Inches Centimeters Points or Normalized Use printframe Inserts a frame around your image Use the default frame or create a custom one Use printframe paper settings Uses the dimensions and parame
232. does not have any of these components as its parent selecting this option reports on all systems in all models Custom use system list Reports on a list of specified systems Specify the full path of each system e lt VariableName gt Inserts the value of a variable from the MATLAB workspace The lt gt notation can denote a string or cell array For more information see lt VariableName gt Notation on the Text component reference page Include subsystems in Simulink functions Specifies whether to include subsystems in Simulink functions By default this option is enabled 8 203 8 Components Alphabetical List 8 204 Loop Options Sort Systems Specifies how to sort systems Alphabetically by system name default Sorts systems alphabetically by name By number of blocks in system Sorts systems by number of blocks The list shows systems by decreasing number of blocks that is the system with the largest number of blocks appears first in the list By system depth Sorts systems by their depth in the model By traversal order Sorts systems in traversal order Search for Reports only on blocks with the specified property name property value pairs To enable searching click the check box In the first row of the property name and property value table click inside the edit box delete the existing text and type ae the property name and value To add a row use the Add row button E For inf
233. down gt steady state bmn sfear 2 dst agence ieee amp sf_carmdl ein sre a Impaler toraue PERTE oi ai the Simulation menu ernie aaa sl to run the simulation sre E lerrot dst a Enge Parameter apin User inputs Wee vehicle kph ehiclemph ivetow Name ie Brate bianna ax throttle s6 throttle angel Tarsmission speed Double click to shit logic vehicle open the GUI vesa andselectan input maneuver A yellow amp twats gt Copyright 1997 2042 The MathWorks Inc Ready nex ods 7 18 Display Items in Original Models rp Gu Eg meer ne ones IE 2 Merge Node cares Ge Redo SiftJogc Pa statetow Fie Edit Find Compare Selected Marge Parametar Parameter Pals stars gt ani chicle kph yellow amp throttle Doti E User Inputs 2 gt Branch te Branch gt Branch bt Branch gt Mux2 TE Branch gt Outt 1 AE Engine t gt transmission 1 E Mux gt vehicle kph yellow amp throttle 1 BE Stateflow kickoown S fourth gt third 88fourth gt second sre dst S selection_state Dhickd eEsteady state gt junction dst Blackdown gt steady state dst oS amp kickdown gt steady state dst 2 SBjunction gt kickdown dst SRjunction gt downshifting sre Ps dst vehicle mph yellow amp throttle TE User Inputs 2 gt Branch Branch gt Mux 2 Et Engine 1
234. e For more information about using Word styles see the Microsoft Word documentation Add Styles to a Word Template To add a new style to a template 1 In Word open the Styles dialog box 11 118 Modify Styles in a Microsoft Word Template Find aD Replace 11 A A Aa 21 1 papbcede aaBbcede AaBbCi De Eh Calibri Body Paste p 2 ay f lt 1 se y B I U x x A Z A SA s FE T Normal No Spac Heading1 y DS Select Clipboard Font E Paragraph E Styles as Editing a Styles a Clear All Subtle Reference Intense Reference Book Title List Paragraph No Spacing T Heading 1 fa Heading 2 fa Title fa Subtitle fa Subtle Emphasis a Emphasis a Intense Emphasis a Strong a Quote fa Intense Quote fa a a a T Show Preview Disable Linked Styles Aa Ese 44 Options 2 Inthe Style dialog box click the Manage Styles button 11 119 T1 Create a Report Program cere ee le Select Styles G Editing Styles 7 Clear All Normal No Spacing a asvoosbibioooosob Is is Bb Heading1 Heading 2 Title Subtitle Subtle Emphasis Emphasis Intense Emphasis Strong Quote Intense Quote a Subtle Reference Intense Reference Book Title List Paragraph Show Preview Disable Linked Styles tul 3 EN Options Manage Styles 3 If applicable select an existing style to use as a starting point for the new style 4 Click the New Style b
235. e slides Children 2 Name ReferenceSlide refSlide find slides ReferenceSlide introSlide add slides Title and Content refSlide contents find introSlide Title replace contents 1 Histogram Plots introText Paragraph You can use the code Text histogram code Font Courier New append introText code append introText function to create many types of plots contents find introSlide Content replace contents 1 introText Generate and Open the Presentation Generate the PowerPoint presentation Use a close method with a Presentation object close slides Open the presentation myUpdatedPresentation pptx file On a Windows platform you can open the presentation in MATLAB 12 57 12 Programmatic PowerPoint Presentation Creation 12 58 if ispc winopen slidesFile end Code for myUpdatedPresentation Here is the complete PPT API program to create the myUpdatedPresentation presentation Note This code requires that the myNewPPTPresentation pptx file be in your current folder To generate that presentation click myNewPPTPresentation program and execute the code in MATLAB Before you run the code for myUpdatedPresentation be sure that the existing presentation includes the changes described in Set Up the Existing Presentation on page 12 54 import mlreportgen ppt slidesFile myUpdatedPresentation pptx slides Presentation
236. e LinkTarget ExternalLink InternalLink CharEntity AutoNumber A block hole can contain a Paragraph Table OrderedList UnorderedList DocumentPart and Group Create an Inline Hole Unzip the template using the unzipTemplate command Open the root html or report htm1 document of the template in an HTML or text editor Place the insertion point in the paragraph where you want to create a hole Add code that uses this pattern lt p gt lt span gt lt div class Hole data default hole style name STYLE NAME data hole id HOLEID gt lt span class HoleId gt HOLEID lt span gt lt span class HoleDesc gt HOLE_DESCRIPTION lt span gt lt div gt lt span gt lt p gt Add Holes in an HTML Template 5 Replace STYLE_NAME with the name of a default text HTML span element style to use for formatting Text objects appended to this hole If a Text object appended to this hole does not specify a style name the DOM API sets the text object StyleName property to the default style name The style must be defined in the style sheet of the template Defining in the template a default text style for hole content eliminates the need to format hole content programmatically Set HOLEID to the ID of the hole and use HOLE_DESCRIPTION to describe the hole Zip the template using the zipTemplate command Templates based on the DOM API default HTML template contain a style sheet for holes that highlights the hole IDs when
237. e default PPT API template To do so when you create a Presentation object specify the template that you want to customize 1 Ina PPT API program create an empty Presentation object without specifying a template The PPT API uses its default PowerPoint template Set Up a PowerPoint Template Generate the presentation Open the presentation and customize the template Save the presentation with a different name from the original presentation Use a different name so that if the PPT program runs again it does not overwrite the template presentation with the default template formatting Use the presentation with the customized template as the template for a new PPT API presentation For example if the customized template presentation is called myTemplate then use myTemplate when you create a PPT API presentation newPresentation Presentation mySecondPresentation myTemplate Global Presentation Formatting Using a Slide Master To specify formatting to apply throughout a presentation use a slide master The formatting in a slide master is the default formatting for all its child slide layouts In PowerPoint open a template or a presentation that you want to use as a template In the View tab in the Master Views section click Slide Master For example using the default PPT API template 12 27 12 Programmatic PowerPoint Presentation Creation iP 3 H gt myTemplate pptx PowerPoint FILE SLIDE MASTER
238. e processing can be quite time consuming To minimize compilations consider using separate reports to report on the contents of a model and on the results of simulating that model Evaluate this string after Specify MATLAB code for processing to occur after the generation report is generated For example you could specify to close a model Location of Report Output File Choose a folder to store the report file You must have write privileges for that folder Folder In the Report Explorer in the Report Options dialog box use the Directory field to specify the name of the folder in which to store the generated report file Specify a folder to which you have write privileges The following table summarizes the report file location options Folder Option The same folder as the report Same as setup file setup file The current working folder Present working directory Temporary folder Temporary directory Another folder Custom Use the Browse button to select from a list of directories You can use lt VariableName gt notation to specify a folder in the Custom text box For more information see lt VariableName gt Notation on the Text component reference page 4 11 A Generate a Report 4 12 Report File Name In the Report Explorer in the Report Options dialog box use the Filename field to specify a file name for the report file Select one of the foll
239. e use myTable Table magic 5 entry3row2 entry myTable 2 3 Alternatively you can access a table row by using the Children property of a Table object You can access a table entry by using the Children property of a TableRow object For example to access the third entry in the second row of myTable myTable Table magic 5 entry3row2 myTable Children 2 Children 3 Format a Column To format a column in a table use one or more mlreportgen ppt ColSpec objects Create a ColSpec object for each column that you want to format and specify the formatting for each ColSpec object Then define an array of the ColSpec objects and use that with the ColSpecs property of the Table object The format specification for a table row takes precedence over the format specification for a column import mlreportgen ppt SlidesFile myColSpecs pptx slides Presentation slidesFile add slides Title and Content t Table magic 12 t Style HAlign center colSpecs 2 colSpecs 1 ColSpec 1 5in ColSpec 1 5in Create and Format Tables colSpecs 1 BackgroundColor colSpecs 2 BackgroundColor t ColSpecs colSpecs t row 2 Style VAlign bottom t row 2 BackgroundColor tan t entry 2 3 FontColor red t entry 2 3 FontSize 30pt red green replace slides Content t close slides if ispc winopen slides OutputPath end When you create a ColSpec objec
240. e Columns and Rows To add or delete a column or row select a cell and then click one of the buttons described in the following table Note You cannot delete a row or column when it is the only row or column in the table Button Action u Add column added to the left of the selected column im Property Table Components Button Action x Delete selected column Add row added above the selected row E Delete selected row Resize Columns To resize the width of a column click and drag its vertical borders as needed Merge and Split Cells To merge or split table cells select a row and then click one of the buttons described in the following table Button Action Merge cells downward Merge cells to the right Split cells Display or Hide Cell Borders To toggle cell borders on and off 1 Place your cursor in a cell and right click to invoke its context menu 2 Choose Cell borders gt Top Bottom Right or Left to toggle the specified border on or off 6 15 6 Add Content with Components 6 16 Zoom and Scroll You can zoom in and out of the table with the zoom buttons which are located to the left of the horizontal scroll bar Button Action i Zoom in i Zoom out You can scroll vertically and horizontally using the table scroll bars Select a Table To display property name property value pai
241. e Defined Sections When you open a Document or DocumentPart object in a report program the DOM API creates a hole and an associated DOCXSection property object for each section defined in the document or document part template The hole ID for the first section is start The hole ID for the second section is sect2 and so on You can use the moveTONextHole function to move from section to section and from hole to hole within a section At each section hole the DOM API sets a document or document part CurrentDOCXSection property to the DOCXSection object associated with that object The DOCXSection object reflects the properties of the current section as defined in the template For example if you have defined the page orientation of that section to be portrait the page orientation is set as portrait in the current DOCXSection object You can change the template defined section properties programmatically For example the page orientation of the DOM default Word template is portrait This example shows how to change the orientation to landscape to accommodate wide tables The code swaps the height and width of the page to reflect the new page orientation import mlreportgen dom Create Microsoft Word Page Layout Sections rpt Document test docx open rpt sect rpt CurrentDOCXSection pageSize sect PageSize pageSize Orientation landscape saveHeight pageSize Height pageSize Height pageSize Width p
242. e Footers and Headers Create Page Footers and Headers In this section Create Page Headers and Footers in a Template on page 11 131 Create Page Headers and Footers Programmatically on page 11 133 You can create as many as three page headers and three page footers for a Word report section One for the first page of the section One for even pages One for odd pages You can create report page headers and footers programmatically or in the template used to create a report or report part You can append content to both template defined and programmatically defined headers and footers Create Page Headers and Footers in a Template You can use Word to create page headers and footers in the main template of a report For information on creating headers and footers see the Word documentation When you open a report the DOM API 1 Reads the headers and footers from the template and converts them to DOCXPageHeader and DOCXPageFooter objects respectively 2 Associates the headers and footer objects with the DOCXSection object that defines the properties of the section that contains the headers and footers 3 Adds the headers and footers to your report as your code navigates the sections defined by the template As your report generation program navigates the sections it can append content to the template defined headers and footers Access Template Defined Headers and Footers To append content t
243. e Model Loop loops over sldemo_auto_ climate elec ClimateControlSystem and its subsystems h Under Section Options select the Create section for each object in loop check box Selecting this option creates separate sections in the generated report for each model over which the component loops The Model Loop properties pane looks as follows 8 73 8 Components Alphabetical List 8 74 Model Loop Models to Include Models to Include sldemo_auto_climate_elec let x le Model Options Active Model name sidemo_auto_cimate_elecmd a Traverse model Selected system s and children v Look under masks All masks X Follow lbrarylinks Do not folow libraryiinks H Modelreference Donot follow model reference boks x I Indude all variants Starting system s sidemo_auto_climate_elec ClimateControlSystem Section Options IV Create section for each object in loop I Display the object type in the section title I Create link anchor for each object in loop Revert Help Save the report by clicking File gt Save Add a System Loop as a child of the Model Loop component Add a System Snapshot component as a child of the System Loop component This step creates snapshots of all the subsystems of ClimateControlSystem in the generated report In the Library pane in the middle double click System Snapshot By default Model Explorer adds this component as a child of the System
244. e Outline pane on the left select the Model Loop Chapter component In the Library pane in the middle scroll down to the Simulink category and then double click the System Snapshot component This component inserts an image of the current model into your report The Properties pane on the right looks as follows 3 25 3 Creating Simulink Reports 3 26 System Snapshot Snapshot Format Automatic SL format z Orientation Portrait z Scaling Automatic Z J Size 7 9 inches Units Inches Max Size 7 9 inches Zoom 100 Properties _ Include callouts to describe visible objects E Use printframe _ rptdefaultframe fig Advanced gt gt 3 Inthe Properties pane on the right a Select Zoom from the Scaling selection list b Enter 70 as the value 4 Inthe Outline pane on the left select the System Snapshot component 5 Click the down arrow on the toolbar once to move it under the Paragraph component 1 958 Model Loop Chapter current model 88 Paragraph This report demonstra i BB System Snapshot 6 Save the report setup file Add a Loop for Processing the Model Note This section builds on the previous tasks described in the step by step example summarized in Create a Simulink Report Generator Report on page 3 2 To see the completed report setup file open Simulink Dynamic Report The report is for the vdp model Add Report Content with Components
245. e Property Value PROPERTY Value e Property Value PROPERTY Value Alignment Aligns the contents of the table cell Center e Left e Right e Double justified Lower border Displays the lower border of the table in the generated report Right border Displays the right border of the table in the generated report Fixed Point Property Table Creating Custom Tables To create a custom table edit a preset table such as the Blank 4x4 table Add and delete rows and add properties To open the Edit Table dialog box click Edit For details about creating custom property tables see Property Table Components on page 6 6 Insert Anything into Report Yes Table Class rptgen_fp cfp prop table See Also Fixed Point Summary Table 8 41 8 Components Alphabetical List 8 42 Fixed Point Summary Table Table of specified fixed point block properties or parameters Description This component displays properties or parameters of specified fixed point blocks in a table Properties Table title Choose a table title in the generated report Automatic Generates a title automatically from the parameter Custom Specifies a custom title Property Columns Property name This field displays the object properties to include in the Summary Table in the generated report To add a property 1 Select the appropriate property level in the menu 2 Select the property to add from the
246. e Report Explorer In the Report Explorer select the template to move In the Template Browser select Move template In the file browser navigate to the new location for the template file Enter a file name using the appropriate extension for the type of template dotx or htmtx Click Save The Path property in the Template Browser shows the new location Related Examples Copy a Conversion Template on page 10 12 Open a Conversion Template on page 10 14 Delete a Conversion Template on page 10 17 More About Report Conversion Templates on page 10 2 Delete a Conversion Template Delete a Conversion Template 1 In Report Explorer select Tools gt Edit Document Conversion Template The Template Browser appears in the Report Explorer 2 Inthe Report Explorer select the template to delete 3 Inthe Template Browser select Delete template and click Yes Related Examples Copy a Conversion Template on page 10 12 Open a Conversion Template on page 10 14 Move a Conversion Template on page 10 16 More About Report Conversion Templates on page 10 2 10 17 10 Template Based Report Formatting Customize Microsoft Word Report Styles 10 18 In this section Customize Default Microsoft Word Component Styles on page 10 18 Create Styles in a Microsoft Word Template on page 10 18 You can customize report styles in a custom Word
247. e empty columns To add a property 1 Select the category from the property category drop down box 2 Select a property in the properties list lt Click the Add property button The property appears in the Property columns table 6 19 6 Add Content with Components 6 20 To remove a property from the table 1 Select the property in the Property columns table i x Click the Delete property x button The property name is removed from the Property columns table Note After making changes in the Report Explorer click Apply to make the changes take effect You can define your own properties by entering their names into the Property columns table using valid variable notation For more information see lt VariableName gt Notation on the Text component reference documentation Set Relative Column Widths To apply a relative column width to the summary table columns in the generated report double click on the Width column of a row in the Property columns table If you do not specify a value for this field column widths automatically set Set Object Row Options You can use the Object Rows pane to set options for table rows including anchor filtering and sorting options Select Insert anchor for each row to place an anchor in each table row in the report Use the Include figures list to specify what objects to include in the summary table Summary table components in figloop tutorial r
248. e locale system language settings through the Oracle Java interface therefore they should use the language specified on your system Alternatively you can change the language directly in Java from the MATLAB command line The following example sets the language to Italian java util Locale setDefault java util Locale ITALY Alternatively you can set the preferred language directly in your rpt file 1 Right click the Report component and select Send to Workspace This displays the properties of the report which are stored in the variable ans Access the report s Language property from the command line through this variable By default Language is auto which indicates that the system s default language is in use 2 Override the default value of Language by setting this property to your desired language for example en for English or it for Italian 4 17 A Generate a Report Convert XML Documents to Different File Formats 4 18 In this section Why Convert XML Documents on page 4 18 Convert XML Documents Using the Report Explorer on page 4 18 Convert XML Documents Using the Command Line on page 4 20 Edit XML Source Files on page 4 20 Why Convert XML Documents You can generate a report in a different output file format without regenerating it by using either the Report Explorer File Converter or the rptconvert command These utilities convert DocBook XML source files crea
249. e of Contents Create a Table of Contents In this section Create a Microsoft Word Table of Contents on page 11 77 Create an HTML Table of Contents on page 11 79 Set Outline Levels of Section Heads on page 11 81 Create a Microsoft Word Table of Contents The DOM API relies on an automatic table of contents TOC generation feature of Word to generate a table of contents in a DOM Word report With the Word TOC generation feature you create an item called a TOC reference in a Word document where you want a TOC to appear You create and set the outline line level of the paragraphs typically section heads that you want to include in the generated TOC Finally you have Word update the TOC to include the content of the paragraphs at the indicated outline level You use a very similar procedure for Word reports you create using the DOM API except that you create the section heads programmatically instead of interactively To generate a table of contents in a DOM Word report perform these steps 1 Create a table of contents reference in the Word template to specify where in the report to generate the TOC See Create a Word Table of Contents Reference on page 11 77 2 Set the outline levels of the section heads that you want to appear in the table of contents See Set Outline Levels of Section Heads on page 11 81 3 Update the generated document See Update the TOC in a Word Report on pa
250. e parameter is empty the report excludes the parameter from the generated report Insert Anything into Report Yes Text Class rptgen_sl csl_ property See Also Block Loop Model Loop System Loop 8 147 8 Components Alphabetical List 8 148 Simulink Property Table Insert table that reports on model level property name property value pairs Description This component inserts a table that reports on model level property name property value pairs Properties Select Object Choose the object for the Property Table in the generated report Model e System e Block e Signal e Annotation For more information about selecting object types in Property Table components see Select Object Types on page 6 9 Table Select a preset table which is already formatted and set up in the preset table list in the upper left corner of the attributes page Preset table Specifies the type of the object property table e Default e Simulation parameters e Version information e Simulink Coder information Simulink Property Table e Summary req Simulink Coder e Blank 4x4 To apply a preset table select the table and click Apply Split property value cells Split property name property value pairs into separate cells For the property name and property value to appear in adjacent horizontal cells select the Split property value cells check box In this case the table is in split mode so
251. e sheet CSS use the ul element for unordered list styles and the 01 element for ordered list styles You can use the parent element selector gt to define multilevel list styles For example this CSS code defines the appearance of a two level unordered list that can contain ordered or unordered sublists ul MyUnorderedList list style type disc ul MyUnorderedList gt ul list style type circle ul MyUnorderedList gt ol list style type decimal For information about editing a cascading style sheet CSS see documentation such as the W8Schools com CSS tutorial See Also Classes mlreportgen dom ListItem mlreportgen dom OrderedList mlreportgen dom UnorderedList Functions mlreportgen dom OrderedList append Related Examples i Use Style Sheets on page 11 21 11 57 11 Create a Report Program Create and Format Tables 11 58 In this section Two Types of Tables on page 11 58 Create a Table from a Two Dimensional Array on page 11 59 Create a Table Using the Table entry Function on page 11 59 Create a Table from Scratch on page 11 60 Format a Table on page 11 61 Create a Formal Table on page 11 66 Format a Formal Table on page 11 66 Create and Format Table Rows on page 11 67 Format Table Columns on page 11 68 Create and Format Table Entries on page 11 69 Two Types of Tables You can use the DOM API to crea
252. e this 8 128 Simulink Data Dictionary Loop File Edit View Tools Help USE xanax 7 BR tHe 4 Report Generator 4 Report MMexampleDDonly rpt The resulting report looks like this Simulink Data Dictionary Presentation Format Table title style name Auto v rgTableTite Table style name Auto if rgUnruledTable Options V Indude child data dictionaries E Make separate table for each child E Indude child dictionaries list Sections to report on V Design Data F Configurati E Other Data Data type Last modified Last modified by Status HRSESoess8 A amp S 8 129 8 Components Alphabetical List 8 130 Table of Contents LH Michael Simulink MMmodels MM_dict_2copy sidd 2HoMichael Simulink MMmodels testDD sldd Chapter 1 H Michael Simulink MMmodels MM_dict_2copy sldd MM _Entryl Name MM_Entry1 Value 27 class double LastModified 2015 Jan 20 01 15 09 619512 Status Unchanged MM_d2_Entryl Name MM_d2_Entry1 Value 27 class double LastModified 2015 Jan 30 23 30 23 182407 Status Modified MM_d2_phone_number Name MM_d2_phone_number Value 508 647 8103 class char LastModified 2015 Jan 30 23 30 05 414130 Status Modified MM_phone_number Chapter 2 H Michael Simulink MMmodels testDD sldd Name MM_phone_number Value 508 647 8103 class char LastModified 2015 Jan 20 01 15 09 782512
253. ear under the snapshot Insert Anything into Report Yes Figure Class rptgen_sl csl blk _toworkspace See Also Figure Loop 8 215 8 Components Alphabetical List 8 216 Truth Table Report on truth tables in Simulink and Stateflow models Description The Truth Table component reports on truth tables in Simulink and Stateflow models It displays both the condition table and the action table The parent component of the Truth Table determines its behavior e Model Loop Reports on all truth tables in the current model e System Loop Reports on all truth tables in the current system e Block Loop Reports on all truth tables in the current block e Signal Loop Reports on all truth tables in the current signal Title Title Specifies a title for the truth table e No title e Use Stateflow name Custom Condition Table Specify display parameters for the condition table Show header Displays the column headers in the table Show number Displays the condition number column in the table Show condition Displays the condition column in the table Show description Displays the description column in the table Wrap if column count Specifies how many columns to display before creating a table continuation If the specified number is greater than the number of columns that can appear on the page some columns do not appear in the report Truth Table Action Table Show header Dis
254. earch Results You can sort the search results in alphabetical order In the search results table click the Name or Parent column Navigate Between Search Results and Model Elements To see the corresponding search result for a highlighted model element click the element To highlight the model element for a search result click the search result The Object Inspector pane to the right of the model updates to reflect the selected model element or search result Create and Use a Web View Create and Use a Web View In this section About This Tutorial on page 5 13 Export Specific Systems on page 5 13 Navigate the Web View on page 5 15 Display Parameters and Properties of Blocks and Signals on page 5 16 Open the Web View on page 5 18 About This Tutorial This tutorial takes you through the steps to export a Simulink model to a Web view You create a Web view from the Simulink model window using the sldemo_auto_climatecontrol model which is provided with the Simulink software This model simulates the working of an automatic climate control system in a car Export Specific Systems When you create the Web view you can specify export options 1 At the MATLAB command prompt enter sldemo_auto_climatecontrol to open the Simulink model 2 Inthe Simulink Editor select File gt Export Model to gt Web 5 Export Simulink Models to Web Views 5 14 7 Flee
255. eb View 0 0 0 0 cee eens 5 13 About This Tutorial 0 0 0 0 0 0 ce ee 5 13 Export Specific Systems Navigate the Web View Display Parameters and Properties of Blocks and Signals Open the Web View Optional Web Views Capture and View Optional Web View Information Capture Optional Web View Information for a Model View Optional Web View Information 5 13 5 15 5 16 5 18 5 20 5 21 5 21 5 21 Add Content with Components 6 Components Component Formatting osre crre 0 0 0 ateri enta eee Report Structure Components Table Formatting Components 00 Property Table Components About Property Table Components 00005 Open the Example Report Template Examine the Property Table Output sce hs hed od ed atin ste Select Object Types 0 cee eee Display Property Name Prop erty Value Pairs Edit Table Titles 0 60 20 ce wee ea ele aw sa ee soe aoa bee ee Enter Text into Table Cells Add Replace and Delete Properties in Tables Format Table Columns Rows and Cells Zoom and Scroll Select a Table Summary Table Components About Summary Table Components Open the Example Report Template Select Object Types 0 0 0 eee Add and Remove Properties S
256. ecify bold as the default for text in the TableEntry by using the Style property of the TableEntry object te tableEntry Use Format Properties te Style Bold true Related Examples Define a Style Using Format Objects on page 12 45 Set Up a PowerPoint Template on page 12 26 More About Presentation Formatting Approaches on page 12 20 12 49 12 Programmatic PowerPoint Presentation Creation Update Presentation Content Programmatically 12 50 In this section Generate the Existing Presentation on page 12 50 Updates to the Presentation on page 12 52 Set Up the Existing Presentation on page 12 54 Import the PPT API Package on page 12 55 Create the Presentation Object on page 12 55 Replace a Picture on page 12 55 Replace Text with Links on page 12 56 Replace a Table on page 12 56 Insert a New Slide on page 12 57 Generate and Open the Presentation on page 12 57 Code for myUpdatedPresentation on page 12 58 You can use the PPT API to update content programmatically in an existing PowerPoint presentation Generate the Existing Presentation This example updates content in the PowerPoint presentation myNewPPTPresentation Although you create the presentation programmatically after you generate it the presentation is like any other PowerPoint presentation To generate the presentation click myNewPPTPres
257. ed checks or all checks Choose an option from the dropdown list your report Files to include Specify files to include or Enter a regular MATLAB exclude from your report expression Check types to include Specify Polyspace Code Enter a regular MATLAB Prover checks to include in expression 8 89 8 Components Alphabetical List 8 90 Property Purpose User Action Function names to Specify functions to include Enter a regular MATLAB include or exclude from your report expression Classification types to Specify classifications to Enter a regular MATLAB include include or exclude from your expression report Status types to include Specify statuses to include Enter a regular MATLAB or exclude from your report expression Comments to include Specify comments to include Enter a regular MATLAB or exclude from your report expression More About Regular Expressions Requirements Block Loop Requirements Block Loop Apply child components to blocks with requirements Description This component applies its child components to blocks with associated requirements Report On Automatic list from context If selected this option reports on all blocks in the current context The parent of the Requirements Block Loop component determines its context e Model Loop Reports on all blocks with requirements in the current model e System Loop Reports o
258. ed report Automatic Generates a title automatically from the parameter e Custom Specifies a custom title Parent block Includes a column in the table that includes the name of the block which contains the reported variable Calling string Includes the MATLAB code that calls the reported variable Include fixed point functions sfix ufix Includes Fixed Point Designer functions in the report Variables Include table of variables Includes a table of Simulink variables in the generated report Table title Specifies a title for the table in the generated report Automatic Generates a title automatically from the parameter e Custom Specifies a custom title Simulink Functions and Variables Include Workspace I O parameters Reports on variables that contain parameters with time vectors and state matrices Set these parameters in the Workspace I O pane in the Simulation Parameters dialog box in a Simulink model In the following table if any of the entries in the first column are on the component looks for the variable listed in the second column If the component finds the variable in the workspace it includes it in the report Parameter name Variable name LoadExternaliInput ExternalInput SaveTime TimeSaveName SaveState StateSaveName SaveOutput OutputSaveName LoadInitialState InitialState SaveFinalState FinalStateName Parent block Includes the name of the bloc
259. edit the cascading style sheet CSS For information about editing a cascading style sheet see documentation such as the W23Schools com CSS tutorial Save the style sheet Related Examples Generate a Report Using a Template on page 10 4 Customize Microsoft Word Report Styles on page 10 18 Customize Microsoft Word Part Templates 10 37 10 Template Based Report Formatting More About Report Conversion Templates 10 38 Create a Report Program Create a Report Program on page 11 3 Document Object Model on page 11 4 Construct a DOM Object on page 11 6 Import the DOM API Package on page 11 7 Get and Set DOM Object Properties on page 11 8 Create a Document Object to Hold Content on page 11 9 Add Content to a Report on page 11 11 Clone a DOM Object on page 11 13 Add Content as a Group on page 11 14 Stream a Report on page 11 16 Report Packages on page 11 17 Close a Report on page 11 18 Display a Report on page 11 19 Report Formatting Approaches on page 11 20 Use Style Sheets on page 11 21 Use Format Objects on page 11 23 Use Format Properties on page 11 24 Format Inheritance on page 11 25 Create Object Containers on page 11 26 Form Based Reporting on page 11 28 Fill the Blanks in a Report Form on page 11 29 Use Subforms in a Report on page 11 31 Cre
260. eflow machines The behavior of this component depends on its parent component If it has no parent the Machine Loop runs its child components for all machines If it has the Model Loop is its parent it runs its child components for all machines in the model Loop Options Search Stateflow If selected searches states that you specify in the field that appears under the check box Section Options Create section for each object in loop Inserts a section in the generated report for each object in the loop Display the object type in the section title Inserts the object type automatically into the section title in the generated report Create link anchor for each object in loop Creates a hyperlink to each object in the loop Insert Anything into Report Yes inserts a section if you select the Create section for each object in loop option Class rptgen_sf csf_machine loop Machine Loop See Also Model Loop 8 53 8 Components Alphabetical List 8 54 Missing Requirements Block Loop Apply all child components to blocks that do not have requirements Description This component runs its child components for each block in the current system model or signal that do not have associated requirements For more information on working with looping components see Logical and Looping Components on page 6 21 Report On This pane describes the type of object on which this component operates
261. either a portrait or landscape orientation Scaling Controls the size of the image in the image file Automatic default Automatically scales the image to output dimensions Custom Specifies image size Zoom Enlarges or reduces the image size to the percent that you specify Use Max Size to specify the maximum size other than the default for the image Note Selecting the Use printframe deactivates the Custom and Zoom options and automatically scales the image to the print frame size Properties Options Include callouts to describe visible objects Displays descriptive callouts for visible objects 8 207 8 Components Alphabetical List Use printframe Prints a frame around the image You can use the default frame rptdefaultframe fig or use the Frame Editor to build a custom frame For more information see the frameedit function in Simulink documentation The default frame is five inches wide and four inches high It includes the name of the system and the model folder This frame is optimized for use with a portrait paper orientation The Flight Control Model in the 14 Simulink model appears here with the default Simulink Report Generator frame option Pa sldemo_fl4 File Edit View Display Diagram Simulation Analysis Code Tools Help v ii v 60 o amp xz sldemo_f14 P sidemo_f14 gt v a F 14 Longitudinal Flight Control a PE Pilot This example models a flight c
262. elds which enable automatic content generation For example to include a page number on each page of a section of your report insert a page number field in the report template in the page footer of a section For more information see the Microsoft Word documentation Create Page Headers and Footers Programmatically Perform these steps to create programmatically a page header or footer in the current section of a report 1 Use the DOCXPageHeader or DOCXPageFooter constructor to create a page header or footer of the desired type first page odd page even page or odd and even page based on a template that defines template form the fixed content and holes for variable content 2 Fill the holes in the header or footer with content 3 Insert the header or footer in the array of page headers or footers of the current DOCXSection object This script creates a first page header from a template stored in the document part template library of a report import mlreportgen dom d Document MyReport docx MyReportTemplate open d 11 133 T1 Create a Report Program 11 134 pageHeaders 1 DOCXPageHeader first d FirstPageHeader while strcmp pageHeaders 1 CurrentHoleld end switch pageHeaders 1 CurrentHolelId case Date append pageHeaders 1 date end moveTONextHole pageHeaders 1 end d CurrentDOCXSection PageHeaders pageHeaders close d rptview d OutputPath See Also Fun
263. elected model system signal or block Description This component inserts a two column table that contains details for the selected model system signal or block into a generated report Options Show current Modeling object to specify properties for Automatic Uses the context of the parent loop Model System Block Annotation Properties list Specifies whether to have Report Explorer select properties automatically or to list the properties to report on Determine properties automatically Let the Report Explorer automatically select the properties to report Modeling Component Selected in the Show Listed Properties current Field Model Description System Description Block Block parameter dialog box prompt properties Annotation Text Signal Description Show properties Specify a list of properties to report Enter the names of object properties that you want the report to include for the modeling object you specified Simulink Automatic Table in the Show current field Use this option to display properties that the Report Explorer does not include automatically Property names often differ from the Simulink dialog box prompts Refer to the Simulink documentation to determine property names for blocks signals and other modeling objects You can also use the MATLAB get command to determine the property names of an object For example to determine the property names of t
264. elon on Data Data Invisible off on Invisible Application Peaks Data Many types of summary table components are available including Handle Graphics Summary Table Simulink Summary Table requires Simulink Report Generator Stateflow Summary Table requires Simulink Report Generator The component used in this example represents MATLAB Report Generator summary table components all of which exhibit similar behavior Open the Example Report Template This example uses the figloop tutorial report template To open the figure loop tutorial report template enter the following at the MATLAB command line Summary Table Components setedit figloop tutorial Select Object Types You can use the Object type selection list to choose Handle Graphics object types for the summary table including blocks signals systems and models The figloop tutorial reports on figure objects Add and Remove Properties You can select object properties to appear in the summary table from the Property Columns pane To add a property to the summary table select the property category from the property category drop down box to the right of the Property columns table Each property category has its own list of properties which appear in the field under the box The following figure shows Main Properties as the selected category Property Columns Main Properties e JV Remov
265. em Snapshot component Chapter Subsection component Insert Variable component Scope Snapshot component 3 6 Chapter 1 Model vdp This report demonstrates Simulink Report Generator s ability to experiment with Simulink systems and auto document the results In this report you load the model vdp and simulate it length times This report modifies the vdp Mu block s Gain value setting it to the values 1 0 0 5 1 2 Each iteration of the test includes a set of scope snapsnots in the report o wan der Pol Equaton OBIT 2004 3010 The Matvara mi Processing the vdp model Iteration Value 1 Figure 1 1 Scope Add Report Content with Components Add MATLAB Code Note This section builds on the previous tasks described in the step by step example summarized in Create a Simulink Report Generator Report on page 3 2 To see the completed report setup file open Simulink Dynamic Report The report is for the vdp model The first component to add is the Evaluate MATLAB Expression component which evaluates MATLAB commands in the workspace The code in this component assigns initial values to variables used in this example 1 2 In the Outline pane on the left select simulink_tutorial rpt BF Report Generator Fo 3 Report simulink_tutorial rpt In the Library pane in the middle under the MATLAB category select Evaluate MATLAB Expression Evaluate MATLAB Expression
266. enerate a System Design Description on page 2 6 You can use the System Design Description report setup file as a starting point for creating a setup file for your own report You can also generate an HTML model report for Stateflow charts You must have the Simulink Verification and Validation product installed to use the Design Requirements report The Design Requirements report includes information about all the requirements associated with the model and its objects For details see Customize Requirements Traceability Report for Model in the Simulink Verification and Validation documentation Interactive Model Exploration Web View A Web view is an interactive rendition of a model that you can view in a Web browser You can use Web views to navigate hierarchically to specific subsystems and see properties of blocks and signals Web views are useful for presenting models to audiences and for sharing models with colleagues who do not have MathWorks products installed For details see Export Models to Web View Files on page 5 4 XML Comparison Report You can use Simulink Report Generator software to compare XML text renditions of different versions of a Simulink model and to compare the XML renditions to explore differences between versions of the model You can also compare the XML text renditions of two different models For details see Model Comparison Simulink Model Exploration Tools You c
267. ent dummy content close slides name2 after slides Presentation name2 name1 lefts find slides Left Content rights find slides Right Content para replace lefts 1 Left item in the list para Italic true para FontColor green replace rights 1 Right List item Inner right list item Other inner right list item Right List item close slides if ispc winopen slides OutputPath end Add or Replace Text in a Text Box Jaga A text box in a slide is a box that you can add text to You can programmatically add or replace the content of a text box in a presentation 12 79 12 Programmatic PowerPoint Presentation Creation 12 80 1 Create a TextBox object Specify the location and width of the text box 2 Add text by using the add method with the TextBox object 3 Add the TextBox object to a presentation using the add method with a Presentation object or the add method with a Slide object For example import mlreportgen ppt slides Presentation myPresentation pptx titleSlide add slides Title Slide TextBox tb X 2in tb Y 2in tb Width 5in add tb Text for text box add titleSlide tb close slides Add or Replace a Table To add or replace a table in a presentation first create a Table object You can adda table by using an add method with a Slide object import mlreportgen ppt
268. ent data for a specified DOM object For an introduction to events and listeners see Events and Listeners Concepts Note When you create a message dispatcher the DOM API keeps the dispatcher until the end of the current MATLAB session Delete message event listeners to avoid duplicate reporting of message objects during a MATLAB session Display DOM Default Messages This example shows how to display the default DOM debug messages Use a similar approach for displaying other kinds of DOM report messages Display Report Generation Messages 1 Create a message dispatcher using the MessageDispatcher getTheDispatcher method Use the same dispatcher for all messages dispatcher MessageDispatcher getTheDispatcher dispatcher Filter DebugMessagesPass true 2 Use the MessageDispatcher Filter property to specify to display debug messages dispatcher Filter DebugMessagesPass true 3 Adda listener using the MATLAB addlistener function Specify the dispatcher object the source and event data and a disp function that specifies the event data and format to use for the message l addlistener dispatcher Message src evtdata disp evtdata Message formatAsText 4 Include a code to delete the listener Place it after the code that generates the report delete 1 This report displays debug messages import mlreportgen dom d Document test html dispatcher MessageDispatcher getTheDi
269. ent is aSystem Loop Include system internal signals Loops on system internal signals This option is valid only when the parent component of this component is aSystem Loop Include system output signals Loops on signals going to outports This option is valid only when the parent component of this component is aSystem Loop Sort signals Specifies how to sort signals Alphabetically by signal name Sorts signals alphabetically by name Alphabetically by signal name exclude empty Sorts signals alphabetically by name Alphabetically by system name Sorts alphabetically by parent system names Lists signals in each system but in no particular order By signal depth Sorts signals by their depth in the model Section Options Create section for each object in loop Inserts a section in the generated report for each object found in the loop Display the object type in the section title Automatically inserts the object type into the section title in the generated report Create link anchor for each object in loop Creates a hyperlink to the object in the generated report Signal Loop Insert Anything into Report Yes inserts a section if you select the Create section for each object in loop option Class rptgen_sl csl sig loop See Also Block Loop Model Loop System Loop 8 117 8 Components Alphabetical List 8 118 Simulink Automatic Table Insert two column table with information on s
270. entation program and execute the code in MATLAB The presentation includes four slides Update Presentation Content Programmatically Histogram of Vector The histogram Function Histogram of Vector What You Can Do with histogram Create histogram plot of x Specify Number of bins Edges of the bins Plot into a specified axes Parameters Description The defect auto sigoritnm chooses bin width to cover the ceta renge and reves the snape of the unceniing sistribution Beate Scotts nde optimal i the date is Goze to being jointly normally distributes This rule iz sppropriste tor most other distributions as wet HE To use the PPT API to update content in an existing PowerPoint presentation programmatically you 12 51 12 Programmatic PowerPoint Presentation Creation 12 52 Set up the PowerPoint presentation by naming content objects that you want to replace If you want to add new content insert placeholders in the presentation for that content In MATLAB import the mlreportgen ppt PPT API package Create a Presentation object that uses the existing presentation as the template for updated version Replace any existing slide content that you want to update Add slides any new slides Generate the presentation Updates to the Presentation In this example you use the PPT API to make these changes to the myNewPPTPresentation presentation Replace the pict
271. ents You can specify what kinds of information to include in the report in terms of What elements of a model to include in the report for example whether to include subsystems from custom libraries Whether to generate a summary version or a detailed version of the System Design Description report For details see Generate a System Design Description on page 2 6 Summary Version Section Information Report Overview Model version Root System e Block diagram representing the algorithms that compute root system outputs Description if available from model Interface name data type and other properties of the system input and output signals 2 Generate System Design Description Reports Section Information Subsystems Subsystems the path and a block diagram for each subsystem State charts Requirements optional Path Block diagram System Design Variables Design variables Functions in design variable expressions Detailed Version The detailed version of the report includes all the information that is in the summary form of the report as well as more information about the system components The atomic subsystem information is more detailed than virtual subsystem information Section Information Report Overview Model version Root system Block diagram representing the algorithms that compute root system outputs Descripti
272. eport on figure objects For more information on options for these figure objects see the following sections Loop on the Current Figure Loop on Visible Figures Loop on Figures with Tags Logical and Looping Components Logical and Looping Components Logical and looping components execute conditionally determining when a child component executes or how many times a child component executes A looping component runs its child components a specified number of times There are several looping components such as logical loops Handle Graphics loops and model and chart loops For model and chart loops you can control aspects such as the order in which the report sorts blocks For an example that uses loop components see Edit Figure Loop Components You can use loop context functions with loop components For details see Filter with Loop Context Functions on page 6 22 Loop Context Functions on page 6 24 6 21 6 Add Content with Components Filter with Loop Context Functions In this section Create and Save the Setup File on page 6 22 Add Components on page 6 22 Run the Report on page 6 23 Use loop context functions to filter the modeling elements to report on and to perform special reporting on specific elements In the following example in a Block Loop component you use RptgenSL getReportedBlock in a Logical If component to report on tar
273. eports on page 11 100 i Appending HTML to DOM Reports on page 11 90 11 99 11 Create a Report Program HTML Code Requirements for DOM Reports 11 100 In this section XML Parsable HTML Code on page 11 100 Supported HTML Elements and Attributes on page 11 100 Supported HTML CSS Style Attributes for All Elements on page 11 102 Support for HTML Character Entities on page 11 103 DOCTYPE Declaration on page 11 104 XML Parsable HTML Code The HTML content that you append to a DOM report must be XML parsable HTML content that is XML parsable complies with the rules for properly formed XML such as Include a closing tag for all elements Use the lower case for the opening and closing start and end tags of an element For example use lt p gt and lt p gt for a paragraph element not lt P gt and lt p gt e Nest elements properly If you open an element inside of another element close that first element before you close the containing element e Enclose attribute values with quotation marks For example use lt p align center gt lt p gt For details see the W38Schools summary of XML rules at www w38schools com xml xml_syntax asp Tip You can use the HTML Tidy program to ensure that your HTML file is XML parsable For details see Use an HTML Cleanup Program on page 11 96 Supported HTML Elements and Attributes In HTML content that you
274. equirements specified with Simulink Verification and Validation System layout System Hierarchy System Snapshot Model configuration Block parameter settings Model Configuration Set Model Advisor Report Simulink Dialog Snapshot Block Loop Properties Simulink Property Table Simulink Summary Table Variables Variable Table Simulink Workspace Variable System documentation included in a model Documentation Simulink Name Results Reporting Results reporting has many uses Model regression testing including Verifying and validating designs Exploring design alternatives Optimizing designs Simulink provides several tools for examining the results of a simulation Simulation data includes signal time output state and data store logging data You can set up your model to export simulation data to the MATLAB workspace during simulation for later retrieval analysis and postprocessing You can use several approaches to explore the simulation data For details see Export Simulation Data in the Simulink documentation You can report on results without creating a report For more information see Interactive Model Exploration on page 1 6 The following table includes some examples of components that are useful results reports Results Information Examples of Components to Use Signal values Scope Snapshot Block Loop System Design Docume
275. equirements Summary Table Requirements System Loop Requirements Table 8 93 8 Components Alphabetical List 8 94 Requirements Documents Table Insert table of linked requirements documents Description This component creates a table that lists all requirements documents linked to model objects Table Options Show documents linked to e Simulink and Stateflow objects Inserts requirements documents linked to both Simulink and Stateflow objects in the model Simulink objects Inserts requirements documents linked only to Simulink objects in the model Stateflow objects Inserts requirements documents linked only to Stateflow objects in the model Table title Specifies a title for the table e No title Model name Default e Custom Table Columns Replace document paths with links Inserts links to requirements documents when possible When replacing with links note absolute vs relative file path Indicates absolute or relative file paths when including links to requirements documents Include document modification time Includes the document modification information Requirements Documents Table Count references to each document Includes a count of the number of references to the requirements document in the model Document References Replace file names with document IDs in the main body of the report Includes shortened IDs to identify requirements documents to simplify t
276. er is associated with a numbering stream that determines the value of each number in a sequence Report generation replaces an automatic numbering object with a number based on its position in the document relative to other automatic numbers in the same stream For example the first automatic numbering object in a stream can be replaced by 1 the second by 2 and so on You can use automatic numbering to create hierarchical numbering schemes such as Section 1 1 Section 1 2 and so on You can automatically number document content programmatically or by inserting automatic numbering fields in a Word template or numbering properties in an HTML template For example you can insert automatic numbering in a template for a document part that is appended repeatedly to a report Automatically Number Content Programmatically To automatically number document content programmatically do the following at each point in a document where you want an automatically generated number to appear 1 Create an automatic numbering object using the mlreportgen dom AutoNumber constructor Specify the name of the associated automatic numbering stream in the constructor For example this line creates an automatic number belonging to the stream named chapter chapterNumber AutoNumber chapter Note If the specified automatic numbering stream does not exist the AutoNumber constructor creates a numbering stream having the specified name The implicitly c
277. er their context to be annotations when the report is running For example the following components report on the looped annotation e Simulink Automatic Table e Simulink Linking Anchor e Simulink Name e Simulink Property e Simulink Property Table Use a Summary Table component to show annotation objects in reports Each Summary Table component creates a single table with each reported annotation on a single row of the table 8 Components Alphabetical List 8 4 Section Options Create section for each object in loop Inserts a section in the generated report for each object found in the loop Display the object type in the section title Inserts the object type automatically into the section title in the generated report Create link anchor for each object in loop Creates a hyperlink to each object in the loop the generated report See Also Block Loop Model Loop Signal Loop System Loop Simulink Linking Anchor Simulink Name Simulink Property Simulink Property Table Simulink Summary Table Block Execution Order List Block Execution Order List Create a list or table of all nonvirtual blocks in the model showing order in which they execute Description This component creates a list or table of all nonvirtual blocks in the model showing the order in which they execute For more information about virtual and nonvirtual blocks see Nonvirtual and Virtual Blocks in the Simulink documenta
278. erator and Simulink Software Interact The Simulink and Simulink Report Generator software interact to create reports and Web views The following table describes these interactions User Interface _ Interaction with Simulink Report Generator Description software Report The Report Explorer is the Simulink Use the Report Explorer to edit Explorer Report Generator graphical interface existing report setup files components For more information see Working stylesheets and attributes or to with the Report Explorer on page 1 16 customize your own Simulink Use Simulink model window to Use the Simulink model window to model window l e Export the model to a Web view Create reports that incorporate the Generate a System Design current Simulink model Description report e Export the model to a Web view Start the Report Explorer to export the model to a Web view or create and generate a report For more information see Model Web Views and Generate a System Design Description on page 2 6 Simulink Report Generator software also interacts with Simulink Coder and Stateflow software Use report generation capabilities with the Simulink Coder software to Create Adobe Acrobat PDF and Microsoft Word documents for generated code Use report generation capabilities with the Stateflow software to Take snapshots of charts Describe truth tables Document chart hierarchy Document o
279. erty Name Property Value Pairs Split Property Value Cells 1 In the Properties pane for the Handle Graphics Property Table component clear the Split property value cells check box 2 Click Edit The table is now in nonsplit mode Nonsplit mode supports more than one property name property value pair per cell and text Figure Prop Table lt no title gt 0 x Select a preset table Apply IV Split property value cells a Main Properties EF MJE DERE E 5 3 For the property name and property value to appear in adjacent horizontal cells in the table select the Split property value cells check box The table is now in 6 9 6 Add Content with Components split mode Split mode supports only one property name property value pair per cell If more than one property pair appears in a cell only the first pair appears in the report all subsequent pairs are ignored Fle viaje eala j alas Display Options Property name property value pairs can appear in cells in several ways To specify how a given property name property value pair appears in a cell select that field in the table for this tutorial select the Name property Choose Value from the display options drop down list at the bottom of the dialog box In the selected table row only the value appears 6 10 Property Table Components Figure Prop Table lt no title gt EAKR r majo alaja m
280. es 10 10 Conversion Template Contents Related Examples Generate a Report Using a Template on page 10 4 Copy a Conversion Template on page 10 12 Customize Microsoft Word Report Styles on page 10 18 Customize Microsoft Word Part Templates on page 10 21 Customize a Microsoft Word Title Page Template on page 10 30 More About Report Conversion Templates on page 10 2 10 11 10 Template Based Report Formatting Copy a Conversion Template 10 12 Copy a Conversion Template 1 In Report Explorer select Tools gt Edit Document Conversion Template The Template Browser appears in the Report Explorer 2 Inthe Library pane middle pane select a template from the list of Word or HTML templates For example select Default Word Template 3 Inthe Template Browser click Copy template A file browser appears 4 In the file browser navigate to the location where you want to save the template file Select a folder that is on the MATLAB path for example in the MATLAB folder in your home folder Specify the file name using the default file extension for a Word template dotx 5 Click Save Results A template you create by copying a template appears in the list of Word or HTML templates The initial name of the copy in the list of templates is Copy of ORIGINAL where ORIGINAL is the name of the template that you copied The name in the list is not the file name you u
281. es Axes 8 140 Simulink Library Information Alpha Index Block Library Reference Block Status Incidence amp Aerospace Incidence amp Airspeed resolved Airspeed Fin Actuator Aerospace 2nd Order Nonlinear resolved Actuator 3DoF Animation Aerospace 3DoF Animation resolved Atmosphere Aerospace Atmosphere model resolved Cm Simulink Interpolation n D resolved using PreLookup Cx Cz Kg Ki Alpha Index Simulink PreLookup Index resolved Search Mach Index Mach Index Insert Anything Into Report Yes Table Class rptgen_sl CLibinfo See Also Block Loop Model Loop System Loop 8 141 8 Components Alphabetical List Simulink Linking Anchor Designate locations to which links point Description This component designates a location to which links point Use the Model Loop System Loop Block Loop or Signal Loop component as the parent component for this component Properties Insert text Specifies text to appear after the linking anchor Link from current Sets the current model system block or signal as the linking anchor Automatic Automatically selects the appropriate model system block or signal as a linking anchor If the Model Loop component is the parent component the linking anchor is set on the current model Similarly if the Block Loop or Signal Loop is the parent component the linking anchor is inserte
282. es are exported and the Web view appears in a Web browser sldemo_auto_climatecontrol View All Pa sldemo_auto_climatecontrol_ p Distribution l i ntrol S Distrbution Request Simulating Automatic Climate Control Systems 1 o 0 aa Distribution Recycle Recycling Air Air On 1 o 0 nd System Trigger Recycling Airt User Setpoint in Celsius Temperature Control Chart EHe vex External Temperature in Celsius rout Ach gt From Tout_H Q From Copyright 1990 2013 The MathWorks inc proportion fan speed Fan Speed rate Simulating Automatic Climate Control Systems v Parameter Attributes Text Simulating Automatic Climate Control Systems DropShadow off Interpreter off FontName auto FontWeight auto FontSize 12 FontAngle auto ForegroundColor black BackgroundColor white HorizontalAlignment center UseDisplayTextAsClickCallback off ClickFen The Temperature Control Chart appears in the top level of the model but you cannot open that chart in the Web view to see its contents Navigate the Web View By default if you export a whole model to a Web view the Model Viewer pane shows the whole model You can display specific systems in the Web view For example 1 In the model viewer double click the AC Control subsystem 5 15 5 Export Simulink Models to Web Views
283. es available for the current file format select a template If you select HTML from template for the file format choose a packaging option for the output files Unzipped Generate the report files in a subfolder of the current folder The subfolder has the report name Zipped Package report files in a single compressed file that has the report name with a Zip extension Both Zipped and Unzipped In the toolbar click the Report button 4 Generate SDD Report Using a Template If you have Simulink installed you can generate a System Design Description SDD report You can use a template when you generate the SDD report This example shows how to generate a report using the PDF format template 1 Open a model such as vdp 2 Inthe Simulink Editor select File gt Reports gt System Design Description 3 Inthe Design Description dialog box set File format to PDF from template 4 Optionally in the Template field specify a template 5 Click Generate More About Report Conversion Templates on page 10 2 Conversion Template Contents Conversion Template Contents In this section Default Styles on page 10 5 Part Templates on page 10 9 Header and Footers in Word Conversion Templates on page 10 10 A report conversion template contains A main template with default style definitions for report elements Part templates for the report elements such as ti
284. es in the report Search Stateflow Reports on Stateflow charts with specified property name property value pairs Section Options Create section for each object in loop Inserts a section in the generated report for each object found in the loop Display the object type in the section title Inserts the object type automatically into the section title in the generated report Create link anchor for each object in loop Creates a hyperlink to the object in the generated report Insert Anything into Report No Class rptgen_sf csf_ hier loop Stateflow Hierarchy Loop See Also Stateflow Hierarchy 8 181 8 Components Alphabetical List 8 182 Stateflow Linking Anchor Designate locations to which links point Description This component designates a location to which other links point The linking anchor is set to the current object as defined by the parent component This component must have the Chart Loop State Loop Machine Loop or Stateflow Filter component as its parent Properties Insert text Specifies text to appear after the linking anchor Insert Anything into Report Yes A link and possibly text depending on attribute choices Class rptgen_sf csf_obj_anchor See Also Chart Loop Machine Loop State Loop Stateflow Filter Stateflow Name Stateflow Name Insert into report name of Stateflow object specified by parent component Description This component in
285. es with tags AA app membrane V Match with regular expressions Loop Figure List Membrane Data Invisible Membrane Data An Application An Invisible Application Section Options Create section for each object in loop Display the object type in the section title 7 Create link anchor for each object in loop Figure Properties Figure properties control which figures appear in the report Table 1 1 of the figloop tutorial report includes a summary of the properties of the figures used in this tutorial Table 1 1 Figure Properties Visible HandleVisibility ion off Invisible Membrane Data An Application An Invisible Application Edit Figure Loop Components For this example do not change these properties For more information see Add Replace and Delete Properties in Tables on page 6 13 Loop on the Current Figure To include only the current figure in the report select Current figure only from the Include figures selection list The current figure is the figure that is current when the report generates This figure may not be the same figure that you selected as the current figure in the Report Explorer before report generation For example if the report generation process creates figures in your report the last figure created with HandleVisibility set to on is the current figure Loop on Visible Figures To include snapshots of all vi
286. esentation you can use the PowerPoint software to fine tune the formatting for the presentation In PowerPoint you can use all PowerPoint formatting options including options that you cannot specify with the PPT API such as animation Interactive editing of slide content of the generated presentation allows you to customize a specific version of the presentation without impacting future versions of the presentation If you use PowerPoint to customize a presentation generated using the PPT API you lose those customizations when you regenerate the presentation To preserve the interactive formatting of content if the presentation is regenerated save the customized version of the presentation using a different file name Related Examples Set Up a PowerPoint Template on page 12 26 Define a Style Using Format Objects on page 12 45 Presentation Formatting Approaches Use Format Properties on page 12 47 More About 7 Presentation Format Inheritance on page 12 24 i Access PowerPoint Template Elements on page 12 37 12 23 12 Programmatic PowerPoint Presentation Creation Presentation Format Inheritance 12 24 The PPT API allows you to use a PowerPoint template and PPT API format objects and properties to format presentation objects You can combine formatting approaches The formatting you specify in a PowerPoint template specifies the default format of presentation content You can use a P
287. esign Description 2 6 In this section Open the System Design Description Dialog Box on page 2 6 Choose System Design Description Options on page 2 6 Open the System Design Description Dialog Box To open the System Design Description dialog box 1 Open the model or subsystem for which you want to generate a report Note The System Design Description fails for models that simulate with an error 2 From the Simulink Editor File menu select Reports gt System Design Description The System Design Description dialog box opens 3 Specify layout and content options for the report For details see Choose System Design Description Options on page 2 6 4 Click the Generate Choose System Design Description Options You can specify options for layout and content for the following items Title page contents Report content Report file format and storage location Tip For faster report generation set File format to use a template Select one of these formats PDF from template which is the default e Word from template Generate a System Design Description e HTML from template 2 7 2 Generate System Design Description Reports Title page options Title vdp Subtitle Design Description Authors Image Legal notice For Internal Distribution Only Include in report 7 Design details Model references Subsystems fro
288. et Relative Column Widths 6 2 6 3 6 4 6 5 6 6 6 8 6 8 6 9 6 9 6 12 6 12 6 13 6 14 6 16 6 16 6 17 6 17 6 18 6 19 6 19 6 20 ix Set Object Row Options 0 0 000 eee eee 6 20 Logical and Looping Components 6 21 Filter with Loop Context Functions 6 22 Create and Save the Setup File 0 4 6 22 Add Components 0 000 cece ee eee eee 6 22 Run the Report eran ie eta Be ea eee eee wl ee 6 23 Loop Context Functions 0 0 00 eee eee 6 24 For Simulink Modeling Elements 6 24 For Stateflow Modeling Elements 6 24 Edit Figure Loop Components 04 6 25 Figure Loop in a Report 0 000 eee eee eee 6 25 Figure Properties 0 2 0 0 0 ee eens 6 26 Loop on the Current Figure 0 0 00 eee eee 6 27 Loop on Visible Figures 0 0 6 27 Loop on Figures with Tags 000 e eee eens 6 27 Modify Loop Section Options 0 00 6 27 Compare Simulink Model XML Files 7 About Simulink Model XML Comparison 7 2 Creating XML Comparison Reports 0005 7 2 Using XML Comparison Reports 0 0000 e eee 7 2 Select Simulink Models for XML Comparison 7 5 Select Files from the Simulink Editor 7 5 Select Files from the Current Folder Browser 7 5 Select Files from a Simuli
289. exadecimal color values that are used repeatedly in a program Extending formatting options beyond the ones that format properties of an object provide Defining a style to use with multiple objects Using the PPT API set format Specifying one or two basic format options for properties of a presentation object a specific presentation object Extending formatting options beyond those options that format properties of an object provide 12 20 Presentation Formatting Approaches Formatting Approach Use Specifying one or two basic format options for a specific presentation object In the PowerPoint software format a Customizing a specific version of a generated generated PPT API presentation Extending formatting options beyond those options that the format objects provide Template Formatting Use templates for applying formatting globally Across a whole presentation for example background color of slides To specific kinds of elements in a presentation for example slide titles Using a PowerPoint template with the PPT API involves creating and formatting template elements such as Slide masters Slide layouts e Placeholders Table styles Using the template to define formatting offers more formatting options than the PPT API provides Defining formatting in the template allows you to have consistent formatting in any PPT API presentations that use that templ
290. f signals by clearing the corresponding option in the Section options area e System input signals e System output signals e System internal signals Signal Loop Loops on the current signal Block Loop Loops on all signals connected to the current block Choose not to report on the following types of signals by clearing the corresponding option in the Section options area e Block input signals e Block output signals Ifthe Signal Loop does not have a looping component as its parent it loops on all signals in all models Choose not to report on the following types of signals by clearing the corresponding option in the Section options area e Block input signals e Block output signals e System input signals e System output signals e System internal signals 8 115 8 Components Alphabetical List 8 116 For conditional processing of signals you can use the RotgenSL getReportedSignal function For more information see Loop Context Functions on page 6 24 Select Signals Include block input signals Loops on signals that feed into blocks This option is valid only when the parent component of this component is aBlock Loop Include block output signals Loops on signals that leave the block This option is valid only when the parent component of this component is aBlock Loop Include system input signals Loops on signals coming from inports This option is valid only when the parent component of this compon
291. f there is an error check box Add Report Content with Components 7 In the field under the check box replace the existing text with the following text disp Error during eval Evaluate MATLAB Expression Insert MATLAB expression in report Display command window output in report Expression to evaluate in the base workspace The name of the model that will be changed expModel vdp evalException message The Report Explorer window now looks as follows The name of the block in the model Sthat will be changed expBlock vdp Mu The name of the block parameter that will be changed expPerem Gein The values that will be set Sduring experimentation expValue 1 0 5 1 2 SexpVelue can be either a vector Sor a cell array testMin 2 1 testMex 3 do not change code below line xl JV Evaluate this expression if there is an error disp Error during Eval evalException message 3 11 3 Creating Simulink Reports 3 12 8 Tip To run the commands that you specified in your MATLAB expression click the Eval Now button This button is located at the upper right corner of the Report Explorer This is an easy way to ensure that your commands are correct and will not cause report generation problems Click File gt Save to save the report setup file For information about handling error conditions see Error Handling for MATLAB Code on page 3 51 Add a
292. fault setting of Use image size Use image size Causes the image to appear the same size in the report as on screen default e Fixed size Specifies the number and type of units Zoom Specifies the percentage maximum size and units of measure Size Specifies the size of the snapshot in the form w h width height This field is active only if you choose Fixed size in the Sealing selection list Stateflow Dialog Snapshot Max size Specifies the maximum size of the snapshot in the form w h width height This field is active only if you choose Zoom in the Scaling selection list Units Specifies the units for the size of the snapshot This field is active only if you choose Zoom or Fixed size in the Image size list box Alignment Aligns your snapshot Only reports in PDF or RTF format support this property e Auto e Right Center e Left Title Specifies text to appear above the snapshot Caption Specifies text to appear under the snapshot Insert Anything into Report Yes Snapshot Class rptgen_sl Cdialog boxesnapshot See Also State Loop 8 175 8 Components Alphabetical List Stateflow Filter Run child components only if current object type matches specified object type Description This component runs its children only if the current object type as set by its parent Stateflow Hierarchy Loop matches the selected object type Properties Object type Specifie
293. fferences in template properties and project metadata You can open a new report to investigate project file and folder differences Project Files Compare 3 Project Files Compare SB Project Metadata B Project Metadata Files Files tests EHtests 14_airframe_test m amp Category Label Parameter 2014 12 10T12 34 05Z created 14 12 10T11 29 06Z Removed test code description labels 2014 12 107T12 34 05Z modified 14 12 10T11 29 06Z Click Template Properties to view differences in the Parameters such as the description or date modified Expand the Project Metadata node to view metadata differences such as label changes Next to Project Files click Compare to open a folder comparison where you can investigate changed added or removed files and folders Compare Templates Comparing template deploy sltx vs template labels sltx Left file list Contents of template CAWork deploy sitx Right file list Contents of template C Worklabels stx_ Click on a column header to sort the table In left list template deploy sltx In right list template labels sltx Type File Name Size bytes Last Modified Date Size bytes Last Modified Date Difference Summary MATLAB Code File utilities set_up_project m open left right 583 2014 12 10 12 34 26 583 2014 12 10 12 34 26 i i MATLAB Code File utilities rebuild_s_functions m
294. fic diff program dialog box enter md1 or s1x for the Extension and enter the following command in the External Program edit box matlabroot bin matlab exe r fileComparisonDriver sbase mine nosplash Replace matlabroot with the path to the specific location on your computer for your MATLAB installation for example C Program files MATLAB R2009a The following example shows this setup on an R2013b installation 7 31 7 Compare Simulink Model XML Files Configure the program used for comparing different revisions of files TortoiseMerge External Click on Advanced to specify alternate diff wscript exe C Program Files TortoiseSVN Diff Scripts diff dll C MATLAB R 20 13b exe T 4 5 Click OK to apply your changes and close all the Tortoise SVN dialog boxes 6 If you also want to use the MATLAB Comparison Tool to compare MATLAB files such as mand mat files or Simulink manifest files smf files you can repeat the steps to add exactly the same External Program command for m mat and smf files Test TortoiseSVN Setup To test your setup follow these steps 7 32 Compare XML from Models Managed with Subversion 1 Start MATLAB and open modify and save a Simulink model that is managed in a Subversion archive This creates a local working copy that is different to the head repository copy 2 In Windows Explorer right click your modified file and
295. file2 returns the names of the generated reports If the MATLAB Report Generator software cannot generate a given report its returned name is empty Examples Example 1 Setting the format of the generated report Generate the report testrpt in PDF format report testrpt fpdf Generate the report testrpt in RTF format report testrpt frtf Generate the report testrpt in Microsoft Word format report testrpt fdoc Note Only Microsoft Windows platforms support this option Generate a multipage HTML report from the figloop tutorial report setup file report figloop tutorial fhtml shtml MultiPage Example 2 Specifying the file and path of the generated report Generate a report named Simple report in the folder tmp index html report simple report o tmp index html1 More About Generate Reports 9 3 9 Functions Alphabetical List See Also setedit rptconvert rptlist compwiz 9 4 rptlist rptlist Return list of all report s in MATLAB path Syntax rptlist rptlist system_name list rptlist Description rptlist with no arguments opens the Report Explorer which lists available report setup files in the MATLAB path You can open run or associate these files with the current Simulink system rptlist system_name opens the Report Explorer with the Simulink system s ReportName property selected list rptlist returns a list of report setup files in t
296. filtering MATLAB code Specifies custom MATLAB filtering code that the System Filter applies when determining which systems and subsystems to report on in a System Loop component The edit box includes a sample function commented out that you can use as a starting point for your own filtering function Use the isFiltered variable for the output of your function For example to filter out systems and subsystems whose names start with engine enter isFiltered strncmpi currentSystem engine 6 Insert Anything into Report No 8 199 8 Components Alphabetical List 8 200 Class rptgen_sf csf_obj_ filter See Also System Loop System Hierarchy System Hierarchy Create nested list that shows hierarchy of specified system Description This component creates a nested list that shows the hierarchy of a specified system The list can display all systems in a model or the parents and children of the current system Starting System Build list from Specifies the system or model from which to build the list e Current system e Current model Emphasize current system Highlights the current system or model in the generated report Display Systems Show number of parents Specifies the number of parents to list Display peers of current system Shows the peers of the current system in the generated report Show children to depth Specifies the depth of children to list List Formatting List st
297. format objects assigned to the document object In this way the DOM prevents changing a format property in one object from changing a style originally assigned to other objects as well More About Report Formatting Approaches on page 11 20 Format Inheritance on page 11 25 Format Inheritance Format Inheritance The DOM API allows you to use both template based styles and format object based styles or equivalent format properties to specify the appearance of an object If you set both the StyleName and the Style property of an object the formats in the Style property override corresponding formats specified by the template based style of the StyleName property Consider for example the following script Document MyDoc docx MyTemplate Paragraph Danger StyleName Warning Style Color red append d p close d oil TTT a Suppose that the Warning style defines the color of a warning as yellow In that case this example overrides the color specified by the Warning style If a document object does not specify a StyleName a template based style it inherits from its container any formats that it does not itself specify The container itself inherits any formats that it does not specify from its container and so on all the way to the top of a container hierarchy Format inheritance allows you to use a single statement to assign a format for all the objects containe
298. fy the Slide Master A template can have multiple slide masters Two or more slide masters can have a child slide layout with the same name By default when you specify the slide layout using PPT API the API uses the first slide layout that has the name you specify If you specify a slide master in an add method specify the slide master argument immediately after the slide layout argument For example this code uses the Title Slide slide layout that is a child of the myCustomMaster slide master slides Presentation myPresentation titleSlide add slides Title Slide myCustomMaster See Also Functions mlreportgen ppt Presentation add mlreportgen ppt Presentation getLayoutNames mlreportgen ppt Presentation getMasterNames Related Examples Create a Presentation Object to Hold Content on page 12 14 Add and Replace Presentation Content on page 12 76 12 75 12 Programmatic PowerPoint Presentation Creation Add and Replace Presentation Content 12 76 In this section Set Up the Template on page 12 76 Replace Content on page 12 77 Add and Replace Text on page 12 77 Add or Replace a Table on page 12 80 Add or Replace a Picture on page 12 81 To use the PPT API to add or replace content in a PowerPoint presentation Set up a PowerPoint template to hold the presentation content you want to add or replace Create PPT API content objects such as Para
299. g with Property Table components see Property Table Components on page 6 6 Table Select a preset table which is already formatted and set up in the preset table list in the upper left corner of the attributes page preset table Specifies a type of table to display the object property table Default Machine Chart State Truth table EM function Data Event Junction To apply a preset table select the table and click Apply Split property value cells Splits property name property value pairs into separate cells For the property name and property value to appear in adjacent horizontal cells select the Split property value cells check box In this case the table is in split 8 187 8 Components Alphabetical List 8 188 mode there is only one property name property value pair per cell If there is more than one name property pair in a cell only the first pair appears in the report The report ignores all subsequent pairs e For the property name and property value to appear together in one cell clear the Split property value cells check box This setting is nonsplit mode Nonsplit mode supports more than one property name property value pair and text Before switching from nonsplit mode to split mode make sure that there is only one property name property value pair per table cell When there is more than one property name property value pair or any text in a given cell only the first propert
300. ge 11 78 Create a Word Table of Contents Reference Open the template in Word Click where you want to create the table of contents In the Word ribbon select the References pane Select the Table of Contents button Aa Q N 11 77 T1 Create a Report Program E H S0 a z Document2 Word FILE HOME INSERT DESIGN PAGE LAYO REFERENCE MAILINGS REVIEW VIEW DE T Add Text AB lia E 53 Manage Sources E B _ Update Table AR Style APA Table of Insert gt Insert r z Insert Contents Footnote Citation Bibliography Caption 3 Built In aphy Captions Automatic Table 1 Contents Heading L 5 Select a TOC format option to generate a table of contents For example select the Built In format option The TOC appears 11 78 E BH S 6 Document2 Word O0 x FILE HOME INSERT DESIGN PAGE LAYO REFERENCE MAILINGS REVIEW VIEW DEVELOPER Acrobat Paul Kinn 1 Add Text AB ita mi 3 Manage Sources E B T B 7 i _ Dl Update Table ay Eastyle APA l Table of Insert Inse eee Insert g Mark Mark Contents Footnote Citation D Bibliography Caption Entry Citation Table of Contents Footnotes G Citations amp Bibliography Captions Index Table of Autho A Contents Chapter 1 ariii A A 1 Section 1 csccssoressssercevsceccsecsccsesenssencanssacsscssccsessaseacsseneasscesosssesscenecsnesveusseccsseeccenssasea
301. ge 11 72 Create a Link Target on page 11 72 Create an External Link on page 11 73 Create an Internal Link on page 11 73 Add Text or Images to Links on page 11 73 Links You can add these kinds of links to a report External Link to a location outside of the report such as an HTML page or a PDF file Use an mlreportgen dom ExternalLink object Internal Link to locations in the report Use an mlreportgen dom InternaLlLink object Create a Link Target To specify the link target for an InternalLink object use value in the Name property of an mlreportgen dom LinkTarget object When you construct an ExternalLink object you can use an LinkTarget object Name value or a URL This example creates a link target called home and uses home as the target for an internal link import mlreportgen dom d Document mydoc append d LinkTarget home append d InternalLink home Go to Top close d rptview mydoc html Create Links Create an External Link Use an mlreportgen dom ExternalLink object to create an external link specifying the link target and the link text import mlreportgen dom d Document mydoc append d ExternalLink http www mathworks com MathWorks close d rptview mydoc html Create an Internal Link To set up links to a location in a report append an mlreportgen dom InternalLink object to the document or document
302. geted blocks within a Block Loop component For a summary of loop context functions see Loop Context Functions on page 6 24 Create and Save the Setup File 1 Open the f14 model 2 At the MATLAB command prompt enter report 3 Inthe Report Explorer select File gt New 4 In the Properties pane set Directory to Present working directory 5 Save the setup file as inport_outport rpt 6 22 Add Components Add these components to the report in order From this Library Add this Component Set this Property Folder Simulink Model Loop N A Formatting Chapter Title to Inport Blocks Simulink Block Loop N A Logical and Flow Logical If Test Expression to Control strcemp get_param Filter with Loop Context Functions RptgenSL getReportedBlock BlockType Inport Simulink Simulink Property N A Table The report setup file looks like this 4 Report Generator Y Report inport_outportrpt 4 ae ModelLoop current model 4 pe Chapter Input Blocks 4 Be BlockLoop Section 1 All blocks in reported systems of current model 4 4 if strcemp get_param RptgenSL getReportedBlock BlockType Inport B Model Prop Table 9 lt Name gt Infor Run the Report 1 Select inport_outport rpt 2 From the context menu select Report The report includes a chapter with properties for the Inport blocks only If you wish create a second chapter that reports on Out
303. gnal Builder blocks looking for signal groups with requirements Custom use list Processes all subsystems in the user defined list If a subsystem on the list does not have requirements the Simulink Report Generator software does not include it in the report Insert Anything into Report Yes inserts a section if you select the Create section for each object in loop option Class RptgenRMI CSystemLoop See Also Missing Requirements Block Loop Missing Requirements System Loop Requirements Block Loop Requirements Documents Table Requirements Summary Table Requirements System Loop Requirements Table Signal Loop 8 97 8 Components Alphabetical List 8 98 Requirements Summary Table Properties of blocks systems or Stateflow objects with associated requirements Description This component displays properties of blocks systems or Stateflow objects with associated requirements Object Type Choose the object type to display in the generated report Block Default e System e Stateflow The selected object type affects the options available in the Property Columns pane Table Title Specify a table title in the generated report Automatic Generates a title automatically from the parameter e Custom Specifies a custom title Property Columns Object properties to include in the Requirements Summary Table appear in a list To add a property 1 Select the appropriate property level in
304. gnal Loop is the parent component then the object name is the name of the current system block or signal respectively Model Includes the current model name in the report System Includes the current system name in the report Block Includes the current block name in the report Signal Includes the current signal name in the report If the signal name is empty the signal lt handle gt which is a unique numerical identifier to that signal appears in the report Annotation Includes the current annotation name in the report Display name as Display the Simulink object name in the report Name For example f14 Type Name For example Model f14 Type Name For example Model f14 Type Name For example Model f14 Simulink Name Show full path name Displays the full path of a system or block Choosing this option for a block causes the Simulink block name to appear as lt Model Name gt lt System Name gt lt Block Name gt Note This option is not available for models or signals Insert Anything into Report Yes Text Class rptgen_sl csl obj_name See Also Chapter Subsection 8 145 8 Components Alphabetical List 8 146 Simulink Property Insert property name property value pair for current Simulink model system block or signal Description This component inserts a single property name property value pair for the current Simulink model system block or signal Sim
305. graph Table and Picture objects Use PPT API content objects to add or replace presentation content You can add and replace content in several ways For example you can Add or replace content globally in a presentation or locally in a specific slide Add content to a text box Replace a text box table or picture with content of the same type Replace a placeholder with content corresponding to that placeholder You cannot replace part of a paragraph table or text box Replace the whole content object Set Up the Template You can replace or add content to an existing PowerPoint presentation without modifying the template However using the PPT API requires knowledge of template and slide objects including Slide master names Slide layout names Slide placeholder and content object names Table style names Add and Replace Presentation Content You can use using PowerPoint to add placeholders to a presentation and then use the PPT API to replace the placeholder with content To replace a specific content object in a presentation you can use PowerPoint to give a unique name to the content object Then use that name with the PPT API For more information about using PowerPoint templates with a PPT API program see Set Up a PowerPoint Template on page 12 26 Access PowerPoint Template Elements on page 12 37 Replace Content You can replace content by specifying the content objec
306. gt Branch E Branch gt transmission ngine REMI s vehicle mph yellow amp throttle 1 S bselection_state SER steady state gt downshifting dst CLUSTER STATE oR STATE a E e v o a m Pa Stelov chan shami stear 2 shift logic Eiei sfear 2 gt Esti loge gt PEMHMOH Hs OY SO ES g x amp Control Highlighting in Models To control highlighting in models on the View tab in the Comparison Tool select or clear the check box Always Highlight You can click the Highlight in Models button to highlight the currently selected report node at any time This can be useful if you turn off automatic highlighting and only want to display specific nodes By default models display to the right of the comparison report with the model corresponding to the left side of the report on top and the right below If you move or resize the models your position settings are respected by subsequent model highlighting operations within the same session The tool remembers your window positions If you want to preserve window positions across sessions position the window and then enter slxmlcomp storeWindowPositions 7 19 7 Compare Simulink Model XML Files 7 20 This preserves the placement of any Simulink windows Stateflow windows and truth table windows To stop storing window positions
307. hapter content rgChapterContent q Delete a Hole Note If you do not have a custom Word conversion template see Copy a Conversion Template on page 10 12 1 In the Report Explorer select Tools gt Edit Document Conversion Template 2 Ihn the list of Word templates in the middle pane select the custom template that you want to edit 3 Inthe Template Browser click Open template To display Word paragraph markers if they are not already visible on the Word ribbon in the Home tab click the Show Hide T button In the Word ribbon in the Insert tab click the Quick Parts E button 6 Select the part template to customize For example select rgChapter to customize the part template for a chapter Customize Microsoft Word Part Templates INSERT 1 E ak GES RESULTS title title 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 DESIGN gt ag le Table Pictures Online Shapes SmartArt Chart Screenshot BD My Apps PE PAGE LAYOUT MAILINGS Store REFERENCES REVIEW VIEW DEVELOPER r iY 5 vl f D D TE h Comment Header Footer Page Number A i a Hyperlink Bookmark Cross reference gt Ear A A CY Signature E E Date amp Tir Quick WordArt Drop Bares Cap l Object Text Pictures Box Illustrations Apps inks Comments Header amp Footer mireportgen rgChapter prema taunteor title rgFigureTitle prets sumber Tike rgChap
308. hat apply to an informal table also apply to formal tables In addition you can format the header body and footer sections of an informal table programmatically If you specify a format for the table and one of its sections the value you specify for the section overrides the value you specify for the table Create and Format Tables as a whole Not all formal table formats apply to formal table sections For example you cannot indent a header body or footer section independently of the containing table In other words the OuterLeftMargin property does not apply to formal table sections Apply Table Styles to a Formal Table and Its Sections Use the same procedure for defining formal table styles in Word and HTML templates as you use for defining informal table styles You can apply a table style to a formal table and to each of its sections If you apply a table style to the table itself and to one of its section for example the header the section style overrides the table style Note If you apply a table style to one or more sections of a Word formal table you must specify the widths of each of the table columns Otherwise the columns of the sections may not line up Create and Format Table Rows If you need to build a table from scratch you can use the TableRow constructor to create the rows Format the rows and then append the rows to a table that you are building Create a Table Row The mlreportgen dom TableRow
309. he requirements documents table Retrieve full module path for DOORS links requires login This option applies only to DOORS requirements Append the DOORS module ID to the module path in the DOORS database if the module information is not stored with the model Insert Anything into Report Yes Table Class RptgenRMI ReqDocTable See Also Requirements Summary Table Requirements Table 8 95 8 Components Alphabetical List Requirements Signal Loop Apply all child components to signal groups with requirements Description The Requirements Signal Loop component applies all child components to signal groups that have requirements in Signal Builder blocks Properties Create link anchor for each object in loop Creates a hyperlink to each object with requirements in the loop Display the object type in the section title Inserts the object name with requirements into the section title Create section for each object in loop Creates a hyperlink to each object with requirements in the loop Section Type Specifies the section type to insert If you choose Automatic the Simulink Report Generator software determines the appropriate section type e Book e Chapter e Section 1 e Section 2 e Section 3 e Section 4 Section 5 e Simple Section Automatic Report On Loops on signal groups in systems 8 96 Requirements Signal Loop Collect all Signal Builders Processes all Si
310. he MATLAB path See Also report setedit rptconvert compwiz 9 5 9 Functions Alphabetical List 9 6 slwebview Export Simulink models to Web views Syntax slwebview filename slwebview system_name filename slwebview system_name Name Value Description slwebview starts the Web View dialog box in the Report Explorer filename slwebview system_name exports the subsystem system _name and its child systems to the file filename filename slwebview system_name Name Value provides additional options specified by one or more Name Value pairs Examples Export Web View for a Subsystem and Systems that Contain that Subsystem Open the fuel rate controller subsystem open_system fuelsys Export to a Web view the fuel rate controller subsystem and the system that contains it Do not export the subsystems that it contains This example assumes the current folder is the H drive fuelsys web_view slwebview fuelsys fuel rate controller SearchScope CurrentAndAbove fuelsys web_view slwebview H fuel_rate_controller webview html The Web view displays in the system browser Simulink Web View Created by Simulink Report A Bly amp wh Pager Safetye Toos y fuel rate controller View All fuel rate controller Main ShowPortLabels FromPorticon Permissions ReadWrite ErrorFen PermitHierarchicalResolution All TreatAsAtomicUnit off Pa
311. he Title and Content slide layout import mlreportgen ppt slides Presentation myPresentation slide add slides Title and Content When you add a slide the PPT API creates an mlreportgen ppt Slide object However you cannot add a slide by using a Slide constructor Specify the Order of a Slide By default the order in which you add slides in a PPT API program determines the order in which the slides appear For example this code makes the titleSlide slide the first slide in the presentation The contentSlide slide is the second slide slides Presentation myPresentation titleSlide add slides Title Slide contentSlide add slides Title and Content When you add a slide to specify explicitly the order in which it appears you can Specify the slide the new slide precedes This approach is useful to keep slides together as you add or delete slides Specify an index indicating the numerical position of the slide in the presentation This approach is useful when you want a slide to appear always in the same numerical position 12 73 12 Programmatic PowerPoint Presentation Creation 12 74 The first approach places the new slide immediately before slide you specify If you created the reference slide using the PPT API you can specify the Slide object For example using the default PPT API template this code causes the pictureSlide to appear immediately before the introSlide slides Presentati
312. he author of each change The model version of the change The time and date of the change A description of the change For more information on model history see Log Comments History in the Simulink documentation Tip If your model has a long revision history consider limiting the number of revisions reported Table Columns Choose the information displayed in the model revision table in this section Author name Includes the name of the person who last revised the model Version Includes the version number of the model Date changed Includes the revision date of the model Description of change Includes a description of the revision to the model Table Rows Limit displayed revisions to Limits the number of revisions that appears in the report Model Change Log Show revisions since date Limits the number of revisions that appears in the report by date Enter the date in the corresponding text field This field supports lt varname gt notation For example the default value lt datestr now 14 gt returns revision history for the last two weeks Table Display Choose how the model revision history table appears in this section Table title Specifies the title of the table Sort order Sorts the table entries from most recent to oldest or from oldest to most recent Date format Specifies a preferred date format for the date time stamps in the table Insert Anything
313. he block currently selected in a model enter the following at the MATLAB command line get get_param gcb Handle Show full path name Displays the full path of the selected Simulink model Display property names as prompts Displays property names as prompts in the generated report The report includes the dialog box string instead of the underlying code property Display Options Table title Displays a table title in the generated report Name Automatically generates a title from the parameter e Custom Specifies a custom title e No title Does not include a title Header row Select a header row for the table in the generated report e No header Includes no header row Type and Name Includes a header row with columns for name and object type e Custom Includes a custom header Don t display empty values Excludes empty parameters in the generated report Insert Anything into Report Yes Table 8 119 8 Components Alphabetical List 8 120 Class rptgen_sl csl auto table See Also Block Loop Model Loop Signal Loop System Loop Simulink Data Dictionary Simulink Data Dictionary Report Simulink data dictionary information Description This component reports on the data dictionary currently active in the data dictionary loop specified by the Data Dictionary Loop component Include this component as a child of a Simulink Data Dictionary Loop component Presentation Format
314. he following metrics about each function in the project 8 21 8 Components Alphabetical List Number of lines within body Number of executable lines Number of goto statements Number of call levels Number of called functions Number of call occurrences Number of function parameters Number of paths Number of return statements Number of instructions Cyclomatic complexity e Language scope Number of calling functions 8 22 Code Metrics Summary Code Metrics Summary Create table of Polyspace metrics Description This component creates a table containing metrics from a Polyspace project The metrics are the same as those displayed under Code Metrics Details However the file and function metrics are not broken down by individual files and functions Instead the table provides the minimum and maximum value of a file metric over all files and a function metric over all functions 8 23 8 Components Alphabetical List 8 24 Code Verification Summary Create table of Polyspace analysis results Description This component creates tables containing the following results Number of results Number of coding rule violations for each coding rule type such as MISRA C Number of defects for Polyspace Bug Finder results Number of checks of each color for Polyspace Code Prover results Whether the project passed or failed the software quality objective Properties I
315. he model Tip If you click a Subsystem contents node the report highlights all visible modified objects in the subsystem Click a report entry to view the highlighted item or its parent in the model Ifthe item occurs in both models they both appear with highlighting If there is no match for the item the unmatched report item row is green It is considered unique and appears highlighted by itself When there is no match in the other model the report highlights the first matched ancestor to show the context of the missing item If this ancestor is a system or subsystem then the report highlights all visible modified objects in the system Ifthe XML comparison tool cannot highlight an item directly e g configuration parameters then it highlights the nearest ancestor of the selected node The following screenshots show reverse annotation of Simulink and Stateflow items in original models using the example slxml_sfcar 7 17 7 Compare Simulink Model XML Files pparisons shiml_sfcar_1stxvs C parisons shml_sfcar_ 2stx o E Ph stem strat Fle Edit View Display Diagram Simulation Analysis Code Tools Help E gt N
316. he template using the PPT API To replace some of the content in an existing presentation but maintain leave the rest use the presentation as the template for the Presentation object you create When you create a complete presentation using the PPT API use an empty presentation that has no slides or only a few slides See Also mlreportgen ppt Presentation Related Examples 7 Create a Presentation Program on page 12 2 Create PPT Objects on page 12 8 7 Generate a Presentation on page 12 15 More About Access PowerPoint Template Elements on page 12 37 Generate a Presentation Generate a Presentation To generate a PowerPoint presentation from your PPT API program use the API to close the presentation For example to generate a presentation whose Presentation object is slides close slides When you generate a presentation it overwrites the previous version of that presentation file Closing a presentation creates or overwrites a pptx file in the path that you specify in the Presentation object constructor For example closing this presentation creates a MyPresentation pptx file in the current folder import mlreportgen ppt slides Presentation MyPresentation add slides Title and Content close slides Note If the presentation pptx file is already open in PowerPoint interactively close the PowerPoint presentation file before you generate the presentation using the PP
317. hild nodes if any Edited Boolean If Edited true then the node is either inserted green or part of a modified matched pair pink Name Name of node Parameters Array of parameter structure arrays Each structure has two fields Name and Value Parent xmlcomp Node reference to parent node if any Partner If matched Partner is an xmlcomp Node reference to the matched partner node in the other tree Otherwise empty Save Comparison Log Files in a Zip File Temporary comparison files accumulate in tempdir MatlabComparisons XMLComparisons TempDirs These temporary files are deleted when you close the related comparison report 7 25 7 Compare Simulink Model XML Files 7 26 You can zip the temporary files such as log files created during XML text comparisons for sharing or archiving While the comparison report is open enter xmlcomp zipTempFiles c work myexportfolder The destination folder must exist The output reports the zip file name Created the zipfile c work myexportfolder 20080915T06551 4w zip To view the log file for the last comparison in the MATLAB Editor enter xmlcomp showLogFile Comparing XML Files from Models with Identical Names Comparing XML Files from Models with Identical Names You can compare XML text from files of the same name To complete the operation the XML comparison tool copies one of the models to a temporary folder because Simulink cannot
318. his component is automatically added as Section 1 because it is inside a Chapter component the Model Loop Chapter component H 4 Report Generator 3 Report simulink_tutorial rpt ae Eval The name of the model Zthat wil Title Page Dynamic Simulink Report 9p8 if stremp bdroot acs expModel I 98 then 38 Model Loop Chapter current model 488 Paragraph This report demonstra Z System Snapshot om for explteration 1 1 length exp alue B Eval Evaluate this string in the bas s 88 Section 1 Section Title else 998 Chapter Load Model Failed g8 Paragraph Error Model lt expMod 3 Inthe Properties pane on the right a Ihn the Title selection list select Custom b In the text box enter the following title Processing the vdp model 3 30 Add Report Content with Components This indicates that the section title comes from the first child component Do not change any other properties 4 Save the report setup file Insert the Block Value Note This section builds on the previous tasks described in the step by step example summarized in Create a Simulink Report Generator Report on page 3 2 To see the completed report setup file open Simulink Dynamic Report The report is for the vdp model Insert the Gain value that is used for each simulation 1 In the Outline pane on the left select the Section 1 compone
319. hod You need to get the slide master name before you get the layout names The PPT API returns slide masters as a cell array This example uses the default PPT API PowerPoint template import mlreportgen ppt slides Presentation myPresentation masters getMasterNames slides layouts getLayoutNames slides masters 1 layouts Columns 1 through 5 Title Slide Title and Vertica Vertical Title an Title and Table Title Access PowerPoint Template Elements Columns 6 through 11 Title and Content Section Header Two Content Comparison Title Only Columns 12 through 13 Content with Capt Picture with Capt Get Placeholder and Content Object Names You need to know placeholder names to use the PPT API to replace placeholders with content To see the names of a placeholder in a template using PowerPoint 1 Select View gt Slide Master 2 Inthe Home tab select Select gt Selection Pane 3 4 Click in a placeholder For example in the PPT API default template you can see that the name of the content placeholder the Title and Content slide layout is Content HHS 6 myTemplate pptx PowerPoint DRAWING TOOLS ew a FILE SLIDE MASTER HOME INSERT TRANSITIONS ANIMATIONS REVIEW VIEW ADD INS Acrobat FORMAT Greg Bartlett H gt Shape Fill A Find _ a F Calibri Body 28 A A Ae i ie Ulf Tee Direction SI 00 r 4 F Shape Outline c Replace
320. ide for some table columns some or all of the formats of a column group In this example the TableColSpecGroup property specifies a column width of 0 2 inches and green text The TableColSpec overrides those formats for the first column specifying a width of 0 5 inches and bold red text import mlreportgen dom rpt Document test rank 5 Create and Format Tables table Table magic rank table Border single table BorderWidth 1px grps 1 TableColSpecGroup grps 1 Span rank grps 1 Style Width 0 2in Color green specs 1 TableColSpec specs 1 Span 1 specs 1 Style Width 0 5in Bold Color red grps 1 ColSpecs specs table ColSpecGroups grps append rpt table close rpt rptview test html To have columns resize to fit the widest content of the table entries in a column include a ResizeToFitContents object in the Style property of the table Create and Format Table Entries If you need to build a table from scratch you can use the mlreportgen dom TableEntry constructor to create table entries You can then format the table entries and add them to table rows which you can then add to the table you are building If you need to format entries in a table that you have created from a cell array you can use the TableEntry or TableRow function entry to gain access to an entry which you can then format Create a Table Entry Use a TableEntry c
321. ify Styles in an HTML Template on page 11 127 Apply a Style to a Text Object Apply a template style to a Text object either as the second argument in a Text object constructor or by setting the StyleName property to a template style For example suppose you have defined styles named Body Pass and Fail in the template for your report You can then apply the styles as follows import mlreportgen dom passed rand 1 gt 0 5 rpt Document MyReport html MyTemplate t1 Text Test status t1 StyleName Body Create and Format Text t1 WhiteSpace preserve if passed status Passed statusStyle Pass else status Failed statusStyle Fail end t2 Text status statusStyle statusPara Paragraph t1 append statusPara t2 append rpt statusPara close rpt rptview rpt OutputPath Override Template Formats You can use programmatic formats to override the formats defined in a template based style For example suppose you define a style named AlertLevel in your template and set the color to be green by default You can override the style in your report program to set a color based on the current alert level For example t Text Danger AlertLevel t Color red See Also Classes mlreportgen dom Bold mlreportgen dom CharEntity mlreportgen dom FontFamily mlreportgen dom FontSize mlreportgen dom Italic mlreportgen dom Strike mlreportgen
322. ight This field is active only if you choose Zoom from the Scaling selection list Units Specifies the units for the size of the snapshot This field is active only if you choose Zoom or Fixed size in the Image size list box Alignment Only reports in PDF or RTF format support this property e Auto e Right e Left Center Title Specifies a title for the snapshot figure Block name Uses the block name as the title Full Simulink path name Uses the Simulink path as the title e Custom Specifies a custom title Caption Select or enter a short text description for the snapshot figure e No caption Automatic use block description Uses the Simulink block description as the caption 8 113 8 Components Alphabetical List Custom Specifies a short text description for the snapshot figure Insert Anything into Report Yes Image Class rptgen_sl csl blk scope See Also Block Loop Model Loop Signal Loop System Loop 8 114 Signal Loop Signal Loop Run child components for each signal contained in current system model or block Description The Signal Loop component runs its child components for each signal contained in the current system model or block The parent component determines the behavior of this component e Model Loop Loops on all signals in the current model System Loop Loops on all signals in the current system Choose not to report on the following types o
323. igner Report File Location asvancpt W Fixed Point Block L Title Page lt No Title gt aasi 00P 5 H Documents MATLAB wsvar html a 4P Chapter Section Title B Fixed Point Logging Options 4 Model Loop current model Fixed Point Property Table Directory Same as setup file 4 Simulink Workspace Variable Loop Simulit B Fixed Point Summary Table Bierce Same as setup file RA Simulink Workspace Variable Formatting E diene tee E If report already exists increment to prevent overwriting ay a Chapter Subsection amp ge type B Image Zipped Unzipped Link Bist Report Output Type and Style Sheets B Paragraph File format web HTML v Default HTML stylest B Text B Tite Page Generation Options Formatting Tables J View report after generation he Table Auto save before generation ie Compile model to report on compiled information Table Column Spec B Table Entry Ev CompileModel Pr generation B Table Footer 4 m 8 162 Simulink Workspace Variable Loop Loop Options Sort Alphabetically by text Sort variables alphabetically by name By data type Sort variables alphabetically by data type Search for Simulink property name property value pairs Reports on variables with specified property name property value pairs Section Options Create section for each object in loop Creates a separate section in the output
324. ilt in styles to specify that paragraphs that serve as section heads appear in the TOC The following example illustrates the use of template defined styles to set the outline levels of section heads This example assumes that the template MyTemplate includes a TOC reference import mlreportgen dom d Document MyReport docx MyTemplate append d Paragraph Chapter 1 Heading 1 append d Paragraph Section 1 Heading 2 close d rptview d OutputPath Updates the TOC You can also use Word or an HTML editor to define your own heading styles and then use them to generate a report Use Format Objects to Set Outline Levels You can use format objects to set outline levels This example assumes that the template MyTemplate includes a TOC reference import mlreportgen dom d Document MyReport docx MyTemplate hi FontFamily Arial FontSize i6pt OutlineLevel 1 h2 FontFamily Arial FontSize 14pt OutlineLevel 2 p append d Paragraph Chapter 1 p Style h1 p append d Paragraph Section 1 p Style h2 close d rptview d OutputPath Updates the TOC Use Heading Objects to Set Outline Levels You can use mLreportgen dom Heading objects to specify outline levels A Heading object is a paragraph whose constructor specifies its outline level You can use a Heading Create a Table of Contents object alone or in combination with template based styles or format ob
325. in a Chapter Subsection component that organizes the loop results Display the Object Type in the Section Title Precede section titles with object titles Enable this option by selecting Create section for each object in loop For example 1 2 Enter membrane back in the list of tags Generate the figloop tutorial report The figures produced by the loop are Membrane Data Invisible Membrane Data An Application An Invisible Application Enable the Create section for each object in loop option Enable the Display the Object Type in the Section Title option Generate the figloop tutorial report The figures produced are now Figure Membrane Data Figure Invisible Membrane Data Figure An Application Figure An Invisible Application The figures produced are now Figure Membrane Data Figure Invisible Membrane Data Figure An Application Figure An Invisible Application Create a Link Anchor for Each Object in Loop Create a hyperlink to the object in the generated report 6 28 7 Compare Simulink Model XML Files About Simulink Model XML Comparison on page 7 2 Select Simulink Models for XML Comparison on page 7 5 Compare Simulink Model XML Files on page 7 8 Display Items in Original Models on page 7 17 e Merge Simulink Models from the Comparison Report on page 7 21 Export Print and Save XML Comparison Results on page 7 24 Comparing
326. ink Project on page 7 6 Select Files from the Comparison Tool on page 7 6 Select Files from the Command Line on page 7 6 Choose a Comparison Type on page 7 7 Examples of XML Comparison on page 7 7 To learn what you can do with XML comparison reports see About Simulink Model XML Comparison on page 7 2 Select Files from the Simulink Editor To compare files using the Simulink Editor 1 Select Analysis gt Compare Simulink XML Files The Select Files or Folders for Comparison dialog box opens 2 Ifthe Editor currently displays a model the current model name and path appear automatically selected in the First file or folder edit box Use the browse buttons to locate and select files for the first and second model files 3 When you click Compare the XML comparison tool performs the analysis and displays the resulting report in the Comparison Tool Select Files from the Current Folder Browser To compare two files from the Current Folder browser For two files in the same folder select the files right click and select Compare Selected Files Folders To compare files in different folders 1 Select a file right click and select Compare Against 7 5 7 Compare Simulink Model XML Files 7 6 2 Select the second file to compare in the Select Files or Folders for Comparison dialog box 3 Leave the default Comparison type Simulink XML text comparison 4 Click Compare If the
327. int Property Table Import Generated Code Import Generated Code Import source and header files generated by Simulink Coder software and custom files specified as part of model Description This component imports source and header files generated by Simulink Coder software It also imports custom files that you specify as part of your model Properties Source files auto generated Includes the following files in the report C and cpp source files generated by Simulink Coder software Simulink Coder source files such as the setup file and supporting files in the build folder This check box is selected by default Clear it to omit source files Header files auto generated Includes the following files in the report hand hpp header files generated by Simulink Coder software Simulink Coder header files in the build folder This check box is selected by default Clear it to omit source files Custom files Includes custom source files that you specify in the Code Generation gt Custom Code pane of the Configuration Parameters dialog box This check box is deselected by default Insert Anything into Report Yes Generated code listings 8 45 8 Components Alphabetical List 8 46 Class RptgenRTW CImportCode See Also Code Generation Summary Look Up Table Look Up Table Report on lookup table blocks Description The Look Up Table component reports on the following bloc
328. interactively explore a model For example you can view block parameter values without opening a block parameter dialog box Use Web views to share models with people who do not have Simulink installed You can save Web views of a model over time creating snapshots of the model as it changes during the development process System Requirements Although you use Simulink Report Generator software to create Web views you can display a Web view in a browser even if you do not have Simulink Report Generator installed By default when you export a Web view that Web view automatically displays in your default Web browser Web views require a Web browser that supports SVG natively Web View Files By default exporting a Web view creates a zip file that includes the Web view HTML file as well as files that support Web view display Supporting files include files include svg and png files Zip file packaging compresses the files and consolidates the Web view and supporting files into one zip file You can choose to export the Web view files as the Web view HTML file and the supporting files in a folder without being zipped You can open the Web view HTML file directly without having to open a non zipped file You can also choose to export the Web view files as both a zip file and as non zipped files The default name of the zip file or folder that contains the non zipped Web view files is the name of the model that contains the systems
329. interactively to customize the template To set default formatting for the whole presentation customize a slide master To set default formatting for a specific kind of slide customize a slide layout For example you can use the slide master to set up the template to use bold text for slide titles 1 Inthe slide layout right click in Click to edit Master title style box 2 From the context menu select B bold Also select the button to center the text 12 64 Create a Presentation Programmatically Calibri Li 44 A Click to edit z Ay Master title style u Lo Ock to edit Master tite syte e Click to edit Master text styles Second level Third level Fourth level e Fifth level Ca me reta tamane m mye Glick to ect Iaster tite syte 3 Save and close the template Import the PPT API Package All PPT API class names include the prefix mlreportgen ppt To avoid including the package name when you invoke PPT API object constructors and method import the package Insert this statement at the beginning of a PPT API program import mlreportgen ppt Note The import line is the first line in this example program This example creates a PPT API program in sections and so you use the import command only once To view the complete program click myNewPPTPresentation program Create the Presentation Object Create a Presentation object Specify myNewPPTPresentation pptx as the out
330. ion with the PPT API This example produces these slides 12 61 12 Programmatic PowerPoint Presentation Creation Histogram of Vector The histogram Function Histogram of Vector What You Can Do with histogram Create histogram plot of x Specify Number of bins Edges of the bins Plot into a specified axes Parameters Description The defect auto sigoritnm chooses bin width to cover the ceta renge and reves the snape of the unceniing sistribution Beate Scotts nde optimal i the date is Goze to being jointly normally distributes This rule iz sppropriste tor most other distributions as wet HE To use the PPT API to create a complete PowerPoint presentation programmatically you 12 62 Create a Presentation Programmatically Set up an empty PowerPoint presentation as a template for the presentation In MATLAB import the mlreportgen ppt PPT API package Create a Presentation object that contains the presentation code Add slides based on slide layouts in the template Add content to the slides Generate the presentation Tip To see another example of a PPT API program in MATLAB enter population slides Set Up a Template A PPT API program uses a PowerPoint presentation as a template to generate a presentation When you create a complete presentation programmatically use an empty template If slides in the template have content such as text
331. ioned signa bbw ion EB Eval expOkValues expO0kValues Pele Eo ono S 48a Paragraph Could not set lt expBl i44 Section 1 Section Title 4 else GP Chapter Load Model Failed ses i489 Paragraph Error Model lt expMod 3 Inthe Properties pane on the right a Select Custom in the Title selection list b Enter Post Test Analysis in the text box In the Outline pane on the left select the new Section 1 component 5 In the Library pane in the middle under the Formatting category double click Paragraph Do not change its properties 3 46 Add Report Content with Components To check whether there are any signal values within the desired range check the array expOkValues with a Logical If component If expOkValues is empty there are no signal values in the desired range Report the result of this check a Inthe Outline pane on the left select the Paragraph component and adda Logical If child component b In the Properties pane on the right enter the expression to evaluate in the Test expression text box isempty expOkValues This expression evaluates to 0 false if expOkValues is empty otherwise it evaluates to 1 true c Inthe Outline pane on the left select the if isempty expOkValue component and add the Logical Else component as a child
332. ions that allow you to create and assemble DOM objects such as paragraphs images and tables into a model of a specific document You can then use the API to write the model out to disk as an HTML or Microsoft Word document file DOM Object Help and Documentation For a list of the DOM objects type the following at the MATLAB prompt help mlreportgen dom To get help for a specific object such as a Paragraph use a help command such as this help mlreportgen dom Paragraph To get a complete list of DOM API classes and functions in the MATLAB Report Generator documentation open the Functions pane To see the documentation reference page for an object search in documentation or in MATLAB use a doc command such as this doc mlreportgen dom Paragraph Related Examples Construct a DOM Object on page 11 6 Get and Set DOM Object Properties on page 11 8 Document Object Model Import the DOM API Package on page 11 7 T1 Create a Report Program Construct a DOM Object 11 6 The DOM API includes a special set of MATLAB functions called constructors for creating DOM objects of various types or classes The name of an object constructor is the name of the MATLAB class from which the DOM creates an object For example the name of the constructor for a DOM paragraph object is mLreportgen dom Paragraph Some constructors do not require any arguments Other constructors can take one or more arguments that ty
333. irements and for a list of supported HTML elements and HTML CSS formats see HTML Code Requirements for DOM Reports on page 11 100 See Also mlreportgen dom Document addHTML mlreportgen dom Document addHTMLFile mlreportgen dom HTML mlreportgen dom HTMLFile Related Examples Append HTML Content to DOM Reports on page 11 92 Append HTML File Contents to DOM Reports on page 11 94 Use an HTML Cleanup Program on page 11 96 More About HTML Code Requirements for DOM Reports on page 11 100 11 91 T1 Create a Report Program Append HTML Content to DOM Reports 11 92 In this section Use an addHTML Method on page 11 92 Append an HTML Object on page 11 93 Address Errors on page 11 93 You can append strings of HTML content to a DOM document or document part using either of these approaches Use the addHTML method with a Document or DocumentPart object Create and append an HTML object If the HTML content that you append does not meet DOM requirements the DOM API generates error messages You can use an HTML cleanup program such as HTML Tidy on a file containing the source HTML content HTML Tidy fixes many issues and also identifies issues you need to address manually After you clean up the source HTML content append it to a DOM report Use an addHTML Method You can use the addHTML method with an mlreportgen dom Document or mlreportgen dom D
334. ispatcher dispatch mlreportgen ppt MessageDispatcher getTheDispatcher mlreportgen ppt ProgressMessage formatAsHTML mlreportgen ppt ProgressMessage formatAsText mlreportgen ppt ProgressMessage passes Filter Classes mlreportgen ppt DebugMessage mlreportgen ppt ErrorMessage mlreportgen ppt MessageDispatcher mlreportgen ppt MessageEventData mlreportgen ppt MessageFilter mlreportgen ppt ProgressMessage mlreportgen ppt WarningMessage 12 19 12 Programmatic PowerPoint Presentation Creation Presentation Formatting Approaches In this section Template Formatting on page 12 21 Format Objects on page 12 21 Format Properties on page 12 22 Interactive Formatting of Slide Content on page 12 22 With the PPT API you can use a PowerPoint template and PPT API format objects and properties to specify the appearance of an object The PPT API supports four approaches for formatting elements of a presentation Formatting Approach Use Define formatting in the PowerPoint Applying formatting globally within a template presentation e Maintaining consistency across presentations Extending formatting options that the PPT API provides Using the PPT API specify format Formatting a specific presentation element objects to define a style for a 3 Specifying multiple format options in one presentation object statement Specifying complicated values such as h
335. isplayed File containing the function definition In addition the line and column where the function definition begins is also displayed In addition the table also displays uncalled functions This table captures the information available on the Call Hierarchy pane in the Polyspace user interface Chart Loop Chart Loop Run child components for specified Stateflow charts Description This component runs its children for specified Stateflow charts For conditional processing for a chart you can use the RptgenSF getReportedChart function For more information see Loop Context Functions on page 6 24 Report On Automatic list from context Report on all chart blocks in the context set by the parent of this component Model Loop Reports on all Stateflow chart blocks in the current model System Loop Reports on all Stateflow chart blocks in the current system Signal Loop Reports on all Stateflow chart blocks connected to the current signal Machine Loop Reports on the current block if it is in a Stateflow chart If the Chart Loop component has any other type of component as its parent selecting this option causes it to report on all Stateflow chart blocks Custom use block list Reports on a specified list of Stateflow chart blocks Loop Options Choose chart block sorting options and reporting options in this pane Sort blocks Specifies how to sort blocks applied to each level in a m
336. ite2Text append tri trite1 append tri trite2 tr2 TableRow Create a Presentation Programmatically tr2teiText Paragraph auto tr2teiText Font Courier New tr2te2Text Paragraph The default auto algorithm chooses a bin width to append tr2te2Text cover the data range and reveal the shape of the underlying distrib tr2te1 TableEntry tr2te2 TableEntry append tr2te1 tr2teiText append tr2te2 tr2te2Text append tr2 tr2te1 append tr2 tr2te2 tr3 TableRow tr3teiText Paragraph scott tr3teiText Font Courier New tr3te2Text Paragraph is optimal if the data is close append tr3te2Text to being jointly normally distributed This rule is append tr3te2Text appropriate for most other distributions as well tr3te1 TableEntry tr3te2 TableEntry append tr3te1 tr3teiText append tr3te2 tr3te2Text append tr3 tr3te1 append tr3 tr3te2 append paramTable tr1 append paramTable tr2 append paramTable tr3 contents find tableSlide Content replace contents 1 paramTable Generate and Open the Presentation Generate the PowerPoint presentation Use a close method with a Presentation object close slides Open myNewPPTPresentation pptx On a Windows platform you can open it in MATLAB if ispc winopen slidesFile end 12 69 12 Programmatic PowerPoint Presentation Creation 12 70 Code for myNewPP
337. item Third item PPT API Programs PPT API programs generally include code that Imports the mlreportgen ppt API package Include an import statement To avoid including the package name when you invoke PPT API object constructors and method import the package import mlreportgen ppt e Creates a Presentation object to Hold the presentation contents 12 3 12 Programmatic PowerPoint Presentation Creation 12 4 Specify the output location for the generated presentation Indicate the PowerPoint template SlidesFile mySlides pptx slides Presentation slidesFile Adds or replaces slide content contents find slide2 Title replace contents Paragraph First Content Slide contents find slide2 Content datePara Paragraph Today is dateText date append datePara dateText add contents datePara J J The PPT API replaces PowerPoint template placeholders with content defined in the program In the template you can interactively add placeholders or rename placeholders for your program to interact with Closes the presentation which generates the content and formatting of the presentation close slides You can include code to open the presentation on Windows platforms Use winopen with the name of the file which in this case is stored in the slidesFile variable if ispc winopen slidesFile end To see another example of a PPT API program in MATLAB ente
338. ject based styles This example assumes that the template MyTemplate includes a TOC reference import mlreportgen dom d Document MyReport docx MyTemplate hi FontFamily Arial FontSize 16pt h2 FontFamily Arial FontSize 14pt h append d Heading 1 Chapter 1 h Style h1 h append d Heading 2 Section 1 p Style h2 close d rptview d OutputPath Updates the TOC The Heading objects generate HTML h1 h2 and so on elements By using Heading objects in an HTML report you can ensure that your report uses the default styles for headings implemented by the browser in which you display the report See Also Functions rptview unzipTemplate zipTemplate Classes mlreportgen dom Heading Related Examples Create a Microsoft Word Template on page 11 111 7 Create an HTML Template on page 11 122 11 83 T1 Create a Report Program Create Image Maps 11 84 You can specify areas of an image to be links Clicking the link area in an image in an HTML browser opens the target You can map different areas in an image to different link targets 1 Create an mlreportgen dom ImageArea object for each image area that is to serve as a link You can specify text to display if the image is not visible You can specify an image area to have one of these shapes Rectangle Circle e Polygon For details see mlreportgen dom ImageArea 2 Create an mlrepor
339. k that contains the reported variable Calling string Includes the MATLAB code that calls the reported variable Size of variable Includes the size of the reported variable Class of variable Includes the variable class to which the reported variable belongs Memory size Includes the amount of memory in bytes that the reported variable needs Value in workspace Includes the value of the reported variable Large arrays may appear as MXN CLASS For example if you have a 300 by 200 double array it appears in the report as 300x200 DOUBLE Storage class Include the storage class of the reported variable The title of this column is Storage Class This option looks at the model s TunableVars property to see if any of the model variables specify their storage class If you specify the storage class TunableVarsStorageClass and TunableVarsTypeQualifier appear in a table column in the model variables table The column entries are TunableVarsStorageClass TunableVarsTypeQualifier when TunableVarsTypeQualifier is not empty If TunableVarsTypeQualifier is empty the column entry is TunableVarsStorageClass 8 137 8 Components Alphabetical List 8 138 Values for TunableVarsStorageClass include e Exported Global e Auto e ImportedExtern e ImportedExtern Pointer Data object properties For variables that are Simulink Parameter data objects includes the values of the object properties that you list in the edit box
340. ks in the Simulink Lookup Tables library Some examples of the lookup table blocks include e 1 D Lookup Table e n D Lookup Table e Cosine e Interpolation Using Prelookup e Direct Lookup Table n D The Look Up Table component inserts a figure and or table into the report The table contains input and output numeric values A figure plots these values Note The Look Up Table component does not display a table or plot for the Direct Lookup Table n D block if the block is configured to generate the table during simulation as a block input Instead the Look Up Table displays a note in the report to the effect that the table is generated dynamically during simulation Look Up Table Options This pane allows you to specify the types of lookup table blocks to include in the report and how they appear If you select none of the check boxes in this pane the component does not insert anything into the report The Look Up Table displays results according to the type of its parent component e Model Loop Includes all lookup tables in the current model e System Loop Includes all lookup tables in the current system Block Loop If the current block is a lookup table the reports that block e Signal Loop Includes all lookup tables connected to the current signal 8 47 8 Components Alphabetical List 8 48 Ifthe Look Up Table does not have any of the looping components as its parent it includes all lookup tables
341. ks only For more information see Block Masks in the Simulink documentation Follow library links Specifies library links to include Do not follow library links Include library links Model Loop e Include unique library links For more information see Work with Library Links in the Simulink documentation Model reference Specifies whether to report on models referenced by a Model block If you want to report on referenced models then you can control the depth of the model referencing hierarchy and whether to report on model reference variants e Do not follow model reference blocks Do not report on blocks contained in referenced models e Follow all model reference blocks Report on blocks contained in all models that any part of the model hierarchy references e Follow model reference blocks defined in current model Report on blocks in models that the currently selected model references e lt Custom model reference depth gt Report on blocks in models that your specified level in the model reference hierarchy references Include all variants Report on all model reference variants To enable this option set the Model reference option to report on blocks in referenced models Starting system s Specifies the system in which to start the loop Available options depend on the value that you select in the Traverse model option Selecting any option other than All systems in model for Traverse model ac
342. l ListItem Close MATLAB append d ol close d rptview orderedListReport html1 Format Lists You can use list styles defined in a report style sheet to specify the indentation of each level of a list and the type of bullet or the number format used to render list items To use a template defined list style to format a list set the Styl eName property of the list to the name of the style For example import mlreportgen dom d Document myListReport html MyTemplate list append d first item OrderedList step 1 step 2 second item list StyleName MyListStyle close d rptview myListReport html Note A list style determines how list items are rendered regardless of the list type If you do not specify a list style the DOM API uses a default list style that renders the list according to type For example the default list style for unordered lists uses bullets to render list items If you specify a list style for an UnorderedList object that numbers top level items the top level items are numbered even though the object type is unordered bulleted Create and Format Lists Create a Word List Style To define a list style in a Word template select List as the style type in the Create New Style from Formatting dialog box see Add Styles to a Word Template on page 11 118 Create an HTML List Style To define a list style in an HTML template cascading styl
343. l fuelsys Pa fuel rate controller 8o Sensor correction and Fault Redundancy Airflow calculation Fuel Calculation est air flow est air flow Failures engine speed feedback correction feedback correction mode fuel rate EGO MAP control logic fuel rate controller Export Web View with Access to Referenced Models Open the sldemo_mdlref_depgraph model open_system sldemo_mdlref_depgraph Export to a Web view the sldemo_mdlref_depgraph model and allow access to the models it references depgraph_web_ view slwebview sldemo_mdlref_depgraph FollowModelReference on depgraph_web_view H sldemo_mdlref_depgraph webview html The Web view displays in the system browser In the Web view you can open the models referenced by the Model blocks 9 7 9 Functions Alphabetical List Pa sidemo_madiref_depgraph i Ti D sldemo_mdlref_depgraph View All sldemo_mdlref_heater in vA sldemo_mdlref_depgraph Parameter Attributes ModelVersion 1 76 LastModifiedDate Tue Oct 01 03 12 44 2013 LibraryLinkDisplay none ModelBrowserVisibility off Dirty off Visualizing Model Reference Architectures poanion This system models the thermodynamics of a house NI sldemo_mdlref_heat2cost Heat Heat Cost Heat Cost sldemo_mdlref_house Thermo Plots C2F Indoor Temp
344. late A Model Explorer stylesheet for HTML Word or PDF The output format and the associated template or stylesheet that you select for a report determines most aspects of the formatting of the generated report For example a report template or stylesheet typically uses different font sizes for chapter titles and section titles For details see Report Output Format Several components include properties that you can set to specify formatting details for that specific instance of a component For example for the MATLAB Property Table you can specify formatting such as whether to display table borders or the alignment of text in table cells 6 Add Content with Components Report Structure Components Use report structure components to organize the content of your report into chapters sections paragraphs lists tables and other standard document structure elements The following table summarizes the report structure components Component Usage Title Page Generate a title page for a report Chapter Subsection Parent components that generate the content of a chapter or chapter subsection Paragraph Specify the content and text format of a paragraph of text Can serve as the parent of one or more text components enabling use of multiple text formats for example bold regular or italic in the same paragraph Text Format strings of generated text List Generate a list from a cell arra
345. layout left to right Sorts blocks by their location in the model layout by rows The block appearing the furthest toward the left top corner of the model is the anchor for the row The row contains all other blocks that overlap the horizontal area defined by the top and bottom edges of the anchor block The other rows use the same algorithm using as the anchor the next unreported block nearest the left top of the model By layout top to bottom Sorts blocks by their location in the model layout by columns The block appearing the furthest toward the left top corner of the model is the anchor for the column The column contains all other blocks that overlap the vertical area defined by the left and right edges of the anchor block The other columns use the same algorithm using as the anchor the next unreported block nearest the left top of the model By traversal order Sorts blocks by traversal order By simulation order Sorts blocks by execution order e lt VariableName gt Inserts the value of a variable from the MATLAB workspace The lt gt notation can denote a string or cell array The following example reports 8 55 8 Components Alphabetical List 8 56 on the theta dot integrator block and the theta integrator block in the model simppend using the variable Z simppend theta simppend theta dot lt Z gt The generated report includes information about the following blocks simppend theta dot
346. ld automatic number to its initial value when its parent number changes For example this script uses a CounterReset format object to reset the chapter table number stream at the beginning of each chapter import mlreportgen dom d Document MyReport html for rank 3 2 9 chapHead Heading 1 Chapter append chapHead AutoNumber chapter 11 87 T1 Create a Report Program 11 88 chapHead Style CounterInc chapter CounterReset table WhiteSpace preserve append d chapHead JH for i 0 1 tableHead Paragraph Table append tableHead AutoNumber chapter append tableHead append tableHead AutoNumber table append tableHead s sprintf Rank i Magic Square rank i tableHead Style CounterInc table Bold FontSize iipt WhiteSpace preserve append d tableHead table append d magic rank i table Width 2in end end close d rptview d OutputPath Automatically Number Content Using Part Templates You can automatically number a document by creating document parts based on templates containing Microsoft Word or HTML automatic numbering and repeatedly appending the parts to a document For example suppose that you add a chapter part template Chapter to the part template library of the Word MyReportTemplate dotx report template This template uses a Word sequence SEQ field to number the chapter heading The template also contain
347. le Print Suppresses title page table of contents list of titles Compact Simple Print Minimizes page count suppresses title table of contents list of titles Large Type Print Uses 12 point font slightly larger than Standard Print Very Large Type Print Uses 24 point font and landscape paper orientation Compact Print Minimizes white space to reduce page count Unnumbered Chapters amp Sections Uses unnumbered chapters and sections Numbered Chapters amp Sections Numbers chapters and sections Paginated Sections Prints sections with page breaks Custom Header Lets you specify custom headers and footers Custom Titlepage Lets you specify custom title page content and presentation Verbose Print Lets you specify advanced print options Web Stylesheets Web Stylesheet Description Default HTML stylesheet HTML on a single page Simulink book HTML stylesheet HTML on multiple pages suppresses chapter headings and table of contents Select Report Generation Options Web Stylesheet Description Truth Table HTML HTML on multiple pages suppresses chapter headings stylesheet and table of contents Multi page Web HTML with each chapter on a separate page Single page Web Single page Unnumbered Chapters amp Sections Single page Numbered Chapters amp Sections Single page Simple HTML on a single page HTM
348. le entry such as the number of rows and columns that it spans Table Footer Parent the row components that generate the content of a table footer Table Header Parent the row components that generate the content of a table header Table Row Parent the table entry components that generate the content of a table row Tip Inserting a Table component into a setup also inserts all the descendant components required to generate a 2x2 table creating a table template Edit this template to create a table that suits your needs 6 Add Content with Components Property Table Components 6 6 In this section About Property Table Components on page 6 6 Open the Example Report Template on page 6 8 Examine the Property Table Output on page 6 8 Select Object Types on page 6 9 Display Property Name Property Value Pairs on page 6 9 Edit Table Titles on page 6 12 Enter Text into Table Cells on page 6 12 Add Replace and Delete Properties in Tables on page 6 13 Format Table Columns Rows and Cells on page 6 14 Zoom and Scroll on page 6 16 Select a Table on page 6 16 About Property Table Components Property Table components display property name property value pairs for objects in tables The following example shows a property table from the figloop tutorial report Property Table Components imxi Fie Edit Vie
349. le shows how to display the default PPT debug messages Use a similar approach for displaying other kinds of PPT presentation messages Display Presentation Generation Messages 1 Create a message dispatcher using the MessageDispatcher getTheDispatcher method Use the same dispatcher for all messages dispatcher MessageDispatcher getTheDispatcher dispatcher Filter DebugMessagesPass true 2 To specify to display debug messages use the MessageDispatcher Filter property dispatcher Filter DebugMessagesPass true 3 Adda listener using the MATLAB addlistener function Specify the dispatcher object the source and event data and a disp function that specifies the event data and format for the message l addlistener dispatcher Message src evtdata disp evtdata Message formatAsText 4 Place code that deletes the listener after the code that generates the presentation delete 1 This presentation displays debug messages import mlreportgen ppt dispatcher MessageDispatcher getTheDispatcher dispatcher Filter DebugMessagesPass true l addlistener dispatcher Message src evtdata disp evtdata Message formatAsText slides Presentation myMessagePresentation titleSlide add slides Title and Content p Paragraph Hello World p Style Bold true t Text How are you t Bold false append p t add titleSlide Content p close slides 12 17 12
350. le title Specifies a title for the table in the generated report e No title Includes no title e Custom Includes a custom title Name default Uses an object name as the title e Object name e Object name with Stateflow path e Object name with Simulink and Stateflow path Header row Selects a header row for the table in the generated report No header Includes no header row Type and Name Includes a header row with columns for name and object type When selected this option creates a header row for the table with object name and type Custom Includes a custom header Don t display empty values Excludes empty values from the generated report 8 171 8 Components Alphabetical List Insert Anything into Report Yes Table Class rptgen_sf csf_auto table See Also Chart Loop Graphics Object Loop Machine Loop State Loop 8 172 Stateflow Count Stateflow Count Count number of Stateflow objects in current context Description This component counts the number of Stateflow objects in the current context Properties Search depth Specifies the search depth for the count Immediate children only default Searches only children one level under the Stateflow object All descendants Searches all children of the Stateflow object Sort results Specifies the sort method for the count results Numerically decreasing by object count Default Alphabetically increasing by objec
351. lery In the Create New Building Block dialog box set Name to the part template name for example rgChapter and the Category to mlreportgen Click OK Customize Microsoft Word Part Templates 13 In the template select all of the contents of the part template and click the Delete button 14 Save and close the template Add a Block Hole The only kind of holes that you can add to a part template are the holes that the Report Explorer supports for that part template For example for the rgChapter part template the block hole that you can reinsert is rg chapterContent holes Do not add multiple instances of the same kind of hole in a part template Creating a block level hole in a Word document is essentially the same as creating an inline hole The main difference is that rich text content control must contain an empty paragraph instead of residing in a paragraph Create an empty paragraph at the point where you want to create a block level hole If you are at the end of a document create a second empty paragraph Related Examples 3 Copy a Conversion Template on page 10 12 Customize Microsoft Word Report Styles on page 10 18 Customize a Microsoft Word Title Page Template on page 10 30 More About Report Conversion Templates on page 10 2 Conversion Template Contents on page 10 5 10 29 10 Template Based Report Formatting Customize a Microsoft Word Title Page Template 10 30
352. lesheet Related Examples Copy a Conversion Template on page 10 12 Set Conversion Template Properties on page 10 15 More About Report Conversion Templates on page 10 2 Set Conversion Template Properties Set Conversion Template Properties For custom conversion templates you can specify properties to describe the template 1 In Report Explorer select Tools gt Edit Document Conversion Template 2 From the list of templates in the Library pane click the template whose properties you want to set 3 In the fields at the top of the Properties pane specify properties for the template Template id Description of the template such as Word template for model reports Display name Template name to display in the list of Word templates for example Model reports Description Description of the template Creator Name of the person or organization that created the template 4 Apply the properties by selecting another template in the list of templates Related Examples Copy a Conversion Template on page 10 12 Open a Conversion Template on page 10 14 More About Report Conversion Templates on page 10 2 10 15 10 Template Based Report Formatting Move a Conversion Template 10 16 You can change the location of a template file 1 o 5 In Report Explorer select Tools gt Edit Document Conversion Template The Template Browser appears in th
353. licking File gt Save As Give it the name sldemo_auto_report Add a Chapter Subsection component to the report setup file to include information about model subsystems a Inthe Library pane in the middle double click Chapter Subsection to add it to the report setup file b For Title choose Custom In the title field enter Description of subsystems Add a Model Loop asa child of the Chapter Subsection component This loops over the ClimateControlSystem system and its subsystems in the sldemo_auto_ climate elec model a In the Library pane in the middle double click Model Loop to add it to the report setup file By default the Report Explorer adds that component as a child of the Chapter Subsection component b Inthe Model Loop properties pane from the Model name selection list select lt Custom block diagram gt Model Loop c Inthe Model name field delete the text lt Custom block diagram gt and then enter Sldemo_auto climate _elec s1x Click any component in the report setup file to add this model to the Models to include list d Inthe Traverse model selection list select Selected system s and children e Inthe Look under masks selection list select All masks f Inthe Model reference selection list select Do not follow model reference blocks g Inthe Starting system s field enter sldemo_auto_climate_elec ClimateControlSystem Because you selected Selected system s and children for Traverse model th
354. lide Add to or replace text in a placeholder object Add toa ContentPlaceholder object a string Paragraph object or with a cell array of strings or Paragraph objects or a combination of both e Replace a ContentPlaceholder object witha Paragraph object Add toa TextBoxPlaceholder object a string Paragraph object or with a cell array of strings or Paragraph objects or a combination of both e Replace a TextBoxPlaceholder object witha Paragraph object See Add and Replace Text in Placeholders on page 12 78 Add to or replace a text box Add to or replace a TextBox object with a string Paragraph object or with a cell array of strings or Paragraph objects or a combination of both See Add or Replace Text in a Text Box on page 12 79 Add and Replace Text in Placeholders You can add or replace text in a ContentPlaceholder and a TextBoxPlaceholder specifying Add and Replace Presentation Content A string A Paragraph object A cell array of strings or Paragraph objects or a combination of strings and Paragraph objects An inner cell array specifies inner list indented items The slide layout specifies whether the text appears as paragraphs a bulleted list or a numbered list import mlreportgen ppt name1 before slides Presentation name1 add slides Comparison replace slides Left Content dummy content replace slides Right Cont
355. lide Layout Names on page 12 40 Get Placeholder and Content Object Names on page 12 41 Get Table Style Names on page 12 42 PPT API Applications and PowerPoint Templates The PPT API uses PowerPoint presentations as templates to generate presentations The template can be an empty presentation or a presentation with slides You can use the following as templates for a PPT API presentation The default PPT API PowerPoint template An existing PowerPoint presentation whose content you want to update A PowerPoint template You can use templates to apply formatting e Across a whole presentation for example background color of slides To specific kinds of elements in a presentation for example the titles of slides You can use the PowerPoint editor or the PPT API to specify formatting for elements of an individual slide That formatting overrides the template formatting but does not affect the template or other elements in the presentation Template Elements PowerPoint templates include several elements that the PPT API uses to generate a presentation To customize formatting defined in a template modify one or more of these template elements 12 37 12 Programmatic PowerPoint Presentation Creation 12 38 PowerPoint Template Element How the PPT API Interacts with the Template Element Slide masters Applies the slide master formatting globally to the presentation To edit slide
356. line only Online only Online only Online only Online only Online only Online only Online only Online only New Release 11 Revised Release 12 Revised for Version 2 02 Release 14 Revised for Version 2 1 Revised for Version 2 1 1 Release 14SP1 Revised for Version 2 2 Release 14SP1 Revised for Version 2 2 1 Release 14SP2 Revised for Version 2 3 1 Release 14SP3 Revised for Version 3 0 Release 2006a Revised for Version 3 1 Release 2006b Revised for Version 3 2 Release 2007a Revised for Version 3 2 1 Release 2007b This publication was previously for MATLAB and Simulink It is now for Simulink only Revised for Version 3 3 Release 2008a Revised for Version 3 4 Release 2008b Revised for Version 3 5 Release 2008b Revised for Version 3 6 Release 2009a Revised for Version 3 7 Release 2009b Revised for Version 3 8 Release 2010a Revised for Version 3 9 Release 2010b Revised for Version 3 10 Release 2011a Revised for Version 3 11 Release 2011b Revised for Version 3 12 Release 2012a Revised for Version 3 13 Release 2012b Revised for Version 3 14 Release 2013a Revised for Version 3 15 Release 2013b Revised for Version 3 16 Release 2014a Revised for Version 4 0 Release 2014b Revised for Version 4 1 Release 2015a Revised for Version 4 2 Release 2015b Contents Getting Started 1 Simulink Report Generator Product Description Key Features System De
357. link MMmodels MM_dict_2copy sldd MM _Entryl Name MM_Entry1 Value 27 class double LastModified 2015 Jan 20 01 15 09 619512 Status Unchanged MM_d2_Entryl Name MM_d2_Entry1 Value 27 class double LastModified 2015 Jan 30 23 30 23 182407 Status Modified MM_d2_phone_number Name MM_d2_phone_number Value 508 647 8103 class char LastModified 2015 Jan 30 23 30 05 414130 Status Modified MM_phone_number Name MM_phone_number Value 508 647 8103 class char LastModified 2015 Jan 20 01 15 09 782512 Status Unchanged Chapter 2 H Michael Simulink MMmodels testDD sldd testVar Name testVar Value testVarVal class char LastModified 2015 Jan 30 23 37 08 139822 Status New 8 125 8 Components Alphabetical List 8 126 Class rptgen_sl csl data dictionary See Also Simulink Data Dictionary Loop Simulink Data Dictionary Loop Simulink Data Dictionary Loop Run Simulink Data Dictionary child component for each Simulink data dictionary in specified context Description This component runs the Simulink Data Dictionary child component for each Simulink data dictionary in the specified context You can specify whether to have each data dictionary in the loop Report on Specify the data dictionaries to report on e Dictionaries in MATLAB path Report on all data dictionaries on the MATLAB path If you select Include child data dictionaries then also reports on child
358. ll Array You can use any of these approaches to create a multilevel list from a cell array e Nest one dimensional cell arrays representing sublists in a one dimension cell array representing the parent list import mlreportgen dom d Document orderedListReport htm1 ol OrderedList step 1 step 2 option 1 option 2 step 3 append d ol close d rptview orderedListReport htm1 Include list objects as members of a one dimensional cell array representing the parent list Use this approach to create ordered sublists from cell arrays d Document myListReport html append d first item OrderedList step 1 step 2 second item close d rptview myListReport html Combine the nested cell array and nested list object approaches Create a Multilevel List from Scratch You can create a multilevel list from scratch by appending child lists to parent lists import mlreportgen dom 11 55 T1 Create a Report Program 11 56 d Document orderedListReport html1 ol OrderedList Start MATLAB Create a rank 3 or 4 magic square optionList UnorderedList li ListItem gt gt magic 3 table append 1i Table magic 3 table Width 1in append optionList li li ListItem gt gt magic 4 table append 1i Table magic 4 table Width 1in append optionList 1i append ol optionList append o
359. lock function For more information see Loop Context Functions on page 6 24 Models to Include You can add a model to the list by clicking Add New Model to List The following table shows the buttons you can use to move a model up or down in the list or to add or delete a model Action Move a model up in the list Move a model down in the list Remove a model from the list JAGA tal Add a new model to the list 8 69 8 Components Alphabetical List 8 70 Model Options Active Includes a given model in the loop This option is selected by default Clearing this option omits the model from the loop This option allows you to temporarily omit one or more models from a report Model name Specifies the model name Current block diagram All open models All open libraries Block diagrams in current directory Custom block diagram Selecting this option automatically sets the Starting system s field top to start in the model root system lt VariableName gt For more information see lt VariableName gt Notation on the Text component reference page in the MATLAB Report Generator documentation Traverse model Specifies the systems to traverse All systems in model Selected system s only Selected system s and ancestors Selected system s and children Look under masks Specifies how to handle masks Functional masks only No masks All masks Graphical mas
360. lock types Block Type Count Insert Anything into Report Yes Table Class rptgen_sl csl blk count See Also Block Loop Model Loop System Loop 8 11 8 Components Alphabetical List Bus Create list of signals exiting from Bus Selector block Description This component creates a list of signals exiting a Bus Selector block The list contains signals leaving from the reported block or downstream buses and signals The parent of this component determines which buses appear in the report e Model Loop Includes all buses in the current model e System Loop Includes all buses in the current system Block Loop Ifthe current block is a bus block then the report includes that block e Signal Loop Includes all buses connected to the current signal If the Bus component does not have a looping component as its parent it reports on all buses in all open models Properties Show Bus Hierarchy Specifies whether the list displays downstream buses hierarchically Insert linking anchor for bus blocks Inserts a linking anchor for each bus block This property designates the list item as the location to which other links for that block point For more information see the Simulink Linking Anchor or Link component reference pages Do not use this option if you have already specified an anchor location for the bus block with an Object Linking Anchor component Insert linking anchor for signals Inser
361. locks that overlap the vertical area defined by the left and right edges of the anchor block The other columns use the same algorithm using as the anchor the next unreported block nearest the left top of the model By traversal order Sorts blocks by traversal order By simulation order Sorts blocks by execution order lt VariableName gt Inserts the value of a variable from the MATLAB workspace The lt gt notation can denote a string or cell array The following example reports on the theta dot integrator block and the theta integrator block in the model simppend using the variable Z simppend theta Block Loop simppend theta dot lt Z gt The generated report includes information about the following blocks e simppend theta dot simppend theta For more information see lt VariableName gt Notation on the Text component reference page in the MATLAB Report Generator documentation Search for Simulink property name property value pairs Reports only on Simulink blocks with specified property name property value pairs Section Options Create section for each object in loop Inserts a section in the generated report for each block found in the loop Display the object type in the section title Automatically inserts the object type into the section title in the generated report Create link anchor for each object in loop Create a hyperlink to the block in the generated report Insert Anything into
362. m and Documentation by the federal government or other entity acquiring for or through the federal government and shall supersede any conflicting contractual terms or conditions If this License fails to meet the government s needs or is inconsistent in any respect with federal procurement law the government agrees to return the Program and Documentation unused to The MathWorks Inc Trademarks MATLAB and Simulink are registered trademarks of The MathWorks Inc See www mathworks com trademarks for a list of additional trademarks Other product or brand names may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders Patents MathWorks products are protected by one or more U S patents Please see www mathworks com patents for more information Revision History January 1999 December 2000 June 2004 August 2004 October 2004 December 2004 April 2005 September 2005 March 2006 September 2006 March 2007 September 2007 March 2008 October 2008 October 2008 March 2009 September 2009 March 2010 September 2010 April 2011 September 2011 March 2012 September 2012 March 2013 September 2013 March 2014 October 2014 March 2015 September 2015 First printing Second printing Third printing Online only Online only Online only Online only Online only Online only Online only Fourth printing Fifth printing Online only Online only Online only Online only Online only Online only Online only Online only On
363. m custom libraries Requirements traceability Glossary and report explanation Report output options File format Filename vdp Folder H Documents MATLAB magic square_html_files Select Folder If report exists increment name to prevent overwriting Package type Zipped Unzipped Both zipped and unzipped Q 2 8 Generate a System Design Description In the dialog box to display detailed information about each option right click on the option prompt and select the What s This context sensitive help To create a customized version of the report click the Customize Content button The customize option creates a copy of the report setup file and opens the copy in the Report Explorer See Customize the System Design Description on page 2 10 2 Generate System Design Description Reports Customize the System Design Description In this section Using the Report Explorer to Customize the Report on page 2 10 Building a Dialog Box for a Custom Report Setup File on page 2 11 You can create customized versions of the System Design Description report by using the Report Explorer and optionally the MATLAB tools for building graphical user interfaces By default when you open a customized version of the report the System Design Description dialog box does not open Using the Report Explorer to Customize the Report To customize the System Design Description setup file in
364. magic_square rpt 10 33 10 Template Based Report Formatting Al Report Explorer File Edit View Tools Help us 2 Report Generator 10 34 42 Document Conversion Templates Name MATLAB home 00 ah bartlett Do sDD_custom rpt SDD_custom1 rpt demoReport rpt ex_link_to_section rpt inport_outport rpt link_report rpt magic square ink rpt magic_squares rpt report rpt magic_squares rpt Actions ES Open report Z Generate report Description This report creates a series of magic squares and displays them as images A magic square is a matrix in which the columns rows and diagonal all add up to the same number simuilnk_tutorial rpt 3 Inthe Report Options pane click Open report 4 Inthe magic_squares report adda Title Page component In the Title Page dialog box set the Title field to Magic Squares 5 Below the Title Page component add a Chapter component 6 Inthe Report Options dialog box set File format to Word from template and instead of Default Word Template select Magic Squares Template Report Output Type and Templates File format Word from template Default Wordtemplate Generation Options Default Word Template DocBook updated My Custom Word Template Magic Square Template V View report after generation 7 Generate the report Select the magic squares report In the Report Explorer toolbar click the Report
365. mat Images 05 Create an Image Resize an Image Image Storage Links from an Image 11 41 11 41 11 41 11 42 11 42 11 46 11 46 11 46 11 47 11 52 11 52 11 53 11 55 11 56 11 58 11 58 11 59 11 59 11 60 11 61 11 66 11 66 11 67 11 68 11 69 11 72 11 72 11 72 11 73 11 73 11 73 11 75 11 75 11 76 11 76 11 76 XV Create a Table of Contents 0 0000085 11 77 Create a Microsoft Word Table of Contents 11 77 Create an HTML Table of Contents 11 79 Set Outline Levels of Section Heads 11 81 Create Image Maps 0 00 11 84 Automatically Number Document Content 11 86 Automatically Number Content Programmatically 11 86 Automatically Number Content Using Part Templates 11 88 Appending HTML to DOM Reports 11 90 Why Append HTML to a DOM Report 11 90 Workflow for Appending HTML 11 90 Append HTML Content to DOM Reports 11 92 Use an addHTML Method 04 11 92 Append an HTML Object 0 00 00 eee ee 11 93 Address Errors cc s2c 05e eaas gained 4a bande sales 11 93 Append HTML File Contents to DOM Reports 11 94 Use an addHTMLFile Method 005 11 94 Append an HTMLFile Object 0 0 0000000 11 94 Address Errors 2s e a ee ea Rae 11 95 Use an HTML Cleanu
366. matic list from context Reports on all blocks in the current context as set by the parent component Simulink Summary Table Custom use block list Reports on a list of specified blocks Specify the full path of each block Loop Options Sort blocks Alphabetically by block name Sorts blocks alphabetically by name Alphabetically by system name Sorts systems alphabetically by name Lists blocks in each system but in no particular order Alphabetically by full Simulink path Sorts blocks alphabetically by Simulink path By block type Sorts blocks alphabetically by block type By block depth Sorts blocks by their depth in the model By layout left to right Sorts blocks by their location in the model layout by rows The block appearing the furthest toward the left top corner of the model is the anchor for the row The row contains all other blocks that overlap the horizontal area defined by the top and bottom edges of the anchor block The other rows use the same algorithm using as the anchor the next unreported block nearest the left top of the model By layout top to bottom Sorts blocks by their location in the model layout by columns The block appearing the furthest toward the left top corner of the model is the anchor for the column The column contains all other blocks that overlap the vertical area defined by the left and right edges of the anchor 8 155 8 Components Alphabetical List 8 156 blo
367. matting Table Object Property bottom Align entries vertically top middle TableEntriesValign Create and Format Tables Formatting Table Object Property Align entries horizontally left right TableEntriesHalign center Create space padding between entry TableEntriesInnerMargin boundary and content Apply a set of format objects to all table TableEntriesStyle entries Keep a Table and Its Title on the Same Page Use the KeepLinesTogether and KeepWithNext paragraph formats to keep a table title and the table together on the same page This example creates a table title creates table content and makes the table header row bold using table entry indexing To keep the table on the same page the code specifies KeepLinesTogether and KeepWithNext for all rows except the last row The last row has only KeepLinesTogether set and not KeepWithNext This prevents the table from being forced to stay with the paragraph that follows import mlreportgen dom rpt Document test docx p Paragraph Table 1 p Style Bold KeepLinesTogether KeepWithNext append rpt p ca Paragraph Col 1 Paragraph Col 2 Paragraph data 11 Paragraph Data 12 Paragraph data 21 Paragraph Data 22 ca 1 1 Children 1 Bold true ca 1 2 Children 1 Bold true for r 1 2 for c 1 2 ca r c Style KeepLinesTogether KeepWithNext end end for c 1 2 ca
368. me icon to an open area on your desktop 3 Right click the icon and select Create shortcut 4 Right click the shortcut and select Properties 5 Inthe Target edit box append the following text allow file access from files Be sure to use two hyphens at the beginning Click OK 6 Close all open Google Chrome browsers 7 Use the shortcut to open a Google Chrome browser 8 Open the Web view file Open a Web View in a Google Chrome Browser on a Macintosh Platform 1 Run Terminal You can find it using Spotlight in Applications Utilities 2 Enter the following text open Applications Google Chrome app allow file access from files Open a Web View in a Google Chrome Browser on a Linux Platform 1 Run terminal 2 Enter the following text chromium browser allow file access from files View Contents of a System To see a thumbnail of the contents of all of systems in the Web view click the View All tab 5 7 5 Export Simulink Models to Web Views sidemo_auto_climatecontrol View All Simulating Automatic Climate Control Systems al sidemo_auto_climatecontrol_ v Parameter Attributes Text Simulating Automatic Climate Control Systems DropShadow off Interpreter off FontName auto F FontWeight auto z FontSize 12 E FontAngle auto ForegroundColor black BackgroundColor white Horizontalalignment center 273 Foo Pepo Outi Outi Constant Constant m Int
369. me properties For example if the Container object specifies red as its text color and none of its text children specify a color the text children are colored red For Microsoft Word report output a Container object simulates container format inheritance applying the formats specified by the Container object Style attribute to each child unless overridden by the child and then appending the child to the Word output The Word output ignores the HTMLTag and StyleName properties of the Container object Tip You can use mlreportgen dom Container or mlreportgen dom Group objects to produce collections of document elements Use a container object to apply format inheritance to a set of objects and to create HTML container elements not otherwise supported by the DOM such as div section and article e Use a group object to append the same content in multiple places in a document without cloning the group See Also Classes mlreportgen dom Container mlreportgen dom Group Create Object Containers Related Examples Use Style Sheets on page 11 21 Use Format Objects on page 11 23 More About Report Formatting Approaches on page 11 20 11 27 11 Create a Report Program Form Based Reporting 11 28 The DOM API supports a form based approach to report generation You can use Microsoft Word or an HTML editor to create a template that defines the fixed content of the form interspersed with holes
370. mple shows how to create a RawText object to append HTML markup import mlreportgen dom d Document test html append d RawText lt div id toc gt lt toc gt close d rptview test html Format Text You can format text programmatically using either DOM format objects or Text object format properties You can also use Word and HTML template styles For information about these formatting techniques and format inheritance see Report Formatting Approaches on page 11 20 Format Text Programmatically You can use format objects to format Text objects or format properties to specify commonly used text formats This example uses A FontFamily format object to specify the primary and backup font The Bold format property to specify text weight import mlreportgen dom d Document test html Create and Format Text t append d Bold Arial text fontFamily FontFamily Arial fontFamily BackupFamilyNames Helvetica t Style fontFamily t Bold true close d rptview test html Use these format objects and format properties to format text Formatting Format Object Format Property Font FontFamily FontFamilyName Backup font HTML only FontFamily n a Complex script font for FontFamily n a example Arabic East Asian font FontFamily n a Font size FontSize FontSize Foreground color Color Color
371. n double click Model Loop It is added as a child of the then component 6 44 Report Generator 3 Report simulink_tutorial rpt WB Eval The name of the model that wil Title Page Dynamic Simulink Report a8if stremp bdroot acs expModel Sga then i i 48a Model Loop current model Welse i 88 Chapter Load Model Failed The Properties pane on the right looks as follows 3 22 Add Report Content with Components Model Loop Help Includes specified models and systems in report Models to Include Model Options Models to Include Active Current block diagram Model name Current block diagram v t Traverse model All systems in model Look under masks Functional masks only x Follow library links Do not follow library links u Model reference Do not follow model reference blocks v Include all variants Starting system s Model root Section Options Create section for each object in loop Display the object type in the section title Create link anchor for each object in loop In the Properties pane on the right a Select the Active check box to process the vdp model b Inthe Traverse model selection list select Selected system s only to traverse only the vdp model c Select Model root from the Starting system s selection list d At the bottom of the Properties pane on the left select the Create section for each object in loop check box to create a chapter
372. n for example background color of slides To specific kinds of elements in a presentation for example the titles of slides You can use the PowerPoint editor or the PPT API to specify formatting for elements of an individual slide That formatting overrides the template formatting but does not affect the template or other elements in the presentation Template Elements PowerPoint templates include several elements that the PPT API uses to generate a presentation To customize formatting defined in a template modify one or more of these template elements 12 5 12 Programmatic PowerPoint Presentation Creation PowerPoint Template Element How the PPT API Interacts with the Template Element Slide masters Applies the slide master formatting globally to the presentation To edit slide masters use the PowerPoint software You cannot use the PPT API to change global presentation formatting You can use the API to customize formatting on individual slides Slide layouts Adds new slides based on a slide layout Replaces or adds content in the locations specified by a slide layout To customize the layout of slides use PowerPoint Table styles Applies a formatting style to a table you create with the PPT API Placeholders Replaces placeholders with content The content you use the PPT API to replace the placeholder must match the kind of placeholder The content replaces all pla
373. n all blocks connected to the current signal Custom use block list Enables you to specify a list of blocks on which to report Enter the full path of each block Loop Options Choose block sorting options and reporting options in this pane gt Sort blocks Use this option to select how to sort blocks applied to each level in a model Alphabetically by block name Sorts blocks alphabetically by their names 8 7 8 Components Alphabetical List 8 8 Alphabetically by system name Sorts systems alphabetically The report lists blocks in each system but in no particular order Alphabetically by full Simulink path Sorts blocks alphabetically by Simulink path By block type Sorts blocks alphabetically by block type By block depth Sorts blocks by their depth in the model By layout left to right Sorts blocks by their location in the model layout by rows The block appearing the furthest toward the left top corner of the model is the anchor for the row The row contains all other blocks that overlap the horizontal area defined by the top and bottom edges of the anchor block The other rows use the same algorithm using as the anchor the next unreported block nearest the left top of the model By layout top to bottom Sorts blocks by their location in the model layout by columns The block appearing the furthest toward the left top corner of the model is the anchor for the column The column contains all other b
374. n all blocks with requirements in the current system e Signal Loop Reports on all blocks with requirements connected to the current signal If the Requirements Block Loop does not have the Model Loop System Loop Signal Loop or Block Loop component as its parent it reports on all blocks in all models Custom use block list Reports on a list of blocks with specified requirements Enter the full paths of each block into this field Loop Options Sort blocks Specify how to sort blocks applied to each level in a model Alphabetically by block name Sorts blocks alphabetically by name Alphabetically by system name Sorts systems and subsystems alphabetically by name Blocks in each system do not appear in alphabetical order 8 91 8 Components Alphabetical List Alphabetically by full Simulink path Sorts blocks alphabetically by Simulink path By block type Sorts blocks alphabetically by block type By block depth Sorts blocks by their depth in the model By layout left to right Sorts blocks by their location in the model layout by rows The block appearing the furthest toward the left top corner of the model is the anchor for the row The row contains all other blocks that overlap the horizontal area defined by the top and bottom edges of the anchor block The other rows use the same algorithm using as the anchor the next unreported block nearest the left top of the model By layout top to bottom
375. n intended recipient of this document you are hereby notified that unauthorized use dissemination or copying of the information contained in it or attached to it is strictly prohibited If you have received this document in error please delete it and immediately notify the issuer 3 On the Word ribbon select the Insert tab 4 Select the content that you have created for the document part template 5 On the Insert ribbon click the Explore Quick Parts button Select Save Selection to the Quick Part Gallery to save a copy of the selected prototype in the Quick Part Gallery of the template file The Create New Building Block dialog box appears EHS OORE MainReportTemplate dotx Word TABLE 2 A O xX HOME INSERT DESIGN PAGE LAYOU REFERENCES MAILINGS REVIEW VIEW DEVELOPER Acrobat DESIGN LAYOUT PaulKinn SE RBGO he p om Ee io aS ii El Footer Gj AutoText Pages Table Pictures Online Shapes Apps Online Links Comment Tet Pictures Video E PageNumber gox Ea Document Property Tables Mustrations Media Comments Header amp Footer E Building Blocks Organizer Eg Save Selection to Quick Part Gall Report Originator Originator Name Originator Report Date ReportDate Date ReportDate Reviewed By _ RevieweBy Reviewed By RevieweBy Confidential This document may contain confidential information If you are not an intended recipient of this document you are hereby notifie
376. n node to see a summary of all changes Compare Simulink Model XML Files Click the truthtable node to reverse annotate and display both truthtable editors Click the Compare button at the end of the Condition Table node to open a new text comparison showing only Condition differences Similarly click the Compare button for Action Table to view only Action changes See the example s1xml_truthtables Understand the Report Hierarchy and Matching Hierarchical node tags such as subsystem tags in the xml file appear twice in the tree as nested nodes This is because the container node and the contents can have separate differences in their properties This feature of the XML report allows you to distinguish between property differences of the node itself and differences contained within nodes nested inside To understand matching results within an XML comparison report see How the Matching Algorithm Works in the MATLAB Report Generator documentation Note It might not be possible for the analysis to detect matches between previously corresponding sections of files that have diverged too much If you cannot see changes you expected to see in the report on the View tab click the Filter button to turn off filters and see all identified changes See Filter Out Differences on page 7 18 Comparing Signal Builder Blocks You can see differences in Signal Builder blocks when you have not touched them This oc
377. n the generated table Example The following table sorts based on Reference Block column The Report Explorer uses the aero_guidance model with Merge repeated rows deselected to generate the table 8 139 8 Components Alphabetical List Block Library Reference Block Status Equations of Aerospace Equations of Motion resolved Motion Body Body Axes Axes Incidence amp Aerospace Incidence amp Airspeed resolved Airspeed Fin Actuator Aerospace 2nd Order Nonlinear resolved Actuator 3DoF Animation Aerospace 3DoF Animation resolved Atmosphere Aerospace Atmosphere model resolved Cm Simulink Interpolation n D resolved using PreLookup Cx Simulink Interpolation n D resolved using PreLookup Cz Simulink Interpolation n D resolved using PreLookup Kg Simulink Interpolation n D resolved using PreLookup Ki Simulink Interpolation n D resolved using PreLookup Alpha Index Simulink PreLookup Index Search resolved Mach Index Simulink PreLookup Index Search resolved Mach Index Simulink PreLookup Index Search resolved Alpha Index Simulink PreLookup Index Search resolved When you select Merge repeated rows the generated table collapses rows in the Block column Each row in the Reference Block column is unique as shown in the following table Block Library Reference Block Status Equations of Aerospace Equations of Motion resolved Motion Body Body Ax
378. n the text comparison report select a difference in the code and click Merge to copy the selected difference from the left block to the right block After you finish merging differences save the parent model in the Editor Related Examples Select Simulink Models for XML Comparison on page 7 5 Compare Simulink Model XML Files on page 7 8 Display Items in Original Models on page 7 17 Source Control in Simulink Project Compare Revisions More About About Simulink Model XML Comparison on page 7 2 Comparing XML Files from Models with Identical Names on page 7 27 7 23 7 Compare Simulink Model XML Files Export Print and Save XML Comparison Results 7 24 In this section Save Printable HTML Report on page 7 24 Export Results to the Workspace on page 7 24 Save Comparison Log Files in a Zip File on page 7 25 Save Printable HTML Report To save a printable version of an XML comparison report 1 On the Comparison tab in the Comparison section select Save As gt Save as HTML The Save dialog box opens where you can choose to save a printable version of the XML comparison report 2 Select a file name and location to save the report The report is a noninteractive HTML document of the differences detected by the algorithm for printing sharing or archiving a record of the comparison If you have applied filters your filtered results appear in
379. nclude Checks from Polyspace Standard Library Stub Functions Unless you deselect this option the tables contain Polyspace Code Prover checks that appear in Polyspace stubs for the standard library functions Coding Rules Details Coding Rules Details Create table of coding rule violations broken down by file Description This component creates tables containing coding rule violations broken down by each file in the Polyspace project For each rule violation the table contains the following information Rule number e Rule description e Function containing the violation Line and column number Review information such as classification status and comments Properties Select Coding Rules Type Using this option you can choose which coding rule violations to display You can display violations for the following set of coding rules e MISRA C rules MISRA AC AGC rules e MISRA C rules JSF C rules Custom coding rules Display by Using this option you can break down the display of coding rule violations by file 8 25 8 Components Alphabetical List 8 26 Coding Rules Summary Create table with number of coding rule violations Description This component creates a table containing the number of coding rule violations You can choose whether to break this information down by rule number or file Properties Select Coding Rules Type Using this option you can choose which co
380. nd Units list For more information on paper position mode see orient in the MATLAB documentation Size Allows you to enter the size of the Handle Graphics figure snapshot in the format wxh width times height This field is active only if you choose Custom in the Image size list box Units Allows you to enter for the size of the Handle Graphics figure snapshot This field is active only if you choose Custom in the Image size list box Invert hardcopy Causes the Handle Graphics InvertHardcopy property to invert colors for printing In other words this option changes dark colors to light colors and light colors to dark colors To change colors in your image choose one of the following options Automatic Automatically changes a dark axes colors to light axes colors If the axes color is a light color this option does not invert the color Invert Changes dark axes colors to light axes colors and light axes colors to dark axes colors Don t invert Does not change the colors in the image that appears on the screen for printing e Use figure s InvertHardcopy setting Uses the InvertHardcopy property set in the Handle Graphics image e Make figure background transparent Makes the image background transparent Display Options Scaling Controls size of the image as displayed in a browser Making an image larger using this option does not affect the storage size of the image but the quality of the displayed image may de
381. nd code characteristics Description This component creates tables containing verification times and code characteristics such as number of lines Properties Include Verification Time Information If you select this option the report contains verification times broken down by phase e For Polyspace Bug Finder the phases are compilation passO pass1 etc For Polyspace Code Prover the phases are compilation global function etc Include Code Details If you select this option the report contains the following code characteristics Number of files Number of lines Number of lines without comment Code Metrics Details Code Metrics Details Create table of Polyspace metrics broken down by file and function Description This component creates a table containing metrics from a Polyspace project If you select the appropriate properties the metrics appear broken down by file and function Properties Project Metrics If you select this option the report contains the following metrics about the project Number of direct recursions Number of files Number of headers Number of protected and unprotected shared variables File Metrics If you select this option the report contains the following metrics about each file in the project Estimated function coupling Lines without comment Comment density Total lines Function Metrics If you select this option the report contains t
382. ne of these character entity references The named character entity reference amp lt The numeric character entity reference amp 003Cc For more information see http en wikipedia org wiki List_of_XML_and_HTML_character_entity_references DOCTYPE Declaration The HTML content that you append to a DOM report does not need to include a document type declaration see http www w38schools com tags tag_doctype asp If the content does include a document type declaration it must meet the following conditions Ifthe content includes character entity references special characters the document type declaration must reference a document type definition DTD that defines the referenced entities For example the following declaration specifies a DTD that defines all HTML character entities lt DOCTYPE html SYSTEM html dtd gt The html dtd is included in the MATLAB Report Generator software Ifthe document type declaration references a DTD a valid DTD must exist at the path specified by the declaration Otherwise appending the content causes a DTD parse error For example the following declaration causes a parse error lt DOCTYPE html SYSTEM foo dtd gt Ifthe content to be appended does not include character entity references the document type declaration does not need to reference a DTD For example the following declaration works for content that does not use special characters lt DOCTYPE html gt
383. nearest the left top of the model By simulation order Sorts blocks by execution order lt VariableName gt Inserts the value of a variable from the MATLAB workspace The lt gt notation can denote a string or cell array For more information see lt VariableName gt Notation on the Text component reference page in the MATLAB Report Generator documentation Search for Simulink property name property value pairs Reports on Simulink blocks with specified property name property value pairs Search Stateflow Reports on Stateflow charts with specified property name property value pairs Chart Loop Section Options Create section for each object in loop Inserts a section in the generated report for each object found in the loop Display the object type in the section title Inserts the object type automatically into the section title in the generated report Create link anchor for each object in loop Creates a hyperlink to the object in the generated report Insert Anything into Report Yes inserts a section if you select the Create section for each object in loop option Class rptgen_sf csf_chart_loop See Also Block Loop Machine Loop Model Loop Signal Loop System Loop Simulink Function System Loop 8 17 8 Components Alphabetical List 8 18 Code Generation Summary Insert version number information list of generated files tables summarizing code generation configuration inform
384. nent Note This section builds on the previous tasks described in the step by step example summarized in Create a Simulink Report Generator Report on page 3 2 To see the completed report setup file open Simulink Dynamic Report The report is for the vdp model Now that the model is open and the Gain parameter is set use the Model Simulation component to simulate the vdp model 1 In the Outline pane on the left select the then component under the if okSetValue component 2 In the Library pane under the Simulink category double click Model Simulation In the Outline pane on the left this component is renamed Simulate model 3 37 3 Creating Simulink Reports Report Generator 4 Report simulink_tutorial rpt a eB Eval The name of the model that wil i i EB Title Page Dynamic Simulink Report b eit stremp bdroot ges expM odell Et pute P Model Loop Chapter current model jee 488 Paragraph This report demonstra fres S System Snapshot b pF for explteration 1 1 lengthlesp alue TB Eval Evaluate this string in the bas Section 1 Processing the vdp model i B Variable lteration_Value B Eval set_param expBlock espParam lter Ey wit fokSetValue I Phen ii H Simulate model use model start end time Pelse fe Be Paragraph Could not set lt expBl 5 4 else P Chapter Load M
385. nformation in a Web view you must have Simulink Verification and Validation installed In a Web view click a highlighted block for example blocks with an orange border have requirements information The information for that block appears in the Informer pane below the model Related Examples Export Models to Web View Files on page 5 4 More About Optional Web Views on page 5 20 5 21 Add Content with Components e Components on page 6 2 Report Structure Components on page 6 4 Table Formatting Components on page 6 5 e Property Table Components on page 6 6 Summary Table Components on page 6 17 Logical and Looping Components on page 6 21 Filter with Loop Context Functions on page 6 22 Loop Context Functions on page 6 24 Edit Figure Loop Components on page 6 25 6 Add Content with Components Components Components are MATLAB objects that specify the content of a report Add components to specify the types of content that commonly occur in reports The MATLAB Report Generator provides a set of components for specifying the types of content that commonly occur in MATLAB based reports The Simulink Report Generator provides additional components to facilitate generation of reports from Simulink models You can also create custom components to handle content specific to your application Using the Report Explorer you can interactively c
386. ng In this section Types of Reports on page 1 3 System Design Documentation on page 1 3 Results Reporting on page 1 4 Types of Reports Two common user goals for reports are System design documentation Capture information about the design decisions structure implementation and operational details of a system Results reporting Present results of running a system You use a very similar workflow for creating and generating both kinds of reports However some components are particularly useful for one or the other kind of report System Design Documentation System documentation has many uses including e Capturing design decisions e Recording implementation details Communicating the system design and interfaces among groups You can view information about a system without creating a report For more information see Interactive Model Exploration on page 1 6 When you create a Simulink Report Generator report to provide system design documentation the report captures information about the system design directly from the model Each time that you generate the report you see up to date documentation for the design The following table includes some examples of components that are useful for system design documentation reports 1 Getting Started 1 4 System Information Examples of Components to Use Requirements Requirements Summary Table for r
387. ng changes dark colors to light colors and light colors to dark colors Automatic Automatically changes dark axes colors to light axes colors If the axes color is a light color this option does not invert the color Invert Changes dark axes colors to light axes colors and light axes colors to dark axes colors Don t invert Does not change the colors in the image on the screen for printing Use figure s InvertHardcopy setting Uses the InvertHardcopy property set in the Handle Graphics image Make figure background transparent Makes the image background transparent Scope Snapshot Display Options Scaling Controls size of the image as displayed in a browser Making an image larger using this option does not affect the storage size of the image but the quality of the displayed image may decrease as you increase or decrease the size of the displayed image Generally to achieve the best and most predictable display results use the default setting of Use image size Use image size Causes the image to appear the same size in the report as on screen default Fixed size Specifies the number and type of units Zoom Specifies the percentage maximum size and units of measure Size Specifies the size of the snapshot in the form w h width height This field is active only if you choose Fixed size from the Scaling selection list Max size Specifies the maximum size of the snapshot in the form w h width he
388. ng Approaches 11 20 The DOM API supports three approaches to formatting document objects in reports Style sheets Assign to a document object such as a paragraph table or list a style from a Microsoft Word or HTML template using the StyleName property of a document object A style is a collection of formats Format objects Use format objects such as a FontFamily object with the Style property of a document object Format properties Use format properties of a document object For example for a Paragraph object p you can specify p Color red Related Examples Use Style Sheets on page 11 21 Use Format Objects on page 11 23 7 Use Format Properties on page 11 24 More About Format Inheritance on page 11 25 Use Style Sheets Use Style Sheets A style is a collection of formats that together define the appearance of a document object such as a paragraph table or list Microsoft Word allows you to define styles and then assign them to paragraphs tables and other documents by name The assigned style then determines how Word renders the document object on the screen or printed page Word stores the styles in a document as an object called a style sheet HTML browsers support a similar capability DOM API objects that have a StyleName property allow you to leverage Word and HTML style sheets to format reports as follows 1 Create a Word or HTML template using the D
389. ng a setup file for your own report You can also generate an HTML model report for Stateflow charts For details see Generate a Model Report The System Requirements Traceability report requires that you have the Simulink Verification and Validation product installed The System Requirements Traceability report includes information about all the requirements associated with the model and its objects For details see Customize Requirements Traceability Report for Model in the Simulink Verification and Validation documentation What Is the System Design Description The System Design Description is a prebuilt Simulink Report Generator report that describes the system design represented by a Simulink model System Design Description By default the Simulink Report Generator generates the report for the model from which you invoke the System Design Description report option What You Can Do with the Report You can use the System Design Description to e Review a system design without having the model open Generate summary and detailed descriptions of the design Assess compliance with design requirements e Archive the system design in a format independent of the modeling environment Build a customized version of the report using the Report Explorer Note To view step by step tutorials for creating and generating a report see the Introduction to System Design Description Reports example Report Cont
390. ng text 3 15 3 Creating Simulink Reports strcmp bdroot gcs expModel The strcmp function compares the name of the open Simulink model and the value of expModel which was set to vdp It tests to see if the vdp model opened successfully strcmp returns 1 true if the two strings match and 0 false if not 5 Save the report setup file The if component name in the Outline pane changes to include the expression that you added BF Report Generator 3 Report simulink_tutorial rpt a Eval The name of the model Zthat wil a Title Page Dynamic Simulink Report 98A if stremp bdroat ges expModel Add Logical Then and Logical Else Components Note This section builds on the previous tasks described in the step by step example summarized in Create a Simulink Report Generator Report on page 3 2 To see the completed report setup file open Simulink Dynamic Report The report is for the vdp model The if strcmp bdroot gcs expModel component has two possible results Add two child components to the report setup file to process these cases 1 In the Outline pane on the left select the if component 3 16 Add Report Content with Components Report Generator 3 Report simulink_tutorial pt GB Eval Evaluate this string in the bas Title Page lt No Title gt gt lif true In the Library pane in the middle unde
391. ng there are no differences If files have not been saved you see an error message informing you that you must save modified or newly created models before running an XML comparison Note It might not be possible for the analysis to detect matches between previously corresponding sections of files that have diverged too much 7 Compare Simulink Model XML Files Change detection in the Chawathe analysis is based on a scoring algorithm Items match if their Chawathe score is above a threshold The Simulink Report Generator implementation of Chawathe s algorithm uses a comparison pattern that defines the thresholds assigned to particular node types e g block For more information see How the Matching Algorithm Works in the MATLAB Report Generator documentation For more information on using the report see Compare Simulink Model XML Files on page 7 8 To control reverse annotation see Display Items in Original Models on page 7 17 To merge differences see Merge Simulink Models from the Comparison Report on page 7 21 For more information about the Comparison Tool see Comparing Files and Folders in the MATLAB documentation Select Simulink Models for XML Comparison Select Simulink Models for XML Comparison In this section Select Files from the Simulink Editor on page 7 5 Select Files from the Current Folder Browser on page 7 5 Select Files from a Simul
392. nge design behavior e Moving blocks can in some cases change the execution order Compare Simulink Model XML Files In a Stateflow chart if you move states or junctions so that they intersect the model fails to simulate To view these types of changes in the report turn off the filter for nonfunctional changes Change Color Preferences You can change and save your diff color preferences for the Comparison tool You can apply your color preferences to all comparison types 1 2 3 On the MATLAB Home tab click Preferences In the Preferences dialog box under MATLAB click Comparison Edit color settings as desired for differences and merges View the colors in the Sample pane The Active Settings list displays Default modified To use your modified settings in the comparison click Apply and refresh the comparison report To return to the default color settings in the Preferences dialog box click Reset and click Apply Refresh the comparison report If you want to save your modified color preferences for use in future MATLAB sessions click Save As Enter a name for your color settings profile and click OK After saving settings you can select them in the Active Settings list Save Comparison Results To save your comparison results use these Comparison tab buttons Save As gt Save as HTML Opens the Save dialog box where you can choose to save a printable version of the XML comparison report See
393. nk Project 7 6 Select Files from the Comparison Tool 7 6 Select Files from the Command Line 7 6 Choose a Comparison Type 0 0 0 0 cece eee 7 7 Examples of XML Comparison 00 00 ee eee 7 7 Compare Simulink Model XML Files 7 8 Navigate the Simulink XML Comparison Report 7 8 Step Through Changes 0 000 e eee eens 7 10 x Contents Explore Changes in the Original Models 7 11 Merge Differences 0 0 0 0 ee ees 7 11 Open Child Comparison Reports for Selected Nodes 7 12 Understand the Report Hierarchy and Matching 7 13 Filter Out Differences 0 0 0 0 ccc ees 7 13 Change Color Preferences 0 000 c eee eee 7 15 Save Comparison Results 20 00 cee eee 7 15 Display Items in Original Models 7 17 Highlighting in Models 0 0 eee eee eee 7 17 Control Highlighting in Models 000 7 19 View Changes in Model Configuration Parameters 7 20 Merge Simulink Models from the Comparison Report 7 21 Merge Models 0 0c cece eee nee 7 21 Merge MATLAB Function Block Code 7 23 Export Print and Save XML Comparison Results 7 24 Save Printable HTML Report 0 05 7 24 Export Results to the Workspace 000005 7 24 Save Comparison Log Files in a Zip File
394. nk path Sorts blocks alphabetically by Simulink path By block type Sorts blocks alphabetically by block type By block depth Sorts blocks by their depth in the model By layout left to right Sorts blocks by their location in the model layout by rows The block appearing the furthest toward the left top corner of the model is the anchor for the row The row contains all other blocks that overlap the horizontal area defined by the top and bottom edges of the anchor block The 8 43 8 Components Alphabetical List 8 44 other rows use the same algorithm using as the anchor the next unreported block nearest the left top of the model By layout top to bottom Sorts blocks by their location in the model layout by columns The block appearing the furthest toward the left top corner of the model is the anchor for the column The column contains all other blocks that overlap the vertical area defined by the left and right edges of the anchor block The other columns use the same algorithm using as the anchor the next unreported block nearest the left top of the model By traversal order Sorts blocks by traversal order By simulation order Sorts blocks by execution order Search for Simulink property name property value pairs Reports only on Simulink blocks with specified property name property value pairs Insert Anything into Report Yes Table Class rptgen_fp cfp summ table See Also Fixed Po
395. nning a loop x Beginning report Looping on model vdp Running FOR loop expIteration 1 Running FOR loop expIteration 2 Running FOR loop explteration 3 Running FOR loop expIteration 4 Running FOR loop explteration 5 Converting report Report complete Generate the Report 2 The vdp model appears You can see each time it is simulated 3 The scope window appears The scope graph changes each time the parameter value changes 4 Each component of the report is highlighted as it executes in the Outline pane on the left in the Report Explorer window When the report is complete Adobe Acrobat Reader opens your report in PDF format 3 53 3 Creating Simulink Reports 3 Adobe Acrobat Professional simulink_tutorial pdf Fo PDE 2 D lt A A F a 3 DBA G EF Gr cone oe ee Dynamic Simulink Report Dy Table of Contents Chapter 1 Model vdp Dynamic Simulink Report Using Report Generator to Document Changes John Q Engineer 3 54 Generate a Report e Generate a Report on page 4 2 Select Report Generation Options on page 4 4 Report Generation Preferences on page 4 13 Change Report Locale on page 4 17 Convert XML Documents to Different File Formats on page 4 18 e Create a Report Log File on page 4 21 Generate MATLAB Code from Report Setup File on page 4 22 Troubleshooting Report Gener
396. ns Formatting Tables View report after generation be Table E Auto save before generation taintody E Compile model to report on compiled information Table Column Spec W Table Entry Evaluate this string after generation 4 Table Footer ee scription Table Header ae Table Row A simple report creates a chapter and a single paragraph Handle Graphics Lorem Ipsum is a collection of Latindooking words that are often used in the publishing world to W Asti experiment with page layouts t Axes Snapshot z W Figure Loop Revert Help ID cimen Coanchat il To set defaults for report generation options that you can override with the Report Options dialog box or with individual components use the Report Generator Preferences pane For details see Report Generation Preferences on page 4 13 Report Output Format In the Report Explorer in the File format text box choose the report output format Using a template when generating a report provides several benefits compared to generating a report without using a template Report generation is faster Report generation does not use Java memory Generating reports without using a template can cause Java to run out of memory You can customize report formatting using standard techniques for specifying Word and HTML styles 4 5 A Generate a Report File Format Using Report Templates To use a template for report genera
397. ns and reporting options in this pane Sort blocks Specifies how to sort blocks applied to each level in a model Alphabetically by block name Sorts blocks alphabetically by name Alphabetically by system name Sorts systems alphabetically by name Lists blocks in each system but in no particular order Alphabetically by full Simulink path Sorts blocks alphabetically by Simulink path By block type Sorts blocks alphabetically by block type By block depth Sorts blocks by their depth in the model By layout left to right Sorts blocks by their location in the model layout by rows The block appearing the furthest toward the left top corner of the Stateflow Summary Table model is the anchor for the row The row contains all other blocks that overlap the horizontal area defined by the top and bottom edges of the anchor block The other rows use the same algorithm using as the anchor the next unreported block nearest the left top of the model By layout top to bottom Sorts blocks by their location in the model layout by columns The block appearing the furthest toward the left top corner of the model is the anchor for the column The column contains all other blocks that overlap the vertical area defined by the left and right edges of the anchor block The other columns use the same algorithm using as the anchor the next unreported block nearest the left top of the model By traversal order Sorts block
398. nsert a TOC placeholder in your report For example import mlreportgen dom d Document MyReport html append d My Report append d DocumentPart d ReportTOC append d Heading 1 Chapter 1 append d Heading 2 Section 1 close d rptview d OutputPath Set Outline Levels of Section Heads To generate a table of contents in a Word or HTML report your program must set the outline levels of the section heads that you want to appear in the table An outline level is a paragraph format property that specifies whether and at what level a paragraph s contents appear in a table of contents For example if a paragraph has an outline level of 1 its content appears at the top level of the generated table of contents You can use up to nine distinct outline levels To set the outline level of paragraphs use one of these approaches Use Template Defined Styles to Set Outline Levels on page 11 82 Use Format Objects to Set Outline Levels on page 11 82 Use Heading Objects to Set Outline Levels on page 11 82 11 81 T1 Create a Report Program 11 82 Use Template Defined Styles to Set Outline Levels You can use styles defined in the report s template to set the outline level of a paragraph For example by default Word documents include a set of styles Heading 1 Heading 2 and so on that define outline levels for paragraphs you want to appear in a TOC Your program can use these bu
399. nt 2 Inthe Library pane in the middle under the MATLAB category double click Insert Variable 3 Inthe Properties pane on the right a Inthe Variable name text box enter Iteration Value b Inthe Display as selection list select Paragraph The Properties pane on the right looks as follows 3 31 3 Creating Simulink Reports Insert Variable Source Variable name _Iteration_Value Variable location Base workspace Z Tteration_Value not found in workspace Display options Title Automatic v Array size limit 32 Object depth limit 10 Object count limit 200 Display as Paragraph Show variable type in headings v Show variable table grids _ Make variable table page wide Omit if value is empty Omit if property default value 4 Save the report setup file Set a Parameter Value Note This section builds on the previous tasks described in the step by step example summarized in Create a Simulink Report Generator Report on page 3 2 To see the completed report setup file open Simulink Dynamic Report The report is for the vdp model For each iteration set the Gain parameter to the value that you extracted from the expValue array In the Outline pane on the left select the Variable component 2 In the Library pane in the middle under the MATLAB category double click Evaluate MATLAB Expression This component is added as a sibling of the Variable component 3 32
400. nt Template changing the font color to red The change applies to the title of that slide layout but not to the title of other slide layouts FILE SLIDE MASTER HOME INSERT TRANSITIONS ANIMATIONS REVIEW VIEW ADD INS Acrobat FORMAT a s A ST 2 Shi ik Calibri Light He 44 A a 4 i i t Ika test Direchon OOC Da y ash gt i 2 Align Text ALLOVGI A one shi aste P ew fo AV y gt Z ann A Arrange Quick Format Painter sjige X Delete B Z U ae MN Aar A m S CUI NUE ely Styles Shi Clipboard G Slides Font Ss Paragraph G Drawing Click to edit M Click to edit Master title style Click to edit Master titie style e Click to edit Master text styles e Second level Third level Fourth level e Fifth level iClick to edit Master title style 5 Save the template Add a Slide Layout You can add a slide layout to a PowerPoint template Adding a slide layout is useful for providing different layouts for slide content that does not fit well into an existing slide layout Also add a slide layout for specifying different formatting for multiple slides in the presentation without affecting current slide layouts 1 In PowerPoint open the template that you want to modify 2 Inthe View tab in the Master Views section click Slide Master 3 Inaslide layout right click and select Insert Slide Master A new slide layout appears with a title placeholder
401. ntation and Results Reporting Results Information Examples of Components to Use Simulation processing Model Simulation Model Configuration Set Fixed Point Logging Options Figures generated with MATLAB Generated code Figure Snapshot To Workspace Plot Code Generation Summary Import Generated Code You can use components such as the Model Simulation component to control how the model simulates Other components such as the Scope Snapshot show the results of the simulation 1 5 1 Getting Started Interactive Model Exploration In this section Simulink Report Generator Tools on page 1 6 Simulink Model Exploration Tools on page 1 7 Simulink Report Generator Tools The Simulink Report Generator provides tools that you can use to obtain information about models without creating report setup files Predefined standard reports e Web View XML Comparison report Predefined Standard Reports From the Simulink Editor you can access two predefined standard Simulink Report Generator reports System Design Description Design Requirements requires Simulink Verification and Validation The System Design Description report provides summary or detailed information about a system design represented by a model You can choose report options with the report dialog box or you can create a customized version using the Report Explorer For details see G
402. nthe list of templates in the middle pane select a custom template 3 Inthe Properties pane click Open stylesheet 4 If applicable select an existing style to use as a starting point for the new style 5 Click the New Style button _ Manage Ses a Edit Recommend Restrict Set Defaults Sort order As Recommended x Show recommended styles only Select a style to edit L Nom CS T rgAbstract T rgAuthor T rgAuthorVerso 1a rgBody T rgChapter T rgCopyright T rgFigure T rgFigureCaption 14 rgFigureTitle r Preview of Normal Body ipt Modify Font Default Body Calibri Left Line spacing single Space After 10 pt Widow Orphan control Style Show in the Styles gallery Only in this document New documents based on this template Cancel 6 Specify a name for the new style and define the style characteristics To save the new style definition click OK and close the dialog box 7 Inthe Manage Styles dialog box click OK 8 In Word save and close the template Related Examples Customize Microsoft Word Part Templates on page 10 21 Customize a Microsoft Word Title Page Template on page 10 30 More About Report Conversion Templates on page 10 2 10 19 10 Template Based Report Formatting Conversion Template Contents on page 10 5 10 20 Customize Microsoft Word Part Templates Customize Microsoft Word Part Templates In this section
403. nthe list of templates in the middle pane select the template copy you just created 6 In the Properties pane in the Template id and Display name fields specify a unique ID and display name for the template The display name is the name that appears in the Report Explorer list of templates The template ID is what you use to identify a template when using a command line interface 7 To save the template properties you entered move the cursor outside of the Properties pane and click Create a Custom HTML Template Select an HTML Editor By default when you edit an HTML style sheet the style sheet appears in the MATLAB Editor To use a different editor for editing an HTML template 1 2 In the Report Explorer select File gt Preferences In Edit HTML Command enter a MATLAB expression that opens the HTML editor you want to use For example system Dreamweaver lt FileName gt amp When you open an HTML stylesheet the Report Explorer automatically replaces FileName with the template that you selected Edit HTML Styles in a Template You can customize or add format styles in a custom HTML template 1 4 In the list of templates in the middle pane select the custom template that you want to edit Tip If the Report Explorer middle pane does not show a list of templates then select Tools gt Edit Document Conversion Template In the Properties pane click Open stylesheet In the HTML editor
404. nts Looping on system Heater Control Looping on system Interior Dynamics Looping on system Subsystem Looping on system Subsystem1 Looping on system User Setpoint in Celsius Converting report Report complete Below is an excerpt from the generated report 8 76 Model Loop Chapter 1 Description of subsystems Table of Contents sldemo_ auto climate elec AC Control ClimateControlSystem External Temperature in Celsius Heat from occupants Heater Control Interior Dynamics Subsystem Subsystem1 User Setpoint in Celsius sldemo_auto_climate_elec AC Control Heat Transfer Equation from ev aporator y wTcomp m_dot h4 h1 y efficiency Enable m_dot mass flow rate w speed of the engine Tcomp compressor torque h4 h1 enthalpy 10 T u Temp enthalpy He efficiency 1 0 Aia om meag Engine Speed gt Comp Torque CG Blower Speed prop Max flowrate ClimateControlSystem Distribution Request Distibuton o D pibgont 1 kr Temporarily Omitting a Model from a Loop This example shows how to use the Model Loop Active check box to temporarily omit a model from the loop This example uses the report setup file that you created in Generating Reports on Specified Systems and their Subsystems sldemo_auto_report rpt and the model f14 which the Simulink software includes
405. ny purposes including Asa debugger Asa reference to a report setup file To share information about a report setup file through email A log file includes the following information Report setup file outline Components and their attributes Generation status messages currently displayed in the Generation Status tab To generate a log file click File gt Log File An HTML version of the log file with the name lt report_template file name_log gt html is saved in the same folder as the report setup file 4 21 A Generate a Report Generate MATLAB Code from Report Setup File 4 22 You can generate MATLAB code versions of report setup files in the form of a MATLAB file m A MATLAB file of a report setup file is useful for various purposes including generating reports and modifying report setup files programmatically To generate a MATLAB file load a report setup file into the Report Explorer and click File gt Generate MATLAB File After the MATLAB file generates it opens in the MATLAB Editor The filename for the generated file is the file name of the report setup file preceded by build Generate Reports from MATLAB Files This example generates a MATLAB file from the figloop_tutorial rpt report setup file which is part of the MATLAB Report Generator software The example then uses the report function to generate a report from the MATLAB file For more information about this function see the report
406. o Functions mlreportgen dom Paragraph append Classes mlreportgen dom Group Related Examples Add Content to a Report on page 11 11 11 15 T1 Create a Report Program Stream a Report 11 16 The DOM API supports two modes of appending content to a document In memory Creates the document entirely in memory In memory is the default mode Streaming Streaming mode writes objects to disk as they are appended to a document Streaming mode allows you to create large reports on systems with modest memory To enable streaming mode set the StreamOutput property of the Document object for the report to true d Document MyDoc d StreamOutput true See Also Classes mlreportgen dom Document Related Examples Add Content to a Report on page 11 11 Report Packages Report Packages A Microsoft Word document packages all of its contents text images style sheets and so on in a single compressed file having a docx extension For HTML documents the DOM API defines an analogous packaging scheme with an htmtx compressed file extension By default the DOM API generates HTML reports as htmx files To generate an HTML report in unzipped format or both zipped and unzipped format set the PackageType property of the Document object for a report to unzipped or both respectively See Also Functions unzipTemplate zipTemplate Classes mlreportgen dom Document More About
407. o a template defined header or footer you need to access it Use the CurrentDOCXSection property of a Document or DocumentPart object to access the 11 131 T1 Create a Report Program 11 132 template defined headers and footers for the current section of a document or document part The value of the CurrentDOCXSection property is a DOCXSection object whose PageHeaders and PageFooters properties contain a cell array of DOCXPageHeader and DOCXPageFooter objects corresponding to the template defined headers and footers of the current section The header cell array can contain as many as three header objects depending on how many of the possible types of headers first page even page odd page you define for the section The footers cell array similarly can contain as many as three footer objects The objects can appear in any order in the cell array Thus to access a header or footer of a particular type search the cell array to find the one you want to access Append Content to a Template Defined Header or Footer You can use the DOM API to append content to a template defined header or footer that appears on every page in a section To append content to a header or footer in the current section of a document or document part first use the document or document part CurrentDOCXSection property to access the DOCXPagerHeader or DOCXPageFooter object Then use the append method of a DOCXPageHeader or DOCXPageFooter object to append conten
408. o achieve the best and most predictable display results use the default setting of Use image size Use image size Causes the image to appear the same size in the report as on screen default e Fixed size Specifies the number and type of units Simulink Dialog Snapshot Zoom Specifies the percentage maximum size and units of measure Size Specifies the size of the snapshot in the format w h width height This field is active only if you choose Fixed size from the Sealing selection list Max size Specifies the maximum size of the snapshot in the format w h width height This field is active only if you choose Zoom from the Scaling selection list Units Specifies the units for the size of the snapshot This field is active only if you choose Zoom or Fixed size in the Image size list box Alignment Only reports in PDF or RTF format support this property e Auto e Right e Left e Center Title Specifies text to appear above the snapshot Caption Specifies text to appear under the snapshot Insert Anything into Report Yes Snapshot Class rptgen_sl CDialogSnapshot See Also Block Loop System Loop 8 133 8 Components Alphabetical List 8 134 Simulink Function System Loop Report on Simulink functions specified in a Stateflow loop Description This component runs its child components for each Simulink function system defined by the parent component For example
409. o be strings function makerpt title author content rptname rpttemplate import mlreportgen dom rpt Document rptname docx rpttemplate while strcemp rpt CurrentHoleld end switch rpt CurrentHoleld case Title append rpt title case Author append rpt author case Content append rpt content end moveTONextHole rpt end close rpt See Also Functions mlreportgen dom Document moveToNextHole 11 29 11 Create a Report Program 11 30 Related Examples Use Subforms in a Report on page 11 31 Create a Microsoft Word Template on page 11 111 Add Holes in a Microsoft Word Template on page 11 112 Create an HTML Template on page 11 122 Add Holes in an HTML Template on page 11 124 More About Form Based Reporting on page 11 28 Use Subforms in a Report Use Subforms in a Report A document part is a form that you can add to a document or to another document part Document parts simplify generation of sections of a report that have the same form such as sections that report on the results of a series of tests or the performance of a series of financial portfolios Use a similar approach as you do for main document forms 1 Create a template that defines the form of the document part 2 For each section a Create anmlreportgen dom DocumentPart object b Fill in the holes c Append the part to the main document For an example of a report
410. ocumentPart object to add a string of HTML content to a DOM report For example you can use addHTML to create an HTML object that you append to a DOM report that produces Word output import mlreportgen dom rpt Document HTMLToWordReport docx html0bj addHTML rpt lt p gt lt b gt Hello lt b gt lt i style color green gt World lt i gt lt p gt close rpt rptview rpt OutputPath Append HTML Content to DOM Reports Append an HTML Object You can create an mlLreportgen dom HTML object and append it to a DOM report To append the content of an HTML object more than once in a report use the clone method with the HTML object Then append the cloned copy to the report For example you can create an HTML object from HTML markup to use for a Word report import mlreportgen dom rpt Document MyRep1 docx html HTML lt p gt lt b gt Hello lt b gt lt i style color green gt World lt i gt lt p gt append html lt p gt This is lt u gt me lt u gt speaking lt p gt append rpt html close rpt rptview rpt OutputPath Address Errors If you receive any MATLAB error messages fix the source HTML markup and append the HTML again You can use an HTML cleanup program such as HTML Tidy on a file containing the source HTML content HTML Tidy fixes many issues and also identifies issues you need to address manually After you clean up the source HTML content append it to a DOM re
411. odel This option is available if you select Automatic list from context in the Report On section or if you select Custom use block list andthe Sort blocks option e Alphabetically by block name Sorts blocks alphabetically by name Alphabetically by system name Sorts systems alphabetically by name Lists blocks in each system but in no particular order 8 15 8 Components Alphabetical List 8 16 Alphabetically by full Simulink path Sorts models alphabetically by their full paths By block type Sorts blocks alphabetically by block type By depth Sorts blocks by their depth in the model By layout left to right Sorts blocks by their location in the model layout by rows The block appearing the furthest toward the left top corner of the model is the anchor for the row The row contains all other blocks that overlap the horizontal area defined by the top and bottom edges of the anchor block The other rows use the same algorithm using as the anchor the next unreported block nearest the left top of the model By layout top to bottom Sorts blocks by their location in the model layout by columns The block appearing the furthest toward the left top corner of the model is the anchor for the column The column contains all other blocks that overlap the vertical area defined by the left and right edges of the anchor block The other columns use the same algorithm using as the anchor the next unreported block
412. odel Failed i 4 Paragraph Error Model lt expMod 3 Inthe Properties pane on the right a Clear the Use model s workspace I O variable names check box b Inthe Time text box enter dynamicT c Inthe States text box enter dynamicx d Inthe Output text box enter dynamicy The Properties pane on the right looks as follows 3 38 Add Report Content with Components Model Simulation 140 Parameters Use model s workspace 1 0 variable names Time dynamicT States dynamic Output dynamic Timespan JV Use model s timespan values Start l 0 Stop l 60 Simulation Options Tl Compile model before simulation Simulation status messages Display to command line x Simulation Parameters a t A Revert Help 4 Inthe Outline pane on the left select the Simulate model component 5 Inthe Library pane in the middle a Scroll down to the Simulink Blocks category b Double click Scope Snapshot to add it as a sibling of the Simulink Model component 3 39 3 Creating Simulink Reports This component captures the scope for each iteration Y Report Generator 3 Report simulink_tutorial rpt ae Eval 4The name of the model that wil i Title Page Dynamic Simulink Report SRS if stremp bdroot ges expM odel I g8 then 489 Model Loop Chapter current model 488 Paragraph This report demonstra ae System Snapshot S 48 for explte
413. og box ir Calibri Body 11 A A Aay i gt vi y tre GE FL FT Pi find alibri Body A Aa iris try Se 2 AaBbCcDc AaBbCcDe AaBbCi Pas 2 N y H t ate y B IT u x e A ZA BEEE aSc Replace 3 M T Normal 1 No Spac Heading1 gt DS Select X Select Clipboard amp Font e Paragraph 5 Styles a Editing A Styles 7x Clear All No Spacing Heading 1 Heading 2 Title Subtitle Subtle Emphasis e I3 a 4 oov Is Is Ie Emphasis Intense Emphasis Strong Quote Intense Quote a Ap l Subtle Reference Intense Reference Book Title List Paragraph Show Preview Disable Linked Styles iul 3 4 Options 2 In the Style dialog box click the Manage Styles button 11 117 T1 Create a Report Program le Select Styles amp Editing Styles 7s Clear All No Spacing T Heading 1 fa Heading 2 fa Title fa Subtitle fa Subtle Emphasis a Emphasis a Intense Emphasis a Strong a Quote fa Intense Quote wa Subtle Reference a Intense Reference a Book Title a List Paragraph T Show Preview Disable Linked Styles a4 R Options Manage Styles 3 Inthe Manage Styles dialog box click Modify The Modify Style dialog box appears 4 In the Modify Style dialog box change any of the style definitions For example you could change the font family font size indentation etc To save your changes click OK and close the dialog box 5 In Word save and close the templat
414. ombine components to create a report setup that specifies the content of a particular report or type of report For general information about working with components see Insert Components Set Component Properties Use a combination of the following types of components in your report setup file based on your goals for the report Type of Component Description Report Structure Components on page Include a title page chapters sections 6 4 paragraphs lists tables and other standard document structure elements Table Formatting Components on page Organize generated content into tables 6 5 Property Table Components on page Display tables with property name 6 6 property value pairs for objects Summary Table Components on page Display tables with specified properties for 6 17 objects Logical and Looping Components on page Run child components a specified number 6 21 of times There are several looping components including logical loops and Handle Graphics loops Components Component Formatting When you generate a report in the Report Options dialog box in the File format field you specify the type of report output you want For example you can generate a report in PDF HTML or Microsoft Word format For each format you can choose to apply styles from either of these style definition sources An HTML or Word report conversion temp
415. on click Slide Master 3 Select the slide layout to add the placeholder to 4 Click Insert Placeholder and then the type of placeholder For example in the default PPT API template you can add a Table placeholder to the Blank slide layout 12 33 12 Programmatic PowerPoint Presentation Creation FILE SLIDE MASTER HOME INSERT TRANSITIONS ANIMATIONS i Xx Delete f a Title Aa Colors Rename J A Fonts Insert Slide Insert Master Insert Yi Footers Themes Master Layout Preserve Layout Placeholder 7 Effects Edit Master Edit Theme i zz Content ick to edit Master title style Online Image 5 In the slide layout position and size the placeholder 6 Name the placeholders that you want to use when you add or replace content with the PPT API 7 Save the template 12 34 Set Up a PowerPoint Template Change the Style for a Table You can change the style used for a table in a slide layout 1 2 3 In PowerPoint open the template that you want to modify In the View tab in the Master Views section click Slide Master Find a slide layout that contains a table placeholder For example in the default PPT API template the Title and Table slide layout has a table placeholder If there is no slide with a table placeholder you can add a table placeholder For details see Add a Placeholder on page 12 82
416. on if available from model Interface name data type and other properties of the root system input and output signals Block parameters Includes detailed information about MATLAB Function blocks Block execution order for root system and atomic subsystems Look up tables Simulink workspace variables Model configuration sets State charts Requirements optional System Design Description Section Information Subsystems The same type of information as the information for the root system as well as Path of the subsystem in the model For atomic subsystems Checksum that indicates whether the version of an atomic subsystem that generates the report differs from other versions of the subsystem Referenced models optional Subsystems from custom libraries optional State Charts State chart States Transitions between the states Junctions Events that trigger state transitions Data types Targets Truth tables Report Captures Documentation Included in a Model The System Design Description reports documentation included in a model including The model description from the model properties The block property Description DocBlock model documentation blocks To enrich the generated System Design Description consider adding descriptive information in a model in these ways listed above 2 Generate System Design Description Reports Generate a System D
417. on myPresentation titleSlide add slides Title Slide introSlide add slides Title Slide pictureSlide add slides Title and Picture introSlide In a presentation created using PowerPoint adding a slide immediately before a slide that you created using PowerPoint requires a few steps 1 In PowerPoint identify the position of the reference slide you want the new slide to precede 2 Open the PPT API program and give a name to the reference slide you want to position the new slide before For example assume that the reference slide is the second slide in a PowerPoint presentation slides Presentation myPresentation myPresentation open slides slides Children 2 Name ReferenceSlide close slides 3 To identify the reference slide object use the slide name Add the new slide relative to the reference slide slides Presentation myPresentation myPresentation open slides refSlide find slides ReferenceSlide add slides Blank refSlide close slides To use the second approach specify an index representing the numerical position for the slide For example using the default PPT API template this code makes pictureSlide the second slide in the presentation slides Presentation myPresentation titleSlide add slides Title Slide introSlide add slides Title and Content Add Slides pictureSlide add slides Title and Picture 2 Speci
418. on Formatting Approaches on page 12 20 12 85 12 Programmatic PowerPoint Presentation Creation Create and Format Paragraphs 12 86 In this section Create a Paragraph on page 12 86 Format Paragraph Content on page 12 86 Create a Paragraph To create a Paragraph object use the mLreportgen ppt Paragraph constructor You can Create an empty Paragraph object Specify a string for the paragraph text Specify a Text or ExternalLink object as the paragraph text After you create a Paragraph object you can append strings or Text objects to add text to the paragraph You can specify separate formatting for each Text and ExternalLink object that you append Format Paragraph Content You can specify the default formatting to apply to the text in a paragraph The paragraph formatting applies to text strings that you add The paragraph formatting applies to Text and ExternalLink objects in the paragraph unless those objects specify formatting that overrides the default paragraph formatting For example this code produces alternating red and green text p Paragraph Default paragraph green text p FontColor green redtext Text red text redText FontColor red append p redText moreText Text back to default green text append p moreText e Default paragraph green text red text back to default green text Create and Format Paragraphs
419. on page 4 4 Report Output Format on page 4 5 PDF Stylesheets on page 4 8 Web Stylesheets on page 4 8 RTF DSSSL Print and Word Stylesheets on page 4 9 Report Generation Processing on page 4 10 Location of Report Output File on page 4 11 Report Description on page 4 12 Report Options Dialog Box To specify report generation options for a specific report in the Report Explorer use the Report Options dialog box The Report Options dialog box in the Properties right hand pane of the Report Explorer 4 4 Select Report Generation Options RAS zE Report Explorer Report simple report rpt a e File Edit View Tools Help Usa sax BB FA Name 2 Report Options 4 Report Generator aa Fixed Point Designer Report File Location 4 Report simple report rpt Nl anai J Paragraph Lorem ipsum dolor sit ERUN H simple report html Fixed Point Logging Options E YB Fixed Point Property Table Directory Present working directory v 4 Fixed Point Summary Table Ficreme Gameananendia il a aaa E 1f report already exists tto t iti T irdk F If report already exists increment to prevent overwriting B Chapter Subsection Eadan ipe B mge 3 Zipped Unzipped Link List Report Format and Stylesheet J ba Paragraph File format web HTML Default HTML stylesheet x Text Title Page Generation Optio
420. onent File Edit View Tools Help USO 4RxXB FEB tte pg pose Name Simulink Data Dictionary Loop 4 Report MMexampleDDonly rpt gt i ERR E ase ee Simulink Data Dicti Loop Chapter be CORTES Dictionaries in list B simul icti Fixed Point Logging Simulink Data Dictionary T a Properti eri ero o ieee aad B Fixed Point Summar Formatting a Array Based Table B Chapter Subsection E i a Image Bs Link Bist a Paragraph e Text B Title Page Section Options Formatting Tables V Create section for each object in loop Then you configure the Simulink Data Dictionary component 8 123 8 Components Alphabetical List File Edit View Tools Help USE xanax 7 BR tHe Simulink Data Dictionary Presentation Format 4 Report Generator 4 Report MMexampleDDonly rpt Table title style name Auto rgTableTite Table style name Auto if rgUnruledTable Options V Indude child data dictionaries E Make separate table for each child E Indude child dictionaries list Sections to report on V Design Data F Configurati E Other Data Data type Last modified Last modified by Status HRSESoess8 A amp S Here is the resulting report 8 124 Simulink Data Dictionary Table of Contents 2H Michael Simulink MMmodels testDD sidd Chapter 1 H Michael Simu
421. only inline holes that you can reinsert are rgChapterTitlePrefix rgChapterTitleNumber and rgChapterTitle holes Do not add multiple instances of the same kind of hole in a part template Note If you do not have a custom Word conversion template see Copy a Conversion Template on page 10 12 11 12 In the Report Explorer select Tools gt Edit Document Conversion Template In the list of Word templates in the middle pane select the custom template that you want to edit In the Template Browser click Open template To display Word paragraph markers click the Show Hide T button Position the Word insertion mark at the point in a paragraph where you want to add an inline hole Tip If the hole is the only content in a paragraph or is at the end of a paragraph add several blank spaces and insert the hole before the spaces Click the Rich Text Control button Word inserts a rich text control at the insertion point To see hole markup on the Word ribbon in the Developer tab click Design Mode Right click in the hole and select Properties In the dialog box in the Title and Tag fields enter the name of the hole Use a Report Explorer hole name For example if you insert an rgChapterTitlePrefix hole set the Title and Tag fields to rgchapterTitlePrefix In the template select all of the contents of the part template In the Insert tab click the Quick Parts button Click Save Selection to Quick Part Gal
422. onstructed stream renders automatic numbers as Arabic numerals To use a stream with different properties create the stream explicitly using a createAutoNumberStream function of a Document object Automatically Number Document Content 2 Append the AutoNumber to a Text Paragraph or Heading object that contains the text that precedes the automatic number append chapHead chapterNumber 3 Append an mlreportgen dom CounterInc format object to the Style property of the content object that you want to automatically number Appending a CounterInc object increments the stream associated with the automatic number when the paragraph or heading is output The updated value replaces the AutoNumber object chapHead Style CounterInc chapter WhiteSpace preserve This script automatically numbers the chapter headings in a document import mlreportgen dom d Document MyReport html for rank 3 5 chapHead Heading 1 Chapter Heading 1 append chapHead AutoNumber chapter append chapHead sprintf Rank i Magic Square rank chapHead Style CounterInc chapter WhiteSpace preserve append d chapHead table append d magic rank table Width 2in end close d rptview d OutputPath Create Hierarchical Automatic Numbering You can create hierarchical numbering schemes such as 1 1 1 2 1 3 2 1 2 2 and so on Use anmlreportgen dom CounterReset format object to reset a chi
423. onstructor to create a table entry You can optionally use the constructor to specify these kinds of entry content Char array Any of these kinds of DOM objects e Paragraph e Text 11 69 11 Create a Report Program 11 70 Image e Table e OrderedList e UnorderedList e CustomElement Format Table Entries Programmatically You can use format objects or TableEntry format properties to format a table entry programmatically Formatting Format Object Format Property Create border around entry Border Border Color of border Border BorderColor Thickness of border Border BorderWidth Create left right top or Border n a bottom entry border Align entry content top VAlign VAlign bottom middle Space between entry InnerMargin InnerMargin boundary and entry content Space between entry InnerMargin n a content and its top bottom right or left boundaries Cause entry to span ColSpan ColSpan multiple columns Cause entry to span RowSpan RowSpan multiple rows You can specify formatting for all table entries in a table use the TableEntriesStyle property of the Table or FormalTable object For example you can set border formatting import mlreportgen dom t Table magic 5 t TableEntriesStyle Border solid black 1 px Create and Format Tables Properties you set for a TableEntry object take precedence over TableEntriesStyle format objects Format
424. ontrol algorithm for the longitudinsl motion of a Grumman Aeros pace F 14 a Q gt u Nz Pilot g alpha rad Copyright 1990 2012 The MathWorks Inc ae E n gt Ready 100 ode45 8 208 System Snapshot Display Options To access the display options click the Advanced button Scaling Controls size of the image as displayed in a browser Making an image larger using this option does not affect the storage size of the image but the quality of the displayed image may decrease as you increase or decrease the size of the displayed image Generally to achieve the best and most predictable display results use the default setting of Use image size Use image size Causes the image to appear the same size in the report as on screen default e Fixed size Specifies the number and type of units Zoom Specifies the percentage maximum size and units of measure Size Specifies the size of the snapshot in a browser using the format w h width height This field is active only if you choose Fixed size in the Scaling selection list Max size Specifies the maximum size of the snapshot in a browser using the format w h width height This field is active only if you choose Zoom in the Scaling selection list Units Specifies the units for the size of the snapshot in a browser This field is active only if you choose Fixed size inthe Image size list box Alignment Only reports in PDF or RTF format support thi
425. operties pane on the right a Ihn the Title text box enter Dynamic Simulink Report b Inthe Subtitle text box enter Using Simulink Report Generator to Document Changes c Inthe Options section choose Custom Author from the selection list 3 13 3 Creating Simulink Reports 3 14 d Enter your name in the text box e Select the Include report creation date check box f Select the default date and time format from the selection list The Properties pane on the right looks as follows Title Page Error a Chapters are required for component Title Page section to appear correctly Add chapters to template Main Image Abstract Legal notice Title Title Dynamic Simulink Report Subtitle Using Report Generator to Document Changes Options Custom author Zi John Q Engineer v Include report creation date dd mmm yyyy HH MM SS 26 Jul 2011 09 36 58 v Include copyright holder and year Display legal notice on title page 5 Save the report setup file Open the Simulink Model Note This section builds on the previous tasks described in the step by step example summarized in Create a Simulink Report Generator Report on page 3 2 To see the completed report setup file open Simulink Dynamic Report The report is for the vdp model The following statement in the Evaluate MATLAB Expression component that you created in Add MATLAB Code on page 3 7 tries to open the vdp model try open_sys
426. operty name the property name appears in the report without a property value Add Replace and Delete Properties in Tables Adding Table Properties To add a Handle Graphics property to a table use the following steps 1 In the Figure Property Table window select a table row above which you want add a new property a Click the Add Row Above Current Cell button A new row appears above the current row 3 Add the property to the new table row a Select the new table row 6 13 6 Add Content with Components b In the Properties Type drop down list at the upper right of the dialog box select a property type c Inthe Properties list select the property you want to add d Click the lt lt Add button or double click the property name The property appears in the table row Alternatively if you know the name of the property you want to add enter the property name directly into the cell as described in Enter Text into Table Cells For information about adding new table rows see Add and Delete Columns and Rows Replace Table Properties To replace a property in a cell of a table in split mode follow the instructions in Adding Table Properties on page 6 13 Note You cannot use these steps to delete a property in a cell when the table is in nonsplit mode Delete Table Properties Delete a property by backspacing over it or using the Delete key Format Table Columns Rows and Cells Add and Delet
427. or 7 pri sfear_1 b File C Work comparisons sbml_sfcar_1 shx File C Work comparisons slxml_sfcar_2 six Q sf carmdl Saved in Simulink version R2014b Saved in Simulink version R2014b a T oe Choose Run from wparisons sbanl_ sfear slx parisons sixml sfeer 23i the Simulation menu 7 m to run the simulation 8a Model Hierarchy Bal Mode Hierarchy Nel Simulink notte system A vehicle kph yellow amp throttle GD engine RPM Ene Poun SaxesTitles ations EE User Inputs 2 gt Branch A vehide mph yellow amp throttle User inputs Branch gt Branch Et User Inputs 2 gt Branch ior iste Branch gt Mux2 Ste Branch gt Muc2 ai EBranch gt Outi SE Engine gt Branch alates feels t Engine 1 gt transmission tE Branch gt transmission FHC Muni gt vehicle kph yellow amp throttle rsranch gt engine REMEL Double click to Lon pee 5B statefiow Mux gt vehicle mph yellow amp throttle open the GUI gt Shit logic BE Stateflow Fanem S gear state shift logic iiai KICKDOWN gear state venice kph A fourth gt third G8fourth gt third Pessoal 263 fourth gt second S selection state O Copyright 1997 2012 The MathWorks Inc sre F S8 steady state gt downshifting gt dst dst Ready ner odes EQ selection state Ohkickdown Py stn sfear 2 CSE Fle Edit View Display Diagram Simulation Analysis Code Tools Help 5 kickdown gt steady state 5 fo Normal 7 sre dst 8B kick
428. or a report in a single template file for example the main template file of a report Create a Document Part Template Library in a Microsoft Word Template File You can use the Quick Part Gallery in Word to create a document part template library in the main template of a report A Quick Part Gallery is a collection of reusable pieces of preformatted content called quick parts that is stored in the document You can use quick parts as templates for DOM DocumentPart objects Open the Word template in which you want to create the document part template 2 Inthe template create the Word content to serve as a prototype for the document part template You will delete the prototype after copying it to the parent template Quick Part Gallery The document part template content that you create can contain holes and page layout sections as well as other types of Word content For example 11 33 T1 Create a Report Program 11 34 Was ORE MainReportTemplate dote Word 7 H ooxX HOME INSERT DESIGN PAGELAY REFEREN MAILING REVIEW VIEW DEVELOP Acrobat PaulKinn 7 ir Calibri Body Ju JE As D B I U vaxx x in Paste i PAES ko Styles Editing S S ALB Arka KK D re Clipboard Font A Paragraph m Styles fa bac Report Originator Originator Name Originator Report Date RepoitDate pate ReportDate Reviewed By RevieweBy Reviewed By RevieveBy Confidential This document may contain confidential information If you are not a
429. or section for each model When you select this check box the component name in the Outline pane on the left changes to Model Loop Chapter F Report Generator 3 Report simulink_tutorial rpt Eval The name of the model that wi GB Title Page Dynamic Simulink Report ROT true lt i then s 48 Model Loop Chapter current model 3 23 3 Creating Simulink Reports e Select the Display the object type in the section title check box to include the object type in this example model in the title name f Clear the Create link anchor for each object in loop check box 4 Save the report setup file Add a Paragraph for Each Model Note This section builds on the previous tasks described in the step by step example summarized in Create a Simulink Report Generator Report on page 3 2 To see the completed report setup file open Simulink Dynamic Report The report is for the vdp model In each Model Loop Chapter add an explanation using the Paragraph component 1 In the Outline pane on the left select the Model Loop Chapter component 2 In the Library pane in the middle scroll up to the Formatting category and then double click Paragraph The Paragraph component is added as a child of the Model Loop Chapter component 44 Report Generator 3 Report simulink_tutorial rpt a Eval The name of the model that wil eB Title Page Dynamic Simulink Report
430. or tables the content appears in the presentation that the PPT API program generates The PPT API provides a default PowerPoint template You can use the PPT API to make a copy of the default template which you then can customize to use with your PPT API program This code creates a template called myTemplate which is a copy of the default PPT API template import mlreportgen ppt SlidesFile myTemplate pptx slides Presentation myTemplate open slides close slides Open the myTemplate pptx file On a Windows platform you can open the presentation in MATLAB if ispc winopen slidesFile end To see template elements such as the slide master and slide layouts in PowerPoint View pane click Slide Master 12 63 12 Programmatic PowerPoint Presentation Creation BHS Oo myTemplate pptx PowerPoint DRAWING TOOLS FILE SLIDE MASTER HOME INSERT TRANSITIONS ANIMATIONS REVIEW VIEW ADD INS Acrobat FORMAT Fa ie Aa Hi colors Background Styles I x Rename C i 7 A Fonts aa Insert Slide Insert m Master t Themes Slide Close Master Layout Up Preserve Layout Placeholde X O Effects Sizex Master View Edit Master Master Layout Edit Theme Background G Size Close Click to edit Master title style Click to edit Master title style e Click to edit Master text styles Second level e Third level Fourth level Fifth level ken adit Miaerar title smda Use PowerPoint
431. ormat a Picture When you create a Picture object you can specify the location width and height The specified formatting applies when you add a picture to a slide or replace a Picture object When you replace a PicturePlaceholder object with a Picture object PowerPoint adjusts the replacement picture to fit the location and dimensions of the placeholder You can specify these format properties for a Picture object Picture Object Formatting Format Object Format Property Upper left x coordinate of n a X picture Upper left y coordinate of n a Y picture Picture width n a Width Picture height n a Height See Also Classes mlreportgen ppt Picture mlreportgen ppt PicturePlaceholder Related Examples Add or Replace a Picture on page 12 81 More About Presentation Formatting Approaches on page 12 20 12 95 12 Programmatic PowerPoint Presentation Creation Create and Format Links 12 96 In this section Create an External Link on page 12 96 Format an External Link on page 12 96 Create an External Link To create a link to a location outside of a presentation use the mlreportgen ppt ExternalLink constructor Specify the full URL of the link target and specify the link text as a string For example import mlreportgen ppt SlidesFile myExternalLinkPresentation pptx slides Presentation slidesFile add slides Title and Content
432. ormation about subsystem property names and values in Block Specific Parameters see the Ports amp Subsystems Library Block Parameters section Section Options Create section for each object in loop Inserts a section in the generated report for each object found in the loop Display the object type in the section title Inserts the object type automatically into the section title in the generated report Number sections by system hierarchy Hierarchically numbers sections in the generated report Requires that Sort Systems be set to By traversal order Create link anchor for each object in loop Creates a hyperlink to the object in the generated report Examples For an example of how to use this component with a Model Loop as its parent see Model Loop System Loop Insert Anything into Report Yes inserts a section if you select the Create section for each object in loop option Class rptgen_sl csl_ sys _ loop See Also Block Loop Model Loop Signal Loop System Loop 8 205 8 Components Alphabetical List 8 206 System Snapshot Insert snapshot of the current system into report Description This component inserts a snapshot of the current system into the report The Snapshot options control how the image file is stored The Properties options control whether the image display includes callouts and a print frame The Display options control how the image is displayed in a browser
433. ors to highlight syntax keywords Include supporting functions Include a list of functions invoked directly or indirectly by the function script If you specify to include supporting functions in the report also specify whether to include both MATLAB and user defined functions or just user defined functions Supporting Function Table Format Options MATLAB Function Table title Insert a title for the supporting functions table Automatic Use the default title for the table Custom Use the title that you specify for the table You can change the header text for property and value columns of the table In the Header column double click to change the header text The Width column indicates the relative width in relative terms based on the smallest width you specify For example for a three column table if the first column width is 1 and the column width of the other two columns is 3 then the second and third columns is three times wider than the first column Grid lines Show grid lines for the table Spans page width Make the table as wide as the page Insert Anything into Report Yes Tables and optionally code Class rptgen_sl csl_emlfcn See Also Stateflow Property 8 61 8 Components Alphabetical List 8 62 Missing Requirements System Loop Loop only on systems and subsystems that do not have associated requirements Description This component runs its child components for ea
434. ort for each object found in the loop Display the object type in the section title Inserts the object type automatically into the section title in the generated report Number sections by system hierarchy Hierarchically numbers sections in the generated report Requires that Sort Systems be set to By traversal order Create link anchor for each object in loop Creates a hyperlink to the object in the generated report Insert Anything into Report Yes inserts a section if you select the Create section for each object in loop option Class rptgen_sl csl_ sys loop See Also Object Loop State Loop Chart Loop System Loop Block Loop Model Loop Signal Loop 8 135 8 Components Alphabetical List 8 136 Simulink Functions and Variables Create table that displays workspace variables and MATLAB functions used by reported blocks in Simulink models Description This component creates a table that displays workspace variables and MATLAB functions used by blocks in a Simulink model The Model Loop component specifies the current model and systems in which the blocks appear For example suppose a Simulink Gain block has a string cos x instead of a number The Simulink software looks for a variable x in the workspace and uses the cos function Functions Include table of functions Includes a table of Simulink functions in the generated report Table Title Specifies a title for the table in the generat
435. ort On Automatic list from context Reports on all fixed point blocks in the context of the parent of this component For example if the parent component is the System Loop then this component reports on all fixed point blocks in the current system If this component does not have a looping component as its parent then selecting this option causes the component to report on all fixed point blocks in all models Custom use block list Reports on a specified list of blocks Loop Options Choose block sorting options and reporting options in this pane Sort blocks Specifies how to sort blocks applied to each level in a model This option is available if you select the Automatic list from context option in the Report On section or if you select Custom use block list andthe Sort blocks options Alphabetically by block name Sorts blocks alphabetically by name Alphabetically by system name Sorts systems alphabetically Lists blocks in each system but in no particular order 8 33 8 Components Alphabetical List 8 34 Alphabetically by full Simulink path Sorts blocks alphabetically by Simulink path By block type Sorts blocks alphabetically by block type By block depth Sorts blocks by their depth in the model By layout left to right Sorts blocks by their location in the model layout by rows The block appearing the furthest toward the left top corner of the model is the anchor for the row
436. other words it shows the system with the largest number of blocks that do not have requirements appears first in the list By system depth Sorts systems by their depth in the model By traversal order Sorts systems in the traversal order Search for Reports only on blocks with the specified property name property value pairs To enable searching click the check box In the first row of the property name and property value table click inside the edit box delete the existing text and type ae the property name and value To add a row use the Add row button eh For information about subsystem property names and values in Block Specific Parameters see the Ports amp Subsystems Library Block Parameters section Section Options Create section for each object in loop Inserts a section in the generated report for each object found in the loop Display the object type in the section title Inserts the object type automatically into the section title in the generated report Number sections by system hierarchy Hierarchically numbers sections in the generated report Requires that Sort Systems be set to By traversal order Create link anchor for each object in loop Creates a hyperlink to the object in the generated report Insert Anything into Report Yes inserts a section if you select the Create section for each object in loop option 8 63 8 Components Alphabetical List Class RptgenRMI NoRe
437. owing options File Name Option The same file name as the report Same as setup file default setup file A file name different from the report Custom setup file name Enter the name of the report You can use lt VariableName gt notation to specify a file name in the Custom text box For more information see lt VariableName gt Notation on the Text component reference page Increment to Prevent Overwriting To maintain the previous version of the setup file when you save updates to the setup file select If report already exists increment to prevent overwriting Image Output File Location Images are placed in a folder with the same name as the report file For example testreport html images are placed in a folder named testreport_ files Report Description To record notes and comments about your report setup use the Report Description field This text that you enter appears in the Properties pane when you select a report setup file in the Outline pane Report Generation Preferences Report Generation Preferences In this section Report Generator Preferences Pane on page 4 13 File Format and Extension on page 4 14 Image Formats on page 4 15 Report Viewing on page 4 15 Reset to Defaults on page 4 16 Report Generator Preferences Pane To set defaults for report generation options use the Report Generator Preferences pane You can over
438. p Program 11 96 Use HTML Tidy to Fix HTML Code 11 96 HTML Code Requirements for DOM Reports 11 100 XML Parsable HTML Code 0 0 00 00 eee 11 100 Supported HTML Elements and Attributes 11 100 Supported HTML CSS Style Attributes for All Elements 11 102 Support for HTML Character Entities 11 103 DOCTYPE Declaration 0 0 0 0 ccc eee 11 104 Display Report Generation Messages 11 106 Report Generation Messages 0 0 00 cease 11 106 Display DOM Default Messages 0 005 11 106 Create and Display a Progress Message 11 108 Compile a Report Program 00 11 110 Create a Microsoft Word Template 11 111 xvi Contents Add Holes in a Microsoft Word Template Display the Developer Ribbon in Word Inline and Block Holes 0 0 0 0000 Create an Inline Hole 00050 Create a Block Level Hole 0000 Set Default Text Style fora Hole Modify Styles in a Microsoft Word Template Edit Styles in a Word Template 4 Add Styles to a Word Template 05 Create an HTML Template Edit a Zipped HTML Template Add Holes in an HTML Template Inline and Block Holes
439. p file For information about generating a report using a template see Generate a Report Using a Template For information about Report Explorer style sheets see Layout Stylesheets 5 Generate the report The following figure illustrates a typical Simulink Report Generator workflow 1 Getting Started 1 10 Report Generator Export Simulink Web View O a Add Generate Simulink Explorer report model GUI l I I I I I I I I I Create Report components I I I I I I Report Components Report Components In this section About Report Components on page 1 11 Report Structure Components on page 1 12 System Based Components on page 1 12 User Supplied Information Components on page 1 14 Dynamic Reporting Components on page 1 14 Format Control at the Component Level on page 1 15 About Report Components Components are modules that you include in a report setup file to insert elements such as tables lists and figures into a report You also can use components to control report generation processing Many components have parent child relationships with other components For example a child components of a Paragraph component include components such as Text Image and Insert Variable Use a combination of the following types of components in your report setup file Component Ty
440. pe Description Report Structure Components on page Include a title page sections and other 1 12 components to organize the content of a report System Based Components on page Include components that automatically 1 12 obtain information directly from a model to include in a report User Supplied Information Components Include text and graphics that you supply on page 1 14 independent of a model Dynamic Reporting Components on page Set up dynamic control for when to include 1 14 components and what information to report on for a component based on data from 1 11 1 Getting Started 1 12 Component Type Description a model or on other conditions that you specify Use the Report Explorer to add components to a report and to specify component properties Report Structure Components To add a title page use a Title Page component You can include an abstract and legal notice information For an example see Add a Title Page on page 3 12 To organize a report into sections use Chapter Subsection components For an example see Create a Section for Each Iteration on page 3 29 System Based Components The Simulink Report Generator includes many components that obtain information directly from a model and include that information in a report Using system based components allows your report to reflect the current state of a model You can generate
441. pically specify its initial content and properties For example the following line creates a paragraph whose initial content is Chapter 1 p mlreportgen dom Paragraph Chapter 1 A constructor returns a handle to the object it creates Assigning the handle to a variable allows you to subsequently append content to the object or set its properties For example the following line appends content to the paragraph object p created in the previous example append p In the Beginning Note that you can assign an object handle to multiple variables and hence access the same object via multiple variables Related Examples 7 Import the DOM API Package on page 11 7 Get and Set DOM Object Properties on page 11 8 More About Document Object Model on page 11 4 Import the DOM API Package Import the DOM API Package All DOM class names and hence constructor names include the prefix mlreportgen dom To avoid the need to include the prefix in your code insert the following statement at the beginning of any script or function that uses the DOM API import mlreportgen dom The documentation frequently refers to DOM API objects and functions without the mlreportgen dom prefix assuming that you have already imported the DOM API package Related Examples Create a Report Program on page 11 3 More About Document Object Model on page 11 4 T1 Create a Report Program Get and Set DOM
442. plate The report need only invoke the document or part fill method For example suppose that you have derived a report class name MyReport from the mlreportgen dom Document class and that this derived class defines methods for each of the holes defined by the report template based on data supplied in its constructor Then you would need only three lines to generate an instance of MyReport function makeReport rptdata rpt MyReport rptdata Ffill rpt close rpt For an example of a forms based object oriented report program in the Examples pane of the MATLAB Report Generator documentation open the Object Oriented Report example See Also Functions mlreportgen dom Document moveToNextHole Classes mlreportgen dom DocumentPart 11 39 11 Create a Report Program 11 40 Related Examples Use Subforms in a Report on page 11 31 Fill the Blanks in a Report Form on page 11 29 Create a Microsoft Word Template on page 11 111 Add Holes in a Microsoft Word Template on page 11 112 Create an HTML Template on page 11 122 Add Holes in an HTML Template on page 11 124 More About Form Based Reporting on page 11 28 Create and Format Text Create and Format Text In this section Create Text on page 11 41 Create Special Characters on page 11 41 Append HTML or XML Markup on page 11 42 Format Text on page 11 42 Create Text Yo
443. play in the generated report e Automatic Uses the parameter name as the title e Custom Specifies a custom title None Specifies no title Size limit Specifies the width of the display in the generated report Units are in pixels The size limit for a given table is the hypotenuse of the width and height of the table sqrt w 2 h 2 The size limit for text is the number of characters squared If you exceed the size limit the variable appears in condensed form Setting a size limit of 0 always displays the variable in long form regardless of its size Display as Specifies a display style from the menu e Auto table paragraph default Displays as a table or paragraph based on the information e Table Displays as a table e Paragraph Displays as a text paragraph 8 185 8 Components Alphabetical List e Inline text Displays in line with the surrounding text Ignore if value is empty Excludes empty parameters from the generated report Insert Anything into Report Yes Text paragraph or table Class rptgen_sf csf_property See Also Paragraph Table Text Stateflow Name 8 186 Stateflow Property Table Stateflow Property Table Insert into report property value table for Stateflow object Description This component inserts a property value table for a Stateflow object into the report Use the Stateflow Filter component as the parent of this component For more information on workin
444. plays the column headers in the table Show number Displays the condition number column in the table Show condition Displays the condition column in the table Show description Displays the description column in the table If you do not select this option no action table appears in the report Insert Anything into Report Yes Table Class rptgen_sf csf_truthtable See Also Block Loop Model Loop Signal Loop System Loop 8 217 8 Components Alphabetical List Variable Access Create table showing global variable access in source code Description This component creates a table showing the global variable access in your source code For each global variable the table displays the following information e Variable name The entry for each variable is denoted by Type of the variable Number of read and write operations on the variable Details of read and write operations For each read or write operation the table displays the following information File and function containing the operation in the form file_name function_name The entry for each read or write operation is denoted by Write operations are denoted by lt and read operations by gt Line and column number of the operation This table captures the information available on the Variable Access pane in the Polyspace user interface 8 218 Functions Alphabetical List 9 Functions Alphabetical List
445. port For details see Use an HTML Cleanup Program on page 11 96 See Also mlreportgen dom Document addHTML mlreportgen dom HTML Related Examples Append HTML File Contents to DOM Reports on page 11 94 Use an HTML Cleanup Program on page 11 96 More About Appending HTML to DOM Reports on page 11 90 7 HTML Code Requirements for DOM Reports on page 11 100 11 93 T1 Create a Report Program Append HTML File Contents to DOM Reports 11 94 In this section Use an addHTMLFile Method on page 11 94 Append an HTMLFile Object on page 11 94 Address Errors on page 11 95 You can append HTML files to a DOM document or document part using either of these approaches e Use the addHTMLFile method with a Document or DocumentPart object Create and append an HTMLFile object If the HTML file contents that you append do not meet DOM requirements the DOM API generates error messages You can use an HTML parser and cleanup program such as HTML Tidy to fix many issues and to identify issues you need to address manually Use an addHTMLFile Method You can use the addHTMLFile method with an mlreportgen dom Document or mlreportgen dom DocumentPart object to add the contents of an HTML file to a DOM report For example you can use addHTMLFile to create an HTMLFile object that you append to a DOM report that produces Word output import mlreportgen dom rpt Do
446. port blocks only as shown below s Z Report Generator a HA Report inport_outport rpt 4 Be ModelLoop current model 4 Be Chapter Input Blocks ee BlockLoop Section 1 All blocks in reported systems of current model 4 Be if strcemp get_param RptgenSL getReportedBlock BlockType Inport Be Model Prop Table lt Name gt Infor ee BlockLoop Section 1 All blocks in reported systems of current model 4 ee if strcmp get_param RptgenSL getReportedBlock BlockType Outport a Model Prop Table lt Name gt Infor 6 23 6 Add Content with Components Loop Context Functions In this section For Simulink Modeling Elements on page 6 24 For Stateflow Modeling Elements on page 6 24 You can use these loop context functions in similar ways as shown in Filter with Loop Context Functions on page 6 22 For Simulink Modeling Elements Modeling Element Looping Component Function Simulink modeling elements Block Block Loop RptgenSL getReportedBlock Signal Signal Loop RptgenSL getReportedSignal System System Loop RptgenSL getReportedSystem Model Model Loop RptgenSL getReportedModel For Stateflow Modeling Elements Modeling Element Looping Component Function Object Object Loop RptgenSF getReportedObject State State Loop RptgenSF getReportedState Chart Chart Loop RptgenSF getReportedChart 6 24
447. ptx slides Presentation slidesFile myNewPPTPresentation pptx Specifying a different name for the output file preserves the original presentation If you want to overwrite the existing presentation you can use the template file name as the file name for the output file Replace a Picture Change the title of the second slide Create a Picture object to replace the existing picture You can use a find method with the Presentation object to find content objects named HistBins and Histogram the unique names you specified using PowerPoint histTitle Paragraph Histogram with Specified Bin Edges replace slides Histogram histTitle x randn 1000 1 12 55 12 Programmatic PowerPoint Presentation Creation 12 56 edges 10 2 0 25 2 10 h histogram x edges saveas gcf hist_plot png plotEdges Picture hist_plot png replace slides HistBins plotEdges Replace Text with Links Change the title of the third slide Create text to replace the existing text The text includes links to the MathWorks online documentation Append ExternalLink objects to Paragraph objects and replace the slide content using a cell array of the Paragraph objects funcsTitle Paragraph Related Functions replace slides RelatedFuncs funcsTitle histCounts Paragraph histCountsLink ExternalLink http www mathworks com help matlab ref histcounts html histcounts append histCounts histCo
448. put file for the generated presentation myTemplate pptx as the PowerPoint template SlidesFile myNewPPTPresentation pptx slides Presentation slidesFile myTemplate 12 65 12 Programmatic PowerPoint Presentation Creation ght He 60 Add a Presentation Title Slide To add a slide programmatically specify a slide layout in the template To see the names of the slide layouts in the PowerPoint Slide Master tab hover over a slide layout The myTemplate template includes a Title Slide slide layout for the presentation title slide To add a slide using the Title Slide layout use the add method with slides which is a Presentation object In the slide layout name do not include the word Layout which appears at the end of slide layout names when you hover over slide layouts presentationTitleSlide add slides Title Slide To add content to the slide first find out the names of the content objects in the slide layout 1 In PowerPoint stay in the slide master view and select the Home tab 2 Click Select gt Selection Pane 3 In the slide layout click the slide layout content item whose name you want Ja lyla n Ll Text Direction E O00 a P Shape Fill i Find Align Text ALLOUVGBI 4 CF Shape Outline 3S Replace Arrange Quick AV Aare asa gt UNA w ra BS e aa a E DAE IAI L Styles Shape Effects Select 12 66 Font Fy Paragraph g Drawing 5 Editing Selection Show All
449. qSystemLoop See Also Block Loop Missing Requirements Block Loop Requirements Block Loop Requirements Documents Table Requirements Signal Loop Requirements Summary Table Requirements System Loop Requirements Table System Loop 8 64 Model Advisor Report Model Advisor Report Insert Model Advisor report or link to Model Advisor report for current model Description This component inserts a Model Advisor report for the current model into the report if the report is in HTML format For other report formats it inserts a link to a Model Advisor report for the current model For more information about Model Advisor reports see Save and View Model Advisor Reports in the Simulink documentation Properties Use existing report Includes an existing Model Advisor report in the report This check box is selected by default Clearing this option generates a new Model Advisor report Insert Anything into Report Yes a Model Advisor report Class rptgen_sl CModelAdvisor See Also Model Change Log 8 65 8 Components Alphabetical List 8 66 Model Change Log Construct model history table that displays model revision information Description Run this component before you run the Model Simulation component It uses a reported model s Modif iedHistory parameter to construct a model history table that displays information about each logged revision to the model This model history table includes T
450. r code 8 29 8 Components Alphabetical List Documentation Insert text extracted from DocBlock blocks in Simulink models Description This component inserts text extracted from DocBlock blocks in Simulink models It can have the following components as its parent e Model Loop e System Loop e Block Loop The specified report format determines the format of the DocBlock block data inserted into the report HTML Imports HTML data into the report Note For non English HTML DocBlock text that you want to include in a Documentation component use UTF 8 file encoding Use a simple text editor to create the HTML code RTF Imports RTF data into the report Properties Import file as Specifies how to format the imported information The following example shows how each option works using the following text as input First row Second row Third row follows blank line e Plain text ignore line breaks Imports plain text without any line breaks no paragraphs as in this example First row Second row Third row follows blank line 8 30 Documentation e Paragraphs defined by line breaks Imports the text contained in paragraphs defined by line breaks hard returns or carriage returns as in this example First row Second row Third row follows blank line e Paragraphs defined by empty rows Imports text contained in paragraphs defined by empty rows rows that do not contain text
451. r dialog box tabs 5 16 Create and Use a Web View Heat Transfer Equation from evaporator y w Tcomp m_dot h4 h1 y efficiency m_dot mass flow rate w speed of the engine Tcomp compressor torque h4 h1 enthalpy enthalpy Texit FAE TEMP UW tion Max flow rate Pa AC Control X NumberOffableDimensions 1 Table 219 97 230 02 240 02 250 05 260 09 270 11 280 13 285 14 290 16 295 17 300 19 305 22 310 24 315 27 320 29 BreakpointsForDimension1 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 285 290 295 300 305 310 315 320 SampleTime 1 Algorithm InterpMethod Linear ExtrapMethod Linear DiagnosticForOutOfRangelnput None RemoveProtectioninput off IndexSearchMethod Binary search BeginindexSearchUsingPrevi off UseOnelnputPortForAllinputD off SupportTunableTableSize off 7 Data Types TableDataTypeStr Inherit Same as output TableMin 0 TableMax D BreakpointsForDimension1D Inherit Same as corresponding input BreakpointsForDimension1Min BreakpointsForDimension1Max FractionDataTypeStr Inherit Inherit via internal rule IntermediateResultsDataTyp Inherit Same as output OutDataTypeStr Inherit Same as first input OutMin 0 OutMax 0 InternalRulePriority Precision InputSameDT on LockScale off RndMeth Floor SaturateOnintegerOverflow on 4 Click the input signal for the Exit Temp AC block to display the signal properties 5 17 5 Export Simulink Mo
452. r model coverage information associated with the current Web view To include model coverage information in a Web view set up a coverage report for the model and simulate the model before selecting the model coverage optional view option Related Examples Capture and View Optional Web View Information on page 5 21 Export Models to Web View Files on page 5 4 More About Optional Web Views on page 5 20 Capture and View Optional Web View Information Capture and View Optional Web View Information In this section Capture Optional Web View Information for a Model on page 5 21 View Optional Web View Information on page 5 21 Capture Optional Web View Information for a Model When you create a Web view you can include optional Web view information To add the model coverage or requirements optional view information to a Web view for a model you must have Simulink Verification and Validation installed 1 In the Web View dialog box open the Optional Views tab 2 Select each optional view for example Model Coverage or Requirements that you want to capture the associated information for Tip The Optional Views tab appears only if you can access an optional Web view Alternatively in the Simulink Editor click Analysis gt Requirements Traceability gt Generate Web View View Optional Web View Information To view the model coverage or requirements optional Web view i
453. r population_slides Two Ways to Use the PPT API You can create a PPT API program that Replaces content in or adds content to an existing PowerPoint presentation Generates a complete PowerPoint presentation Create a Presentation Program Add Content to an Existing Presentation To add or update content to an existing presentation without manually updating the presentation each time content changes use the PPT API This approach is useful when you want to use most of the content and formatting in an existing presentation You can use the PPT API and MATLAB functions to generate content for a presentation from MATLAB code and Simulink models You can update a presentation by overwriting the presentation file or create a separate version of the presentation with a different presentation name Create a Complete Presentation To create a complete presentation when you want to use the same content using multiple PowerPoint templates use the PPT API PPT API Applications and PowerPoint Templates The PPT API uses PowerPoint presentations as templates to generate presentations The template can be an empty presentation or a presentation with slides You can use the following as templates for a PPT API presentation The default PPT API PowerPoint template An existing PowerPoint presentation whose content you want to update A PowerPoint template You can use templates to apply formatting Across a whole presentatio
454. r the Logical and Flow Control category double click Logical Then In the Outline pane on the left select the if component again In the Library pane in the middle under the Logical and Flow Control category double click Logical Else Both elements are added as child components to the if component as shown in the Outline pane 3 44 Report Generator H Report simulink_tutorial rpt i H Eval The name of the model that wil To move the else component under the then component select the else component and click the down arrow on the toolbar once The Outline pane on the left looks as follows 3 17 3 Creating Simulink Reports EF Report Generator H Report simulink_tutorial rpt B Eval The name of the model that wil H Title Page Dynamic Simulink Report 6 Save the report setup file Error If Model Cannot Be Opened Note This section builds on the previous tasks described in the step by step example summarized in Create a Simulink Report Generator Report on page 3 2 To see the completed report setup file open Simulink Dynamic Report The report is for the vdp model Ifthe if strcmp bdroot gcs expModel component fails the vdp model cannot open the else component executes Display an error message in the report using the Chapter Subsection component 1 Inthe Outline pane on the left select the else component 3 1
455. rPoint presentation programmatically Your presentation can capture dynamic information from a MATLAB program without you making manual updates to the presentation You can use templates slide masters and styles to format your presentation For more information see Programmatic PowerPoint Presentation Creation 1 21 Generate System Design Description Reports System Design Description on page 2 2 Generate a System Design Description on page 2 6 e Customize the System Design Description on page 2 10 2 Generate System Design Description Reports System Design Description In this section Predefined Standard Reports on page 2 2 What Is the System Design Description on page 2 2 What You Can Do with the Report on page 2 3 Report Contents on page 2 3 Predefined Standard Reports From the Simulink Editor you can access two predefined standard Simulink Report Generator reports called System Design Description System Requirements Traceability The System Design Description report provides summary or detailed information about a system design represented by a model You can choose report options using the report dialog or you can create a customized version using the Report Explorer For details see Generate a System Design Description on page 2 6 You can use the System Design Description report setup file as a starting point for creati
456. raphy Captions Index Table of Autho A Update Table of Contents Word is updating the table of contents Select one Update entire table Mv Renort i E D Update Table Contents Chapter 1 Section 1 PAGE10F1 13worDS 3 4 Save the report Create an HTML Table of Contents The DOM API provides a JavaScript script that you can include in an HTML report to generate a table of contents when you open the report in an HTML browser To use this script to generate a TOC in an HTML report perform these steps 1 Create an HTML TOC placeholder element in the template See Create an HTML TOC Placeholder on page 11 80 2 Set the outline levels of the section heads that you want to appear in the table of contents See Set Outline Levels of Section Heads on page 11 81 3 Open the generated report in a browser 11 79 T1 Create a Report Program 11 80 Create an HTML TOC Placeholder An HTML TOC placeholder element is an HTML div element with an id attribute set to toc lt div id toc gt You can create a TOC placeholder in any of the following ways Use a Template That Contains a Placeholder on page 11 80 Insert a Placeholder Programmatically Using a Custom Element on page 11 80 Insert a Placeholder Programmatically Using a Document Part on page 11 81 Use a Template That Contains a Placeholder 1 Create a copy of the DOM default HTML
457. ration 1 1 length exp alue ae Eval Evaluate this string in the bas 4 Section 1 Processing the vdp model a Variable lteration_Yalue s Eval set_param expBlock expParam lter QB if okSetValue then B Simulate model use model start end time EB Scope Snapshot All graph amp open scope blocks in reported systems of current model m 6 Inthe Properties pane on the right a Inthe Paper orientation selection list select Portrait b For the Image size enter 5 4 c Inthe Sealing selection list select Zoom d Enter 75 for the value 7 Save the report setup file 8 To test to see if the signal data falls within a specified range add another Logical If component a Inthe Outline pane on the left select the Scope Snapshot component b Inthe Library pane in the middle scroll up to the Logical and Flow Control category c Double click the Logical If component 3 40 Add Report Content with Components 9 To test the signal data replace true in the Test expression text box with the following in the Properties pane on the right max dynamicX 2 gt testMin amp max dynamicX 2 10 Save the report The Outline pane looks as follows Report Generator 3 Report simulink_tutorial rpt j Eval The name of the model that wil ae Title Page Dynamic Simulink Report eB if stremp bdroot ges expM odel
458. ray BasedTable and table components such as Handle Graphics Property Table 10 9 10 Template Based Report Formatting Part Template Report Explorer Components the Part Template Formats Table title including prefix such as Table number and title and for the content rgFigureTitle Table and Array BasedTable Table title including prefix such as Table number and title and for the content Part Template Holes Part templates include fill in the blanks hole markup The report converter fills holes with content that the MATLAB Report Generator generates For example the rgChapter part template in the default Word conversion template includes an rgChapterTitle hole rgChapterTitlePrefix prefix rgChapterTitleNumber number gChapterTitle title 1 rgChapterContent Chapter content rgChapterContent q The report converter fills the rgChapterTitle hole with the contents of the Title property of top level Chapter Section components in a report You can rearrange or delete holes to change the order in which generated content appears in the report or to omit content Do not add holes If you add holes the report converter ignores them Header and Footers in Word Conversion Templates Word conversion templates include headers and footers for the document as a whole You can also specify headers and footers for the rgRectoTitlePage rgVersoTitlePage and rgChapter part templat
459. reate an HTML template from scratch Edit a Zipped HTML Template To edit a zipped HTML template unzip it into a subfolder of the current folder using the unzipTemplate function For example to unzip files for a template called mytemplate unzipTemplate mytemplate To repackage a template after you edit it use the zipTemplate function For example to package the mytemplate htmx template in a subfolder called mytemplate in the current folder ZipTemplate mytemplate htmtx If you do not want to use the current folder you can specify a path with the unzipTemplate and zipTemplate functions See Also Functions unzipTemplate zipTemplate Classes mlreportgen dom Document Related Examples Add Holes in an HTML Template on page 11 124 Modify Styles in an HTML Template on page 11 127 Create an HTML Template Create a Microsoft Word Template on page 11 111 11 123 11 Create a Report Program Add Holes in an HTML Template 11 124 In this section Inline and Block Holes on page 11 124 Create an Inline Hole on page 11 124 Create a Block Hole on page 11 125 Template holes are places in a template that a report script fills with generated content supporting a forms based report Inline and Block Holes The DOM API supports two types of holes inline and block An inline hole is for document elements that a paragraph element can contain Text Imag
460. ride these preferences with the Report Options dialog box or with individual components To specify report generation options for a specific report in the Report Explorer use the Report Options dialog box For details see Select Report Generation Options on page 4 4 To open the Report Generator Preferences pane use one of these approaches In the Report Explorer select File gt Preferences From the MATLAB Toolstrip in the Home tab in the Environment section select Preferences gt Report Generator 4 13 A Generate a Report 4 MATLAB Apps Code Analyzer Colors Command History Command Window Comparison Current Folder Editor Debugger gt Fonts General GUIDE Help Keyboard Toolbars Variables Web Workspace Simulink DSP System Toolbox Database Toolbox LTE System Toolbox Figure Copy Template Computer Vision System Toolbox Image Acquisition Toolbox Image Processing Toolbox Instrument Control Toolbox MATLAB Report Generator Parallel Computing Toolbox m MATLAB Report Generator Preferences Output Format Options Format ID a HTML Extension html Simulink images bit i 9 PNG 24 bit image A Stateflow images PNG 24 bit image x s 4 HG images PNG 24 bit image x Visible in Report Explorer View command web rptgen file2urn lt FileName gt v Reset to Defaults Preferences Anim
461. ries 6 Inthe tidy zip file right click tidy exe and select Extract Extract tidy exe to the current MATLAB folder 7 Create a batch file to use with Tidy In Notepad enter the following code tidy doctype omit input xml no output xml yes write back yes f errs txt 1 Save the batch file in the Windows path Save the file as tidyup bat You can use this batch file with other HTML files that you want to append to a DOM report 8 Make a backup copy of the simple _html_example html file which contains the HTML to append to the DOM report 9 Run Tidy on simple_html_example html In a Windows command window enter tidyup simple html_example html 10 In the folder where you ran tidyup check the errs txt file That file summarizes the changes Tidy made and lists as errors issues that Tidy could not fix In this example there are no errors but if errs txt did report errors manually edit the HTML file to address those issues 11 In MATLAB append the simple_html_example html file to a DOM report and display the report import mlreportgen dom rpt Document html_report docx htmlFile HTMLFile simple_html_example html append rpt htmlFile close rpt rptview rpt OutputPath Related Examples Append HTML Content to DOM Reports on page 11 92 11 98 Use an HTML Cleanup Program Append HTML File Contents to DOM Reports on page 11 94 More About HTML Code Requirements for DOM R
462. roperties Parameter settings for the MATLAB Function block Argument properties Properties of the function arguments for example complexity The function script MATLAB code of the function Function symbol data Information about the user defined and optionally built in MATLAB variables and functions invoked by the MATLAB function that computes the block outputs Supporting functions User defined functions and optionally MATLAB functions that are included in the MATLAB Function block function For details about MATLAB Function blocks see the MATLAB Function block reference page Use the MATLAB Function component within a section paragraph or table Note To view the contents of a MATLAB Function block in a Web viewer use the Web view feature of the Simulink Report Generator In the Web view hover your cursor over the MATLAB Function block For details see Model Web Views Function Properties Table Include function properties Generates a table with function property information Table title Insert a title for the function properties table Automatic Use the default title for the table Custom Use the title that you specify for the table MATLAB Function You can change the header text for property and value columns of the function properties table In the Header column double click to change the header text The Width column indicates the relative width in relative
463. rrently displayed or chart currently selected in the Simulink Editor For the systems in the levels that you are exporting in Include Options select any kinds of systems you want the Web viewer user to be able to navigate below the Subsystem or Model block to the underlying blocks or models If you select more than one kind of system the criteria for exporting information for interacting with the contents of the systems are applied downward through the model hierarchy For example if you left Referenced Models unchecked when you exported the model regardless of how you set the Library Links option in the Web view you cannot interact with a library link block that is inside of a referenced model In the Systems to Exclude list of the systems you have selected to export select any systems that you do not want to export To select multiple systems press the Ctrl key and select systems Export Models to Web View Files To avoid overwriting existing exported Web view files select If file exists increment name to prevent overwriting In Package Type specify whether you want to package the Web view as a zipped file the default packaging In Package name you can specify a name for the zip file or for the folder for the Web view files Click Export Note If you use the Web View export option in the Report Explorer Properties pane then click Export model If you change the visible system or chart while the Report Explorer
464. rs you can select a preset table or use a custom table A preset table is built in and formatted You can select a preset table in the preset table selection list in the upper left of the Figure Prop Table window To apply a preset table select the table and click Apply To create a custom table select a preset table and modify it to fit your needs by adding and or deleting rows and properties You may want to start with the Blank 4x4 preset table Note You cannot save a custom table as a preset table If you do so you lose all changes to the custom table Summary Table Components Summary Table Components In this section About Summary Table Components on page 6 17 Open the Example Report Template on page 6 18 Select Object Types on page 6 19 Add and Remove Properties on page 6 19 Set Relative Column Widths on page 6 20 Set Object Row Options on page 6 20 About Summary Table Components Summary table components insert tables that include specified properties for objects into generated reports Summary tables contain one object per row with each object property appearing in a column as shown in the following summary table in the figloop tutorial report 6 17 6 Add Content with Components 6 18 aioi File Edit view Go Debug Desktop Window Help zj Table 1 1 Figure Properties Name Visible HandleVisibility Membrane jmembran
465. rt Program 11 12 append d Table tableArray See Also Functions mlreportgen dom Paragraph append Related Examples lt Construct a DOM Object on page 11 6 Clone a DOM Object on page 11 13 Add Content as a Group on page 11 14 Stream a Report on page 11 16 More About 7 Document Object Model on page 11 4 Clone a DOM Object Clone a DOM Object If you attempt to append an object more than once to the same object or to append an object to multiple objects the append function throws an error If you need to append an object multiple times use the clone function to create copies of the object d Document MyDoc text append d Hello World text Color magenta text clone text text Color cyan append d text See Also Functions mlreportgen dom Paragraph clone Related Examples Add Content to a Report on page 11 11 7 Construct a DOM Object on page 11 6 More About Document Object Model on page 11 4 11 13 T1 Create a Report Program Add Content as a Group 11 14 You can use a group to include the same content in different parts of a report The DOM API clones the members of a group before appending them to another object This example shows the key code to include After describing the steps involved in using a group this example includes code for a complete report that uses a group 1 Define the DOM o
466. ry currently active in the data dictionary loop specified by the Data Dictionary Loop component references The referenced information displays at the end of the table for the referencing data dictionary unless you select Make separate table for each referenced dictionary Make separate table for each referenced dictionary If you select Include referenced data dictionaries display a table for each referenced data dictionary Include referenced dictionaries list If you select Include referenced data dictionaries following the referencing data dictionary summary table include a list of the referenced data dictionaries Sections to Report You can specify the data dictionary sections to include data for Design Data default Include information from the Design Data section of the current data dictionary Configuration Include information from the Configuration section of the current data dictionary Other Data Include information from the Other Data section of the current data dictionary Fields to Report The current dictionary summary table lists properties of the variables that it contains The table always includes the variable name and value In addition it optionally includes these properties Data type Last modified Simulink Data Dictionary Last modified by Status Referenced dictionary that contains data Example Suppose that you configure an HTML report with the Simulink Data Dictionary Loop comp
467. s Specifies the level of transition detail to display in the generated report e All Labeled or non redundant 8 177 8 Components Alphabetical List Non redundant Labeled None Skip autogenerated charts under truth tables Excludes autogenerated charts under truth tables List Formatting List style Bulleted list e Numbered list Allows you to specify numbering options in the Numbering style section Numbering style Allows you to specify a numbering style This setting supports only the RTF DOC report format 1 2 3 4 a b c d A B C D i ii iii iv lt I II III IV To show the parent number in each list entry select Show parent number in nested list 1 1 a To show only the current number or letter select Show only current list value a Insert Anything into Report Yes Tree graphic Class rptgen_sf csf_hier 8 178 Stateflow Hierarchy See Also Stateflow Hierarchy Loop 8 179 8 Components Alphabetical List 8 180 Stateflow Hierarchy Loop Run child components on Stateflow object hierarchy Description This component runs its child components on the Stateflow object hierarchy Loop Options Minimum legible font size Specifies the minimum font size to use in the report The default font size 8 is the smallest recommended font size Skip autogenerated charts under truth tables Excludes autogenerated charts under truth tabl
468. s by traversal order By simulation order Sorts blocks by execution order Search for Simulink property name property value pairs Reports on blocks with specified property name property value pairs Search Stateflow Reports on Stateflow charts with specified property name property value pairs Insert Anything into Report Yes Table Class rptgen_sf csf_summ table 8 197 8 Components Alphabetical List See Also Block Loop Chart Loop Model Loop Object Loop Signal Loop State Loop Stateflow Hierarchy Loop System Loop 8 198 System Filter System Filter Run child components if current system meets specified conditions Description This component runs its child components if the current system meets the conditions that you specify with this component Properties Report only if system has at least N blocks Specifies the minimum number of blocks that the system must include for any of the child components to run If you enter 0 child components run regardless of the number of blocks in the system Report only if system has at least N subsystems Specifies the minimum number of subsystems that the system must include for the child components to run If you enter 0 child components run regardless of the number of subsystems in the system Report only if system mask type is Specifies which masks to include in the generated report e Either masked or unmasked Masked Unmasked Custom
469. s holes for the chapter title and the chapter content Chapter SEQ Chapter MERGEFORMAT Chanterttle ChapterTitle ChapterContent ChapterContent ChapterContent This script uses the chapter part template to create numbered chapters The last statement in this script opens the report in Word and updates it Updating the report causes Word to replace the SEQ fields with the chapter numbers Automatically Number Document Content import mlreportgen dom d Document MyReport docx MyReportTemplate for rank 3 5 chapterPart DocumentPart d Chapter while strcemp chapterPart CurrentHoleld end switch chapterPart CurrentHolelId case ChapterTitle append chapterPart sprintf Rank i Magic Square rank case ChapterContent table append chapterPart magic rank table Width 2in end moveTONextHole chapterPart end append d chapterPart end close d rptview d OutputPath You can use a similar approach to automatically number HTML reports using the CSS counter increment and content properties in the template for your report See Also Functions mlreportgen dom Document createAutoNumberStream mlreportgen dom Document getAutoNumberStream Classes mlreportgen dom AutoNumber mlreportgen dom AutoNumberStream mlreportgen dom CounterInc mlreportgen dom CounterReset 11 89 T1 Create a Report Program Appending HTML to DOM Reports 11 90 In this section
470. s property e Auto e Right e Left e Center Image title None Default e System name Uses the system name as the image name Full system name Uses the system name with path information as the image name e Custom Specifies a custom title 8 209 8 Components Alphabetical List 8 210 Caption None Default Description use system description Custom Specifies a custom caption Insert Anything into Report Yes Image Class rptgen_sl csl sys snap See Also System Loop Test Sequence Test Sequence Capture Test Sequence block information Description This component captures information about Simulink Test Test Sequence blocks The report includes the test sequence using the tabular series of steps from the Test Sequence block Test Sequence Block Section Title Title to use for the Test Sequence block section Use Test Sequence name default Use the name of the Test Sequence block as the section title Custom Specify a custom section title in the text box Insert Anything into Report Yes Class rptgen_stm cstm_testseq 8 211 8 Components Alphabetical List 8 212 To Workspace Plot Capture plot figure created in the MATLAB workspace Description This component captures a plot figure created in the MATLAB workspace and then inserts one or both of the following into the report A table that includes input and output numeric values
471. s the Stateflow object type to include in the report Run only if Stateflow object has at least the following number of Stateflow children Specifies a minimum number of children that a Stateflow object must have to include in the report Automatically insert linking anchor Inserts a linking anchor before the reported object If an anchor for this object exists this option does not create a second anchor Insert Anything into Report No Class rptgen_sf csf_obj_ filter See Also Stateflow Hierarchy Loop 8 176 Stateflow Hierarchy Stateflow Hierarchy Provide visual representation of the hierarchy of a Stateflow object Description This component inserts a tree that shows the hierarchy of a given Stateflow object Tree Options Construct tree from Specifies the object to use for the tree representation e Current object e Root of current object Starts reporting from the top of the hierarchy Emphasize current object in tree Highlights the current object in the tree representation Show number of parents Specifies the number of parents to include in the tree representation Show siblings Displays siblings in the tree representation Show children to depth Specifies the depth of children to display for each object in the tree representation Children Show junctions Specifies the level of junction detail to display in the generated report All Non redundant None Show transition
472. second entry spans the second and third columns import mlreportgen dom doc Document test table Table 4 table Border single table ColSep single table RowSep single row TableRow append row TableEntry entry 11 te TableEntry entry 12 13 te ColSpan 2 te Border single append row te append row TableEntry entry 14 append table row row TableRow for c 1 4 append row TableEntry sprintf entry 2 1i c end append table row append doc table Create and Format Tables close doc rptview doc OutputPath Format a Table You can format a table programmatically using DOM format objects or format properties You can also use Word and HTML template styles For information about these formatting techniques and format inheritance see Report Formatting Approaches on page 11 20 Format a Table Programmatically You can use format objects to format tables or use Table format properties to specify commonly used table formats This example uses Border ColSep and RowSep format objects to specify a red table border and the green column and row separators The Width format property to specify the table width import mlreportgen dom doc Document test html table Table magic 5 table Style Border ColSep RowSep inset red 3px single green 1px single green 1px
473. sed when you saved the copy To change the template name that appears in the list of templates in the Template Properties dialog box specify the name in the Display name field For details see Set Conversion Template Properties on page 10 15 Related Examples Set Conversion Template Properties on page 10 15 Open a Conversion Template on page 10 14 Move a Conversion Template on page 10 16 Delete a Conversion Template on page 10 17 Customize Microsoft Word Report Styles on page 10 18 Customize Microsoft Word Part Templates on page 10 21 Customize a Microsoft Word Title Page Template on page 10 30 Copy a Conversion Template More About Report Conversion Templates on page 10 2 10 13 10 Template Based Report Formatting Open a Conversion Template 10 14 1 In Report Explorer select Tools gt Edit Document Conversion Template The Template Browser appears in the Report Explorer 2 Select a template from the list of Word and HTML templates in the Library pane For example select Default Word Template The properties of the template appear in the Report Explorer Properties pane 3 Inthe Template Browser click Open template If you open a default template you cannot edit it To edit a template make a copy of the default template and open the copy To open both the template and the template stylesheet in the Template Browser click Open sty
474. select TortoiseSVN gt Diff TortoiseSVN runs a new instance of MATLAB MATLAB loads and runs the fileComparisonDriver m file located in the folder matlab toolbox rptgenext rptgenextdemos slxmlicomp The fileComparisonDriver function performs these steps 1 Creates temporary copies of the current working version of the Simulink model and the previously stored version of the model 2 Compares the XML text files from both models and generates a comparison report displayed in the MATLAB Comparison Tool The function must preprocess the file names by creating renamed temporary copies because Subversion uses a temporary file naming convention that is not compatible with Simulink because of invalid delimiting characters The branch and version information is embedded in the temporary model names See also Comparing XML Files from Models with Identical Names on page 7 27 for information about using the report and a warning to avoid losing work in the temporary models Other TortoiseSVN workflows using Diff operations are also supported such as comparing two versions in an archive 7 33 7 Compare Simulink Model XML Files Compare Templates 7 34 In this section Compare Project Templates on page 7 34 Compare Model Templates on page 7 35 Compare Project Templates You can compare project templates SLTX files If you select two project template files to compare you see a comparison report showing di
475. selected files are XML or model files the XML text comparison tool performs a Chawathe analysis and displays a report in the Comparison Tool For more information about comparisons of other file types e g text MAT or binary with the Comparison Tool see Comparing Files and Folders in the MATLAB documentation Select Files from a Simulink Project If you have a Simulink Project using source control you can create an XML comparison report from the Modified Files view of the Simulink Project Tool For details see Project Management Select Files from the Comparison Tool To compare files using the Comparison Tool from the MATLAB Toolstrip in the File section select the Compare button In the dialog box select files to compare If the selected files are XML or model files the XML text comparison tool performs a Chawathe analysis and displays a report in the Comparison Tool Select Files from the Command Line To compare XML files from the command line enter visdiff filename1 filename2 where filename1 and filename1 are XML files or Simulink models If the files are models the XML comparison tool performs the comparison on the XML files This XML comparison functionality is an extension to the MATLAB visdiff function visdiff produces a report in the Comparison Tool To create an xmlcomp Edits object at the command line without opening the Comparison Tool enter Select Simulink Models for XML Comparison
476. selection list and click Add To delete a property select the property name and click the Delete button To move properties up and down in the list click the Up and Down buttons Note Some entries in the list of available properties such as Depth are virtual properties that you cannot access using the get_param command The properties used Fixed Point Summary Table for property value filtering in the block and system loop components must be retrievable by the get_param Therefore you cannot configure your Summary Table to report on all blocks of Depth 2 Transpose table Enabling this check box changes the summary table rows into columns in the generated report putting the property names in the first column and the values in the other columns Object Rows Insert anchor for each row Inserts an anchor for each row in the summary table Report On Specifies blocks on which to report e Automatic list from context Reports on all blocks in the current context Custom use block list Reports on a specified list of blocks To include a given block in the report specify its full path Loop Options Sort blocks Specifies how to sort blocks applied to each level in a model Alphabetically by block name Sorts blocks alphabetically by name Alphabetically by system name Sorts systems alphabetically Lists blocks in each system but in no particular order Alphabetically by full Simuli
477. serts the name of the Stateflow object as defined by its parent component into the report This component must have the State Loop Chart Loop or Stateflow Filter component as its parent Using this component as the first child component of a Chapter Subsection component allows the current Stateflow object name to be the chapter or section title Properties Display name as Displays the Stateflow object name in the report e Name For example Object e Type Name For example Object lt ObjectName gt e Type Name For example Object lt ObjectName gt e Type Name For example Object lt ObjectName gt Display name as Specifies the level of detail with which the Stateflow object name displays the report e Object name e Object name with Stateflow path e Object name with Simulink and Stateflow path Insert Anything into Report Yes Text Class rptgen_sf csf_obj_name 8 183 8 Components Alphabetical List See Also Chapter Subsection Chart Loop State Loop Stateflow Filter 8 184 Stateflow Property Stateflow Property Insert into report table text or paragraph with information on selected Stateflow object property Description This component inserts a table text or paragraph that contains details of the selected Stateflow object property Property to Display Property name Specifies the Stateflow property name to display Display Options Title Specifies a title to dis
478. sible figures in your report in the Include figures selection list select Visible figures This option inserts a snapshot and Property Table for all figures that are currently open and visible 1 Select the Data figures only Exclude applications option to exclude figures from the loop whose HandleVisibility parameter is off 2 To generate the report in the Report Explorer toolbar click the Report button In the generated report scroll down to Chapter 2 Figures in Report The Membrane Data and Peaks Data figures appear in the generated report Loop on Figures with Tags To include figures with specified tags in the report 1 In the Include figures selection list select the All figures with tags option 2 Inthe list of tags delete membrane 3 Click Report to generate the report The An Application andAn Invisible Application figures appear in the report They both have an app tag Modify Loop Section Options In a loop a section refers to a space in the generated report in which information including text images and tables appears You can alter the appearance of sections 6 27 6 Add Content with Components in each loop appear in the report by using the options in the Figure Loop component s Section Options pane Create Section for Each Object in Loop Create an individual section for each object found in the loop using the object title as the section title This option is useful when a loop does not conta
479. sign Documentation and Results Reporting Types of Reports System Design Documentation 000000 Results Reporting Interactive Model Exploration 4 Simulink Report Generator Tools 00000005 Simulink Model Exploration Tools 05 Report Creation Workflow Approaches for Creating Reports 00 cues Interactive Report Creation 0 00 cee eens Report Components About Report Components 0 00 0 eee ees Report Structure Components 0 0000 System Based Components 0 000 ce eee ees User Supplied Information Components Dynamic Reporting Components 000005 Format Control at the Component Level Working with the Report Explorer About the Report Explorer 0 000 How Simulink Report Generator and Simulink Software Interact Supported Report Formats 1 2 1 2 1 3 1 3 1 4 1 6 1 7 1 9 1 9 1 9 1 11 1 11 1 12 1 12 1 14 1 14 1 15 1 16 1 16 Add Content to PowerPoint Presentations Programmatically 0 0 000 000 ee eee 1 21 Generate System Design Description Reports 2 System Design Description 0000005 2 2 Predefined Standard Reports 0 00 eee 2 2 What Is the System Design Description 2 2 What You Can Do with the Report
480. slidesFile myNewPPTPresentation pptx histTitle Paragraph Histogram with Specified Bin Edges replace slides Histogram histTitle x randn 1000 1 edges 10 2 0 25 2 10 h histogram x edges saveas gcf hist_plot png plotEdges Picture hist_plot png replace slides HistBins plotEdges funcsTitle Paragraph Related Functions replace slides RelatedFuncs funcsTitle histCounts Paragraph histCountsLink ExternalLink http www mathworks com help matlab ref histcounts html histcounts append histCounts histCountsLink fewerbins Paragraph Update Presentation Content Programmatically fewerbinsLink ExternalLink http www mathworks com help matlab ref fewerbins html fewerbins append fewerbins fewerbinsLink replace slides FuncList histCounts fewerbins long Paragraph Long Name long Bold true short Paragraph Short Name short Bold true rgb Paragraph RGB triplet rgb Bold true table2 Table long short rgb yellow y 1 1 0 green contents find slides ParamTable replace slides ParamTable table2 slides Children 2 Name ReferenceSlide refSlide find slides ReferenceSlide introSlide add slides Title and Content refSlide 1 contents find introSlide Title replace contents 1 Histogram Plots introText Paragraph You can use the code
481. spatcher dispatcher Filter DebugMessagesPass true l addlistener dispatcher Message src evtdata disp evtdata Message formatAsText p Paragraph Chapter p Tag chapter title p Style CounterInc chapter CounterReset table WhiteSpace pre append p AutoNumber chapter append d p close d rptview test html delete 1l 11 107 T1 Create a Report Program 11 108 Create and Display a Progress Message This example shows how to create and dispatch a progress message You can use a similar approach for other kinds of messages such as warnings 1 Create a message dispatcher dispatcher MessageDispatcher getTheDispatcher 2 Adda listener using the MATLAB addlistener function l addlistener dispatcher Message src evtdata disp evtdata Message formatAsText 3 Dispatch the message using the Message dispatch method Specify the dispatcher object and the message to dispatch Here the message is a debug message called starting chapter and the Document object d is the source of the message dispatch dispatcher ProgressMessage starting chapter d 4 Include code to delete the listener after the code that generates the report delete 1 This report uses this progress message import mlreportgen dom d Document test html dispatcher MessageDispatcher getTheDispatcher l addlistener dispatcher Message src evtd
482. ssage Halting generation gt Revert Help Clear the Insert MATLAB expression in report and the Display command window output in report check boxes so you do not include MATLAB code or output in this report Add MATLAB code to the Expression to evaluate in the base workspace text box to specify the following values The model name The block name The block parameter 3 9 3 Creating Simulink Reports 3 10 e Parameter values Other initial values required for processing the vdp model Replace the existing text with the following MATLAB code The name of the model that will be changed expModel vdp The name of the block in the model that will be changed expBlock vdp Mu The name of the block parameter that will be changed expParam Gain The values that will be set during experimentation expValue 1 0 5 1 2 expValue can be either a vector or a cell array testMin 2 1 testMax 3 do not change code below line try open_system expMode1 end expOkValues cel1 0 2 Note When you change a field in the Properties pane on the right the field background changes color the default is a cream color indicating that there are unapplied changes to that field As soon as you perform operations on another component the Simulink Report Generator software applies the changes and the background color becomes white again Select the Evaluate this expression i
483. ssanseacesesseseassasscesseseaseee 1 Chapter 1 Section 1 4 PAGE1OF1 13worDs 3 b 100 6 Save the template Update the TOC in a Word Report After you generate a Word report with the DOM API open the report in Word and update the document Updating a document refers to the process of updating the parts of a Word document that Word itself generates such as a TOC page numbers and so on to reflect changes in the document content The DOM rptview function causes Word to update a report after opening it If you use rptview to display your document in Word you do not need to do anything else to generate a TOC in your report Create a Table of Contents However if you open a newly generated report yourself in Word without first using rptview perform these steps to get the TOC to appear 1 Inthe Word template select the TOC reference 2 Open the Reference pane and click the Update Table button 3 Inthe Update Table of Contents dialog box select Update entire table and click w3 HS 0 a Document2 Word FILE HOME INSERT DESIGN PAGE LAYO REFERENCE MAILINGS REVIEW VIEW DEVELOPER Acrobat Paul Kinn f 79 Add Text AB ita S E Manage Sources gt B i B 1 iE P Update Table ag EmStyle japa Table of Insert int eae Insert Mark Mark Contents Footnote Citation D Bibliography Caption Entry Citation Table of Contents Footnotes m Citations amp Bibliog
484. stom Specifies a custom title Property Columns Property columns Displays the object properties to include in the Summary Table in the generated report To add a property Select the appropriate property level in the text box In the context list under the text box select the property that you want to add and click Add To delete a property select the property name and press the Delete key Some entries in the list of available properties such as Depth are virtual properties that you cannot access using the get_ param command The properties 8 195 8 Components Alphabetical List 8 196 used for property value filtering in the block and System Loop components must be retrievable by the get_param Therefore you cannot configure your Summary Table to report on all blocks of Depth 2 Remove empty columns Removes empty columns from the Summary Table in the generated report Transpose table Changes the summary table rows into columns in the generated report putting the property names in the first column and the values in the other columns Object Rows Insert anchor for each row Inserts an anchor for each row in the summary table Report On Automatic list from context Reports on all blocks in the current context as set by the parent component Custom use block list Reports on a specified list of blocks Specify the full path of each block Loop Options Choose block sorting optio
485. stom template to format instances of Paragraph Text and other report components In the component properties dialog box specify the name of the style in the Style field Benefits of Using Templates When you use a template to generate a report report generation Is faster Report Conversion Templates Does not use Java memory to convert report XML content to HTML Word or PDF Converting report XML content without using a template can cause Java to run out of memory Also templates allow you to use your knowledge of Word and HTML document formatting to format reports Related Examples 2 Generate a Report Using a Template on page 10 4 Copy a Conversion Template on page 10 12 i Customize Microsoft Word Report Styles on page 10 18 Customize Microsoft Word Part Templates on page 10 21 Customize a Microsoft Word Title Page Template on page 10 30 Create a Custom HTML Template on page 10 36 More About Report Conversion Templates on page 10 2 Conversion Template Contents on page 10 5 10 3 10 Template Based Report Formatting Generate a Report Using a Template 10 4 In Report Explorer in the Outline pane select the report In the Report Options dialog box that appears in the Properties pane set the File format field to one of these options e HTML from template e PDF from template e Word from template Optionally from the list of templat
486. supports an object oriented approach to creating report programs With this approach you subclass the DOM Document and DocumentPart classes to create document and document part classes tailored to your report application You then create instances of these classes to generate a report Related Examples Simplify Filling in Forms on page 11 39 Simplify Filling in Forms Simplify Filling in Forms The object oriented approach allows you to exploit the DOM fill method to simplify form based reporting The fill method is intended to be used with instances of classes derived from mlreportgen dom Document or mlreportgen dom DocumentPart class It assumes that for each hole in a document or document part template the derived class defines a method having the following signature fillHolelId obj The HoleID part of the signature is the ID of a hole defined by the document or document part template The obj argument is an instance of the derived class For example supposed that a template defines a hole named Author Then the derived class would define a method name fillAuthor to fill the Author hole Assuming that the derived class defines methods for filling the holes the fill method moves from the first hole in the document or part to the last invoking the corresponding fillHoleId method to fill each hole The fill method eliminates the need for a report program to loop explicitly through the holes in a document or document part s tem
487. t you can specify the column width in the constructor For example myColSpec ColSpec 3in Also you can specify the column width using the Width property of a ColSpec object You specify other formatting properties of the ColSpec object such as BackgroundColor See Also Functions mlreportgen ppt Table entry mlreportgen ppt Table row Classes mlreportgen ppt ColSpec mlreportgen ppt ColWidth mlreportgen ppt Table mlreportgen ppt TableEntry mlreportgen ppt TablePlaceholder mlreportgen ppt TableRow Related Examples Add or Replace a Table on page 12 80 More About Presentation Formatting Approaches on page 12 20 12 93 12 Programmatic PowerPoint Presentation Creation Create and Format Pictures In this section Create a Picture on page 12 94 Format a Picture on page 12 95 Create a Picture To create a picture for a presentation use the mlreportgen ppt Picture constructor Specify the path to a picture file The picture file must use one of these formats you cannot use Svg format bmp e emf eps e gif gt jpeg jpg png tif lt tiff For example import mlreportgen ppt slides Presentation slides pictureSlide add slides Blank plane Picture which b747 jpg plane Width 5in plane Height 2in add pictureSlide plane close slides 12 94 Create and Format Pictures F
488. t Se Systems to Exclude 4 sldemo_auto_climatecontrol Entire Model a Pal AC Control Current and Below P Heater Control lane a Interior Dynamics Current and Above a Subsystem A Pa Subsystem1 2 Curent 4 Temperature Control Chart amp in_temp_range Include Options setpoint_calc Referenced Models Library Links MathWorks Library Links l Masked Subsystems Package path Package name sldemo_auto_climatecontrol Folder job69138_pass matlab test toolbox rptgen webview2 Select Folder If package exists increment name to prevent overwriting Package Type Zipped Unzipped Both zipped and unzipped Export Cancel Help In the Include Options select Masked Subsystems This enables users of the Web view to interact with masked blocks In Systems to Exclude select Temperature Control Chart Use the Folder edit box to specify climate_control_webview as the name for the zip file for the exported Web view files Select the If file exists increment name to prevent overwriting check box Selecting this option prevents overwriting the Web view files if you export multiple Web views from the same model Click Export Exporting the selected systems to a Web view creates several support files as well as an HTML file for displaying the systems In this example you change the defaults for the naming of the files Create and Use a Web View The Web view fil
489. t Template on page 12 26 More About Presentation Formatting Approaches on page 12 20 12 44 Define a Style Using Format Objects Define a Style Using Format Objects A format object is a MATLAB program entity that defines the properties and functions of a specific type of presentation format such as the weight for text bold or regular The PPT API provides a set of constructors for creating several format objects including e mlreportgen ppt Bold objects e mlreportgen ppt Italic objects e mlreportgen ppt Strike objects e mlreportgen ppt Underline objects e mlreportgen ppt FontColor objects Most PPT API presentation element objects such as Text objects include a Style property that you can set to a cell array of format objects that defines the appearance of the object For example to specify the default format for text in a paragraph is red bold text p Paragraph Model Highlights p Style FontColor red Bold true You can assign the same array of format objects to more than one PPT API presentation element object This allows you to create a programmatic equivalent of a template style sheet For example import mlreportgen ppt slides Presentation myParaPres add slides Title and Content add slides Title and Content caution FontColor red Bold true p1 Paragraph Hardware Requirements p1 Style caution p2 Paragraph Software Requirements p2 Style
490. t Title Page component copyright rgFigure Paragraph that contains an image generated by a snapshot or Image component to adjust the spacing of images relative to adjacent paragraphs rgFigureCaption The caption for Image component and snapshot components rgFigureTitle The Image component and snapshot components title rgFigureTitleNumber The Image component and snapshot components title number rgFigureTitlePrefix The Image component and snapshot components title prefix rgFigureTitleText The Image component and snapshot components title text rgLegalNotice Title Page component legal notice section rgListTitle The List component title rgListTitleNumber The List component title number rgListTitlePrefix The List component title prefix rgListTitleText The List component title text rgParagraph Paragraph component text rgParagraphTitle Paragraph component title Conversion Template Contents Style Report Explorer Components the Style Formats rgProgramListing Code generated by Text component with Show text as syntax highlighted MATLAB code option is selected e MATLAB Function Block component e Truth Table component rgPubDate Title page report creation date rgPubDatePrefix Title page report creation date prefix rgSect1Title Section title for first level section in a chapter rgSectiTitleNumber Number for Section title for first level section in a chapter rgSectiTitlePrefi
491. t check spelling or grammar a Centered G Line spacing At least 32 35 pt Space a ed Only inthis document New documents based on this template 5 Inthe Modify Style dialog box for rgTit1le click the down arrow for Automatic Select the blue color box and click OK 10 32 Customize a Microsoft Word Title Page Template Modify Style EJES Properties Name rgTitle Style type Paragraph Zs Style based on Normal tA Style for following paragraph T Normal Z Formatting Arial x E r u Automatic Sr a a i Automatic Theme Colors E HEE EEe Sample Text Sampl Sample Text Sampl i m i i i jen Sample Text Sampl Standard Colors Sample Text Sampl bo m E amp More Colors Font Default Arial 24 5 pt Bold Do not check spemmg or grammar tentereo a Line spacing At least 32 35 pt Space Before 18 65 pt Keep with next Don t hyphenate Style Show in the Styles gallery Based on Normal m V Add to the Styles gallery T Automatically update Only inthis document New documents based on this template 6 Inthe Manage Styles dialog box click OK 7 Save and close the template Assign the Template to a Report You can assign the customized template to the magic square rpt Report Explorer report 1 Inthe Report Explorer select Report Generator node 2 Inthe Report Explorer in the list of reports select
492. t name in a replace method with a Slide object For example in the default PPT API template the Title Slide layout has a content object called Title titleSlide add slides Title Slide replace titleSlide Title This Is My Title To replace presentation content you can use a find method with a Presentation or Slide object The find method searches for content objects whose Name property value matches the search value you specify Then you can use the index of the returned item that you want to update slides Presentation myPresentation titleSlide add slides Title Slide contents find slides Title replace contents 1 This Is My Title Add and Replace Text You can use these approaches to add or replace text for to a presentation Text Specification Technique Associated PPT API Objects Specify a string as part of Text creating these objects e Paragraph e ExternalLink 12 77 12 Programmatic PowerPoint Presentation Creation 12 78 Text Specification Technique Associated PPT API Objects Append text to a paragraph or external link Append text to these PPT API objects e Paragraph e TableEntry e ExternalLink Replace a Paragraph object ina presentation or slide Specify a string Paragraph object or a cell array of strings or Paragraph objects or a combination of both kinds of objects for the replace method with these objects e Presentation e S
493. t the document part template to modify 6 Edit the instance 7 Select and save the modified instance to the Quick Part Gallery using the same name as the original template 8 Delete the instance from the parent template file 9 Save the parent template file Create a Document Part Template Library in an HTML Template File HTML template packages created by copying the DOM API default HTML template package contains a document part template library file named docpart_templates html E default htmbd Ji res Ji images J scripts J stylesheets Folder Folder Folder Folder XML File mi HTML File HTML File The docpart_templates html file contains default document part templates whose names and content are indicated by HTML markup conventions defined by the DOM 11 35 11 Create a Report Program 11 36 API You can modify these templates and add your own templates by editing this file using the markup conventions You can also create a template part library file in an HTML template that you create from scratch In this case you must ensure that the file observes the HTML markup conventions that the DOM API uses to indicate the name and content of a document part template in a document part library To ensure this copy the default template part library file into the template you create from scratch Add a Template to an HTML Document Part Template Library File 1 Unzip the template package containing the part templ
494. t to the header or footer Because header and footer objects are a kind of document part object you can append any kind of content to a page header or footer that you can append to a document part for example images and tables as well as paragraphs You can use holes in the header and footers of your main template to control the positioning of content that you append to the headers and footers For example this script appends today s date to a hole named Date on the first template defined page header of the first section of a report This example assumes that the Word template MyReportTemplate has one section that defines a first page odd page and even page header and footer import mlreportgen dom d Document MyReport docx MyReportTemplate open d sect d CurrentDOCXSection for i 1 numel sect PageHeaders if strcmpi sect PageHeaders i PageType first firstPageHeader sect PageHeaders i while strcmp firstPageHeader CurrentHoleld end Create Page Footers and Headers switch firstPageHeader CurrentHoleld case Date append firstPageHeader date end moveTONextHole firstPageHeader end break end end close d rptview d OutputPath Generate Header and Footer Content That Varies from Page to Page You cannot programmatically append to headers and footers content that varies from page to page such as page numbers or running heads To create content that varies use Word fi
495. t type Include a list of objects in table Inserts a column containing the counted objects Show total count Displays a total of counted objects Insert Anything into Report Yes Table Class rptgen_sf csf count See Also State Loop 8 173 8 Components Alphabetical List 8 174 Stateflow Dialog Snapshot Insert snapshots of Stateflow editor dialog boxes Description This component reports on the current reported Stateflow dialog box object depending on its context If this component is the child of a State Loop for example the report includes information about the dialog box of the current State Display the current settings associated with an object or document the appearance of your custom mask dialog boxes Format Image file format Specifies the format for the snapshot image file The Automatic format uses BMP format for PDF files and PNG for other formats Show all tabs Automatically generates images for all the tabs for the dialog box If you clear this check box the Simulink Report Generator software creates an image of only the first tab Display Options Scaling Controls size of the image as displayed in a browser Making an image larger using this option does not affect the storage size of the image but the quality of the displayed image may decrease as you increase or decrease the size of the displayed image Generally to achieve the best and most predictable display results use the de
496. tainer and the contents The two nodes have the same name but different properties for example name changes are a property of the container node You can merge the container parameters and contents independently If you want to merge a subsystem and all its properties merge both the container and the contents nodes You cannot insert or delete parameters and not all parameters can be merged For example you cannot merge Simulink Identifier SID parameters Merge Simulink Models from the Comparison Report If you change filter settings after any merge operations you will lose your merge changes A dialog prompts you to confirm you want to throw away all merge operations and revert the report and models to their original state If you click Yes to continue the analysis runs again and you see a new report with the new filtering applied For information on merging between models with identical names see Comparing XML Files from Models with Identical Names on page 7 27 Merge MATLAB Function Block Code 1 4 5 To merge differences in MATLAB Function block code create a comparison report for the parent models Optional On the View tab turn off Highlight in Models Otherwise the parent models display each time you merge a difference in the MATLAB Function block code text comparison Next to the MATLAB Function block node in the XML comparison report click the Compare button A new text comparison report opens I
497. te a Report Program The MATLAB Report Generator includes a set of functions called the DOM Document Object Model API that allows you to generate Word HTML and PDF reports programmatically For example the following MATLAB script uses the API to generate and display an HTML report displaying today s date import mlreportgen dom report Document today append report Today is date close report rptview report OutputPath To get started learning about creating reports with the DOM API see Document Object Model on page 11 4 More About Document Object Model on page 11 4 T1 Create a Report Program Document Object Model 11 4 The DOM API creates a representation of a report document in your system s memory Such a representation is often referred to as a Document Object Model DOM Hence the DOM API s name The DOM API s document object model consists of a hierarchical set of data structures known as objects that represent the document and its contents At the top of the hierarchy is an object representing the document itself The document object maintains a list of objects called its children that represent its contents such as paragraphs images tables lists and so on Each child object in turn maintains a list of its contents For example a table lists its rows a row lists its table entries a table entry lists its contents and so on The DOM API contains funct
498. te two types of tables that differ in structure An informal table i e a table consists of rows that contain table entries A formal table contains a header a body and a footer section Each section contains rows that contain table entries Informal tables are useful for most of your reporting needs Use formal tables for tables whose headers or footers contain multiple rows For details about informal tables see e Create a Table from a Two Dimensional Array on page 11 59 e Create a Table Using the Table entry Function on page 11 59 e Create a Table from Scratch on page 11 60 Format a Table on page 11 61 For details about formal tables see e Create a Formal Table on page 11 66 Format a Formal Table on page 11 66 Create and Format Tables Create a Table from a Two Dimensional Array You can create a table by appending a two dimensional numeric array or a cell array containing built in MATLAB data strings and numbers and DOM objects Text Table Image etc to a document The append function converts the array to a Table object appends it to the document and returns the Table object which you can then format You can also create a Table object directly by including a two dimensional array in its constructor This example shows how to create a table from a numeric array and another table from a cell array of various object types The cell array contains a magic square which
499. ted by the report generation process into formatted documents such as HTML RTF or PDF Note The report generation process can only convert XML source files created by the latest version of the software Convert XML Documents Using the Report Explorer To open the Convert Properties pane 1 In the Report Explorer select Tools gt Convert source file The Convert Source File Properties pane appears All XML files in your current folder appear in the Options pane in the middle Convert XML Documents to Different File Formats 7 Report Explorer Convert my_test 4 Fl oj x File Edit View Tools Help JUSGeal4 gt oAx Ble SBItB Eve Convert Source File Report Generator my_test xml The Source File Converter transforms DocBook XML source files created by the Report m EAA Z sera turial ad Generator into a formatted document such as HTML RTF or PDF i v S Conversion Options Bae g Report Unnamed rpt Source file JH my_test xml Browse File format web HTML v Stylesheet Defaut HTML stylesheet Edit IV View report when done converting Convert file r File Preview gt Revert Help Z 2 Select your XML source file using one of the following options Click Browse in the Properties pane on the right to browse to the location of your XML source Double click a file name in the Options pane in the middle to autom
500. teflow data objects in the loop Report on Event objects Includes Stateflow event objects in the loop Report on Transition objects Includes Stateflow transition objects in the loop Report on Junction objects Includes Stateflow junction objects in the loop Report on Target objects Includes Stateflow target objects in the loop Report on Note objects Includes Stateflow note objects in the loop Loop Options Report depth Specifies the level at which to loop Local children only Default Reports only on children one level down All objects Reports on all Stateflow objects Skip autogenerated charts under truth tables Excludes autogenerated charts under truth tables from the report Remove objects which do not contain more information than a snapshot Excludes objects that contain only a snapshot Search Stateflow Reports on Stateflow charts with specified property name property value pairs Object Loop Section Options Create section for each object in loop Inserts a section in the generated report for each object found in the loop Display the object type in the section title Automatically inserts the object type into the section title in the generated report Create link anchor for each object in loop Creates a hyperlink to the Stateflow object in the generated report Insert Anything into Report Yes inserts a section if you select the Create sec
501. tem expMode1 end Add Report Content with Components Tip Select the Eval component in the Outline pane on the left to look at this code again To see if the vdp model was successfully opened test the result of the open_system command using a Logical If component 1 2 3 In the Outline pane on the left select the Title Page component In the Library pane in the middle under the Logical and Flow Control category select Logical If This component checks to see if a given condition is true or false in this case if the model opened successfully Logical and Flow Control For Loop Logical Else Logical Elseif Logical If Logical Then While Loop SS GS GS BS BS In the Properties pane on the right click the icon next to Add component to current report The Logical If component appears as if in the Outline pane BF Report Generator El 3 Report simulink_tutorial rpt W Eval The name of the model that wi 8 Title Page Dynamic Simulink Report D if true These components are child components of the report and siblings of one another Components can have parent child and sibling relationships This component can have child components Add Logical Then and Logical Else Components on page 3 16 explains how to add two child components to the if component In the Properties pane on the right in the Test expression text box replace the default text true with the followi
502. template 2 Unzip the template using the unzipTemplate command 3 Ina text or HTML editor open the template main document typically named root html 4 Inthe root document in the report location you want the TOC to appear insert the following HTML markup lt div id toc gt lt div gt 5 Save the main document 6 Zip the template using the unzipTemplate command 7 Set the outline levels of the section heads that you want to appear in the table of contents See Set Outline Levels of Section Heads on page 11 81 8 Use the template to generate the report Next Insert a Placeholder Programmatically Using a Custom Element If you use the DOM default HTML template or a template based on the default template you can create a placeholder programmatically in your report For example import mlreportgen dom d Document MyReport html append d My Report Create a Table of Contents toc CustomElement div toc CustomAttributes CustomAttribute id toc append toc CustomText Workaround for browser bug append d toc append d Heading 1 Chapter 1 append d Heading 2 Section 1 close d rptview d OutputPath Insert a Placeholder Programmatically Using a Document Part The document part template library of the DOM default template contains a document part for creating a TOC placeholder If you use this template or a template based on it you can use the document part to i
503. ter curent model 88 Paragraph This report demonstra i BS ystem Snapshot 1 988 for explteration 1 1 lengthfexpValue i Eval Evaluate this string in the bas 3 On the Properties pane on the right c Clear the Insert MATLAB expression in report and Display command window output in report check boxes Enter the following text in the Expression to evaluate in the base workspace text box Evaluate this string in the base workspace if iscell expValue Iteration_Value expValue expIteration else Iteration_Value num2str expValue expIteration end The Iteration_Value variable represents the designated array element Clear the Evaluate expression if there is an error check box 4 Save the report setup file Create a Section for Each Iteration Note This section builds on the previous tasks described in the step by step example summarized in Create a Simulink Report Generator Report on page 3 2 3 29 3 Creating Simulink Reports To see the completed report setup file open Simulink Dynamic Report The report is for the vdp model Create a separate section for each iteration of the loop that includes the data using the Chapter Subsection component 1 In the Outline pane on the left under the for component select the Eval component 2 Inthe Library pane in the middle under the Formatting category double click the Chapter Subsection component to add it as a sibling T
504. terTitlePrefix prefix rgChapterTitleNumber number rgChapterTitle tit rgChapterContent q rgChapterContent chapter content Tip To display Word markup for the part template on the Word ribbon in the Developer tab click Design Mode Write down the name of the part template you are customizing because you need to enter that name later in this procedure In the rgChapter part template delete the rgChapterTitlePrefix hole Select the hole markup and click the Delete key In the template select all of the contents of the part template Right click and select Properties In the Content Control Properties dialog box in the Title and Tag fields enter the name of the template part you are customizing rgChapter Click OK In the template select all of the contents of the part template In the Insert tab click the Quick Parts button Click Save Selection to Quick Part Gallery In the Create New Building Block dialog box set Name to the part template name for example rgChapter and the Category to mlreportgen Click OK In the template select all of the contents of the part template and click the Delete button Save and close the template 10 27 10 Template Based Report Formatting 10 28 Add an Inline Hole The only kind of holes that you can add to a part template are the holes that the Report Explorer supports for that part template For example for the rgChapter part template the
505. ters as set by the specified printframe to size your image If you choose this option all other options except for Image file format become inactive Properties Include callouts to describe visible objects Displays descriptive callouts for visible objects Insert anchors for transitions and junctions Inserts anchors for transitions and junctions into the report e None e Redundant children only All Run only if Stateflow object has at least the following number of children Specifies the minimum number of children that the current Stateflow object must have to include in the report This option is inactive unless the selected object in the parent Stateflow Filter component is a graphical object Tip This option allows you to exclude certain images to decrease the size of the report for large models Display Options Sealing e Use image size Uses the image size that you specify in the snapshot option Zoomand Fixed size Allows you to specify the size of the image Size Specifies a size in inches for your image The default is 7 by 9 8 192 Stateflow Snapshot Max size Specifies the maximum size of the snapshot in the format w h width height This field is active only if you choose Zoom from the Scaling selection list Units Specifies the units for the size of the snapshot This field is active only if you choose Zoom or Fixed size in the Image size list box Alignment Only reports in
506. tgen dom ImageMap object to associate the link areas with the image Append the ImageArea objects to the ImageMap object For example you can create a link from a plot image to documentation about plotting import mlreportgen dom d Document imageArea html x 0 pi 100 2 pi y sin x plot x y annotation textbox 0 2 0 4 0 1 0 1 String Help for plot function saveas gcf plot_img png ploti Image plot_img png append d plot1 areal ImageArea http www mathworks com help matlab ref plot html searchHighlight plot plot function help 240 450 463 492 map ImageMap plot1 Map map append map areat Create Image Maps close d rptview d OutputPath See Also Classes mlreportgen dom Image mlreportgen dom ImageArea mlreportgen dom ImageMap Functions Related Examples 7 Add Content to a Report on page 11 11 More About Report Formatting Approaches on page 11 20 11 85 T1 Create a Report Program Automatically Number Document Content 11 86 In this section Automatically Number Content Programmatically on page 11 86 Automatically Number Content Using Part Templates on page 11 88 You can automatically number document content such as chapter section table and figure headings Append automatic numbering objects to the document where you want numbers to appear Each automatic numb
507. that uses subforms open the Functional Report example Tip The DOM API allows you to store the templates for document parts in the main template for a report This allows you to use a single template file to supply all the templates required for a report For details see Create Document Part Template Libraries on page 11 33 See Also Functions mlreportgen dom Document moveToNextHole Classes mlreportgen dom DocumentPart Related Examples 2 Fill the Blanks in a Report Form on page 11 29 Create a Microsoft Word Template on page 11 111 Add Holes in a Microsoft Word Template on page 11 112 Create an HTML Template on page 11 122 7 Add Holes in an HTML Template on page 11 124 11 31 11 Create a Report Program More About Form Based Reporting on page 11 28 11 32 Create Document Part Template Libraries Create Document Part Template Libraries In this section Create a Document Part Template Library in a Microsoft Word Template File on page 11 33 Create a Document Part Template Library in an HTML Template File on page 11 35 A document part template library is a set of document part templates stored by name in another template You can create a document part based on a template stored in a library by specifying the name of the template in the document part constructor Document part template libraries allow you to store all the templates f
508. the Simulink Report Generator using the Report Explorer 1 Inthe System Design Description dialog box click the Customize Content button to open the Report Explorer Report Explorer Report SDD_custom4 rpt File Edit View Tools Help usa saax 9S Name 4 Z Report Generator 4 F Report SDD_custom rpt gt Formatting n ne A Eval sdd_custom_data struct Array Based Table 4E Title Page vdp Chapter Subsection 4 P Chapter Model Version Image 4 4 ModelLoop lt sdd_custon Link Paragraph Version List a paragraph Last modifie Paragraph A paragraph Checksum Text 4 chapter Root System Title Page 4 4H ModelLoop lt sdd_custon Formatting Tables A amp P systemLoop systems fr Table 4 tH Chapter Subsystems Table Body 4 P ModelLoop lt sdd_custon Table Column Spec systemLoop Reported Table Entry 4 Chapter system Design Variab 4 P ModelLoop lt sdd_custon 4H Section 1 Design Variat Table Footer Table Header Cisse tae ieee eee eel eee eee eel section 1 Design Variat Table Row 4 4 chapter system Model Config Handle Graphics WB Model Configuration Set Axes Loop 4 Chapter Glossary Axes Snapshot 4H paragraph A subsystem tre Figure Loop Figure Snapshot Graphics Object Loop Handle Graphics Linking Anch Handle Graphics Name Handle Graphics Parameter Handle Graphics Property Ta Handle Graphics Summary Ta
509. the printable report Export Results to the Workspace To export the XML comparison results to the MATLAB base workspace 1 On the Comparison tab in the Comparison section select Save As gt Save to Workspace The Input Variable Name dialog box appears 2 Specify a name for the export object in the dialog and click OK This action exports the results of the XML comparison to an xmlcomp Edits object in the workspace The xmlcomp Edits object contains information about the XML comparison including file names filters applied and hierarchical nodes that differ between the two XML files To create an xmlcomp Edits object at the command line without opening the Comparison Tool enter Edits slxmlcomp compare modelname_A modelname_B Export Print and Save XML Comparison Results Property of xmlcomp Edits Description Filters Array of filter structure arrays Each structure has two fields Name and Value LeftFileName File name of left model exported to XML LeftRoot xmlcomp Node object that references the root of the left tree RightFileName File name of right model exported to XML RightRoot xmlcomp Node object that references the root of the right tree TimeSaved Time when results exported to the workspace Version MathWorks release specific version number of xmlcomp Edits object Property of xmlcomp Node Description Children Array of xmlcomp Node references to c
510. the property that you want to add and click Add To delete a property select the property name and click Delete lt SplitDialogParameters gt is a unique property for Simulink Summary Tables where the object type is Block This property generates multiple summary tables organized by block type Each Summary Table group contains the dialog box parameters for that block Some entries in the list of available properties such as Depth are virtual properties that you cannot access using the get_ param command The properties used for property value filtering in the block and System Loop components must be retrievable by the get_param Therefore you cannot configure your Summary Table to report on all blocks of Depth 2 You can create multiple values for a property in a Simulink Summary Table For example to report on blocks of type Inport Outport and Constant 1 Check the Search for Simulink property name property value pairs box 2 Make sure that you set Property Name to BlockType 3 Type the following text into the Property Value field lt Inport Outport Constant gt Remove empty columns Removes empty columns from the table Transpose table Changes the summary table rows into columns in the generated report putting the property names in the first column and the values in the other columns Object Rows Insert anchor for each row Inserts an anchor for each row in the summary table Report On e Auto
511. the report automatically When report generation generation finishes the viewer associated with the report output format displays the report Note On Linux and Macintosh platforms the report output displays in Apache OpenOffice which must be installed in Applications OpenOffice app To view the report manually browse to the location specified in the Report File Location section in the Properties pane on the right and open the file Auto save before generation Compile model to report on compiled information Automatically save the report setup file before you generate a report Ensure that a report reflects compiled values By default the Simulink Report Generator reports uncompiled values of Simulink parameters The uncompiled values of some parameters such as signal data types can differ from the compiled values used during simulation This option causes the report generator to compile a model before reporting on model parameters After generating the report the report generator returns the model to its uncompiled state Note When you select this option whenever report generation requires simulating the model for example the report includes a Model Simulation component the report generator uncompiles the model and then recompiles the model if necessary to report on model Select Report Generation Options Option Purpose contents If a report requires multiple compilations th
512. the report includes the properties of the object You can filter out properties to streamline the report Use a Simulink Workspace Variable Loop component as a parent for a Simulink Workspace Variable component In the Report Options dialog box select Compile model to report on compiled information Simulink Workspace Variable A Name Report Options 4 Report Generator Z Fixed Point Designer Report File Location a a 2 Report wsvar rpt me ps Title Page lt No Title gt Fixed Point Block Loop H Documents MATLAB wsvar html a ES Chapter Section Title E Fixed Point Logging Options l 4 8 Model Loop current model Fixed Point Property Table S Directory Same as setup fie z 4 lt Simulink Workspace Variable Loop Simul Fixed Point Summary Table Fiename Same as setup fle z index Simulink Workspace Variable Formatting W Aray Based Table C If report already exists increment to prevent overwriting 2 Chapter Subsection A ge type Image Zipped Unzipped Link B List Report Output Type and Style Sheets B Paragraph File format web HTML v Default HTML stylest B Text Tite Page Generation Options Formatting Tables v View report after generation Table Auto save before generation a ide Boy Compile model to report on compiled information Table Column Spec X Table Entry Ev CompileModel
513. the text box on the left 2 In the text box on the right select the property that you want to add and click Add To delete a property select the property name and click Delete Requirements Summary Table lt SplitDialogParameters gt is a unique property that you can specify for Requirements Summary Tables where the object type is Block This property generates multiple summary tables grouped by block type Each Summary Table group contains the dialog box parameters for that block Some entries in the list of available properties such as Depth are virtual properties that you cannot access using the get_ param command The properties used for property value filtering in the block and System Loop components must be retrievable by the get_param Therefore you cannot configure your Requirements Summary Table to report on all blocks of Depth 2 Remove empty columns Removes empty columns from the table Transpose table Changes the summary table rows into columns in the generated report putting the property names in the first column and the values in the other columns Object Rows Insert anchor for each row Inserts an anchor for each row in the Requirements Summary Table Report On e Automatic list from context Reports on all blocks in the current context The parent of this component determines its context Custom use block list Reports on a list of blocks that you specify and enters the block names in
514. ther instance of a Title and Content slide which formats the text as a bulleted list You can use a nested cell array to specify levels for bullets textSlide add slides Title and Content titleText2 Paragraph What You Can Do with func Text histogram 12 67 12 Programmatic PowerPoint Presentation Creation 12 68 func Font Courier New append titleText2 func contents find textSlide Title replace contents 1 titleText2 contents find textSlide Content replace contents 1 Create histogram plot of x Specify Number of bins Edges of the bins Plot into a specified axes Add a Slide with a Table You can use several approaches to add a table to a slide This example shows how to build a table row by row Create a Table object Create a TableRow object for each row of the table Create TableEntry objects and append them to table rows Add the table to a slide tableSlide add slides Title and Content contents find tableSlide Title titleText3 Paragraph Parameters replace contents 1 titleText3 j paramTable Table colSpecs 2 ColSpec 6in colSpecs 1 ColSpec 3in paramTable ColSpecs colSpecs tri TableRow tri Style Bold true triteiText Paragraph Value trite2Text Paragraph Description trite1 TableEntry trite2 TableEntry append trite1 triteiText append trite2 tr
515. tion Properties List Title Automatic Generates a list or table title automatically e Custom Enables you to enter a title Include block type information Include each block s BLlockType property in the list or table Look under nonvirtual subsystems The default is Automatic On for models Off for systems Set it to On or Off Insert Anything into Report Yes List Class rptgen_sl csl blk _sort_list 8 5 8 Components Alphabetical List See Also Block Loop 8 6 Block Loop Block Loop Run child components for each block in the current system model or signal Description This component runs its child components for each block contained in the current system model or signal For conditional processing based of blocks you can use the RptgenSL getReportedBlock function For more information see Loop Context Functions on page 6 24 Report On This pane describes the type of object on which this component operates Automatic list from context Report on all blocks in the current context The parent component of the Block Loop determines its context If this component does not have the Model Loop System Loop Signal Loop or Block Loop asits parent selecting this option causes this component to report on all blocks in all models e Model Loop Reports on all blocks in the current model e System Loop Reports on all blocks in the current system e Signal Loop Reports o
516. tion select one of these options e PDF from template e HTML from template e Word from template If you use a template then from the list of templates you can specify a template other than the default template Each output format that does not use a template has a default stylesheet associated with it Specify the stylesheet in the text box next to the File format text box For more information about using templates for report generation see Generate a Report Using a Template File Format Using Report Explorer Stylesheets If you do not use a template then you can specify in the Stylesheet field you can specify a stylesheet Viewer Format Description Stylesheets Adobe Acrobat Adobe Acrobat Produce a PDF that PDF see PDF Reader PDF you can view using Stylesheets Adobe Acrobat Reader software See PDF Image Formats on page 4 7 Word processor Word Document Produce output Print see RTF DSSSL RTF or Rich that is compatible Print and Word Text Format with most word Stylesheets processing packages including Microsoft Word software See RTF Display of Hidden Content on page 4 7 4 6 Select Report Generation Options Viewer Format Description Stylesheets DocBook DocBook no Produce a report in N A transform DocBook format Tip To create and use customized styles see Create a New Stylesheet
517. tion for each object in loop option Class rptgen_sf csf_obj_ loop See Also Stateflow Filter Stateflow Hierarchy Stateflow Hierarchy Loop Simulink Function System Loop 8 85 8 Components Alphabetical List Recursive Functions Create table of recursive functions Description This component creates a table containing the recursive functions in your source code For each recursive function the table lists its immediate caller 8 86 Report Customization Filtering Report Customization Filtering Create filters that apply to your Polyspace reports Description This component allows you to filter unwanted information from existing Polyspace report templates To apply global filters place this component immediately below the node representing the report name Properties Code Metrics Filters The properties in table below apply to the inclusion of code metrics in your report Property Include Project Metrics Purpose Choose whether to include metrics about your Polyspace project User Action Select the check box to include project metrics Project metrics to include Specify project metrics to include or exclude from report Enter a regular MATLAB expression Include File Metrics Choose whether to include per file metrics in report Select the check box to include per file metrics File Metrics gt Files to include File metrics to include Specify
518. title ii Type Success in the text box iii Enter the following text in the Paragraph text text box The conditioned signal has a maximum value of lt max dynamicX 2 gt which lies in the desired range of greater than lt testMin gt and less than lt testMax gt 12 To save the success values to insert into a table at the end of the iterations use an Evaluate MATLAB Expression component a Inthe Outline pane on the left select the Paragraph component b Inthe Library pane in the middle under the MATLAB category double click Evaluate MATLAB Expression An unintended result occurs the new component is a child of the Paragraph component QB if max dynamicx 2 gt testMin amp max dynamicX 2 8 Paragraph The conditioned signa i H Eval Evaluate this string in the bas m c To make the new component a sibling of the Paragraph component in the Outline pane on the left select the Eval component and then Click the left arrow on the toolbar The Eval component becomes a sibling of the Paragraph component EJ 48Aif max dynamicX 2 gt testMin amp maxfdynamicx 2 ega Paragraph The conditioned signa BE E val E valuate this string in the bas 13 In the Properties pane on the right for the Eval component 3 42 Add Report Content with Components a Clear the Insert MATLAB expression in report and Display command window output in report check boxes b
519. tivates the Starting system s option If you do not enter a model name in the Model name option then select either Root model or Current to specify where to start the loop If you specify a model name in the Model name option then the Starting system s option provides an edit box in which you can enter The full path of a subsystem or subsystems top to start the loop in the model root system e current to start the loop in the currently selected system Section Options Create section for each object in loop Inserts a section in the generated report for each object found in the loop 8 71 8 Components Alphabetical List 8 72 Display the object type in the section title Inserts the object type automatically into the section title in the generated report Create link anchor for each object in loop Creates a hyperlink to the object in the generated report Examples Generating Reports on Specified Systems and their Subsystems This example shows how to loop over a specified system and its subsystems in the sample model sldemo_auto_climate_elec which the Simulink software includes 1 o Optional To open the sldemo_auto_ climate elec model at the MATLAB command prompt enter the following command sldemo_auto_climate_elec Explore the model to familiarize yourself with its subsystems Open the Report Explorer Create a report setup file by clicking File gt New Save the report setup file by c
520. tle and rgChapterContent holes Do not add multiple instances of the same kind of hole in a part template 10 21 10 Template Based Report Formatting 10 22 Display the Developer Ribbon in Word To work with holes in a Word template use the Word Developer ribbon If the Developer tab is not showing in your Word ribbon add it to the ribbon 1 In Word select File gt Options 2 Inthe Word Options dialog box select Customize Ribbon 3 Inthe Customize the Ribbon list select the Developer check box and click OK Tip If you do not see Developer check box in the list set Customize the Ribbon to Main Tabs Customize a Word Conversion Part Template To customize a report element such as a title page replace the appropriate default part template with a customized copy of the part template For another example illustrating how to create a custom Word part template see Customize Title Page Content and Layout on page 10 34 Note If you do not have a custom Word conversion template see Copy a Conversion Template on page 10 12 In the Report Explorer select Tools gt Edit Document Conversion Template In the list of templates in the middle pane select a custom template In the Properties pane click Open template hOoOnND At the beginning of the template position the cursor in the first paragraph and click the Quick Parts button 5 m In the Insert tab select the Quick Parts button 6
521. tle pages chapters and titles for sections and tables Part templates contain fill in the blanks holes for generated content e Headers and footers Default Styles The default conversion template includes styles that the Report Explorer uses to format components during report generation Most styles begin with rg for example rgTitle Styles for syntax highlighting MATLAB code begin with MWSG for example MWSHKeywords The default style names and formatting are the same for the Word and HTML templates to the extent applicable For example page break formatting applies when you use a Word template but not an HTML template You can modify the built in styles but do not delete them In addition you can define your own styles and use them in components that allow you to specify a style such as the Paragraph component Style Report Explorer Components the Style Formats MWSHComment MATLAB code comment MWSHKeywords MATLAB code keywords MWSHStrings MATLAB code strings rgAbstract Title Page component abstract rgAbstractTitle Title Page component abstract section rgAuthor Title Page component front page author rgAuthorVerso Title Page component back page author 10 5 10 Template Based Report Formatting Style Report Explorer Components the Style Formats rgBody Text component rgChapter Chapter component rgChapterTitle Chapter component title rgCopyrigh
522. to include Simulink functions within a given model in the report you can include this component as the child of a Stateflow Object Loop or Object Loop component each of which in turn is usually a child of a Chart Loop component Report On Include subsystems in nested Simulink functions Specifies whether to include subsystems in nested Simulink functions By default this option is enabled Loop Options Sort Systems Specifies how to sort systems e Alphabetically by system name default Sorts systems alphabetically by name By number of blocks in system Sorts systems by number of blocks The list shows systems by decreasing number of blocks that is the system with the largest number of blocks appears first in the list By system depth Sorts systems by their depth in the model By traversal order Sorts systems in traversal order Search for Reports only on Subsystem blocks with the specified property name property value pairs To enable searching click the check box In the first row of the property name and property value table click inside the edit box delete the existing text and type the property name and value For information about subsystem property names and values in Block Specific Parameters see the Ports amp Subsystems Library Block Parameters section Simulink Function System Loop Section Options Create section for each object in loop Inserts a section in the generated rep
523. trol tools The following example describes how to configure TortoiseSVN to use the Simulink Report Generator XML comparison You can register the XML comparison function with TortoiseSVN as an extension specific diff program to use for model files When you perform a TortoiseSVN diff on a model file TortoiseSVN uses the XML comparison to generate a report This workflow describes a typical usage of Subversion on a Windows PC 1 Configure TortoiseSVN to use the fileComparisonDriver function for model files 2 When you perform a TortoiseSVN diff on a model file the fileComparisonDriver function invokes the visdiff function to generate an XML comparison report Optionally you can also configure TortoiseSVN to use the same function to call the Comparison Tool for mat files and for Simulink manifest files smf files Compare XML from Models Managed with Subversion Configure TortoiseSVN This example is compatible with Release 2008b onwards and was tested with Subversion 1 7 7 on Windows 7 Enterprise Configure TortoiseSVN to use the XML comparison tool for model files as follows 1 2 Right click a file in Windows Explorer and select TortoiseSVN gt Settings In the TortoiseSVN Settings dialog box click Diff Viewer under External Programs in the tree then click the Advanced button In the Advanced Diff settings dialog box add an entry to specify what to do with model files by clicking Add In the Add extension speci
524. ts on page 3 16 Error If Model Cannot Be Opened on page 3 18 Create the Body of the Report on page 3 21 Process with a Model Loop Component on page 3 22 Add a Paragraph for Each Model on page 3 24 Insert a Snapshot of the Model on page 3 25 Add a Loop for Processing the Model on page 3 26 Block Parameter Value from a MATLAB Expression on page 3 28 Create a Section for Each Iteration on page 3 29 Insert the Block Value on page 3 31 Set a Parameter Value on page 3 32 Check Value Using a Logical If Component on page 3 34 Simulate the Model Using a Model Simulation Component on page 3 37 Create a Post Test Analysis Section on page 3 43 Report Components Report components specify what information to include in the report Components are self contained modular MATLAB objects that control the report generation process and insert elements such as tables lists and figures into a report setup file Use components to customize the appearance and output of reports For more information see Report Components on page 1 11 The following figure shows a sample page from the report you create in this example and which components you use to produce this output 3 5 3 Creating Simulink Reports Note Do not deactivate report components that you add to the report setup file Chapter Subsection component Paragraph component Syst
525. ts a linking anchor for each signal This property designates the list item as the location to which other links for that signal point For more information see the Simulink Linking Anchor or Link component reference pages Do not use this option if you have already specified an anchor location for the signal with an Object Linking Anchor component Title Inserts a title before each list This attribute supports the lt varname gt notation For more information see lt VariableName gt Notation on the Text component reference page in the MATLAB Report Generator documentation Insert Anything into Report Yes List Class rptgen_sl csl blk bus See Also Block Loop Model Loop Signal Loop Simulink Linking Anchor System Loop 8 13 8 Components Alphabetical List Call Hierarchy Create table showing call graph in source code Description This component creates a table showing the call hierarchy in your source code For each function call in your source code the table displays the following information Level of call hierarchy where the function is called Each level is denoted by If a function call appears in the table as gt file_name function_name the function call occurs at the third level of the hierarchy Beginning from main or an entry point there are three function calls leading to the current call File containing the function call In addition the line and column is also d
526. ty value pairs into separate cells For the property name and property value to appear in adjacent horizontal cells in the table select the Split property value cells check box In this case the table is in split mode so there only one property name property value pair can exist in a cell If there is more than one name property pair in a cell only the first pair appears in the report The report ignores all subsequent pairs For the property name and property value to appear together in one cell clear the Split property value cells check box That option specifies nonsplit mode Nonsplit mode supports more than one property name property value pair and text 8 39 8 Components Alphabetical List 8 40 Before switching from nonsplit mode to split mode make sure that there is only one property name property value pair per table cell If you have more than one property name property value pair or text in one cell only the first value pair appears in the report Subsequent pairs and text are omitted Display outer border Display the outer border of the table in the generated report Table Cells Select table properties to modify The selection in this pane affects the available fields in the Cell Properties pane Cell Properties Contents Modify the contents of the table cell selected in the Table Cells pane Show as Specifies the format for the contents of the table cell PROPERTY Value e Value e Property Value
527. u can create text by appending a string to a document paragraph table entry or list item The DOM append function converts the string to a Text object appends it and returns the Text object Use the Text object to format the text You can also create a text object directly and append it to a document This example Creates the Text object t1 by appending the string Hello to the document e Uses a Text constructor to create a Text object and append the text World to the document import mlreportgen dom doc Document mydoc html ti append doc Hello append doc Text World close doc rptview mydoc html Create Special Characters You can define special characters such as the British pound symbol to include in a report by creating an mlreportgen dom CharEntity object Specify a name of a character entity listed at http en wikipedia org wiki List_of_XML_and_HTML_character_entity_references For example import mlreportgen dom d Document test html 11 41 T1 Create a Report Program 11 42 p Paragraph CharEntity pound append d p append p 3 close d rptview test html Append HTML or XML Markup To append HTML markup to an HTML document or Microsoft Word XML markup to a Word document use anmlreportgen dom RawText object This is useful for creating HTML or Word elements that the DOM API does not support directly such as the HTML div element This exa
528. u can only merge from left to right If you want to merge into the other file use Swap Sides before you start merging Swap Sides reverts any merges already made and creates a new comparison report for the original files You can merge from the left model to the right model using the XML text files You can click Undo to revert all merge operations You can merge modified added or deleted nodes in the report as follows 1 Select a report item you want to merge 2 On the Comparison tab in the Merge section click Merge Node to merge the selected node Merge is disabled when you cannot merge the selected node For example you cannot merge the top level model nodes data nodes or nodes within configuration settings Tip Merge blocks before lines and merge states and junctions before merging transitions See Merging Tips on page 7 22 3 View the results in the report and the models The report merges the selected node from the left side of the report to the right Merged report nodes have gray row highlighting and a green merge arrow if the node has an icon e g TR transmission _ 7 21 7 Compare Simulink Model XML Files 7 22 7 The merge copies the change a modified added or deleted item from the left model to the right model If the node exists only in the left tree then the merge inserts it into the right tree The software attempts to connect all lines to blocks after the merge To merge individ
529. ual parameters right click an item in the Parameters pane and select Merge Left to Right Alternatively click the Merge Parameter button in the Merge section of the toolstrip You cannot insert or delete parameters and not all parameters can be merged If you merge all possible parameters for a node then the report marks that node as merged e g TRiransmission qf you partially merge some parameters of a node the report marks the node as partially merged with a green merge arrow icon and no gray row highlighting Optional To revert all merge operations on the Comparison tab in the Merge section click Undo All A dialog prompts you to confirm you want to throw away all merge operations and revert the report and models to their original state Inspect your merge changes in the Simulink Editor If necessary connect any lines that the software did not connect automatically The comparison report does not update to show any changes you make in the Editor Save the model in the Editor or in the comparison report Merging Tips You must merge blocks before lines in the Simulink part of the report and in the Stateflow section you must merge states and junctions before merging transitions or the report cannot make the connections For an example showing how to merge a change involving multiple nodes see slxml_sfcar If you want to merge subsystems be aware that in XML text files subsystems are represented by two nodes the con
530. uirements System Loop Requirements Block Loop Requirements Documents Table Requirements Signal Loop Requirements Summary Table Requirements Table System Loop 8 103 8 Components Alphabetical List 8 104 Requirements Table Requirements links for current context Description This component creates a table that contains information from the Simulink Verification and Validation software Objects can have multiple requirements Each requirement is a row in the table Table Options Show requirements for current Specifies the object type to display e Simulink object e Stateflow object Table title Specifies a title for the table e No title Object name Default e Custom Table Columns Description Includes the object description in the table e Document name Includes the report name in the table Locations within document Includes the locations of the object within the document in the table Requirement keyword Includes the requirement keyword for the object in the table Insert Anything into Report Yes Table Requirements Table Class RptgenRMI CReqTable See Also Missing Requirements Block Loop Missing Requirements System Loop Requirements Block Loop Requirements Documents Table Requirements Signal Loop Requirements Summary Table Requirements System Loop Stateflow Automatic Table Stateflow Name 8 105 8 Components Alphabetical List 8 106 Run time Che
531. ulink Object and Parameter Object type Specifies the Simulink object type to include in the report e System e Model e Block e Signal e Annotation System parameter name Specifies a Simulink parameter name to include in the generated report Ifyou select Model for Object type this option appears as Model parameter name Ifyou select Block for Object type this option appears as Block parameter name If you select Signal for Object type this option appears as Signal parameter name Display Options Title Choose a title to display in the generated report e Automatic Uses the parameter name as the title Simulink Property e Custom Specifies a custom title e None Uses no title Size limit Limits the width of the display in the generated report Units are in pixels The size limit for a given table is equal to the hypotenuse of the table width and height sqrt w 2 h 2 The size limit for text is the number of characters squared If you exceed the size limit the variable appears in condensed form Setting a size limit of zero always causes the variable to display regardless of its size Display as Specifies a display style e Auto table paragraph Displays as a table or paragraph based on the information e Table Displays as a table e Paragraph Displays as a text paragraph Inline text Displays as inline which fits in line with the surrounding text Ignore if value is empty If th
532. ument the object to which the content is to be appended For example the append method in the following script throws an error This code throws an error image Image membrane png append image Paragraph Hello World This is because you cannot add a paragraph to an image The reference documentation for classes lists the types of objects that you can append to instances of the classes To get a complete list of DOM API classes and functions in the MATLAB Report Generator documentation open the Functions pane To see the documentation reference page for an object search in documentation or in MATLAB use a doc command such as this doc mlreportgen dom Paragraph As shown in the preceding examples the append method depending on the target object type allows you to append strings doubles arrays and other basic MATLAB data types without first converting the data to DOM objects The function converts the appended data to a DOM object before appending it to the target object For example the following script appends a two dimensional array of strings to a document as a table d Document MyDoc tableArray a b c d append d tableArray Many constructors also allow you to specify basic MATLAB data types as the initial content of the object when you construct the object This example is equivalent to the preceding example d Document MyDoc tableArray a b c d 11 11 11 Create a Repo
533. un time Checks Details Ordered by Review Information Create table with Polyspace Code Prover checks ordered by review information Description This component creates tables displaying the Polyspace Code Prover checks in your code All checks with same combination of Classification and Status appear in the same table 8 108 Run time Checks Summary Ordered by File Run time Checks Summary Ordered by File Create table with Polyspace Code Prover checks ordered by file Description This component creates a table displaying the number of Polyspace Code Prover checks per file in your code Properties Sort the data Use this option to sort the rows in the table alphabetically by filename or by percentage of unproven code Display as Use this option to display the number of checks in a table or in bar charts Display ratio of checks in a file Select this option to display the number of checks of a certain color as a ratio of total number of checks in the file Include checks from Polyspace standard library stub functions Select this option to include the checks from Polyspace standard library stub functions in your display 8 109 8 Components Alphabetical List 8 110 Scope Snapshot Insert images of scopes and XY graphs Description This component inserts images of scopes and XY graphs Examples of blocks for which this component inserts snapshots include Scope and Floating Scope blocks and the
534. untsLink fewerbins Paragraph fewerbinsLink ExternalLink http www mathworks com help matlab ref fewerbins html fewerbins append fewerbins fewerbinsLink replace slides FuncList histCounts fewerbins Replace a Table To create a table create a Table object In the Table constructor you can specify a cell array of values for the table cells To get bold text for the top row include Paragraph objects as the first three elements of the cell array Then replace the table long Paragraph Long Name long Bold true short Paragraph Short Name short Bold true rgb Paragraph RGB triplet rgb Bold true Update Presentation Content Programmatically table2 Table long short rgb yellow y 1 1 0 green g 1 01 contents find slides ParamTable replace slides ParamTable table2 Insert a New Slide You can use the PPT API to insert a new slide in an existing presentation and you can specify the numerical location of the slide For example this code makes a new slide the fifth slide in a presentation newSlide add slides Title and Content 5 However to have a slide precede a specific slide even if later you add or remove other slides you can specify a reference slide To use this approach when updating an existing PowerPoint presentation use the PPT API to name the reference slide Use the name of the reference slide when you insert a new slid
535. ups of changes in the report in the following order 1 The first time you click Next it selects the first changed pink or inserted green node on the left tree 2 Step through the differences with the Next button When selected items have a match in the right tree then they are also highlighted Next skips white nodes with no color background White nodes are parts of the hierarchy that contain no differences If there is an insertion or deletion with child nodes Next skips the child nodes if they are all also insertions or deletions For example if you insert a subsystem Next selects the top subsystem node then skips all the nodes inside the subsystem if they are all also insertions and selects the next difference Compare Simulink Model XML Files e Next minimizes context switching when highlighting in models When you click Next the report steps through all differences at the same level of the model subsystem or chart in both left and right trees in the report before moving to the next level of the report For example you step through all differences in a subsystem in the left and right trees before moving to another subsystem 3 When you have stepped through all changes Next returns to the beginning of the left tree If you click an item in the report the Next Previous controls will step through changes from the point you selected Explore Changes in the Original Models When you compare the XML text
536. ure on the second slide Replace the text on the third slide Replace the table on the fourth slide Insert a new slide before the slide with the plot Here is the updated presentation Update Presentation Content Programmatically Histogram of Vector The hiatageam Function 2 Histogram Plots You can use the histogram function to creste many types of plots 3 Histogram of Vector 4 What You Can Do with histogram Create histogram plot of x ironis Edges of the bins Plot into a specified axes 5 12 53 12 Programmatic PowerPoint Presentation Creation Set Up the Existing Presentation A PPT API program uses a PowerPoint template to generate a presentation When you update an existing PowerPoint presentation programmatically use that presentation as the template for the updated presentation To update content in the Slide objects use the PPT API 1 Open the myNewPPTPresentation presentation In PowerPoint click View gt Normal 2 View the names of content objects in the slides In the Home tab click Select gt Selection Pane When you click content in a slide the Selection pane highlights the name of the content object ik E Layout B X Reset Paste New Slide Section Clipboard amp Slides 1 Histogram of Vector 2 Histogram of Vector wnat You Can Do with hi stegram Font A 0 Y 2 Find So BO Le Go ae LZ SacReplace Shapes Arrange Quick X
537. ure which b747 jpg contents find pictSlide Picture replace contents 1 plane2 j close slides PowerPoint adjusts the picture dimensions to fit in the picture placeholder If the picture placeholder dimensions are bigger than the Picture object dimensions the picture stretches proportionally If the dimensions are smaller the picture is centered 12 81 12 Programmatic PowerPoint Presentation Creation 12 82 Related Examples Create and Format Text on page 12 83 Create and Format Paragraphs on page 12 86 Create and Format Tables on page 12 89 Create and Format Pictures on page 12 94 Create and Format Links on page 12 96 More About Presentation Formatting Approaches on page 12 20 Create and Format Text Create and Format Text In this section Create Text on page 12 83 Create a Subscript or Superscript on page 12 83 Format Text on page 12 84 Create Text You can create a Text object using an mLreportgen ppt Text constructor specifying a text string Also you can create text by using a string with these kinds of PPT API objects e Paragraph e ExternalLink e TableEntry e TextBox e ContentPlaceholder TextBoxPlaceholder For example import mlreportgen ppt slides Presentation myPresentation pptx slide add slides Title Slide contents find slide1 Title titleText replace contents 1
538. utton 11 120 Modify Styles in a Microsoft Word Template 6 Edit Recommend Restrict Set Defaults Sort order As Recommended x m Show recommended styles only Select a style to edit a T rgAbstract fa T rgAuthor T rgAuthorVerso 14 rgBody T rgChapter T rgCopyright T rgFigure T rgFigureCaption 14 rgFigureTitle a Preview of Normal Body Font Default Body Calibri Left Line spacing single Space After 10 pt Widow Orphan control Style Show in the Styles gallery New Style N Only inthis document New documents based on this template ort Related Examples Specify a name for the new style and define the style characteristics To save the new style definition click OK and close the dialog box In Word save and close the template Add Holes in a Microsoft Word Template on page 11 112 Create an HTML Template on page 11 122 11 121 T1 Create a Report Program Create an HTML Template 11 122 Use one of these approaches to create an HTML template for generating a report Use mlreportgen dom Document createTemplate to create a copy of the DOM API default HTML template that you can then customize For example mlreportgen dom Document createTemplate mytemplate html Use an existing HTML template for example a report template for your organization and customize the template to use with the DOM API C
539. values and their resulting signal maximum d Inthe Outline pane on the left select the Text component under the then component of the if isempty expOkValues component 10 To create an array for use when formatting the table use the Evaluate MATLAB Expression component a In the Library pane in the middle double click Evaluate MATLAB Expression b In the Properties pane on the right i Clear the Insert MATLAB expression in report and Display command window output in report check boxes ii The next component of the report uses the strings Mu Value and Signal Maximum as table header values Add the strings to the front of the expOkValues cell array by entering the following text into the Expression to evaluate in the base workspace text box expOkValues Mu Value Signal Maximum expOkValues ii Make sure you select the Evaluate this expression if there is an error check box Enter the following text into the text box disp Error during eval evalExpression message 11 In the Outline pane on the left select the Eval component 12 In the Library pane in the middle under the Formatting category double click the Table component so it becomes a sibling of the Text and Eval components 3 48 Add Report Content with Components pe if isempty expOkValues 4 Be then Bh Text lt size expOkValues 1 B Eval expOkValues Mu Value Signal 2 Array Based Table expOkValues 13 In the Properties pane
540. w Go Debug Desktop Window Help aja x Chapter 2 Figures in Report Membrane Data Name Membrane Data HandleVisibility on Tag membrane X 4 Done 2 Many types of property table components are available including MATLAB Property Table Simulink Property Table requires Simulink Report Generator Stateflow Property Table requires Simulink Report Generator The component used in this example represents MATLAB Report Generator property table components all of which exhibit similar behavior 6 Add Content with Components 6 8 Open the Example Report Template This example uses the figloop tutorial report template To open the figure loop tutorial report template at the MATLAB command line enter setedit figloop tutorial Examine the Property Table Output Property pages for all property table components are similar in form In the Outline pane select the Figure Prop Table component To modify table settings in the Handle Graphics Property Table dialog box click the Edit button Property Table Components Select Object Types Property table components offer multiple object types on which to report For example the Handle Graphics Property Table lets you report on a figure an axes object or a Handle Graphics object You can select a different object type on which to report in the Object type list in the Properties pane for the component Display Prop
541. x Prefix for Section title for first level section in a chapter rgSectiTitleText Text for Section title for first level section in a chapter rgSect2Title Section title for second level section in a chapter rgsect2TitleNumber Number for Section title for second level section in a chapter rgsect2TitlePrefix Prefix for Section title for second level section in a chapter rgSect2TitleText Text for Section title for second level section in a chapter rgSect3Title Section title for third level section in a chapter rgSect3TitleNumber Number for Section title for third level section in a chapter rgSect3TitlePrefix Prefix for Section title for third level section in a chapter 10 7 10 Template Based Report Formatting 10 8 Style Report Explorer Components the Style Formats rgSect3TitleText Text for Section title for third level section in a chapter rgSect4Title Section title for fourth level section in a chapter rgSect4TitleNumber Number for Section title for fourth level section in a chapter rgSect4TitlePrefix Prefix for Section title for fourth level section in a chapter rgsect4TitleText Text for Section title for fourth level section in a chapter rgsect5Title Section title for fifth level section in a chapter rgSect5TitleNumber Number for Section title for fifth level section in a chapter rgSect5TitlePrefix Prefix for Section title for fifth level section in
542. y name property value pair appears in the report The report omits subsequent pairs and text Display outer border Displays the outer border of the table in the generated report Table Cells Specifies table properties to modify The selection in this pane affects the available fields in the Cell Properties pane Cell Properties The options in the Title Properties pane depend on the object selected in the Table Cells pane If you select lt Name gt only Contents and Show appear If you select any other object in the Table Cells pane Lower border and Right border appear Contents Modifies the contents of the table cell selected in the Table Cells pane Alignment Justifies the contents of the selected table cell in the Table Cells pane Left Center e Right e Double justified Show As Specifies the format for the contents of the table cell e Value e Property Value PROPERTY Value e Property Value Stateflow Property Table e PROPERTY Value e Property Value e PROPERTY Value Lower border Displays the lower border of the table in the generated report Right border Displays the right border of the table in the generated report Creating Custom Tables You can edit a preset table such as the Blank 4x4 table to create a custom table Add and delete rows and add properties To open the Edit Table dialog box click Edit For details about creating custom property tables see Property Table Components
543. y of numbers or strings or parent components for example Paragraph components that specify the items in a list You can create multilevel lists by embedding list components within list components Link Generate a hyperlink from one location in a report to another or to an external location on the user s file system or the Worldwide Web Image Insert an image into a report Array Based Table Generate a table from a cell array of numbers or strings Table Parent a table body component See Table Formatting Components Table Formatting Components Table Formatting Components Use table formatting components to organize generated content into tables The following table summarizes the table formatting components Component Usage Table Parent a table body component Can also parent column specification components and a table header and a table footer component Specifies properties of the table as a whole for example its title number of columns and border Table Body Parent the rows that make up the table body Specifies the default vertical alignment of entries in a table body Table Column Specification Specify attributes of a table column such as its width and borders and the default horizontal alignment of column entries Table Entry Parent a component that determines a table entry s content such as a paragraph image list or another table component Specifies attributes of a tab
544. yle Bulleted list e Numbered list Allows you to select numbering options in the Numbering style section 8 201 8 Components Alphabetical List Numbering style Allows you to select a numbering style in the selection list by setting List style to Numbered List Only the RTF DOC report format supports this option 1 2 3 4 a b c d A B C D e i ii iii iv ae ra Fd a eB Insert Anything into Report Yes List Class rptgen_sl csl_ sys list See Also Model Loop System Loop 8 202 System Loop System Loop Specify systems and subsystems on which to loop as defined by parent component Description This component runs its child components for each system defined by the parent component For example to include systems and subsystems within a given model in the report you can include this component as the child of a Model Loop component For conditional processing systems you can use the RptgenSL getReportedSystem function For more information see Loop Context Functions on page 6 24 Report On Loop on Systems Select systems automatically Reports on all systems in the current context as set by the parent component e Model Loop Reports on systems in the current model e System Loop Reports on the current system Signal Loop Reports on the parent system of the current signal Block Loop Reports on the parent system of the current block If this component
545. you display the template in a browser Create a Block Hole 1 2 3 Unzip the template using the unzipTemplate command Open the report html document of the template in an HTML or text editor Position the insertion point at the desired location for the hole You cannot set he insertion point inside a paragraph Add code that uses this pattern lt div gt lt span gt lt div class Hole data default hole style name STYLE NAME data hole id HOLEID gt lt span class HoleId gt HOLEID lt span gt lt span class HoleDesc gt HOLE_DESCRIPTION lt span gt lt div gt lt span gt lt div gt Replace STYLE with the name of a default paragraph HTML p element style to use for formatting text content appended to this hole If you do not specify a style name for a Text object appended to this hole the DOM API sets the text object StyleName property to the default style name The template style sheet must define the default style Defining a default paragraph style for hole content eliminates the need to format hole content programmatically Set HOLEID to the ID of the hole and use HOLE_DESCRIPTION to describe the hole 11 125 11 Create a Report Program 11 126 5 Zip the template using the zipTemplate command See Also Functions unzipTemplate zipTemplate Related Examples Modify Styles in an HTML Template on page 11 127 Create a Microsoft Word Template on page 11 111 Modify Styles in an
546. your program must execute the following statement before executing the first line of DOM code that it executes to generate a report makeDOMCompilable Create a Microsoft Word Template Create a Microsoft Word Template Use one of these approaches to create a Word template for generating a report Use mlreportgen dom Document createTemplate to create a copy of the DOM API default Word template that you can then customize For example mlreportgen dom Document createTemplate mytemplate docx Use an existing Word template for example a report template for your organization and customize the template to use with the DOM API Create a Word template from scratch If you copy an existing template that is not based on the DOM API default Word template apply any standard Word styles such as Title Heading 1 TOC 1 List 1 Emphasis etc to an element in the template You can apply the styles to placeholder content and then remove the content That process creates instances of the standard styles in the template style sheet See the Word documentation for information about how to create templates and to copy styles from one template to another Related Examples Add Holes in a Microsoft Word Template on page 11 112 Modify Styles in a Microsoft Word Template on page 11 117 7 Create an HTML Template on page 11 122 11 111 11 Create a Report Program Add Holes in a Microsoft Word Template 11 1

Simulink Report Generator User's Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents